Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual

Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual
NOTICE
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or
printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the
document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the
capability to print the document correctly.
Features and Specifications Manual
INT-1023 (IPK)
Document Revision 4
(Release 4000/4500)
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers.
The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and shall not be
reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered trademark of
NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. TeLANophy,
ViewMail, ViewCall Plus, ActiveFax, and ViewFax are all registered trademarks of Active Voice
Corporation. Q-Master is a trademark of Zeacom Limited.
Copyright 2005
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development
Preface
GENERAL INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC Electra Elite IPK Electra
Elite IPK System.
The Electra Elite IPK system is a feature-rich key system that provides over
200 features including Computer Telephony Integration, Least Cost Routing,
Automatic Call Distribution, T1, ISDN-BRI Voice Trunks, ISDN-PRI Voice
Trunks, Voice over Internet Protocol, LAN/KTS Cabling Integration and many
others.
The Electra Elite IPK system provides the customer needs today, and as
business expands the system can be expanded to grow as well.
The Electra Elite IPK system has a set of manuals that provide all the
information necessary to install and support the system. This preface
describes these manuals.
THIS MANUAL
This manual contains detailed instructions to install the Electra Elite IPK
KSUs, ETUs, Multiline Terminals, and optional equipment in the following
chapters.
Electra Elite IPK General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features,
system configuration and standards. This manual provides an overview of the
Electra Elite IPK system and can be used to present information to potential
customers.
Electra Elite IPK System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This
manual has detailed instructions for installing the Electra Elite IPK KSU,
ETUs, Multiline Terminals, and optional equipment.
Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the Electra Elite IPK
system using a Multiline Terminal or PC.
Electra Elite IPK System Administration Terminals (SAT) Technician’s Guide
This manual provides information and instructions for installation and
programming to the technician who must maintain the system at a customer
site.
Electra Elite IPK System Administration Terminals (SAT) End-User Manual
This manual provides programming information and operating instructions for
the customer personnel who must operate the system at the customer site.
Electra Elite IPK Least Cost Routing Manual
This manual provides instructions to the service technician for programming
the customer site for least cost routing.
Electra Elite IPK Job Specifications Manual
This manual helps the technician install and maintain the Electra Elite IPK
system. This manual contains the job specification worksheets. When these
worksheets are completed, they provide all of the system programming values
and configuration information necessary to assist technicians in maintaining
the system.
Electra Elite IPK Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Manual
This manual provides information installing and programming the
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) System.
Electra Elite IPK Wireless System Manual
This manual describes the system and provides hardware installation and
programming procedures for the Electra Elite IPK Wireless Communication
System (WCS).
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1
General Information ............................................................................... 1-1
Section 2
Multiline Terminals Used With The System .......................................... 1-1
Chapter 2
Features
Section 1
General Information ............................................................................... 2-1
Section 2
Operating Procedures .......................................................................... 2-2
Section 3
Features ............................................................................................... 2-3
A-1
Account Code Entry ..................................................................... A-1
A-2
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified ................................. A-5
A-3
Add-On Conference ..................................................................... A-9
A-4
All Call Page .............................................................................. A-13
A-5
Alphanumeric Display ................................................................ A-17
A-6
Analog Line Extender (Dterm ® Analog EXT) .............................. A-21
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection ...................................................... A-23
A-8
Answer Hold ............................................................................... A-25
A-9
Answer Key ................................................................................ A-29
A-10
Assigned Night Answer (ANA) ................................................... A-33
A-11
Attendant Add-On Console ........................................................ A-37
A-12
Attendant Camp-On ................................................................... A-43
A-13
Attendant Positions .................................................................... A-47
A-14
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout .......................................... A-49
A-15
Attendant Transfer ..................................................................... A-53
A-16
Authorization Code .................................................................... A-57
A-17
Automated Attendant ................................................................. A-61
A-18
Automatic Answer with Delay Message ..................................... A-69
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
i
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-19
Automatic Callback .....................................................................A-75
A-20
Automatic Call Distribution ..........................................................A-77
A-21
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching .........................................A-87
A-22
Automatic Hold ...........................................................................A-89
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1 ..................................A-91
A-24
Automatic Redial .........................................................................A-99
A-25
Automatic Release ....................................................................A-103
A-26
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) .............................................A-105
A-27
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer ...........................................A-109
B-1
Background Music Over External Speakers .................................B-1
B-2
Background Music – Multiline Speaker .........................................B-3
B-3
Barge-In ........................................................................................B-5
B-4
Battery Backup – System Memory ...............................................B-9
B-5
Battery Backup – System Power ................................................B-13
B-6
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals .....................................B-15
C-1
Call Alert Notification ....................................................................C-1
C-2
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys .......................................................C-5
C-3
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys ................................................................C-9
C-4
Callback Request ........................................................................C-13
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks) ...........................................C-17
C-6
Caller ID Call Return ...................................................................C-25
C-7
Call Forward – All Call ................................................................C-31
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer .................................................C-37
C-9
Call Forward – Centrex ...............................................................C-41
C-10
Call Forward – Display ................................................................C-47
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise ........................................................C-49
C-12
Call Forward – Split ....................................................................C-57
C-13
Call Monitoring ............................................................................C-61
C-14
Call Park – System .....................................................................C-65
C-15
Call Pickup Direct .......................................................................C-71
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
C-16
Call Pickup – Group ................................................................... C-75
C-17
Cascade CPU ............................................................................ C-79
C-18
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines) ............................. C-85
C-19
Class of Service ......................................................................... C-93
C-20
Clock/Calendar Display .............................................................. C-99
C-21
Code Restriction ...................................................................... C-103
C-22
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction .......................................... C-107
C-23
CO Message Waiting Indication ............................................... C-109
C-24
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .................................... C-115
C-25
Consecutive Speed Dial ........................................................... C-117
C-26
Cordless Telephone Connection .............................................. C-119
C-27
Customized Message .............................................................. C-123
D-1
Data Line Security ........................................................................ D-1
D-2
Delay Announcement ................................................................... D-3
D-3
Delayed Ringing ........................................................................... D-7
D-4
Dialed Number Indication Service (DNIS) .................................. D-11
D-5
Dial 0 For Attendant ................................................................... D-15
D-6
Digit Insertion ............................................................................. D-17
D-7
Digital Line Extender (Dterm ® ISDN EXTender Plus) ................ D-19
D-8
Digital Voice Mail ....................................................................... D-21
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ........................................................ D-37
D-10
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ........................................ D-43
D-11
Direct Inward Termination (DIT) ................................................. D-49
D-12
Direct Paging Access ................................................................. D-53
D-13
Direct Station Selection (DSS) ................................................... D-57
D-14
Distinctive Ringing ..................................................................... D-61
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND) ................................................................ D-65
D-16
Door Lock Release Relays ........................................................ D-69
D-17
Door/Monitor Telephone ............................................................ D-73
D-18
DP to DTMF Switching ............................................................... D-77
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
iii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D-19
Drop Key .....................................................................................D-79
D-20
Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal ..............................................D-83
D-21
Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal .......................................................D-89
D-22
Dterm ® Cordless Lite II Terminal ................................................D-97
D-23
Dterm ® Handset Cordless .........................................................D-101
D-24
Dterm ® IP Gateway System ......................................................D-109
E-1
Elapsed Call Time .........................................................................E-1
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals ...........................................................E-3
E-3
Electra Elite Terminal Migration ....................................................E-9
E-4
Electra Professional Terminal Migration .....................................E-11
E-5
Electronic Volume Control ..........................................................E-13
E-6
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire) ..............................................................E-17
E-7
Elite ACD Plus ............................................................................E-21
E-8
Elite CallAnalyst ..........................................................................E-33
E-9
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server .............................................E-37
E-10
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response ......................................E-45
E-11
EliteApps - PC Attendant ............................................................E-51
E-12
Elite Q-Master .............................................................................E-57
E-13
Emergency 911 – Cut Through ...................................................E-71
E-14
Enhanced 911 .............................................................................E-75
E-15
Equal Access Accommodation ...................................................E-79
E-16
External Tone Ringer ..................................................................E-81
E-17
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me) ................................................E-83
F-1
Facsimile CO Branch Connection ................................................. F-1
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable ......................................... F-3
F-3
Flexible Line Assignment ............................................................ F-11
F-4
Flexible Numbering Plan ............................................................. F-15
F-5
Flexible Ringing Assignment ...................................................... F-21
F-6
Flexible Timeouts ........................................................................ F-23
F-7
Full Duplex Handsfree ................................................................ F-29
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation ............................................................F-31
G-1
General Purpose Relays .............................................................. G-1
G-2
Ground Start Trunks .................................................................... G-5
G-3
Group Listening ............................................................................ G-7
H-1
Handset Mute ............................................................................... H-1
H-2
Handsfree Answerback ................................................................ H-3
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring ................................................ H-7
H-4
Headset Connection (Built-In) ...................................................... H-9
H-5
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive) ....................... H-11
H-6
Hot Key Pad ............................................................................... H-15
H-7
Hot Line ...................................................................................... H-17
H-8
Howler Tone Service .................................................................. H-19
I-1
I-Hold Indication ............................................................................. I-1
I-2
Incoming Call Identification ............................................................ I-3
I-3
Incoming Trunk Name or Number Display ..................................... I-5
I-4
Internal Hub ................................................................................... I-7
I-5
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling ......................................................I-13
I-6
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me) .................................................. I-17
I-7
IP CPU & Media Gateway ............................................................ I-21
I-8
IP Station (MEGACO) .................................................................. I-29
I-9
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections ......................................................I-33
I-10
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections ......................................................I-39
I-11
I-Use Indication ............................................................................ I-49
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) ................ K-1
K-2
Key Function/Multifunction Registration ....................................... K-9
L-1
Large LED Indication .................................................................... L-1
L-2
Last Number Redial ...................................................................... L-3
L-3
Least Cost Routing (LCR) ............................................................. L-7
L-4
Live Monitoring ............................................................................ L-13
L-5
Live Record ................................................................................. L-19
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
v
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
L-6
Loop Start Trunks ....................................................................... L-23
M-1
Message Display Board ............................................................... M-1
M-2
Message Waiting ......................................................................... M-3
M-3
Microphone Control ..................................................................... M-7
M-4
Multiline Conference Bridge ....................................................... M-11
M-5
Multilingual LCD Indication ........................................................ M-15
M-6
Multiple Trunk Groups ............................................................... M-17
M-7
Music on Hold ............................................................................ M-19
N-1
NEC Elite PC Assistant .................................................................N-1
N-2
Nesting Dial ..................................................................................N-7
N-3
Night Call Pickup ........................................................................N-13
N-4
Night Chime ................................................................................N-15
N-5
Night Transfer .............................................................................N-17
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing ......................................................................... O-1
O-2
Off-Premise Extension ................................................................. O-3
O-3
One-Touch Feature Access ......................................................... O-5
P-1
PC Programming ..........................................................................P-1
P-2
Pooled Line (Outgoing) .................................................................P-5
P-3
Power Failure Transfer .................................................................P-7
P-4
Preset Dialing ...............................................................................P-9
P-5
Prime Line Assignment ...............................................................P-11
P-6
Privacy on All Calls .....................................................................P-15
P-7
Privacy Release ..........................................................................P-17
P-8
Private Lines ...............................................................................P-21
P-9
Programming from Multiline Terminal .........................................P-23
P-10
Pushbutton Dial – DTMF or DP ..................................................P-25
Q-1
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail ........................................................ Q-1
R-1
Recall Key .....................................................................................R-1
R-2
Recall With Station Identification ..................................................R-5
R-3
Redial Key ....................................................................................R-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
Electra
Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
R-4
Remote Programming .................................................................. R-9
R-5
Resident System Program ......................................................... R-11
R-6
Restriction (Outgoing) ................................................................ R-13
R-7
Ring Tone Variation ................................................................... R-15
R-8
Ringing Line Preference ............................................................ R-17
R-9
Route Advance Block ................................................................. R-19
S-1
Save and Repeat ......................................................................... S-1
S-2
Scrolling Directories ..................................................................... S-3
S-3
Secondary Incoming Extension ................................................... S-7
S-4
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display ......................................... S-11
S-5
Simplified Call Distribution ......................................................... S-13
S-6
Single Point of Entry (SPE) ........................................................ S-15
S-7
Single Line Telephone Access ................................................... S-21
S-8
SLT Adapter ............................................................................... S-27
S-9
SLT Timed Alarm ....................................................................... S-31
S-10
Softkeys ..................................................................................... S-35
S-11
Speed Dial – Station .................................................................. S-41
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters ................................................... S-47
S-13
Speed Dial – System ................................................................. S-51
S-14
Station Add-On Console ............................................................ S-57
S-15
Station Camp-On ....................................................................... S-63
S-16
Station Hunt ............................................................................... S-65
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ............................... S-69
S-18
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable .................... S-77
S-19
Station Outgoing Lockout ........................................................... S-83
S-20
Station Relocation ...................................................................... S-87
S-21
Station Transfer ......................................................................... S-91
S-22
Step Call .................................................................................... S-95
S-23
Store and Repeat ....................................................................... S-97
S-24
Stored Hookflash ..................................................................... S-101
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
vii
Document
Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 3
S-25
Synchronous Ringing ................................................................S-105
S-26
System Data Up/Down Load ....................................................S-107
T-1
T1 Connection .............................................................................. T-1
T-2
Tandem Switching of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines ................................ T-5
T-3
Tenant Service .............................................................................. T-9
T-4
Three-Minute Reminder .............................................................. T-11
T-5
Tone Override ............................................................................. T-13
T-6
Trunk Queuing ............................................................................ T-15
T-7
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer .............................................................. T-19
T-8
Two-Color LEDs ......................................................................... T-23
U-1
Unified Messaging ........................................................................U-1
U-2
Unified Messaging – EliteMail CTI-LX Lite ...................................U-7
U-3
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ..................................................U-11
U-4
Uniform Numbering Network ......................................................U-17
U-5
Universal Slots ............................................................................U-23
U-6
Unsupervised Conference ..........................................................U-33
U-7
User Programming Ability ...........................................................U-35
V-1
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) .....................................................V-1
V-2
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line
V-3
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Trunk
V-4
Voice Over Split ..........................................................................V-15
V-5
Voice Prompt ..............................................................................V-19
W-1
Wireless .......................................................................................W-1
W-2
Wireless – DECT .......................................................................W-13
Keys ...........................V-5
Card .....................V-9
Feature Access Codes
Section 1
General Information .............................................................................. 3-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
Table of Contents
Introduction
Chapter 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Electra Elite IPK (DTH telephones), Dterm Series i (DTR telephones), Dterm IPK
(ITH Telephones), Electra Elite (DTU telephones), and Dterm Series E (DTP
telephones) can be used with the Electra Elite IPK system.
SECTION 2
MULTILINE TERMINALS USED WITH THE SYSTEM
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals (DTH telephones) either with or without LCD
display offer a variety of colors, and line sizes.
N
N
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display terminals provides call
status data and programming information.
N
Terminal line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
N
IP terminals are available in 8-line and 16-line (both with LCD).
N
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard.
N
All are compatible with the AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R Unit, CT(U)-R,
or HF-R Unit adapter. The AP(R)-R Unit requires an AC-R Unit to supply AC
power.
N
The ADA-2R is compatible with ITH-2 IP terminals.
N
The ADA-2R and PS(A)-R are compatible with ITH-3 IP terminals.
N
An Attendant Add-On DCR-60-1 CONSOLE is available with 60 station and/or
outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
1-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite IPK Terminal Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch Keys
Keys are designated Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch throughout
this manual. The keys operate much the same, but various limitations imposed on
each type are described below.
N
Feature Access Keys
Depending on the type, a Multiline Terminal can have 2, 8, 16, or 24 line keys.
These highly-flexible keys can be used for station DSS/BLF and Speed Dial.
N
Single On/Off Keys
Line keys may also be assigned as Single On/Off keys in System Programming to
toggle a feature on/off. This assignment has no impact on the Feature Access
keys, but the assigned features are very specific. Call Forward All Call, Call
Forward Busy/No Answer, Scrolling (CID), headset, and DND are examples of
features available for Single On/Off keys.
N
One-Touch Keys
One-Touch keys can perform the same function as Feature Access keys. A
Multiline Terminal has a fixed number of these keys. No system assignment is
necessary, and the number of keys ranges from none to 16 depending on the
terminal type.
Line/Feature
Access Keys
One-Touch Keys
Key Assignment Example
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2
Introduction
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Dterm Series i Terminals
The Dterm Series i Terminals (DTR telephones) with or without LCD display offer a
variety of colors and line sizes.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on display terminals provides call status
data and programming information.
Line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
2-line on the DTR-2DT-1.
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard (except
on the DTR-2DT-1).
All but the DTR-2DT-1, DTR-1-1, DTR-1HM-1 and Cordless terminals are
compatible with the AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R , CT(A)-R and HF-R Unit
adapters. The AP(R)-R Unit requires an AC(A)-R Unit to supply AC power. For
Attendant Positions, an Attendant Add-On DCR-60-1 CONSOLE is available with
60 station and/or outside line assignments and 12 function keys. The DTR-2DT-1
has an internal Analog Port without ringer.
A two-line terminal with two Flexible Line keys (each with 2-color LED), nine
function keys, built-in speakerphone, a large LED to indicate incoming calls or
messages, and an outgoing only Analog SLT Port [AD(A)-R] is also available.
The Electra Elite IPK Single Line Terminals are offered in two variations (DTR-1-1
and DTR-1HM-1). Both terminals come in black or white. Both have DTMF and
Pulse Dialing compatibility, and offer Flash and Redial key functionality. The
Electra Elite IPK Single Line Terminals come standard with a Message Waiting
Indicator that also functions as an Incoming Call Indication. During a call, the
receive audio level can be increased three levels and decreased two levels from
the default setting (six volume level settings in all). The terminals offer four ring
volume settings (Off, Soft, Medium, and Loud), and three ring patterns (Slow,
Medium, and Fast). The DTR Single Line Terminals also have a Data Port that
functions similar to that of an AP(R)-R optional adapter, and have a built-in wall
mount adapter. The DTR-1HM-1 terminal has eight programmable speed dial
buttons (maximum 21 digits each). The DTR-1HM-1 also has Hold and Monitor
Function keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
1-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Dterm IPK ITH Terminals
The Dterm IPK ITH Terminals come with LCD display and offer a variety of colors
and line sizes:
N
N
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on display terminals provides call status
data and programming information.
N
Line sizes include 8-line and 16-line.
N
Speakerphone with full-duplex handsfree operation and headset jack is standard.
N
Terminals are compatible with AD(A)-2R and PS(A)-R.
Electra Elite and Dterm Series E Terminals
The Electra Elite Terminals (DTU telephones) and Dterm Series E terminals (DTP
telephones) with or without LCD displays are available in a variety of colors and
lines sizes.
N
N
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display terminals provides call
status data and programming information.
N
Line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
N
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard.
N
The Dterm Handset Cordless terminal is a 16-button phone (display only).
N
N
An Attendant Add-On DCU-60-1 CONSOLE is available for 60 station and/or
outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
An SLT Adapter can be used in place of a digital terminal for connecting Single
Line Telephones, or similar devices.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4
Introduction
Chapter 2
Features
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
All features available with the Electra Elite IPK system are listed alphabetically by
name and described in this document. The following information is provided, when
applicable, for each feature:
Feature Description – briefly describes the feature and, when applicable, tells
how the feature is used by the end-user.
System Availability – describes Multiline Terminals that can be used with this
feature and lists any additional equipment, such as adapters or ETUs, that must
be installed for this feature to operate.
Operating Procedures – contains detailed procedures for using each feature.
Quick Access Code Reference – provides a table for those features with
associated Access Codes that are used with the operation of the feature. This
table has Default, Access Code Name, and Alphabetic Designation columns.
N
N
Default – indicates the default values for the Access Codes that are set when a
new system is installed). Access Codes, except for System and Fixed codes, can
be changed in System Programming.
Access Code Name – indicates the name associated with the Access Code. The
code type is shown in parentheses at the end of each code name. Access Code
types include the following:
System Codes are usually 1-digit codes that apply to the operation of the
system. These codes can be changed using Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access
Code (1-Digit) Assignment].
Intercom Codes are 2-digit codes that apply to the associated feature and
indicate Access Codes that can be changed using Memory Blocks 1-1-46
[Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] and 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit)
Assignment].
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
2-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature Codes are typically 3-digit codes and indicate Access Codes that
apply to the associated feature. These codes can be changed using Memory
Blocks 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] and 1-1-48 [Access Code
(3-Digit) Assignment].
Fixed Codes are set in the system and cannot be changed.
Alphabetic Designation – the alphabetic equivalent that helps you to easily
remember the Access Code. These designations are available only for
Feature and Intercom codes.
Service Conditions – specifies conditions that apply to the feature operation.
Related Features Lists – lists any associated features.
SECTION 2
OPERATING PROCEDURES
The operating procedures are the same for the Electra Elite IPK, Electra Elite,
Dterm Series E, and Dterm Series i Multiline Terminals. The Series i (DTR)
terminals have an added MIC key and two buttons: Directory and Message. Minor
key differences are listed below. These differences are important when
performing the operations listed in this manual.
Table 2-1
Comparing Keys for Electra Elite IPK Dterm Series i and
Electra Elite Dterm Series E Telephones
DTH or DTR Terminals
A
B
AK
J
L
~
C
D
E
DTP or DTU Terminals
¶
¶
¶
¶
¶
¶
¶
¶
T
Q
AK
J
L
~
S
R
P
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-2
Features
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-1
Comparing Keys for Electra Elite IPK Dterm Series i and
Electra Elite Dterm Series E Telephones (Continued)
DTH or DTR Terminals
F
G
H
UV
DTP or DTU Terminals
¶
¶
¶
¶
¶
O
N
U
M
N/A
Directory
¶
I
SECTION 3
¶
N/A
N/A
FEATURES
Features that are available with the Electra Elite IPK system are listed in the
remainder of this chapter in alphabetical order by feature name.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
2-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-4
Features
Account Code Entry
A-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Account Code Entry allows assignment of Account Codes with up to 16 digits. Account Codes are
incorporated in the call records generated by Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) and provide a
reference for billing.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
MIFM-U( ) ETU
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
From a Multiline Terminal with an outside call in progress:
A
FF
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Enter the Account Code (Up to 16 digits) using the dial pad while talking with the outside party.
4.
Press
A
.
(fixed Access Code).
.
- OR - (R4000 or higher)
Continue talking to outside party; after eight seconds fixed time-out, the Account Code is entered.
- OR - (R4000 or higher)
Hang up after entering Account Code; the call is terminated and the Account Code is entered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
From a Multiline Terminal with an outside call on hold:
1.
While receiving internal dial tone, dial Account Code Entry Access Code XX (not assigned at
default).
2.
Enter the Account Code using the dial pad.
3.
Retrieve the held call.
- OR -
While receiving internal dial tone, press the Feature Access or One-Touch key programmed for
Account Code Entry.
4.
Enter the Account Code using the dial pad.
5.
Retrieve the held call.
From a Single Line Telephone with an outside call in progress:
1.
Press the hookswitch, and wait for a new internal dial tone; the outside party is put on hold.
2.
Dial Account Code Entry Access Code XX (no default assigned).
3.
Enter the Account Code using the dial pad.
4.
Use a hookflash to return to the held call.
QUICK ACCESS CODE REFERENCE
Default
66
Access Code Name
Feature Access Code (Fixed)
Alphabetic
Designation
N/A
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General
H
H
The Interdigit timer for Account Code entry is fixed at eight seconds.
The Multiline Terminal user can enter an Account Code while talking with the outside party. Tones
are not sent to the CO line, and the outside party is not put on hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-2
Account Code Entry
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
If multiple Account Codes are entered during one call, the last entry is output from SMDR.
H
The Account Code can have up to 16 digits.
H
H
Use Memory Block 1-5-26 (SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection) to control generation of an
SMDR Report on incoming calls. When an Account Code is entered during an outgoing call, a call
report is generated regardless of system assignment.
Account Codes can be programmed to a Feature Access or One-Touch key on any Multiline
Terminal.
Restrictions
H
H
H
H
H
An Account Code cannot be entered when a station is part of a conference supported by the
system.
An Account Code cannot be entered if a hookflash results in a conference when a Single Line
Telephone has a call on hold and another call is in progress.
During Account Code Entry, Call Alert Notification is not provided.
An Account Code Entry does not print with SMDR unless the account code is entered after the Call
Start time elapses.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension numbers
are printed in the SMDR.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-2
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BTS
,
+BTT
,
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
7-3-02
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-13
+AS
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-14
+AS
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-5-26
+AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
+AS
SMDR Print Format
1-5-02
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
+CSS
Com Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BA
+AS
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-6
041
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-4
Account Code Entry
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
A-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Account Code – Forced/Verified forces selected station users to dial an Access Code and a verified
Account Code before making an outgoing call. The outgoing call is processed only after the dialed
Account Code is verified.
Account Code – Forced/Unverified forces selected station users to dial an Access Code and an
unverified Account Code before making an outgoing call. The outgoing call is processed only after the
unverified Account Code is dialed.
This feature allows a system administrator to control unauthorized outgoing calls. The Forced/Verified/
Unverified Account Code is part of the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. A Forced/
Verified Account Code has a maximum of 13 digits.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
MIFM-U( ) ETU
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To enter Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified from any station:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Forced Account Access Code. A second dial tone is received.
3.
Dial the Forced Account Code. Wait for Internal dial tone.
4.
Dial the Trunk Access code and the outside number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program Account Code – Forced/Verified from Attendant Position:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Forced Account Access Code (not assigned at default), and wait for a second dial tone.
3.
Dial the Forced Account Number (
4.
Dial the Forced Account Code (default: 10 digits). Wait for Confirmation tone.
5.
to enter the information. The next Account Number is displayed. (Repeat steps 4 ~ 5
Press
until all desired Account Codes are entered.)
6.
Press
G
E
KKA EKK
~
).
to stop entering Account Codes.
To use this feature with Scrolling Directories:
1.
Press the
2.
Press the
- OR -
V
V
(SYS. or STA. softkey) to designate system or station speed dialing.
(UP or DOWN softkey) to view the names/numbers listed in the directory.
J
Press a dial pad key (to select the first letter of the name or number of the desired speed dial
buffer) and dial
.
3.
To dial the number press
4.
Enter the Account Code.
E
or lift the handset.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
Only outgoing calls from an intercom require a Forced Account Access Code. Direct access to
trunks bypasses this feature.
Reorder tone is provided when an outgoing call is dialed without entering the Forced Account
Access Code and a Forced Account Code.
Call Alert Notification is not provided during Account Code Entry verification and programming.
PBR Time values apply when a Single Line Telephone is used to enter a Forced Account Code.
Forced Account Codes can be uploaded, downloaded, or modified using PC based System
Programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-6
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Forced Account Code Verified/Unverified and Account Code entries are printed on the SMDR
report if both are used.
H
A is placed in front of the Forced Account Codes on the SMDR reports to distinguish them from
other Account Code entries.
H
H
A total of 500 Forced/Verified Account Codes can be entered system-wide.
When the Interdigit time (default 10s) expires after the user inputs a Forced Account Code, Busy
Tone is generated.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
Existing restrictions and Least Cost Routing (LCR) assignments are applied after Forced Account
Codes are entered.
When a 911 call is placed, Account Code Forced/Verified is overridden by the following:
J
J
Emergency 911 Cut-Through is enabled.
A CAMA trunk is installed and enabled.
Enhanced 911 calls override the forced account code and are controlled by the Emergency 911
Dialing Route Assignment.
H
H
Verified and Unverified Forced Account Codes cannot be used in the same Class of Service.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension numbers
are printed in the SMDR.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-1
Account Code Entry
A-16
Authorization Code
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BA
+BTS
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
146,147
2-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
,
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-07
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-08
+BTT
,
4-17
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization
Code) Day Mode Assignment
4-64
+AC
Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization
Code) Night Mode Assignment
4-65
+BF
Forced Account Code Length Assignment
1-8-27
+BS
Card interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
7-3-02
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-13
+ AS
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-14
+ AS
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print selection
1-5-26
+ AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
+ AS
SMDR Print Format
1-5-02
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
+CSS
Com Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
+AC
+AS
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
5-1, 6-3
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A-8
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Add-On Conference
A-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Add-On Conference allows a conference call with a total of four parties with various combinations of
outside lines and stations. This increases efficiency by allowing multiple parties to enter a conversation.
System Software supports up to 16, 4-party conferences with no more than two outside lines per
conference.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With Release R2000 or higher, a Single Line Telephone or PSII can perform a 1 terminal - 2 outside
party conference call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To initiate an Add-On Conference using a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress:
D
1.
Press
2.
Dial a station number or outside party, and inform the answering party of the conference.
3.
Press
4.
Repeat steps 1~3 to add an additional party to the conference.
D
.
again. The
D
LED is on continuously. Talk with both parties.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To initiate an Add-On Conference using a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress:
1.
Press the hookswitch to place the first call on hold.
2.
Dial an internal station and announce conference.
3.
Press the hookswitch again. Talk with both parties.
4.
Repeat steps 1~3 to add an additional party to the conference.
To initiate a 2 Outside Party Add-On Conference using a Single Line Telephone with an outside call in
progress (R2000 or higher):
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is placed on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code for desired trunk.
3.
Dial the desired number and wait for the party to answer.
4.
Provide hookflash again. Talk with both parties.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The elapsed time of the call from the originating terminal is shown on display Multiline Terminals.
H
When all conference circuits are in use, the red Conference key on each Multiline Terminal is on.
H
Allowed conference configurations are:
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
4 terminals - no outside party
3 terminals - 1 outside party
3 terminals - no outside party
2 terminals - 1 outside party
1 terminal - 2 outside parties
Only one member of a conference can place a conference on hold at a time.
When the conference is placed on hold, the Conference LED flashes on all phones in the
conference.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 10
Add-On Conference
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
Recall is not provided at the Multiline Terminal when a conference is on hold.
The CO to CO conference loss is 6 db (3 db per CO). This does not include the loss already
occurring on each CO circuit. A telephone for conference connection incurs a 10 db loss.
Restrictions:
H
H
A Single Line Telephone cannot be used to originate a 2-party CO conference (R1700 or lower
only).
When a Single Line Telephone or PSII is attempting to establish a 2-party outside conference call,
the following apply for outside lines without answer supervision:
J
J
H
J
H
H
H
A hookflash to join the parties after Memory Block 1-3-11(SLT/PSII Talk Start timer) elapses
results in a three party (two COs and one Single Line Telephone) conference call.
When a Single Line Telephone or PSII is attempting to establish a 2-party outside conference call,
the following apply for outside lines with answer supervision:
J
H
A hookflash to join the parties before Memory Block 1-3-11(SLT/PSII Talk Start timer)
elapses results in dropping the new call and returns the user to the original call.
A hookflash to join the parties before far end answer detection results in dropping the new
call and returns the user to the original call.
A hookflash to join the parties after far end answer detection results in a three party (two COs
and one Single Line Telephone) conference call.
A Single Line Telephone connected to the AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit or APA-U/APR-U Unit does not
support a 1 terminal - 2 outside parties conference call.
A Multiline Terminal user on hold cannot enter another conference.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension numbers
are displayed during an Add-On Conference call.
A Multiline Terminal cannot generate DTMF tones while engaged in a conference.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-25
Automatic Release
M-4
Multiline Conference Bridge
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 12
Add-On Conference
A-4
All Call Page
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
All Call Page allows simultaneous paging (internal and external) of all idle Multiline Terminals in a zone
over each built-in speaker and over all external paging speakers. This enables a person within hearing
distance of a Multiline Terminal or external speaker to respond to the paging call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate a page on a Multiline Terminal:
EI
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone (or press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Page.
H
when the user is engaged on a call).
(set as default) for All Call Page.
To answer a page on a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Wait for internal dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
EJ
3.
Dial Meet-Me Access Code
station number.
4.
Talk with All Call Page originator.
(set as default); the display changes to show the originator
To originate a page on a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone or press the hookswitch when the user is engaged in
a call.
2.
Dial All Call Page Access Code
3.
Page.
EI
(default).
To answer a page on a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Lift the handset or press the hookswitch when the user is engaged in a call.
2.
Wait for dial tone.
3.
Dial Meet-Me Access Code
4.
Talk with All Call Page originator.
EJ
(default).
QUICK ACCESS CODE REFERENCE
Default
59
,
5
Access Code Name
Alphabetic
Designation
All Internal/External Zone Paging
N/A
Internal/External Meet-Me
N/A
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 14
All Call Page
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
All Call Page can be originated or answered by Meet-Me Answer from internal dial tone.
H
All Call Page times out using the External Paging Time Out (default is five minutes).
H
An outside line can be conferenced with External Page to allow a conversation to be monitored.
H
H
The default Access Code for All Call Page is 59. The default Access Code for All Call Page
Meet-Me code is 5, (Internal/External Meet-Me).
Use Memory Block 4-31 (Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection) to allow or deny a station from
receiving paging. This includes All Call Page, Internal Zone Paging, and External Zone Paging.
Internal Emergency All Call Page is not included.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
A Multiline Terminal user engaged in a handsfree call cannot receive All Call Page or Internal Zone
Pages.
Only one All Call Page or Internal Zone Page can be established at a time. Another page can be
originated as soon as the first is abandoned or answered by Meet-Me Answer.
Simultaneous zone paging (Internal Zones A, B, and C) can be established at one time; however,
All Internal Zone Paging and Internal Emergency All Call Page cannot be performed when any
other internal page is in use.
If there are no idle stations available to receive an All Call Page, the All Call Page is denied, and
BUSY is displayed at the station attempting to originate the page.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
E-17
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
I-6
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BTM
Internal Zone Paging Selection
4-93
+BTT
Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection
4-31
+BP
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection
1-2-25
+BP
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-2-00
+BP
External Speaker Connection Selection
1-7-02
+BP
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
1-7-03
+BP
External Speaker Pre-Tone/Chime Selection
1-7-08
+BP
External Speaker Chime Start time Selection
1-7-09
+BP
External Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-06
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
070~079,
081
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 16
All Call Page
A-5
Alphanumeric Display
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Each Electra Elite, Dterm Series E, Electra Elite IPK, or Dterm Series i Display Multiline Terminal has a
24-character by 3-line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). These displays provide information such as: date/
time, elapsed call time on outside calls, digits dialed, internal calling party number, Customized
Message, Speed Dial entries or softkeys.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
LCD DISPLAYS
Refer to Display Indications table below.
Display
12:24 AM WED 10
Location
All Stations with
LCD
Definition
Clock/Calendar
ALL 100 - - > [ ]
Set Call Forward – All Call
ALL FWD CANCLD
Cancel DND/Call Forward – All Call System-Wide
FWD/DND CANCLD
Originator
Cancel DND/Call Forward – All Call At Individual Stations
FWD SET [ ]
Originator
Set Call Forward – All Call From Forward To Extension
FWD RESET [ ]
Reset Call Forward – All Call From Forward To Extension
BUSY 100 -- > [ _ ]
Set Call Forward – Busy
FWD BUSY CANCLD
Cancel Call Forward – Busy
NOANS 100 - > [ ]
Set Call Forward – No Answer
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display
Location
Definition
FWD NA CANCLD
Cancel Call Forward – No Answer
FWD BNA - > [ ]
Set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
FWD BNA CNCL
Cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
BACK MM/DD HH:MM
Set Customized Message
MESSAGE CLEAR
Cancel Customized Message System-Wide or From
Individual Station
NIGHT MODE SET
Night Mode Switch
NIGHT MODE RESET
Reset Night Mode
NT TENANT
Set Night Mode For Tenant
CALLBACK CANCLD
Cancel Callback System-Wide
FNC LAMP OFF
Reset FNC LED
CURRNT PASSWORD
Originator
Telephone Password (1)
NEW PASSWORD ?
Originator
Telephone Password (2)
ENTER PASSWORD
Originator
Set Password (CO/PBX Restriction)
RESTRICT SET
Originator
After Setting Password
CALL DENIED
Originator
Display on Station Outgoing Restricted Telephone
RESTRICT CANCLED
Originator
After Canceling Outgoing Call Restriction
CANCEL TEL
Cancel Restriction on Another Telephone
RLY 0 ON
Relay On
RLY 0 OFF
Relay Off
ALARM AM 00 : 00
Set Alarm For A.M.
ALARM PM 00 : 00
Set Alarm For P.M.
ALL ALARM CANCLD
Cancel Alarm System-Wide
SET TIME REMINDR
Set Timed Alarm for SLT
DND SET
Originator
Set Do Not Disturb
*<- - XXX XXXX
Originator
Save and Repeat Number Is Stored
ALL PAGE
Originator
Internal All Zone Paging
GROUP [ A ]
Group Paging
TENT [ ]
Tenant Paging
SPKR [ A ]
Originator
External Speaker
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 18
Alphanumeric Display
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display
Location
Definition
TRF TO CO =
Set Automatic Tandem Trunk Transfer IN/OUT Trunk
TRF CNCL CO =
Reset Automatic Tandem Trunk Transfer
TRF TO CO =
Set or Confirm Transferred Trunk of Automatic Tandem
Trunk Transfer
TRNS TO N / A
Transferred Trunk Not Assigned
00 : EMPTY
No Speed Dial Number Entered
00 : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Speed Dial Number Confirmation
NO SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording Not Available
ERROR
Error Message
BUSY
Busy Message
PRINTER TROUBLE
Printer Problems
SPKR [ A , B , C ]
Originator
External All Paging
LINE IDLE
Originator
Trunk Queuing; CO/PBX Trunk Idle
TRUNK QUE SET
Originator
Trunk Queuing Set
LNR [ # ] / SPD [ ]
Press Redial Key
TRUNK QUE CANCLD
Originator
Trunk Queue Canceled
RCL : 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 3 , 0 4
Originator
Hold Recall
120 < - [ 1 1 0 ] TRANSF
Destination
Ring Transfer
120 = = [ 1 1 0 ] TRANSF
Automatic Ring Transfer
OVD > [ ]
Barge-In On a Station
OVD - > CO [ ]
Barge-In On CO/PBX Line
100 < - TIE LNXX
Tie Line Answer
100 < - DID LNXX
DID Answer
DATA ENTRY
Enter Data Via System Programming
STA NUMBER?
Call Pickup Direct Originate
100 _ _ [101]URGENT
Voice Over Split Originate/Receive
01/12147517627
Caller ID Indication
MUSIC SET/RESET
Background Music is On/Off
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
H
French, Japanese, and Spanish characters are also available.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BCT
,
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
3-00
+BTT
,
Station Name Assignment
4-18
+BE
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-33
+BI
Customized Message 1~10 Assignment
1-2-09~18
+BTM
Multilingual LCD Indication Selection
4-28
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 20
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Line Extender (Dterm ® Analog EXT)
A-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Dterm Analog EXT allows a user with an NEC Multiline Telephone to make or receive calls from a
remote location while maintaining a station appearance from the office KTS.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTP-32DE-1 TEL
Required Components:
Electra Elite KTS with one ESI port
Dterm Analog extender (OF) with termination to an ESI port of the KTS and an analog line from the CO
Dterm Analog extender (RE) with termination to an analog line from the CO
DTP-32DE-1 Dterm Series E terminal
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal incoming call handling procedures apply.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Refer to Dterm Analog EXT Owners Manual for more information.
Use Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] 0r 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring
Assignment (Night Mode)] to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on Multiline Terminals.
Use Memory Block 4-31 (Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection) to disable (press LK 2) paging
for the station.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The user must use a line that is not connected to the Dterm Analog EXT to make 911 calls. If a call
is made from the remote terminal, the telephone number at the KTS location is sent to the
emergency center.
Zone and voice paging must be turned off using KTS programming. The remote telephone should
be programmed to ring for all incoming calls.
When the remote Multiline Terminal is programmed to answer multiple calls, they should ring at the
terminal. Contact your authorized NEC dealer when system changes are required.
Synchronous ringing does not operate on the remote telephone. Incoming trunk calls
automatically ring 2 sec. on/2 sec. off.
Analog fax machines and modems cannot operate with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal that is
connected to an APR-U Unit optional adapter.
Dterm Cordless terminals cannot be used with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal or Dterm Analog
EXT.
CTA-U Unit and CTU(S)-U Unit cannot be installed to a KTS remote Multiline Terminal to provide
TAPI functionality with the KTS.
H
CTU(C)-U Unit (Coreline) cannot be used with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal or Dterm Analog
EXT.
H
Dterm PC and PCII do not function with Dterm Analog EXT.
H
H
The HFU-U/HF-R Unit handsfree adapter cannot operate with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal or
Dterm Analog EXT used in a home environment because of FCC restrictions, but it can operate in
an office environment.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 22
Analog Line Extender (Dterm ® Analog EXT)
Ancillary Device Connection
A-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Ancillary Device Connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary) devices to a Multiline
Terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives.
An Electra Elite IPK Terminal user can accomplish this by using the AP(R)-R Unit (Analog Port Adapter
with Ringer) or AP(A)-A Unit (Analog Port Adapter without Ringer) for analog telephone devices, or
installing the AD(A)-R Unit to connect devices such as tape recorders.
The AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit is the interface for installing a Single Line Telephone, Modem, Credit Card
Reader, Wireless Headset, NEC Voicepoint/Voicepoint Plus Conferencing unit or other compatible
analog device.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTH-8-1, DTH-8D-1, DTH-16D-1, DTH-32D-1, DTH 16LD-1
Required Components:
AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Depends on the connected ancillary device.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The optional device fits underneath the terminal.
Engineering Technical Information Bulletins (ETIs) provide connection instructions for the various
ancillary devices. Ancillary devices that are not covered by an ETI may not be compatible with
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals. Verify with NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., National Technical
Assistance Center (NTAC) before attempting hookup.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Individual device conditions and operating procedures are provided in the applicable ETI Bulletins
and ancillary device manufacturer information.
Restrictions:
H
H
A Single Line Telephone connected to an APR-U/AP(R)-R Unit or APA-U/AP(A)-R Unit cannot
perform Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and does not support a 1 terminal - 2 outside parties conference
call.
A Single Line Telephone connected to an APR-U/AP(R)-R Unit or APA-U/AP(A)-R Unit does not
support Message Waiting Indication.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-3
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
E-4
Electra Professional Terminal Migration
F-7
Full Duplex Handsfree
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
S-7
Single Line Telephone Access
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTM
APR Ring Mode Assignment
4-39
+AU
APR/APA Hookflash Selection
4-59
+BTI
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
4-95
+BTI
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
1-3-02
+BCM
Hookflash Time Selection
1-1-02
+BTI
SLT Hookflash Assignment
4-24
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 24
Ancillary Device Connection
A-8
Answer Hold
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Answer Hold allows a Multiline Terminal user to press the flashing Answer key to answer an incoming
ringing call. When the Multiline Terminal user is already answering a call, the first call is automatically
placed on Non-Exclusive Hold when the second call is answered. Answer Hold is particularly useful at
Attendant Positions or other central answering positions. Using the Answer key speeds call handling,
and Answer Hold prevents accidental call dropping.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To answer calls on a different line key with a call in progress:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring. The
2.
Press
F
F
F
, and answer the new call (
LED flashes.
LED goes off). The original call is put on Hold.
a.
When the original call is on a Call Appearance Key, the call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold
on the Call Appearance Key.
b.
When the call is on a line key, the call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold on the line key.
3.
Talk with the CO/PBX incoming caller.
4.
When additional calls are received, press
the next call. (Refer to a. and b. above.)
F
to place the current call on Hold and connect to
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
CO/PBX ringing transfer/camp-on calls may be answered.
When multiple incoming calls activate the Answer key LED, the LED continues to flash until all calls
are answered.
Use Memory Block 4-51 (Off-Hook Ringing Selection) to assign YS (default) or NO for Off-hook
ringing for Answer Hold to work.
Restrictions:
H
H
Answer Hold does not function for incoming internal calls.
CO/PBX incoming calls not assigned to ring or assigned to other tenants do not activate Answer
Hold.
H
DID/Tie line and DIT/ANA calls do not activate Answer Hold.
H
When all Call Appearance keys are in use, the next call cannot be answered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 26
Answer Hold
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTT
,
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
,
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-03
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
4-04
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
4-51
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive
Hold)
1-1-03
+BTS
+BM
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 28
Answer Hold
A-9
Answer Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multiline Terminals have an Answer key with an LED that flashes when the Multiline Terminal user
receives an incoming CO/PBX, Tie/DID transfer, or CO/PBX transfer call ringing in the same tenant
group. When multiple calls are received, the Answer key is used to pick up calls. The Answer key
continues flashing until the last unanswered call is answered. Press the Answer key during a call to hold
the current call and allow the next call to be answered.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To answer calls using the Answer key:
F
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring. The
2.
Press
3.
Talk with the CO/PBX incoming calling party.
4.
LED flashes again. Press
to
When additional CO incoming calls are received, the
place the current call on Non-Exclusive Hold and connect the Multiline Terminal user to the next
call.
F
. The
F
LED flashes.
LED goes out.
F
F
a.
An original call on a Call Appearance Key is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold on the Call
Appearance Key.
b.
An original call on a line key is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold on the line key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
The Answer key LED functions for incoming CO/PBX calls, CO/PBX transfer/camp-on calls, and
transfer/camp-on Tie/DID calls.
Incoming CO/PBX ringing calls to other tenants with the CO/PBX line appearance and ring
assignment activate the Answer key LED.
Incoming calls answered by the Answer key are handled first in-first out.
Restrictions:
H
An Internal call, internal transfer/camp-on call, Secondary Incoming Extension, Automated
Attendant, or Tie/DID call does not activate the Answer key LED.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 30
Answer Key
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTT
,
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
,
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-03
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
4-04
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
4-51
+BTT
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without
Ringing Assignment (Day Mode)
4-52
+BTT
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without
Ringing Assignment (Night Mode)
4-53
+BTS
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 32
Answer Key
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
A-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Assigned Night Answer (ANA) is a Direct Inward Termination programmed to ring directly at a selected
station when the system or tenant is in Night Mode. This assignment operates independently from the
DIT (Day Mode) ringing assignment.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal incoming call handling procedures apply.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
ANA incoming ringing is assigned for Distinctive Ring or Synchronous Ring system-wide.
When a busy station, programmed for ANA, receives an incoming ANA call, the system provides
Camp-On tone for the busy station. The calling party receives ringback tone until the call is
answered.
H
A Call Pickup for the same tenant, Access Code 68 (default), can be used to answer ANA calls.
H
ANA calls do not activate External Tone Ringer or Night Chime.
H
ANA calls can be assigned to ring on voice mail ports. A hunt group can be assigned using the
internal master hunt number assignments.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
When a station, programmed for ANA, receives an incoming ANA call, internal ring tone is heard at
all stations where a secondary incoming extension appears and is assigned to ring.
Incoming ANA calls cannot be answered directly at the CO line key appearance. The CO line key
indicates Other Use (red LED).
While an incoming ANA call is being received, an internal call cannot be made.
Multiple CO/PBX lines can be assigned to ring at the same station, hunt group master number, or
ACD/UCD Pilot number.
Incoming ANA calls follow the station Call Forward setting.
Restrictions:
H
When a CO/PBX line is assigned for ANA, the Night Mode CO/PBX ring assignment is disabled.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-11
Feature Name
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BCT
Memory
Block
DIT Assignment
3-42
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BCT
DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time Selection
3-61
+BCT
DIT Tenant Assignment
3-62
+BCT
DIT Weekend Mode Selection
3-63
+BCT
DIT Night Mode Delay Answer Selection
3-64
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BCT
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 34
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
Call Forward - Busy Immediately/Delay
Selection
4-42
+BM
Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 36
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
Attendant Add-On Console
A-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Attendant Add-On Console functions with a Multiline Terminal programmed as an Attendant. This
console provides access to a maximum of 48 stations and/or outside lines. The Busy Lamp Field status
is shown by a red LED for each station or trunk. Trunks can include CO/PBX, ISDN, DID, E&M Tie Lines,
and FT1 lines. The Attendant Add-On Console also has 12 function keys that can be used for attendant
messaging, paging access, or undefined functions.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any Multiline Terminal programmed as an Attendant Position
Required Components:
DCR-60-1/DCU-60-1 Console
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To transfer a call:
1.
Attendant answers an incoming CO/PBX call.
2.
Press the DSS/BLF key for the desired station. The calling party is put on Non-Exclusive Hold.
3.
When the called party answers the Attendant call, the Attendant announces the call and then
presses
on the Attendant Add-On Console.
4.
Go on-hook.
G
- OR 1.
Attendant answers an incoming CO/PBX call.
2.
Press the Attendant Add-On Console key for the desired station. The calling party is put on
Non-Exclusive Hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
G
3.
Press
4.
Go on-hook.
on the Add-On Console.
To call a station:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Press the DSS/BLF key for the desired station. Hear ringback tone or voice announce the station.
3.
Called party answers.
To set/cancel Message Waiting or Station Outgoing Lockout (Outgoing Restrict) to station:
1.
Press the Message Wait or Station Lockout key.
2.
Press the DSS/BLF key for the desired station.
To make an outgoing call using the Attendant Add-On Console from the Attendant Position:
1.
Go off-hook with the handset or press a CO line key on the Attendant Add-On Console.
2.
Dial the desired number.
To answer an incoming call at the Attendant Add-On Console from the Attendant Position:
Press the incoming CO line key or flashing
F
if ringing is assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 38
Attendant Add-On Console
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
The 48 DSS keys and 12 function keys on Attendant Add-On Consoles are flexible and can be
changed.
Both DSS/BLF for stations and CO lines can appear on the same DCU-60-1/DCR-60-1 Console.
When the Attendant transfers a call, the transferred outside line remains on Non-Exclusive Hold
until the call is answered.
H
Each installed Attendant Add-On Console is included in the maximum number of stations.
H
The keys are assigned at default as follows:
01~48
ICM Call
00~147
(Depending On System Configuration)
49
Night Mode
50~53
Direct Paging Access
54
Vacant
55
Message
56~59
External All Zone Paging
60
Transfer
Internal Zone and All Zone Page
External Zone and All Zone Page
H
Busy Lamp Field indications show when a Multiline Terminal, outside line, or zone paging is in use.
H
Busy Lamp Field status indications at the Attendant Add-On Console are:
LED Indications:
Busy Lamp Field Status:
Off
Station Idle
Red
Busy
Fast-flashing Red
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Slow-flashing Red
VM Message Waiting Indication
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
LED Indications:
Outside Line Status:
Off
Outside Line Idle
Green
In Use (by Attendant station)
Red
Busy
Winking
Call On Hold
Flashing
Incoming Call
Message Waiting/Station Outgoing Lockout status indications at the Attendant Add-On Console
are:
LED Indications:
Station Status:
Off
No Message/Lockout Not Set
Green
Message Waiting/Lockout Set
Using an Attendant Add-On Console, the Attendant can set a message to a Single Line Telephone
equipped with a Message Waiting LED and connected to an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU.
When the Message Waiting indication is set, the Large LED flashes green on Multiline Terminals
and continues to flash until the message is answered or canceled by an Attendant.
Attendant Add-On Consoles can be assigned to any Multiline Terminal programmed as an
Attendant Position.
When the entire system is switched into Night Mode, the Night Transfer (NT) key LED on the
Attendant Add-On Console lights red.
An Attendant Add-On Console cannot have a Message Wait key and a Station Lockout key
assigned at the same time.
Multiple CO calls ringing at an Attendant Station or Attendant Add-On Console are answered in
first in-first out order.
Voice Mail MSG Waiting has priority over any other state of the flashing line key or One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 40
Attendant Add-On Console
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The following Digital Voice Mail integrated functions can be assigned to keys on the Attendant
Add-On Console:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Record Start
Record Pause/Restart
Record Erase
Record Finish
Record Erase/Restart
Urgent Page (Pager) ON/OFF
Record Confirmation
Restrictions:
H
Only four DCU-60-1/DCR-60-1 Consoles can be installed per system.
H
Only four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to one station.
H
H
H
When tone signaling is selected in Memory Block 1-6-03 (DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection),
the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the DSS station dials 1 to switch to voice.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, the Digital Voice Mail integrated functions (e.g.,
Record start) are not supported.
Incoming CAR keys are not supported.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-13
Attendant Positions
A-14
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
B-6
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
M-2
Message Waiting
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+BS
,
+BTD
,
Memory
Block
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
Assignment
1-6-01
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BTD
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-6-03
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station To Class Of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTT
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
4-23
+BTD
Attendant Transfer Selection During Live
Record
1-6-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
All
4-2
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 42
Attendant Add-On Console
Attendant Camp-On
A-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Camp-On, used at an Attendant Position with an Attendant Add-On Console, allows a call to
be transferred to a busy station. Press the Transfer key on the Attendant Add-On Console to send the
Camp-On tone to the busy station. When the station receives the camp-on tone, the call rings and can
be answered. A camp-on call that is not answered in a programmed time recalls to the Attendant
Position.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any display Multiline Terminal programmed as an Attendant Position
Required Components:
DCU-60-1/DCR-60-1 Console
OPERATING PROCEDURES
From an Attendant Position with a CO/PBX Call in progress:
1.
Press the DSS/BLF key on the Attendant Add-On Console or the Attendant Position for the desired
station.
2.
Wait for call waiting tone.
3.
Press
4.
Go on hook.
5.
After time-out, When the Camp-On is not answered, a recall tone is received at the Attendant
Position, and the LED on the assigned CO/PBX line key or Call Appearance Key returns to flashing
green.
6.
Press the CO/PBX line key with the flashing green LED to return to the call.
G
on the Attendant Add-On Console or on the Attendant Position. Camp-On is set.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer a Camp-On Call from a Multiline Terminal:
F
1.
The user engaged in a call receives a camp-on tone. The
flashes green, and CO/PBX line flashes green, when assigned.
2.
Press
F
flashes red, the Large LED
and talk with the CO/PBX incoming caller. The previous call is put on hold.
To answer a Camp-On Call from a Single Line Telephone:
1.
The user engaged in a call receives a camp-on tone.
2.
Hang up or put the call on System Call Park.
3.
Go off-hook, and talk with the CO/PBX incoming caller.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Two Camp-On types are provided by the system:
J
J
H
H
Attendant Camp-On
Station Camp-On
The camp-on tone is heard over the handset or from the speaker when the Multiline Terminal is in
handsfree mode.
Any number of outside calls can be camped on to a station. When the station goes idle, the
Camp-On calls are answered in order from the lowest numbered lines to the highest numbered
lines.
Restrictions:
H
Camp-On is not allowed to stations that have received Tone Override.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 44
Attendant Camp-On
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-19
Class of Service
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
S-15
Station Camp-On
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-11
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station To Class Of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTT
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-90
+BM
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection
1-1-12
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-2, 3-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 46
Attendant Camp-On
Attendant Positions
A-13
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Any number of stations can be designated an Attendant Position. These stations have access to distinct
Attendant-type features. Two Attendant Positions can support two Attendant Add-On Consoles each.
Programming for Attendant features such as setting Night Mode and System Speed Dial memory apply.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any Multiline Terminal with display programmed as an Attendant Position
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Provided under specific Attendant feature descriptions.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Restrictions:
H
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be assigned to one Attendant Position.
H
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be assigned in the system.
H
Up to four Attendant positions can have an Attendant Add-on Console.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-17
Automated Attendant
A-27
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
C-4
Callback Request
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
N-5
Night Transfer
S-9
SLT Timed Alarm
S-13
Speed Dial – System
S-19
Station Outgoing Lockout
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
Assignment
1-6-01
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection
1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class Of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1~1-3,
1-7
2-6, 4-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 48
Attendant Positions
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
A-14
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout allows an Attendant Position with an Attendant Add-On Console to
be used to set a predetermined Code Restriction Class Assignment at any station assigned on the
Attendant Add-On Console. This allows an Attendant to set/reset a restriction to allow/deny an outgoing
call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any Multiline Terminal programmed as an Attendant Position
Required Components:
DCU-60-1/DCR-60-1 Console
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set the Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout from the Attendant Position using the Attendant Add-On
Console:
1.
Press programmed Lockout key on the Attendant Add-On Console.
2.
Press the DSS key on the Attendant Add-On Console that is associated with the station where
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout is desired.
3.
The green LED next to the DSS key lights to indicate lockout is set.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel the Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout from the Attendant Position using the Attendant
Add-On Console:
1.
Press the key programmed as Lockout key on the Attendant Add-On Console.
2.
Press the DSS key on the Attendant Add-On Console that is associated with the station where
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout is to be canceled.
3.
The green LED next to the DSS key turns off to indicate the lockout is canceled.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
All Attendant Add-On Consoles can be used to set Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout.
H
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout is retained by the memory backup battery.
H
No indication is provided at a terminal when Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout is set.
H
H
To confirm that Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout is set at an Attendant Add-On Console, ensure
that the green LED associated with the station is On. Lockout remains set until canceled at the
Attendant Add-On Console where it was set.
The station with Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout set cannot be used to manually cancel the
lockout.
Restrictions:
H
H
An Attendant Add-On Console, with an Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout key assigned on it,
cannot be used to set the Message Waiting feature from an Attendant.
When multiple Attendant Add-On Consoles are installed, the Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout is
displayed only on the Attendant Add-On Console where the Lockout was set.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
M-2
Message Waiting
S-19
Station Outgoing Lockout
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 50
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTD
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment When
Lockout is Set
1-1-70
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 52
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
Attendant Transfer
A-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Transfer permits efficient call transfers in the system using an Attendant Multiline Terminal
equipped with one to four Attendant Add-On Console(s). Transferred calls can be voice announced,
camped-on (when the station is busy), or directly transferred to ring at stations. After a programmed
time, all unanswered transferred calls return to the Attendant with distinct audible and visual indications.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any display Multiline Terminal programmed as an Attendant Position
Required Components:
DCU-60-1/DCR-60-1 Console
OPERATING PROCEDURES
From the Attendant Position with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press the DSS key on the Attendant Add-On Console or the Attendant Position for the desired
station.
2.
Wait for ringback tone or voice announcement.
3.
Press
on the Attendant Add-On Console or on the Attendant Position. The call is
transferred.
4.
Hang up.
5.
After time-out, when the transferred call is not answered, a recall tone is received at the Attendant
Position; and the LED on the assigned CO/PBX line key or Call Appearance Key flashes green.
6.
Press the CO/PBX line key with the flashing green LED to return to the call.
G
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
When a Transfer/Camp-On is denied, the call remains on hold at the Attendant Position.
The outside line key LED flashes green on the station receiving the Transfer/Camp-On, when the
line appears on that station. The Large LED also flashes green and the LED or the ANS key
flashes red.
An Attendant trying to Transfer/Camp-On a call to a station may be denied, when the Multiline
Terminal is busy and receiving Tone Override.
Use Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection) to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for
the outside party when a trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Dterm, or hook flash
from a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold keys at a PSII station.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-11
Attendant Add-On Console
A-12
Attendant Camp-On
A-25
Automatic Release
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 54
Attendant Transfer
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-11
+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-13
+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
1-1-14
+AU
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BM
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection
1-1-12
+AU
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
Hold Tone Selection
1-4-17
+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BTS
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-2
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKl
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 56
Attendant Transfer
Authorization Code
A-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Authorization Code permits a station user to dial outside numbers that would otherwise be restricted.
When an access code plus Authorization Code is dialed, the station code restriction class temporarily
changes to allow calls when permitted by a new code restriction class.
The Authorization Code can be verified or unverified based on class of service and is assigned in the
Forced/Verified Account Code table (these share the same table).
The Authorization/Account Code is part of the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To enter Forced Account Code/Authorization Code from any station:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access Code (not set at default).
3.
Dial the Account Code.
4.
Dial the trunk access code and the outside number.
. .
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program Forced Account Code/Authorization Code from Attendant position:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming Access Code (not set at default).
3.
Dial the Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Number (001~500).
4.
Dial the Account Code (default: 10 digits).
5.
to enter the information. The next Account Number is displayed. Repeat steps 4~5
Press
until all desired Account Codes are entered.
6.
Press
G
E
.
to stop entering Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Use Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), Page 5, LK 1 to
activate Forced Account Code/Authorization Code features.
Use Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), Page 6, LK 3 to
activate Unverified for the Forced Account Code/Authorization Code features.
When a call is made without using an authorization code, memory blocks 4-64 and 4-65 are used
to assign the code restriction class.
When a call is made using an authorization code, the code restriction class is temporarily changed
and Memory Blocks 4-07 and 4-08 are used to assign the code restriction class.
After a call is placed using an authorization code, when the Recall or Drop keys are used, the
temporary code restriction class remains with the setting assigned in Memory Blocks 4-07 and
4-08 allowing the user to dial another non-restricted number.
After placing a call using an authorization code, when the station goes idle (On-hook), the code
restriction class is reset to its previous setting assigned in Memory Blocks 4-64 and 4-65.
A total of 500 Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes can be entered system-wide.
Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes and Account Code entries Codes are printed on the
SMDR report, when both are used.
A is placed in front of the Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes on the SMDR reports to
distinguish them from other Account Code entries.
When the Interdigit time (default is 10 seconds) expires during the user input of a Forced Account
Codes/Authorization Code, Busy Tone is generated.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 58
Authorization Code
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
PBR Time values apply when a Single line Telephone is used to enter a Forced Account Code/
Authorization Code.
H
Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes can be uploaded, downloaded, or modified using
PC-based System Programming.
Restrictions
H
H
A Forced Account Code/Authorization Code has a maximum of 13 digits.
The Authorization Code feature is provided only from intercom dial tone. Direct access to trunks is
bypassed by pressing CO Line Keys.
H
Existing restrictions (permitted by the temporary change to code restriction class) and Least Cost
Routing (LCR) assignments are applied after Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes are
entered.
H
H
When a 911 call is placed, Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is overridden by the
following:
J
J
Emergency 911 Cut-Through is enabled.
Enhanced 911 (CAMA Trunk) is installed and enabled.
Verified and Unverified Forced Account Code/Authorization Code cannot be used in the same
Class of Service.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension number
are printed by SMDR.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-2
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
C-21
Code Restriction
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BA
+BTS
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
146, 147
2-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+BTS
,
+BTT
,
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTT
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
+BTT
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class (without Authorization
Code) Day Mode Assignment
4-64
Code Restriction Class (without Authorization
Code) Night Mode Assignment
4-65
+BF
Forced Account Code Length Assignment
1-8-27
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BA
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
7-3-02
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
+AS
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-13
+AS
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-14
+AS
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-5-26
+AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
+AS
SMDR Print Format
1-5-02
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
+CSS
Com Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
+AW
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
+BTT
,
+BTT
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
5-1, 6-3
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 60
Authorization Code
A-17
Automated Attendant
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Automated Attendant answers incoming CO/PBX calls and sends a greeting message to calling
parties. When the caller enters a station number or a 1- or 2-digit number from the dial pad, as instructed
in the greeting message, the Automated Attendant transfers the call to a designated station or Station
Hunt group. The Automated Attendant can be set to provide eight automated message levels.
Incoming DID calls can be answered by the Automated Attendant.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To record an Automated Attendant Message:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase Access Code (e.g.,
3.
A
B
C
Dial operation:
EK
).
Recording
Confirmation
Erasing
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 61
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
AB
C
AB
C
Dial operation:
Automated Attendant
Voice Prompt Message
Delay Announcement
5.
6.
AH
Enter Automated Attendant Message (
Enter Mode:
~
).
Day Mode
Night Mode
Weekend Mode
7.
Record Message.
8.
Go on-hook.
To set the Automated Attendant Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
HA
.
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
.
KK FD KK
~
).
indicates All CO/PBX lines.
Dialing 00 sets or cancels the Automated Attendant mode for all trunks when the trunks are idle.
A trunk that is busy when 00 is dialed is not set. To set the Automated Attendant to a busy trunk, dial the
individual trunk number.
Press
A
.
To cancel the Automated Attendant Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
HB
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
.
.
KK FD KK
~
).
indicates All CO/PBX lines.
Dialing 00 sets or cancels the Automated Attendant mode for all trunks when the trunks are idle. A trunk
that is busy when 00 is dialed is not set. To set the Automated Attendant to a busy trunk, dial the individual
trunk number.
Press
A
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 62
Automated Attendant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set/cancel the Weekend Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
HF KK DG
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
3.
Dial tenant number (
.
~
).
All trunks for the dialed tenant are set/canceled for the weekend mode.
4.
Press
A
.
To answer by One Level:
1.
Receive an incoming CO/PBX call.
2.
The Automated Attendant answers the call and sends a greeting.
3.
A DTMF tone is received. Each tone is assigned to a station number or a station hunt group.
4.
The call is transferred to a designated station or station hunt group.
5.
The called party answers and talks.
To answer by Multiple Levels (up to eight levels are available):
1.
Receive an incoming CO/PBX call.
2.
The Automated Attendant answers the call and sends a greeting.
3.
A 1-digit DTMF tone is received. Each tone is assigned to another message on the VRS ETU.
4.
The call is answered by the VRS(4)-U( ) ETU and another message is played.
5.
A 1-, 2-, or 3-digit DTMF signal is received.
6.
The call is transferred to a designated station of the second level, or another VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
message is played.
7.
The called party answers and talks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 63
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Timeout - No Answer:
1.
An incoming CO/PBX call is received on a line.
2.
The Automated Attendant answers the call and sends a greeting.
3.
A 1-digit DTMF tone is received.
4.
The call is transferred to a designated station or Station Hunt group.
5.
When there is no answer, the CO/PBX ringing transfer at the station is changed to an ordinary
CO/PBX ringing call on the CO/PBX line, after a programmed time.
6.
The calling party on the CO/PBX line is answered.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
A maximum of two VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs can be used for Automated Attendant.
Each channel has 240 recording seconds that can be subdivided into 2, 4, 8, or 16 equal recording
times.
A maximum of eight Automated Attendants can be assigned. Multiple Automated Attendants can
be assigned to one VRS(4)-U( ) ETU channel.
When the VRS(4)-U( ) ETU or PBR is busy and a CO/PBX call is incoming, the caller hears a
ringback tone until a VRS channel and PBR are available.
When Automated Attendant or PBR is busy, after the call is transferred to the second level, a
ringback tone is sent to the calling party.
H
DIT/ANA assigned to the same trunk has higher priority.
H
Automated Attendant and system Access Codes can be assigned individually.
H
H
Automated Attendant is assigned to tenants and follows the tenants Day/Night/Weekend mode
switching.
When Automated Attendant answer is assigned for a trunk and a VRS(4)-U( ) ETU is not installed,
second dial tone is provided for incoming callers.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 64
Automated Attendant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When an incoming caller is transferred to a busy station, the following options are available to this
caller:
A
J
L
Dial
Action
Step Call is performed
Second dial tone is provided
Ringing begins based on the Day/Night ringing assignment
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU circuits are used for this feature. The CPUI( )-U( ) ETU has four built-in PBR
circuits that can be programmed for use with the Automated Attendant, DISA feature, or Single
Line Telephones. When all four circuits are set for AA/DISA using Memory Block 1-8-01 (SLT or
Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection), a PBR ETU must be installed for Single Line
Telephone use.
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and Automated Attendant cannot be set for the same trunk at
the same time.
Memory Block 1-4-02 (Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection) must time
out before incoming DID calls can be answered by the Automated Attendant (cannot be set to No
Limit).
Memory Block 1-4-02 (Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection) is not
required to time out before incoming DID calls can be answered by the Automated Attendant (can
be set to No Limit).
Only trunks assigned in Memory Block 3-05 (Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection) for AA are
set or canceled for Automated Attendant/DISA Mode when an Attendant position enters 00 during
the set or cancel operation.
Use Memory Block 1-4-08 (Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response Selection) to specify
how a call is answered by the Automated Attendant when a DTMF tone is not received. When
NORMAL Call is specified (default), the system rings selected stations using Memory Block
4-01[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] or 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].
When RELEAS is specified, the call is dropped after a fixed time of 30 seconds.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 65
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-10
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
D-10
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
D-11
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+AR
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-12
VRS Message Function Assignment
1-8-13
+AU
Automated Attendant Extension Number
Assignment
1-4-21
+AU
Automated Attendant Direct Extension Ring
Assignment
1-4-22
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/48
Automated Attendant Message Day/Night
Mode Selection
1-4-11
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to PBR
Selection
1-8-01
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-05
+AU
Automated Attendant Function Selection
3-59
+AU
Automated Attendant Message to Trunk
Selection
3-38
+BM
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week
Selection
1-1-32
+AR
,
+BA
,
+AU
,
+BTI
,
+BCT
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
501
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 66
Automated Attendant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AU
Hold Tone Automated Attendant Selection
3-65
+AU
Automated Attendant Message to Tenant
Assignment
1-4-12
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AU
Automated Attendant Message Access Code
(1-Digit) Assignment
1-4-14
+AU
Automated Attendant Message Access Code
(2-Digit) Assignment
1-4-15
+BA
Specified Station Access Code Assignment
1-2-08
+AU
Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time
Assignment
1-4-13
+AU
Automated Attendant Message Repeat
Selection
1-4-16
+AU
Automated Attendant PBR Start Time
Selection
1-4-09
+AU
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR
Release Time Selection
1-4-01
+AU
Automated Attendant Selection for DID
4-58
+AU
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout
Response Selection
1-4-08
+AU
PBR Receive Level Assignment for
Automated Attendant/DISA
1-8-02
+AU
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed
Ringing Time Selection
1-4-02
+AU
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern
1-1-54
+AU
Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect
Time Selection
1-4-03
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1, 1-2,
1-8, 2-7
2-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 67
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+AU
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
Hold Tone Selection
1-4-17
+ALN
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-20
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-21
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-22
+ALN
DID Forward Station Number for Busy
Station or Undefined Digit
1-1-23
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
Tone Assignment
1-8-15
+AT
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension
Assignment
1-4-04
+BM
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time
Assignment
1-1-27
+BI
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
Tone
Table 01
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 68
Automated Attendant
A-18
Automatic Answer with Delay Message
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Answer with Delay Message answers an incoming CO/PBX call and plays a specified
message to the outside caller while still ringing the designated station. Up to two messages can be
played to the outside caller. The message(s) played are the same as the Automated Attendant
message(s).
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To record an Automated Attendant Message:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase Access Code (e.g.,
3.
4.
5.
A
B
C
A
Dial operation:
EK
).
Recording
Confirmation
Erasing
Dial operation:
Automated Attendant
AH
Enter Automated Attendant Message (
~
).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 69
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
AB
Enter Mode:
Day Mode
7.
8.
Night Mode
Record Message.
Go on-hook.
To set the Automated Attendant/Delay Message Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
HA
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
.
.
KK FD KK
~
).
indicates All CO/PBX lines.
Dialing 00 sets or cancels the Automated Attendant mode for all trunks when the trunks are idle. A trunk
that is busy when 00 is dialed is not set. To set the Automated Attendant to a busy trunk, dial the individual
trunk number.
Press
A
.
To cancel the Automated Attendant/Delay Message Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
HB
.
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
.
KK FD KK
~
).
indicates All CO/PBX lines.
Dialing 00 sets or cancels the Automated Attendant mode for all trunks when the trunks are idle. A trunk that
is busy when 00 is dialed is not set. To set the Automated Attendant to a busy trunk, dial the individual trunk
number.
Press
A
.
To answer by One Level:
1.
Receive an incoming CO/PBX call.
2.
The Automatic Answer with Delay Message answers the call and sends a greeting.
3.
The outside party hears ringback tone or MOH (System Programmed).
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 70
Automatic Answer with Delay Message
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer by Two Levels:
1.
Receive an incoming CO/PBX call.
2.
The Automatic Answer with Delay Message answers the call and sends a greeting.
3.
The outside party hears ringback tone or MOH (System Programmed).
4.
After the time expires, a second message is played.
5.
The outside party hears ringback tone or MOH until the call is answered.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
A maximum of two VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs, four channels per ETU, can be used for Automated
Attendant.
Each channel has 240 recording seconds that can be subdivided into 2, 4, 8, or 16 equal recording
times.
A maximum of eight Automated Attendants can be assigned.
The Automatic Answer with Delay Message feature uses the Automated Attendant Message to
play to the outside caller.
H
DIT/ANA assigned to the same trunk has higher priority.
H
Automated Attendant and system Access Codes can be assigned individually.
H
H
Automated Attendant is assigned to tenants and follows the tenants Day/Night/Weekend mode
switching.
When Automated Attendant answer is assigned for a trunk and a VRS(4)-U( ) ETU is not installed,
second dial tone is provided for incoming callers.
Restrictions:
H
H
Tie/DID lines are not supported by the Automatic Answer with Delay Message feature.
DTMF digits cannot be dialed by the outside caller while in the Automatic Answer with Delay
Message mode.
H
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU PBR circuits are not used for this feature.
H
Automatic Answer with Delay Message or Automated Attendant is assigned per trunk.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 71
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and Automated Attendant cannot be set for the same trunk at
the same time.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-10
Feature Name
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU
PBR Selection
1-8-01
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-12
VRS Message Function Assignment
1-8-13
Automated Attendant Message Day/Night
Mode Selection
1-4-11
+AU
Automated Attendant Message to Tenant
Assignment
1-4-12
+AU
Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time
Assignment
1-4-13
+AU
Automated Attendant Message Repeat
Selection
1-4-16
+AU
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
Hold Tone Selection
1-4-17
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
Assignment
1-4-18
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay
Announcement Interval Time
1-4-19
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
Disconnect Time
1-4-20
+BS
+BTI
,
+AR
+AR
,
+AU
,
+AU
,
+AU
,
+AU
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 72
Automatic Answer with Delay Message
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BCT
System Data Name
,
+AU
,
Memory
Block
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-05
Automated Attendant Message to Trunk
Selection
3-38
+AU
,
Automated Attendant Function Selection
3-59
+BA
,
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/48
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
501
1-8
2-6
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 73
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 74
Automatic Answer with Delay Message
Automatic Callback
A-19
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
After receiving a call waiting tone from a busy station, a user can set Automatic Callback when allowed
in Class of Service (Station). When both stations are idle, the system signals the Automatic Callback
originator first and, after the originator answers, signals the other station.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature after calling a busy station and receiving a call waiting tone:
K
1.
Dial Access Code
2.
Hang up.
3.
The originating station rings when both stations become idle.
4.
Lift the handset or press
5.
Receive tone burst or ringback tone; talk when the called station user answers.
(set as default).
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 75
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Any station can be used for setting an Automatic Callback, and Automatic Callback can be set to
multiple stations regardless of tenants.
When the user that sets an Automatic Callback receives the Callback and does not answer within
30 seconds after the ringing begins, the Callback is automatically released.
While set, a Callback cannot be manually canceled.
Restrictions:
H
Only one Automatic Callback may be set at a station.
H
Automatic Callback cannot be set to a station that is in Do Not Disturb mode.
H
Call Pickup Group feature does not pickup Automatic Callback ringing on the originator station.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BA
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-24
+BM
Automatic Callback Release Time Selection
1-2-02
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-3
004
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 76
Automatic Callback
Automatic Call Distribution
A-20
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Call Distribution forwards any incoming trunk call (DIT, ANA, DID, or CO Ring Transfer) to a
selected ACD Group of Agents. An incoming call is distributed to the ACD Group Agent that has been
idle the longest. The ACD feature has four distinct parts: Call Distribution, Agents and Supervisor
Function, Status screens and Management Information System (MIS) reports, and Delay
Announcement.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
MIFA-U( ) with KMA(1.0)U for ACD
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU for Delay Announcement.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the Automatic Call Distribution Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 77
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
CALL PROCESSING
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The following features are included:
Abandoned Call Search
Abandoned incoming calls are not connected to Agent Positions. The system can recognize abandoned
calls and remove them from the queue on trunks that provide calling party disconnect supervision.
Call Distribution to Agents
Calls are automatically and uniformly distributed among Agents in an ACD Group. Calls are distributed
to the longest idle Agent Position. When incoming calls are held, the oldest call is connected to the first
available Agent position.
Call Transfer to ACD Group Queue
CO Trunk calls that terminate to either a normal station, ACD Agent, or Supervisor Position may be
transferred to an ACD group queue.
Night Service
When the ACD group is placed in Night Mode, the system can route all incoming ACD calls to one of the
following: Internal Station, Night Announcement, transfer to the Attendant, or Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
Overflow
Overflow Service allows calls held in queue for more than a programmed time to be directed to an
assigned station or Station Hunt group, but not to overflow to another group.
Queuing
All incoming calls destined for ACD groups are placed in queue when no Agent in the ACD group is
presently available to handle the call. Queue is used to provide service in order of arrival (first in-first
out).
Pilot Numbers
Pilot numbers (Access Codes to ACD functions) are programmed in the System Data according to the
numbering plan in effect for the system. Pilot numbers do not correspond to any line appearance in the
Electra Elite systems. No hardware equipment is required to assign a Pilot number. An ACD Group Pilot
number should not be programmed in a Station Hunt group. The Station Hunt feature takes priority over
the ACD function.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 78
Automatic Call Distribution
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
When the Agent (in the ACD group where a call is terminated) does not answer for a programmed
time, the call is transferred to another Agent in the ACD group.
When the Agents (in the ACD group where a call is terminated) are all busy, the call waits in a
queue until an Agent is available. The caller receives a Delay Announcement and Music On Hold.
Calls are answered first-in, first-out.
When the overflow destination station is busy, calls continue searching the ACD group for an
available Agent.
When an incoming call to an ACD group encounters all ACD Agents busy or no answer, the call is
queued and the caller receives a recorded announcement (Delay Announcement) after a
programmed time.
The ACD group is assigned a Pilot number. Calls directed to the Pilot number are directed to
Agents of that ACD group.
The following maximum assignments for programming ACD groups and Agents are:
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
Up to 32 Agents can be programmed per system.
Up to four ACD Groups can be assigned per system.
Up to 32 Agents can be assigned in one ACD group.
All trunks used for ACD incoming calls must provide a receiving remote disconnect signal to
release abandoned calls.
Overflow is performed only once.
When the overflow destination station is set for Call Forward to an ACD Group, overflow does not
occur.
A Voice Mail Hunt group can be assigned as the destination station for ACD overflow; however, no
DTMF digits are sent to the voice mail system.
Restrictions:
H
H
Alert tone is not provided even when all Agents in the ACD group are busy. However, Pooled Line
(Outgoing) can indicate the status of trunks in an ACD group as an alternate method.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 79
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
AGENT AND SUPERVISOR FUNCTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The following features are included:
Assistance
This feature allows an Agent to call a Supervisor in the ACD group for assistance. Activation of this
feature during an ACD call, automatically places the active call on hold and places an assistance call to
the Supervisor. This feature uses a Feature Access or One-Touch key.
Break Mode
This feature allows the Agent to take a position out of the ACD mode without logging off. Break Mode is
used for breaks from work (e.g., lunch or coffee breaks). This feature uses the DND key that is
programmed on a Feature Access or One-Touch key.
Logon/Logoff
This feature allows an Agent to logon/logoff the system. Operating statistics are collected for the Agent
until they logoff. This feature is activated by the Logon/Logoff key that is programmed on a Feature
Access or One-Touch key on the Agent Position.
Non-ACD Call
This feature allows an Agent or Supervisor to receive a call directly from dial trunks (e.g., Tie line, DID,
or DIT) or a transferred call to the agent. Transfer ACD calls from another Agent or ACD calls on hold by
another Agent are counted as non-ACD calls by MIS when they are picked up by another Agent.
Answer/Release-Headset
This feature uses the Headset On/Off key that is assigned on a line key in System Programming to allow
an Agent using a headset to answer or release an ACD call.
Volume Control-Headset
This feature allows an Agent to control the receiving level at a station, independent of the level of the
incoming calls.
Control of Night Mode
This feature can be activated and deactivated by the NT key that is programmed on a Feature Access or
One-Touch key on the Supervisor terminal to allow the Supervisor to activate Night Mode.
Monitoring (Barge-In)
This feature allows the Supervisor to monitor calls at an Agent Position and is activated by key operation
on the Supervisor Terminal. During monitoring, the Conference LED at both terminals is On.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 80
Automatic Call Distribution
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
When a call is transferred to an ACD Pilot number using a Call Appearance key, the LED stays On
until the call is answered and released by an Agent.
When the Agent is in Break Mode, the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) flashes red.
Any Agent in an ACD group can busy out a station by pressing the Logoff key on the Multiline
Terminal. When log off is activated, the station user can receive a call directed to the station
number (but not the ACD group number) and originate calls.
H
During Break Mode, an incoming ACD call cannot be received.
H
ACD MIS interfaces with the Electra-Stat ACD/MIS or Elite Stat Plus application software.
H
Any non-ACD call that is transferred or Direct Terminal Interfaced to a station that is logged on as
an ACD agent follows any Call Forwarding that is set.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
Agents can log off or enter Break Mode only when their station is idle.
When an Agent logs on with an outside call on hold, the status of the Agent on the MIS terminal
shows Available, but the system does not distribute an ACD call to the Agent until the held call is
terminated or transferred to another user.
While an ACD Agent is logged on, the ACD calls do not follow any forwarding on the telephones.
ACD Agents do not receive another ACD call when an existing ACD call is on hold or is call parked.
When the held or call parked call is terminated, the ACD Agent can receive ACD calls again.
H
Call Forwarding can be set or canceled only while the agent is logged out of ACD.
H
When using 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 81
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
STATUS SCREENS AND MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS)
REPORTS
DESCRIPTION
The Elite Stat Plus Management Information System (MIS) software provides a cost effective means to
manage incoming telephone traffic and associated staff activity. The ACD/MIS feature provides real-time
statistical reports with readily accessible help screens.
ACD/MIS runs on an external PC that uses an Open Applications Interface (OAI) channel to
communicate with the Electra Elite IPK. ACD/MIS operates in conjunction with the Log on, Log off, and
Break features of the associated Electra Elite IPK.
Elite Stat Plus has two main system components:
H
Elite Stat Plus Server
H
Elite Stat Plus Monitor Client
Elite Stat Plus Server
The Elite Stat Plus Server program sets up communication with the NEC KSU and recording call activity
to an external database. The server should be running at all times to properly store call records. The
server can run in a foreground or background window, and as an icon. The server application is added to
the startup tasks to allow auto-start when the PC is turned on.
The Server PC should be a dedicated system reserved exclusively for Elite Stat Plus programs. Once
initiated, the program begins to accept data from the KSU after 15 ~ 20 seconds.
Elite Stat Plus must be running to properly collect all call record activity (i.e. the program must either be
active or minimized).
Elite Stat Plus Monitor Client
The Elite Stat Plus Monitor Client program can run on the Server PC or run on a networked PC (client).
A password is not required to run the Monitor client; however, only a maximum number of five
simultaneous Monitors can be active.
When Elite Stat Plus Monitor is started on the same PC as the server, it registers with the server and
begins displaying ACD group data immediately. When the program determines that it is running on a
network machine, the operator must enter the network address or network machine name of the Server
PC. At that time the monitor is registered with the server and the ACD group data is displayed.
When running in real-time mode, the Monitor displays a screen at start-up to show real-time queue
information. From within the real-time screen, select a particular report from the Reports menu to obtain
historical call information for viewing or printing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 82
Automatic Call Distribution
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Monitor user interface provides real-time queue information for all ACD groups:
H
The current status of all agents
H
The selected report in graph format
H
H
H
The queue statistics (number of agents logged in, number of calls in queue, and longest wait time
of calls in queue)
ACD group call statistics per user-defined period (number of abandoned calls, number of
answered calls)
An ACD group call summary for user-defined period (average time talking with agent and average
hold time)
For additional information, refer to the Elite Stat Plus ACD/MIS Owner’s Manual.
REAL TIME DISPLAY (RTD)
DESCRIPTION
The Real Time Display (RTD) consists of a server application that is installed on the same PC running
the ACD Plus server software, and client software that is installed on Agent PCs. This application
provides real time queue and agent status information to the individual desktop as a cost effective
alternative to expensive wall displays. In addition to the queue and agent status information, the
application also allows text messaging to be sent to individual agents and groups of agents.
Elite Stat Plus Software Suite is required to support RTD feature.
A sample display of the RTD is shown below.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 83
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
An optional RTD License Key is available to support additional RTD clients.
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
Number of agents logged into the queue
Number of calls waiting in the queue
Wait time of the call that has been in the queue the longest
By default, the top line on the Real Time Display shows the headers for each statistic column. The
bottom row of the Real Time Display shows text messages as they are received from other users.
The following appearances of RTD can be customized:
J
J
J
J
H
With an RTD License Key, up to 100 RTD clients are supported.
For each queue, the RTD lists the following statistics:
J
J
J
H
Without an RTD License Key, up to three RTD clients are supported.
Turning headers off/on
Resizing
Repositioning
Keeping the RTD image visible
The Real Time Display application is controlled through settings in the ACD Plus Server that allow
text messages to be sent between RTD clients. General announcements can be made to groups
of users or direct comments can be made to individual agents. All RTD clients can receive text
messages.
A text message received by an RTD Client is scrolled across the bottom line of the display. The
message continues to scroll until the message duration has expired or the user selects the Clear
function. When multiple messages are received, the messages are displayed in sequence, in the
order in which they were received.
A threshold can be defined on the ACD Plus Server for each statistic shown on the Real Time
Display. The threshold represents critical levels that indicate the efficiency of the call center
operations. Threshold levels are shown on the RTD by the color of the individual statistic when the
threshold is reached. Green indicates an acceptable level. Yellow indicates a warning level. Red
indicates a critical level.
The RTD can also provide additional alerts (a Tone or a Popup) as threshold levels are reached.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 84
Automatic Call Distribution
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
The PC requirements for an Elite Stat Plus Software Suite running the RTD feature include:
J
J
Software Requirements
N
Microsoft Windows 98, 2000, Me, or XP
Hardware Requirements
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IBM-compatible machine with at least a 500 Mhz CPU
Elite Stat and RTD Server — 256 MB RAM
RTD Client — 128 MB RAM
Minimum 40 MB of available hard disk space
CD-ROM drive
Unused serial port for connecting to the KSU
Mouse
Printer (optional)
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-2
Feature Name
Delay Announcement
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (ACD) Assignment
7-3-00
+BA
,
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+AA
,
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment
1-12-00
Function
1-8-07
Attendan
t
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
031, 032,
040
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 85
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+AA
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
1-8-25
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AA
ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination
Assignment
1-12-01
+AA
ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection
1-12-02
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTS
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
1-1-76
+AA
ACD Hunt Time
1-8-40
Function
1-8-07
Attendan
t
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1, 1-4,
1-5
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 86
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
A-21
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Day/Night Mode switching programs the system to switch automatically in or out of the Night
Mode at a programmed time. This eliminates the daily need to manually set/reset the Night Mode. After
a programmed time, the system automatically switches back to Day Mode.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Two separate Day/Night Mode switch times are available. In any 24 hour period, the system
changes from night mode to day mode at a specified time, then later the system changes from day
mode back to night mode at a specified time.
Station Code Restriction Class Assignment may also change automatically when the system goes
into Night Mode.
This feature switches Day/Night Mode for all tenants.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 87
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+BM
,
+BM
,
Memory
Block
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time
Assignment
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week
Selection
1-1-32
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
+BM
Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection
1-8-48
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1,1-2
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 88
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
Automatic Hold
A-22
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Hold works when an Attendant at an Attendant Add-On Console presses a DSS key
programmed for station or page access during an outside call or when a Multiline Terminal user,
engaged in an outside call, presses a Feature Access key or One-Touch key programmed for Direct
Station Selection or Direct Paging Access. This feature reduces the risk of accidentally disconnecting a
call and simplifies access to various features by reducing the required operational steps.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
While on an outside call at a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Press the DSS/BLF key for the desired station or paging. The original call is automatically placed
on Non-Exclusive Hold.
2.
Talk with called party, or page.
3.
Press the held line key or Call Appearance key to return to the held call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 89
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Press the Transfer, Conference, or a DSS key during a call in progress, to place the existing call on
Non-Exclusive Hold.
When you receive an incoming CO/PBX call during a call in progress, press the Answer key to
place the existing call on Hold and connect the Multiline Terminal user to the next call.
Press the Hold key to place the existing call on Non-Exclusive Hold or Exclusive Hold (when the
Feature key and then the Hold key are pressed).
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
A-8
Feature Name
Answer Hold
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
Assignment
1-6-01
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive
Hold)
1-1-03
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 90
Automatic Hold
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
A-23
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
T1 ANI displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal for incoming
trunk calls. ANI information follows the call to where it is transferred.
When the MIFM-U( ) ETU with KMM(1.0)U is installed, the Caller ID information can be displayed for the
last 50 incoming calls by using the Directory key or a Caller ID Scroll key when it is assigned.
Historically, ANI has been a feature of long-distance carriers typically provided on T1 circuits. The
Electra Elite IPK system supports ANI on T1-FGD (Feature Group D) trunks. This feature is functionally
the same as Caller ID.
ENHANCEMENTS
Release 1700:
With R1700 or higher, the following Memory Blocks are no longer needed for assigning the Caller ID or
ANI features and have been removed:
H
1-1-78 Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode
H
3-44
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
H
4-49
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
Prior to this release, 16 stations could display Caller ID or ANI information during an incoming day or
night ring assigned call. Using R1700 or higher, all stations can display Caller ID or ANI information
during incoming calls.
Release 2000:
With R2000 or higher, incoming calls to SIE keys display Caller ID on a Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 91
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, caller ID Scrolling is enhanced as follows:
H
H
A Class of Service option, Save Caller ID Missed Calls, has been added. When allowed, all
incoming calls with Caller ID are saved in the Caller ID Scroll Log. When denied, only calls
answered by the station or incoming calls never answered are saved (Same as allowed by
software prior to this enhancement).
During Caller ID Scrolling, answered incoming calls display A. Incoming unanswered (missed)
calls display M.
The following firmware versions are required:
ETU
Minimum Firmware Version
MIFM-U10
V6.10
MIFM-U20
V6.10
SPE(M)-U10
V6.10
With R3000 or higher, Caller ID to Single Line Telephones is supported. A Class of Service option,
Send Caller ID Information to Single Line Telephones, has been added.
Version 1.54 is required for the SLIB(4)-U10/SLIE(4)-U10 ETU to support Caller ID for Single Line
Telephones.
MIFM-U( ) Firmware V5.00:
MIFM-U( ) firmware V5.00 provides 50 Caller ID scroll buffers. Lower level software provided only 10
Caller ID scroll buffers.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with display
Required Components:
DTI-U( ) ETU
MIFM-U10 ETU with KMM(1.0)U installed when ANI/Caller ID Scrolling and/or Call Return are used
- OR MIFM-U20 ETU with KMM-U20 Upgrade Chip installed when ANI/Caller ID Scrolling and/or Call Return
are used
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 92
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To display a stored ANI:
Press the Scroll key to display the last incoming ANI. Repeatedly press the Scroll key to display up to 50
ANI numbers.
The Scroll key is programmed using Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode). Refer to the
Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for instructions.
To return a call to the number displayed on the LCD:
Go off-hook. The system automatically accesses an outside line and dials the ID number displayed on
the LCD.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Caller ID indication and Automatic Number Indication (ANI) are so functionally similar that they can
be assumed to have the exact same abilities and limitations.
The following incoming calls display Caller ID on a Multiline Terminal:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Ordinary CO calls
DIT/ANA calls
VRS/AA calls
Ring Transfer calls
CAR calls
SIE Calls (R2000 or higher)
ACD/UCD calls
Calls with delayed ringing
H
While the Multiline Terminal is ringing, the ANI Indication is displayed on the top row of the LCD.
H
A maximum of 13 characters can be displayed on the LCD.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 93
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
Press the green line key where the CO call resides during a CO call, to verify the ANI information
from any display terminal.
When the station is assigned to receive DIT/ANA calls, Caller ID is displayed only on the Multiline
Terminal where DIT/ANA is assigned to ring. ANI/Caller ID follows the station Call Forward setting
or Station Hunting feature.
When a Multiline Terminal is busy, the ANI/Caller ID is displayed for an incoming call.
When a Multiline Terminal is set for Do Not Disturb, the ANI/Caller ID is displayed for incoming
calls.
When a Multiline Terminal receives multiple incoming calls, the first caller identification is
displayed. After the first call is answered, the second caller identification is displayed.
The ANI/Caller ID disappears under the following conditions:
J
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
When an incoming call is answered.
When an internal or ring transferred call is received.
When a Feature Access, DSS, Redial, or Feature key is pressed.
The caller number is printed on the Station Message Detail Recording printout for incoming calls
that are answered at stations that can display ANI/Caller ID data. The name is not printed.
When the scroll key is used, a maximum of 50 ANI/Caller IDs can be stored in System Memory.
When 50 ANI/Caller IDs are stored and an additional call is received, the first ANI/Caller ID is
erased from System Memory. Press the Scroll key to display the stored ANI/Caller IDs. When you
go Off-hook, the displayed ANI/Caller ID is automatically dialed. The LCR feature is required for
the Automatic Dial Out option.
Five users can use the Scroll function at the same time. When additional users try to scroll, IN USE
is displayed at their Multiline Terminal.
ANI/Caller ID Scrolling times out and the LCD returns to idle when the Scroll key is not pressed
within five seconds.
When an outgoing call is made via the Scroll function, the call follows Code Restriction, Digit
Restriction, and Least Cost Routing. The LCR feature is required for the scroll function to operate
properly.
ANI/Caller ID scrolling and automatic dial out features require installation of the MIFM-U( ) ETU
with an attached KMM(1.0) U.
When DID conversion table is used to provide CID to the SLIB(4)-U10 ETU, the Date and Time are
provided by the IPK.
When analog lines are used to provide CID to the SLIB(4)-U10 ETU, the Date and Time are
provided by the CO provider.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 94
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
SIE incoming calls do not support Caller ID Indication even when the Multiline Terminal is ringing
(R1700 or lower only).
H
Name is not supported on ANI trunks.
H
T1-ANI trunks use MF wink start signaling for incoming calls.
H
T1-ANI trunks use DTMF signaling for outgoing calls.
H
Only Feature Group D (FGD) protocol is supported.
H
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU can be installed in any Interface Slot (S1~S8) of any cabinet (1~3) without
requiring vacant adjacent slots.
The available ANI service depends on the DTI-U( ) ETU version as shown in the table below.
Service
ANI-Feature Group D Incoming
only signaling
ANI-Feature Group D Incoming
MF wink start signaling and
Outgoing DTMF signaling
Key-Common Channel
Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
H
H
DTI-U(20) ETU
DTI-U(30) ETU
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
When a system speed dial buffer is assigned number and name, the name can be displayed when
the ANI number information matches a speed dial number. Memory Block 3-53 (Caller Name
Indication Selection) must be assigned to TRK for the name to be displayed.
When CAR keys are assigned on the Multiline Terminal and a DIT/ANA or VRS/Automated
Attendant transferred call is received at the CAR, the following assignments are required:
J
J
J
H
DTI-U(10) ETU
Use Memory Block 1-1-78 (Caller ID Display Assignment for system mode) to assign up to 15
Multiline Terminals to display ANI/Caller ID indication for normal incoming CO/PBX calls or
CO/PBX calls ringing a Call Arrival (CAR) key (R1600 or below only).
Use Memory Block 4-49 (Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment). to assign one Multiline
Terminal per CAR key to display ANI/Caller ID indication for incoming CO/PBX calls ringing
on a CAR key (R1600 or below only).
Memory Block 4-37 [Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] and/or Memory Block
4-38 [Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].
Caller ID Name to Single Line Telephone is not supported for ISDN (BRT/PRT) Trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 95
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
I-9
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
I-10
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
L-3
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
S-7
Single Line Telephone Access
T-1
T1 Connection
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (ANI/Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
+AD
Signal Format Selection
1-11-00
+AD
Clear Channel Selection
1-11-01
+AD
Line Length Selection
1-11-02
+AD
IP K-CCIS Selection
1-11-03
+AD
T1 Channel Selection
1-11-05
+AD
Signaling Selection
1-11-06
+AD
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
1-11-07
+AD
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
1-11-08
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
Mode (R1600 or lower)
1-1-78
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2
1-8-08
+AD
,
+AI
,
+BTS
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4,
5-7, 6-5,
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 96
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AI
Caller Name Indication Selection
3-53
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX
Line (R1600 or lower)
3-44
+AI
Caller ID Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTM
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-41
+AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
(R1600 or lower)
4-49
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 97
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 98
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
A-24
Automatic Redial
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Redial simplifies repetitive dialing to a busy or unanswered outgoing call. After a busy tone or
no answer is received during a CO/PBX call, the system systematically redials the party number while
the station user monitors the call for completion.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set while receiving a busy tone or no answer on an outside call:
E
1.
When using the handset, press
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
The call is repeated automatically (default: 2 times).
5.
Lift the handset to respond when the called party answers. When this is not done, the call is
disconnected when the next redial cycle starts.
A
B
, and restore the handset.
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 99
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Automatic Redial:
Lift the handset, then restore handset, or press
E
.
- OR Automatic Redial is canceled automatically when the specified number of redials (default: 2) is
completed.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
This feature remains in effect until the party initiating the call lifts and restores the handset or
presses Speaker during a redial attempt. An incoming call is answered on that line, or two (default)
redial attempts are made.
The system does not detect answer, no answer, or busy condition from the outside network.
When Automatic Redial is in progress (a call is being initiated by the system), an LCD appearance
(,: Number Dialed) confirms Automatic Redial is activated. For stations with or without an LCD, a
flashing Feature LED indication is provided, and the Redial key is on continuously.
The outside line LED on the Multiline Terminal, where Automatic Redial is initiated, is green but on
other Multiline Terminals in the system it is red.
When the feature times out, access a CO/PBX line, press the Feature key and then the Redial key,
or a Feature Access or One-Touch key programmed to activate this feature.
When an incoming CO/PBX call is received from the CO during the waiting period of the Automatic
Redial feature, Automatic Redial is released, and a busy tone is sent to the station.
The handset must be lifted off-hook to disable Automatic Redial after an outside call is answered.
Use Memory Block 1-1-04 (Automatic Redial Time Selection) to program Automatic Redial Time
parameters as follows:
Programming
Range
Default
Callback Time:
1~50 seconds
030
Wait Time:
1~100 seconds
060
Redial Times:
1~ 15 times
002
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 100
Automatic Redial
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
H
H
The station retains sole use of the outside line during Automatic Redial.
An internal call received during Automatic Redial cannot be answered unless Automatic Redial is
released. The calling station receives a call waiting tone.
A station user cannot set a Tone Override to a station with an Automatic Redial set. However, a
Callback Request or an Automatic Callback can be set.
H
This feature is not available for Single Line Telephones.
H
This feature is not available for Tie/DID lines.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
System Data Name
+BM
Automatic Redial Time Selection
1-1-04
+BTS
Manual Pause Selection
1-1-09
¦
¦
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 101
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 102
Automatic Redial
Automatic Release
A-25
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For this feature to
work with Loop Start Trunks, the CO/PBX providing the outside line must provide a timed disconnect
signal. Automatic release is normally provided on Ground Start, DID, ISDN, and Tie Line Trunks.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 103
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Loop Start, Ground Start, DID and TIE Line Trunks provide this feature when the outside exchange
generates a timed disconnect signal to indicate the distant party has abandoned the call.
Automatic Release on ISDN trunks is provided by the protocol.
When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key, the LED associated with the line key
goes off when Automatic Release occurs.
This feature functions while a call is in progress, on hold, or conferenced.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BCT
System Data Name
Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-40
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 104
Automatic Release
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
A-26
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) allows an outgoing line to be seized using a Trunk Group or Route
Advance Block (RAB) for each number dialed by the user. The ARS feature allows more efficient use of
the trunks connected to the system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature:
I
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for dial tone.
2.
Dial ARS access code
3.
Dial the desired number.
(default) and receive LCR dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 105
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
All Trunk Groups in the system (00 is used to deselect trunk groups) can be accessed using ARS.
Trunk Group Access code 9 (default) activates ARS at stations assigned for LCR Class
assignment using Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class Selection).
ARS is based on actual digits dialed to properly route the call.
ARS can be programmed to consider a maximum of eight dialed digits before making a selection
for the number dialed.
When using Code Restriction with ARS, code restriction applies to the digits dialed by the system.
After a 10 second interdigit time expires during dialing using ARS, a busy tone is generated, and
the user must redial the number.
When a station user places an outgoing call using ARS, Trunk queuing cannot be set.
When a feature code is assigned to CO Feature Service code for Code Restriction using Memory
Block 1-1-82 (CO Feature Code Service for Code Restriction), this code does not have to be
programmed in the ARS Dialing Assignment Tables.
When ARS route assignment 00 is set using Memory Block 1-14-03 (ARS Route Table Number
Assignment), the dialed number is sent out Trunk Group 01 the way the number was dialed.
Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), ARS Overflow (Page 6,
LK1) allows or restricts access to Trunk Group 01 when first priority Trunk Group (programmed
route) is busy.
Use Memory Block 1-1-46~48 [Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment] (Function No. 101) to
assign an access code.
Restrictions
H
H
Route Advance Blocks or Trunks programmed on a line key, bypass ARS.
Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), LCR/ARS Bypass only
applies when the station is assigned to a LCR/ARS Class (1~4) in Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class
Selection). ARS Bypass does not apply when using access codes to directly access an ARS Table
(functions 601~604 - ARS Tables 1~4) in Memory Blocks 1-1-46~48 (Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit
Assignment).
H
ARS is not available when the Electra Elite 48/192 system is in KF registration.
H
Outgoing calls using Direct Inward System Access (DISA) cannot access ARS.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 106
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
ARS cannot be used to route calls by hour of day or day of week.
H
Only a single Route Assignment can be specified for each Dialing Assignment entry.
H
When ARS is set to YES (allow) using Memory Block 1-14-00 (ARS Allow/Deny Selection), the
MIFM LCR is disabled even when allowed in system programming.
H
A maximum of 10 digits can be deleted or added to a Route Assignment.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+BTT
LCR Class Selection
4-40
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BA
+BTS
,
Memory
Block
,
+AB
,
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-00
+AB
,
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-01
+AB
,
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-02
+AB
,
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-03
+AB
,
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number
Assignment
1-14-04
+AB
,
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-05
+AB
,
ARS Digit Add Assignment
1-14-06
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-4, 6-1
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 107
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 108
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
A-27
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer allows an incoming CO/PBX call to be automatically dialed out of the
system over another outside line to a programmed telephone number. This is especially useful for
forwarding calls to an answering service during nonbusiness hours (i.e., nights, weekends, or holidays).
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Assigned Attendant Position Multiline Terminals with this ability.
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set the Trunk Forward Assignment from the Attendant Position:
A
FC
L
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
Press
5.
Dial outgoing telephone number where the call is to be directed.
6.
Press
.
.
.
A
KA FD
~
).
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 109
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel the Trunk Forward Assignment from the Attendant Position:
A
FC
LA
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
Press
5.
Press
.
.
KA FD
~
).
.
To set the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
FA
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
Press
.
.
A
.
KA FD
~
).
Dialing 00 sets the Automated Attendant mode for all trunks when the trunks are idle. When 00 is dialed, a
busy trunk is not set. To set the Automated Attendant to a busy trunk, dial the individual trunk number.
To cancel the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode from the Attendant Position:
A
FB
.
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
Press
.
A
.
KA FD
~
).
Dial 00 to cancel the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Mode for all trunks when the trunks are idle. When 00 is
dialed, a busy trunk is not canceled. To cancel Automated Trunk-to-Trunk mode to a busy trunk, dial the
individual trunk number.
To confirm the Trunk Forward Assignment from the Multiline Terminals with LCD:
A
FD
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 110
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
KA FD
3.
Dial the incoming trunk number (
4.
(outgoing telephone number is displayed in the LCD). When the outgoing telephone
Press
number is longer than nine digits, continue to press
to display each remaining digit.
A
~
).
A
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
When this feature is activated, and an incoming call rings in, any ringing assigned station rings and
the call can be answered while the outgoing call is being made.
The incoming or outgoing trunk can be a CO/PBX or Tie/DID line.
The Attendant can press the Feature key and the line key to verify the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer status when set.
When the outgoing line is in use and an incoming call rings in, the call is treated as a normal
incoming call. When the outgoing line becomes free, the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
feature is activated.
When this feature is activated, the incoming trunk LEDs assigned on Multiline Terminals wink and
the outgoing trunk LEDs are always On.
When this feature is activated, the winking incoming trunks set for Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer are available for outgoing use.
The outgoing telephone number cannot exceed 24 digits.
After the system dials the outgoing number, the incoming call is transferred, the trunk LED
assigned to Line keys is On steady, and the call cannot be answered.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
Outgoing trunks cannot be used when this feature is set.
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and Automated Attendant cannot be set for the same trunk at
the same time.
Only trunks assigned in Memory Block 3-05 (Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection) for TANDM
TRF are set or canceled for Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode when an Attendant Position
enters 00 during set or cancel operation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
A - 111
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BCT
,
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-05
+AT
,
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
3-06
+BCT
,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection
1
1-8-07
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AT
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode
Selection
1-4-05
+AT
Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time
Selection
1-4-00
+BCT
Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection
3-40
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-7
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 112
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Background Music Over External
Speakers
B-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Background music over external speakers is integrated with the three-zone paging system provided by
the ECR-U( ) ETU. The connection does not require an external relay system. When a zone (or all
zones) is connected to paging, the paging system BGM is turned off automatically.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
No amplifier is provided on the ECR-U( ) ETU.
H
The impedance of the speakers must be 600 Ω.
H
The Paging BGM input impedance is 600 Ω.
H
The control relays can handle up to 24 Vdc @ 500 mA.
H
The paging output comes from the ECR-U( ) ETU to an amplifier (up to 10W) and then back into
the ECR-U( ) ETU. The speakers are connected to the ECR-U( ) ETU (up to three zones). The
ECR-U( ) ETU does the rest.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BP
General Purpose Relay Assignment
1-8-37
+BP
External Speaker Connection Selection
1-7-02
+BP
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
1-7-03
+BP
External Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-06
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
B-2
Background Music Over External Speakers
Background Music – Multiline Speaker
B-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Music on hold provides station background music through the station speaker when the station is idle.
A loop-start COI port can be used as an alternate background music source when a Valcom V-9941A
unit, or equivalent, is provided.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Background Music (BGM) when the Multiline Terminal is idle:
A
BF
1.
Press BGM On/Off key (or press
2.
Background Music is displayed on the Multiline Terminals for five seconds.
To cancel Background Music:
A
).
BF
1.
Press BGM On/Off key (or press
).
2.
The Background Music display is canceled after five seconds.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Background Music stops while the Multiline Terminal is in use.
H
When Background Music is provided via a COI port, a Valcom V-9941A (or equivalent) is required
to provide Talk Battery to the COI(8)-U( ) ETU.
H
BGM stops at a station that is in DND mode while receiving an incoming call indication.
H
Originating a call, answering a voice announcement, a ringing call, paging, or pressing the Feature
key interrupts Background Music.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦¦
¦
System Data Name
+BCS
+BTS
+BCS
,
,
Memory
Block
BGM Port Assignment
1-1-79
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Hold Tone Source Selection
1-8-31
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-7
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
B-4
Background Music – Multiline Speaker
B-3
Barge-In
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Barge-In allows selected Multiline Terminal users in the system to override another station user
conversation with or without an audible alert to that station user. The alert tone is programmable.
Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and
laws. Consult a legal advisor before implementing the monitor of conversations. Some
federal and state laws require a monitoring party to use an alert tone to indicate
monitoring and/or obtain consent from all parties to the conversation. Some laws
provide strict penalties for illegal monitoring of telephone conversations.
ENHANCEMENTS
Release 1700
With Release R1.70 or higher, Memory Block 1-1-76 (Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment) controls the
Conf LED at the station barged into as follows:
H
YS (Allow)
H
NO (Denied) The Conf LED is Off.
The Conf LED is On.
Prior to this release, the Conf LED was always on at the station that was barged into.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To Barge-in using a station number:
E
D
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the station number to be overridden.
4.
Press
5.
Interrupt is enabled.
A
A
, then press
, and wait for internal dial tone.
.
.
To Barge-in using an outside line number:
E
D
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press
3.
Dial
4.
Dial the CO/PBX number to be overridden.
5.
Press
6.
Interrupt is enabled.
A
J
, then press
and wait for internal dial tone.
.
.
A
.
To Barge-in using an outside line key:
E
D
, and wait for internal dial tone.
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press
3.
Press the CO/PBX line key to be interrupted.
4.
Interrupt is enabled.
A
, then press
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Multiline Terminals can be used to interrupt the privacy of conversations on outside lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
B-6
Barge-In
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Barge-In overrides a conversation held by a station in Do Not Disturb mode.
H
When Barge-In is denied, DENIED is displayed in the LCD.
H
The station interrupting an outside line cannot put the CO/PBX call on hold.
H
Each Barge-In in progress uses a conference circuit.
H
H
When Memory Block 1-1-76 (Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment) is assigned YS (Allow), both the
internal and external parties receive the tone.
When a call with Barge-In in progress is placed on hold, the held status is displayed on the
Conference LED (Conf LED flashes), and the green CO or CAP key line appearance turns red. To
retrieve the held call, press the flashing COnf key. This condition is valid for all software releases.
Restrictions:
H
Barge-In is not allowed for internal calls.
H
Barge-In is not allowed until the Elapsed Call Time starts.
H
Add-On Conference calls cannot be interrupted.
H
The Barge-In feature is not permitted when all 16 Add-On Conferences are in progress.
H
The Barge-In feature does not override conversation on a Private Line.
H
H
H
H
A Single Line Telephone user cannot activate Barge-In; however, the conversation on a Single
Line Telephone can be interrupted.
The Barge-In feature cannot be used on outside lines for another tenant unless the lines are
assigned to both tenants.
Data Line Security prevents a station from being barged in on, even when Barge-In is allowed in
Class of Service.
Barge-In is not allowed on outside lines on Hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-19
Class of Service
D-1
Data Line Security
E-1
Elapsed Call Time
P-8
Private Lines
T-3
Tenant Service
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
+BTS
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BCS
Private Line Assignment
1-1-29
+BTT
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-90
+BTS
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
1-1-76
+BM
Start time Selection
1-1-05
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-4, 1-5
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
B-8
Barge-In
Battery Backup – System Memory
B-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A battery is provided on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU for the Electra Elite IPK system to retain System Program
Memory when power fails. When fully charged, the battery maintains backup power for approximately 21
days. System Data, Speed Dial Memories, and Clock/Calendar functions are protected by the backup
battery. After power is restored, the system returns to normal operation.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The battery connector on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU should be disconnected during long term storage
but must be connected (protection against loss of power) just before installation to provide battery
backup for System Memory.
H
When fully charged, the battery retains System Memory for approximately 21 days.
H
Battery backup on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU retains memory for the following functions:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
System Program
Night Transfer Status
Call Forwarding
Callback Request
Speed Dial Memories (System/Station)
Clock/Calendar
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Save and Repeat
Store and Repeat
Last Number Redial
Message Waiting
Microphone Status
Station Lock (Set and Password)
Timed Alarm
Customized Message
Voice Mail Message
Feature Access and One-Touch Keys
Volume Set Level
Automatic Attendant Mode
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode
General Purpose Relay Setting
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 10
Battery Backup – System Memory
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
During normal operation, the batteries are continually recharged using a built-in charging circuit.
Restrictions:
H
Battery backup on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU does not protect the following:
J
J
J
J
Automatic Callback
Off-line Status (for programming system or station assignments)
Automatic Redial
Trunk Queuing
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
B-4
Feature Name
Battery Backup – System Power
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 12
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Power
B-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30 minutes during
commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries are connected and fully charged,
full system operation can be maintained for an extended time. Actual time depends on system
configuration, traffic conditions, and the capacity of the batteries.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
B64-U( ) KSU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
During normal operation, the batteries are continually recharged by a built-in charging circuit.
H
The B64-U( ) KSU is equipped with batteries for system battery backup.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
B-4
Feature Name
Battery Backup – System Memory
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 14
Battery Backup – System Power
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
B-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) indicates station status using LEDs. The applicable LED is on for Feature
Access keys and One-Touch keys that are programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS). This allows
Multiline Terminal users to determine at a glance that a station is in use.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTU/DTP or DTH/DTR-8-1 TEL
Up to eight line keys
DTU-8D-1 or DTP/DTH/DTR-8D-2 TEL
Up to eight line keys
DTU/DTP-16-1 TEL
Up to 16 line keys
DTU-16D-1 or DTP/DTH/DTR-16D-2 TEL Up to 16 line keys
DTU-16HC-1 TEL
Up to 16 line keys
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
Up to 16 line keys ,
DTU/DTP-32-1 TEL
Up to 16 line keys and 16 One-Touch keys
DTU-32D-1 or DTP/DTH/DTR-32D-2 TEL Up to 16 line keys and 16 One-Touch keys
,
The 16 LD telephone indicates BLF status by an LED indicator.
Required Components:
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program the Feature Access key for DSS/BLF:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the station number.
6.
Dial
7.
Press
A
AA
.
.
.
(optional step, toggles call between voice and tone).
.
To program the One-Touch key for DSS/BLF:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the One-Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the station number.
6.
Dial
7.
Press
A
AA
.
.
.
(optional step, toggles call between voice and tone).
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 16
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
A single color LED (red only) is used to indicate the following station status:
LED is Flashing:
Station is in Do Not Disturb (DND) or Call Forward – All Call, Break Mode.
LED is Winking:
Station is Off-Line (to program). Station is accessing Feature functions.
LED On:
Station is busy, receiving Voice Announcement, receiving Internal/DIT/ANA/TIE/DID
ringing signal, or was put on hold.
LED Off:
Station is idle, receiving CO/PB call, receiving CO/PBX transferred call, or receiving
recall.
Local power is not required for the BLF function on a Multiline Terminal. The Attendant Add-On
Console requires an AC transformer that is provided with the console.
Assignment of One-Touch keys for Direct Station Selection (DSS) with busy lamp indications is
programmable by the user from the Multiline Terminal. Any existing station can be assigned.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BE
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-1-35
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
B - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 18
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
Call Alert Notification
C-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Alert Notification allows a station user to receive an alert tone, flashing ICM, Large LED, and LCD
identification during an incoming call while the user station is busy. This allows the station user to put the
current call on hold to answer a second call to increase call handling abilities.
This feature works with Call Forward – Busy/No Answer so the second incoming call is queued to the
station for eight seconds (default) before it is forwarded.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To answer an incoming DIT, DID, Tie line, or Automated Attendant transferred call on a Multiline
Terminal, after receiving a Call Alert Notification while talking with another party:
H
1.
Press
2.
Incoming caller is automatically connected.
. The first call is put on hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer the incoming call on any station (single-line station in particular), after receiving a Call Alert
Notification while talking with another party:
1.
Go on-hook on the first call.
2.
Go off-hook to answer the incoming call.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
This feature is provided for DID, DIT, Tie line, internal transferred calls, and Automated Attendant
transferred calls.
When an Automated Attendant transferred call does not get answered and changes to a normal
CO ringing, the Call Alert Notification is no longer provided at the station receiving the transferred
call.
When a station that has Call Forward – No Answer assigned receives a second call, it follows the
Call Forward – No Answer time before it is forwarded.
When a station is already receiving a Call Alert Notification, an additional internal call to this station
provides Busy tone to the caller. When Call Forward – Busy is set, the internal call follows this
forward setting.
Incoming Call Alert Notification to Multiline Terminals is as follows:
J
J
J
H
H
H
LCD shows second incoming call.
A Call Alert Notification tone of 0.8 seconds is provided to the called party.
The LCD does not indicate that a second call is ringing in when using Store and Repeat.
During Incoming Call Alert Notification to a Single Line Telephone, a Call Alert Notification tone of
0.8 seconds is provided to the called party.
The calling party hears the following when the called station is already on another call:
J
J
H
ICM and Large LED flash.
Automated Attendant, DIT, DID, and Tie line callers hear ringback tone.
Internal callers hear call waiting, allowing Step Calling to be used.
When a station is the Master Hunt Number for a Station Hunt group, the second call follows the
Station Hunt Group assignment. When all agents in this group are busy, Call Alert Notification is
given to the called party and the call remains at the master station.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C-2
Call Alert Notification
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
Multiple incoming calls, except internal and Automated Attendant transferred calls, continue to ring
at a busy station. However, the LCD of this station indicates only the first call waiting to be
answered.
ACD agents that are busy on a call do not receive Call Alert Notification when another ACD call is
received. Call Alert Notification is provided when a call is transferred to the station and not the pilot.
The following maximum incoming calls can wait at a station:
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
DIT, DID, and Tie lines:
No Limitation.
Internal and Automated Attendant transferred calls:
No Limitation.
When a station with Call Forward – Busy assigned receives a second call, this call follows the Call
Forward – Busy setting either immediately or after the Call Forward – No Answer time has expired.
When Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2, Page 3 LK8 (Call Alert
Notification) is set for deny, incoming Tie Line or DID calls to a busy station are restricted and the
calling party receives a busy tone. This assignment is not used to restrict an incoming DIT call to a
busy station and does not block the Call Alert tone to the user.
When Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2, Page 3 LK3
(Voice/Tone Override [Receive]) is set for deny, the Call Alert tone is not provided to the speaker of
the Multiline Terminal or to the handset.
When Memory Block 4-90 (SLT Data Line Security Assignment) is assigned for a Multiline
Terminal, incoming Tie Line, DID, or DIT calls to the busy terminal produce a call Alert tone only
through the speaker of the Multiline Terminal. The Call Alert tone cannot be heard form the
handset.
Use Memory Block 4-42 (Call Forward – Busy Immediately/Delay Selection) to specify immediate
forward (NO) or delay forward (default: YS) for an incoming call when the station is set for
Call Forward – Busy.
Restrictions:
H
When a station that has set DND receives a second call, Call Alert Notification tone is not provided.
H
A station does not receive Call Alert Notification when Automatic Redial is activated.
H
Call Alert Notification calls cannot be answered using Call Pickup.
H
Call Forwarding can be set or canceled only when logged out of ACD.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTT
Call Forward - Busy Immediately/Delay
Selection
4-42
+BTT
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-90
+BM
Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-8
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C-4
Call Alert Notification
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
C-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature automatically places an outside call on a Call Appearance key when the system is operated
as a hybrid (Multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned on any Multiline Terminal or the same
key can appear on multiple terminals. This feature allows efficient call handling when numerous CO calls
are received and a limited number of CO line key appearances are available. These keys are often
called CO loop keys.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To place a Multiline Terminal outgoing call on hold and retrieve it:
I
E
1.
Go off-hook using the handset or press
2.
Dial Trunk Access Code (default:
3.
Dial the outside party, and begin conversation.
4.
Press
5.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
H
. Wait for internal dial tone.
). A Call Appearance key lights.
. The Call Appearance key flashes.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To place a Multiline Terminal incoming call on hold and retrieve it:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Go off-hook using the handset, or press
party.
3.
Press
4.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
H
E
. A Call Appearance key lights. Talk with outside
. The Call Appearance key flashes.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A trunk call that is originated or answered at a Multiline Terminal must appear on a line key. The
line key can be assigned as the trunk or as a Call Appearance Key. A CAP is dynamic because it
is used for any trunk call. An 8-key multiline terminal can have eight CAP keys that allow the
telephone to process all 64 trunks, 8 trunks at a time.
A total of 1152 different CAP keys are broken up into 48 CAP blocks with 24 keys per block. In
system programming, a Multiline Terminal is associated with a single CAP block. As the Multiline
Terminal processes calls, only keys in its assigned CAP block are used.
Several Multiline Terminals can be assigned to the same CAP block with the same set of 24 keys.
Incoming trunks to these Multiline Terminals appear on the same CAP key at each station.
CAR keys can also be associated with a CAP block. As a call arrives and is answered from a CAR,
it moves to the assigned CAP key on the terminal. Different CAR keys can be associated with
different CAP blocks to segregate calls based on the extension the call was sent to. When a CAR
is not assigned to a CAP block, the telephone CAP assignment is used by the CAR.
Any held call left on a CAP key for more than the programmed time recalls to the Multiline Terminal
where the call was originally put on hold.
When a Multiline Terminal (other than the one that originally initiated or received a call) is used to
retrieve a held call, the SMDR records a transfer to the Multiline Terminal where the call was
retrieved.
Only outside lines use a CAP key.
Outside lines reside on the CAP key in the order of lowest to highest line key number on the
station.
A Multiline Terminal can have multiple CAP keys assigned to it (including those from different CAP
blocks).
All Flexible Line keys on a Multiline Terminal can be assigned as CAP keys in System
Programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C-6
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Multiline Terminals and CAR Keys are assigned to CAP blocks in System Programming.
H
A conference call involving two outside lines cannot reside on one Call Appearance key.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-3
Feature Name
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦¦
¦¦
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment
4-43
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
+BTM
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C-8
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
C-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Arrival (CAR) keys are available software extensions as part of 120 station numbers on the
Expanded Port Package. The Basic Port Package provides 32 station numbers (24 can be shared CAR
ports) and 40 dedicated CAR ports. A Call Arrival extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring
on an individual station or multiple stations. When a call is directed to a CAR, any station with the CAR
can answer. This ensures that every call to that group is answered promptly. Multiline Terminals may
have several CAR extension appearances depending on the application.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To answer an incoming outside call to the Call Arrival key on an outside or internal line call with Off-Hook
Ringing assigned:
1.
Receive off-hook ringing.
2.
Press CAR key. The first call is placed on hold, and the CAR is answered.
3.
The incoming call resides on a Call Appearance (CAP) key, or CO Line key when it is assigned on
the telephone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer an incoming outside line call to the Call Arrival key on an internal call with Ringing Line
Preference:
1.
Go on-hook on an internal call.
2.
Go off-hook to answer incoming outside line call to a CAR key.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Incoming outside line calls can ring on a CAR. When the call is answered, it resides on a CAP (or
CO Line key). The CAR becomes idle for another incoming call or continues to flash when another
call is waiting to be answered. When a Call Appearance key (or CO Line key) is unavailable, an
outside line call to a Call Arrival key cannot be answered.
Incoming internal calls to a Call Arrival key can be answered with a Call Appearance key
unassigned. The ICM lamp (when provided) indicates a call, and when the call is put on hold,
flashes at the Conference key.
Go off-hook, press the Speaker key when Ringing Line Preference is assigned, press the flashing
Call Arrival key, or press the Answer key to answer Calls ringing at a Call Arrival key.
H
Call Arrival Keys can be set for Call Forward – All Call and Call Forward – Busy/No Answer.
H
Call Arrival keys can be set for Call Forward – Off - Premise.
H
Off-Hook Ringing can be provided for calls ringing into CAR keys.
H
H
H
H
CAR keys can be assigned as a station hunting master number and/or as a member of a Station
Hunt group.
A BLF indication is provided on an Attendant Add-On Console during incoming calls.
A CAR key can be called using a DSS key assigned on an Attendant Add-On Console or assigned
on a DSS key at a Multiline station.
An internal call to a CAR key is ring only. Voice announce is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 10
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
The Electra Elite IPK Basic Port system can contain 24 Call Arrival keys which are shared with 32
station ports. Forty additional CAR key extensions are also available.
The Electra Elite IPK Expended Port system can provide 112 Call Arrival keys. This number is
shared with 120 station ports. When 112 CAR keys are assigned, the remaining eight numbers can
be assigned for hardware extension numbers.
The Electra Elite IPK system can have a maximum of 40 CAR key extensions and 8 stations ports
or 32 station ports and 16 CAR ports.
Incoming CAR keys are not supported on an Attendant Add-On Console.
With EliteApps - PC Attendant, incoming calls to a CAR key are supported only by Line Keys
assigned for the incoming CAR key. Incoming CAR keys are not supported by DSS/BLF keys or
by Extended DSS/BLF keys.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-2
Feature Name
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Read the CAP Key features and specifications because CAR and CAP can be closely related.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BK
System Data Name
,
+BN
+BA
,
Memory
Block
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
Access Code (1- or 2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BS
,
Station Number Assignment
4-10
+BTM
,
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
,
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
,
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BTM
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-41
+BTT
Station to Call Appearance Block
Assignment
4-43
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
Page-Line
Key
001
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 12
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Callback Request
C-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Callback Request can be set at any Multiline Terminal to notify the user that another station wants a call
returned. The Multiline Terminal user can receive a maximum of three Callback Requests from other
station users. Non-display Multiline Terminal users receive a Feature LED indication when a Callback
Request is set. Single Line Telephone users can set but not receive a Callback Request.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set from a station while placing an internal call and receiving Call Waiting or No Answer:
L
1.
Dial Access Code
2.
Hang up.
(set as default).
To cancel from the originating station:
Dial the destination where the Callback Request is set.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel from an Attendant Position (system-wide):
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Press
A
HH
A
1.
.
.
.
At default, this ability is denied.
To Callback from a Multiline Terminal with LCD:
E
L
1.
Press
2.
Dial the number to be called back, or press
3.
Lift the handset to talk when the party answers.
4.
Hang up.
s or lift the handset.
.
To Callback from a Multiline Terminal without LCD:
E
L
or lift the handset.
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Lift the handset to talk.
4.
Hang up.
(set as default).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Multiline Terminals without display receive an indication of the Callback Request by a Feature LED
that flashes 0.25 seconds On, 0.25 seconds Off.
When a Multiline Terminal receives two or more Callback Requests, they are called back in the
order they were received. Multiline Terminal users can go off-hook and dial # (as set in default) to
call the station user that left a Callback Request.
A maximum of three Callback Requests can be set at one Multiline Terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 14
Callback Request
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Callback Requests are protected by system memory battery backup.
H
When a Callback Request is set, the caller receives a set tone.
H
H
H
A caller does not receive a set tone when attempting to leave a Callback Request at a station with
three Callback Requests set.
Callback Requests that are set in the system can be canceled (system-wide) only at Attendant
Positions.
Individual Callback Requests are canceled when:
J
J
J
H
Callback recipient places internal call to Callback originator.
Callback originator places internal call to Callback recipient.
Callback recipient enters Feature, 99, Feature.
A Callback Request can be set to a Single Line Telephone (SLT), but there is no indication at the
SLT. The SLT user can still go Off-hook and dial # to complete the callback.
Restrictions:
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only two Callback Requests can be set at a
Multiline Terminal.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BA
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-24
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
005
2-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 16
Callback Request
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
C-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Analog Caller ID can display the calling party name and telephone number or name on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal for incoming calls. For normal incoming calls (Day or Night Ring Assignment), up to
16 Multiline Display Terminals can display the Caller ID for the incoming analog trunk. For Direct Inward
Termination (DIT) calls, the Caller ID information is displayed at the terminating station. After the CO
call is answered, the Caller ID information follows when the call is transferred.
When the MIFM-U( ) ETU with KMM(1.0)U is installed, the Caller ID information can be displayed for the
last 50 incoming calls by using the Directory key or a Caller ID Scroll key when assigned.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 1700:
With R1700 or higher, the following Memory Blocks are not needed for assigning the Caller ID or ANI
features and have been removed:
H
1-1-78 Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode
H
3-44
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
H
4-49
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
Prior to this release, 16 stations could display Caller ID or ANI information during an incoming day or
night ring assigned call.
Release 2000:
With R2000 or higher, incoming calls to SIE keys display Caller ID on a Multiline Terminal.
With R2000 or higher all stations can display Caller ID or ANI information during incoming calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, caller ID Scrolling is enhanced as follows:
H
H
H
A Class of Service option, Save Caller ID Missed Calls, has been added. When allowed, all
incoming calls with Caller ID are saved in the Caller ID Scroll Log. When denied, only calls
answered by the station or incoming calls never answered are saved (Same as allowed by
software prior to this enhancement).
During Caller ID Scrolling, answered incoming calls display A. Incoming unanswered (missed)
calls display M.
In a squared environment, when Station A, B, and C are ringing and Station A answers the call,
Station A shows the Caller ID Scrolling as to reactivate17Answered, and Stations B and C show
the same number as missed.
The following firmware versions are required:
ETU
Minimum Firmware Version
MIFM-U10
V6.10
MIFM-U20
V6.10
SPE(M)-U10
V6.10
With R3000 or higher, Caller ID to Single Line Telephones is supported. A Class of Service option,
Send Caller ID Information to Single Line Telephones, was added.
Version 1.54 is required for SLIB(4)-U10/SLIE(4)-U10 ETU to support Caller ID for Single Line
Telephones.
MIFM-U( ) Firmware V5.00:
MIFM-U( ) firmware V5.00 provides 50 Caller ID scroll buffers. Lower level software provided only 10
Caller ID scroll buffers.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD
Required Components:
COIB(4)-U( ) ETU (in COID mode), COIB(8)-U( ) ETU (in COID mode)
MIFM-U10 ETU with KMM(1.00)U installed for Caller ID Scrolling and Call Return
- OR MIFM-U20 ETU with KMM-U20 Upgrade Chip installed for Caller ID Scrolling and Call Return
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 18
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To display a stored Caller ID using the Scroll Key:
Press the Scroll key to display the most recent saved ID. Repeatedly press the Scroll key to display
additional Caller ID names/numbers. (A maximum of 50 Caller ID names/numbers can be displayed.)
The Scroll key is programmed using Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection for the Telephone Mode). Refer
to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for instructions.
To return a call to the number displayed on the LCD using the Scroll Key:
Press the Scroll Key until the desired number to be called back is displayed. While the number is
displayed, go off hook. The system automatically accesses an outside line and dials the displayed
number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
H
H
H
H
H
COID( )-U( ) ETUs or COIB( )-U( ) ETUs (in COID mode) can be installed in any Interface Slot
(1~8) of any cabinet (1~3).
The DIR key provided with the Electra Elite IPK Terminals performs the same function as the Caller
ID Scroll Key.
When the CO line key is flashing red (Incoming CO call), the user can press Feature + LK to
display Caller ID even when Caller ID is not normally displayed.
When the telephone company sends the caller name and number, the name or the number (or
both) is displayed on the LCD while the Multiline Terminal is ringing. When the telephone company
sends the caller number only, it is displayed on the top line of the LCD while the Multiline Terminal
is ringing.
With R1600 or lower, a maximum of 15 Multiline Terminals can be assigned to display Caller ID
for normal incoming CO calls system-wide. A sixteenth Multiline Terminal can be assigned to
display Caller ID for normal incoming CO calls per CO line. These 16 Multiline Terminals constitute
a Caller ID group. An answered call can be transferred to any station in the system, and Caller ID
is displayed at that station.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
With R3000 or higher, Caller ID to Single Line Telephones is supported only for the incoming
outside trunk calls (Loop Start, T1, ANI, or ISDN BRI and PRI).
Press the green line key where the CO call resides during a CO call, to verify the Caller ID. When
the telephone company provides both Name and Number (depending on the system assignment)
they are displayed for five seconds, followed by the remaining information.
When the station is assigned to receive DIT/ANA calls, Caller ID is displayed only on the Multiline
Terminal where DIT/ANA is assigned to ring. The Caller ID Indication follows the station Call
Forward setting or Station Hunting feature.
H
When a Multiline Terminal is busy, the Caller ID is displayed for an incoming call.
H
When a Multiline Terminal is set for Do Not Disturb, the Caller ID is displayed for incoming calls.
H
H
When a Multiline Terminal receives multiple incoming calls, the first Caller ID is displayed. After the
first call is answered, the second Caller ID is displayed.
The Caller ID Indication disappears:
J
J
J
H
H
When an incoming call is answered.
When an internal or ring transfer call is received.
When Feature Access, DSS, Redial, or Feature key is pressed.
The Caller ID number is printed on the SMDR printout for incoming calls that are answered at
stations that can display Caller ID data. The name is not printed.
When a station is engaged in a voice over, whisper page, or broker’s call, the station cannot
display Caller ID until the process ends.
H
When an incoming call is answered before Caller ID is sent, the Caller ID is not displayed.
H
The following incoming calls display Caller ID on a Multiline terminal:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Ordinary CO Calls
DIT/ANA calls
VRS/AA calls
Ring Transfer calls
CAR calls
SIE calls (R2000 or higher)
ACD/UCD calls
Calls with delayed ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 20
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
When a Multiline Terminal displays Caller ID with off hook ringing and receives another incoming
CO call, the Caller ID changes to the second caller.
When trunk name indication is assigned, the data in Memory Block 3-00 (Trunk Name/Number
Assignment) is displayed on the Multiline Terminal assigned for Caller ID indication even when a
terminal receives a caller name and number.
Restrictions:
H
H
SIE incoming calls do not support Caller ID Indication even when the Multiline Terminal is ringing
(R1700 or lower only).
Five users can access the Scroll function at the same time. IN USE is displayed on the Multiline
terminal of another user that tries to access it.
H
A maximum of 13 characters can be displayed on the LCD for Caller ID Name/Number.
H
Caller ID Name to Single Line Telephone is NOT supported for ISDN (BRT/PRT) Trunks.
H
H
H
Caller ID scrolling and automatic dial out features require installation of the MIFM-U( ) ETU with
KMM(1.0)U installed.
When a call transferred to a station goes unanswered and is transferred again, Caller ID
information is not stored in the scrolling bin at that station.
When CAR/SIE keys are assigned on the Multiline Terminal, and a DIT/ANA or VRS/Automated
Attendant transferred call is received at the CAR/SIE, the following assignments are required:
J
J
J
H
Use Memory Block 1-1-78 (Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode) to assign up to
15 Multiline Terminals to display ANI/Caller ID indication for normal incoming CO/PBX calls
or CO/PBX calls ringing a Call Arrival (CAR) key (R1600 or lower only).
Use Memory Block 4-49 (Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment) to assign one Multiline
Terminal per CAR key to display ANI/Caller ID indication for incoming CO/PBX calls ringing a
Call Arrival (CAR) key (R1600 or lower only).
Use Memory Block 4-37 [Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] or Memory Block
4-38 [Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] to assign Day or Night Mode.
Internal calls, transferred calls, and K-CCIS calls do not support Caller ID on Single Line
Telephones.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
General:
H
H
H
H
When the Scroll key is used, a maximum of 50 Caller IDs can be stored in System Memory. When
50 Caller IDs are stored and an additional call is answered, the first Caller ID is erased from
System Memory. Press the Scroll key to display the stored Caller IDs. When you go Off-hook, the
displayed Caller ID is automatically dialed. The LCR or ARS feature is required for the Automatic
Dial Out option.
ANI/Caller ID scrolling times out and the LCD returns to idle when the Scroll key is not pressed
within five seconds.
When an outgoing call is made using the Scroll function, the call follows Code Restriction, Digit
Restriction, and Least Cost Routing (LCR) or Automatic Route Selection (ARS). The LCR or ARS
feature is required for the Scroll function to operate properly.
Caller ID data is not stored when the following conditions apply:
J
J
J
J
H
COIN
Caller ID is sent from a pay phone.
Out of Area
Data is sent from a CO that cannot process Caller ID data.
Private
Calling party disables Caller ID information for the called party.
Data Error
The data stream includes an error.
When Out of Area or Private characters are received, the MIFM-U( ) ETU does not store them in
the Scroll Key buffer.
Restrictions:
H
With R2000/R2500 or lower, for the ANI/Caller ID information to be saved in a station Caller ID
Scroll log, one of the following conditions must occur:
J
J
H
H
The station must answer the ringing call while ANI/Caller ID is displayed.
The station receives a ringing call with ANI/Caller ID display, and no system-wide station,
including voice mail, answers the call.
With R3000/R3500 or higher, new enhancements allow calls to be saved when not answered.
When an inbound trunk call is answered either by Voice Mail or a person and transferred to a
second station or CAR key, and the call is abandoned during the ringing of the second station, the
Caller ID Missed Call indication is NOT presented.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 22
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
A-26
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
C-19
Class of Service
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
I-9
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
I-10
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
L-3
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
S-7
Single Line Telephone Access
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
T-1
T1 Connection
U-5
Universal Slots
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (ANI/Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
Mode (R1600 or lower)
1-1-78
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
(R1600 or lower)
3-44
+AI
Caller Name Indication Selection
3-53
+BTS
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4,
5-7, 6-5,
6-8, 7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+AI
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
+AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
(R1600 or lower)
4-49
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 24
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
Caller ID Call Return
C-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Caller ID Call Return feature allows the voice mail system to use Caller ID information captured with
the message to call and connect the person that left the message with the voice mail user that is
checking messages. After the call is ended by either party, the voice mail user returns to checking
messages.
FMS Voice Mail System Software Q revision 05931 database version 6.68 or higher is required.
VMS Voice Mail System Software Q revision 00931 database version 6.68 or higher is required.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU or FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Caller ID Information Operation on Non-Display Telephone or Display Telephone without Softkeys:
1.
Dial the EliteMail extension.
2.
After message playback, EliteMail prompts to hear Caller ID number only.
K
- OR -
Dial
during message to stop playback, save the current message as an old message, and
hear Caller ID number only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
When Caller ID information is available after the Caller ID number is played, the system prompts
the mailbox user with an option to return the call.
A
- OR -
LK
LKJ
During message playback dial
for yes.
4.
J
To repeat the Caller ID number during playback, dial
dial
.
To end a Return Call, dial
L
, and when the voice mail prompts to return the call dial
. To skip to the end of the Caller ID number
to return to the mailbox and disconnect the outside call.
Caller ID Information Operation on Display Telephone with Softkeys:
1.
Dial the EliteMail extension.
2.
During message playback, EliteMail displays Caller ID name or number only depending on system
programming. To change display between Name and Number, press V(MORE) Softkey twice
then press V(CID) Softkey.
K
- OR -
K
L
J
Dial
during message to stop playback, save the current message as an old message, and
hear Caller ID number only.
When
is dialed, you can dial
the number.
to repeat the Caller ID number or dial
to skip to the end of
3.
During playback, using a mailbox that allows the option, press the V(MORE) Softkey three times
then press the V(CALL) Softkey to return the call.
4.
To end a Return Call, press the V(END) Softkey to return to the mailbox and disconnect the
outside call.
Caller ID Information Operation from Telephone Outside the System:
I
1.
Call the number that takes you to the main greeting of the EliteMail system.
2.
While main greeting is playing, dial
security code if prompted.
3.
Follow prompts to listen to new, old, or archived voice mail messages.
and your extension to take you to the mailbox. Enter
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 26
Caller ID Call Return
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
When Caller ID information is available, EliteMail prompts to hear Caller ID number only after
message playback.
K
- OR -
Dial
during message to stop playback, save the current message as an old message, and
hear Caller ID number only.
5.
When Caller ID information is available, the system prompts the mailbox user with an option to
return the call after the Caller ID number is played.
- OR -
LK
LKJ
During message playback dial
for yes.
6.
J
To repeat the Caller ID number during playback, dial
dial
.
To end a Return Call, dial
L
, and when voice mail prompts to return the call dial
A
. To skip to the end of the Caller ID number
to return to the mailbox and disconnect the outside call.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
A caller using a telephone without Softkeys, calling from outside the system, or from a remote
system is prompted to hear Caller ID information and return a call.
H
Return Call is available for subscriber messages and public messages.
H
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber during and after message playback.
H
Return Call is available for new and old messages.
H
H
H
H
H
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber using Softkeys in Softkey mode or using DTMF in voice
conversation Mode.
One minute before disconnecting the original caller, voice mail plays a warning prompt and
immediately before disconnecting plays a prompt to indicate that it is returning to the subscriber
mailbox.
When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey eqipped telephone, and Caller ID
information is unavailable, the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank. When
Caller ID is disabled on the system, voice mail displays the message count.
From the subscriber options Softkey menu, a subscriber can access a Softkey menu that allows
selection of name or number to be displayed on the LCD during message playback. The default is
name. Voice mail uses this setting to determine the initial display on the LCD during playback.
Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post-message playback menu is still
displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
During Return Call, the voice mail port is in conference with the box owner and messages.
H
Internal station terminals using Call Return have the Conf key LED On.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
VMS revision Q008XX v 6.68 and FMS revision Q058XX v 6.68 or higher are also required.
When Centralized Voice Mail is used, the remote voice mail user gets only Caller ID number when
voice mail answers incoming CO calls and performs an Await-Answer transfer to the remote user.
A Call that forwards to voice mail from the remote system does not have Caller ID information.
Live Record is not available when using Return Call.
A Telephone used as an ACD Plus agent or supervisor station should not have mailboxes that
support Softkeys. Softkeys can be disabled per mailbox in Access Codes Options on Easymade
Application Screen, Page 5 of 6. Place * in front of Hands Free Play (Item N) to disable Softkeys
for a particular station.
The Return Call feature is enabled per mailbox in Expanded Access Codes and can be enabled for
internal numbers only or for both internal and external numbers.
To use this feature for long distance calls, LCR or ARS must be programmed for the voice mail
ports set to dial out. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for detailed programming
instructions.
The enhanced Caller ID is enabled by setting CID=0,0 on the Integration Options line of Easymade
Switch Setup Screen, Page 1. When Caller ID is already enabled on a system that is updated, the
CID=X,Y setting must be changed to CID=0,0. Only one CID setting is allowed on this line.
The Return Call parameter must be entered on the Integration Options line of Easymade Switch
Setup Screen, Page 1 to enable this voice mail feature. Default is RCV=6,10 where 6 is the
number of rings voice mail tries when returning a call, and 10 is the number of minutes a retuned
call can last.
A trunk access code must be entered on Easymade Switch Setup Screen, Page 1, line 9 so the
Return Call feature can access a trunk to return the call. When this is not entered, the mailbox
user is not prompted to return the call even when Caller ID information is available.
The Rings to answer field on Easymade Applications Screen, Page 2, line 15 must be set to 2 or
greater because Caller ID information is provided from Telco between the first and second ring.
Use Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection] Page 4, LK3 to allow (LED
On) or Deny (default: LED Off) capture of Caller ID information on voice mail ports.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 28
Caller ID Call Return
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
L-4
Live Monitoring
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 30
Caller ID Call Return
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Forward – All Call forwards all calls directed to one station, to another station, Voice Mail system, or
to the Attendant. This permits more efficient call processing by allowing a station to be left unattended
and have calls answered at another location. Call Forward – All Call can be set or canceled at the
destination station. Attendant Positions can be used to cancel Call Forward – All Call system-wide.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Call Forward settings to
be assigned and saved as part of the database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Call Forward – All Call at a forwarding station:
1.
Press the Call Forward – All Call ON/OFF key.
2.
Dial the station number or press
- OR -
A
E
.
FK
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Dial the forward destination.
4.
Press
A
.
To set Call Forward – All Call using Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal:
E
DA
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the station number or hunt group master number where incoming calls are to be forwarded.
4.
Wait for the confirmation tone, and restore handset or press
(set as default).
E
.
To verify (Multiline Terminals only):
A winking
A
LED indicates the station is in Call Forward – All Call mode.
- OR The Feature Access or single On/Off key LED (when equipped) remains on while this setting is assigned
on the key.
To cancel (Multiline Terminal only):
1.
Press Call Forward – All Call On/Off key.
2.
Press
E
.
To cancel (Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal):
E
DB
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Wait for confirmation tone, and restore the handset or press
(set as default).
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 32
Call Forward – All Call
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set at a destination station (Attendant Positions only):
E
DG
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the station number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
4.
Wait for confirmation tone, and restore the handset or press
(set as default).
E
.
To cancel at a destination station (Attendant Positions only):
E
DH
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the station number where forwarding is to be canceled.
4.
Wait for the confirmation tone, and restore the handset or press
.
(set as default).
E
.
To cancel Call Forward – All Call, Busy/No Answer, and Do Not Disturb system-wide (Attendant
Positions only):
A
.
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
.
FH
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
When a station with Call Forward assigned receives a second call, and Call Forward is set to a
busy station, the second incoming call does not follow the forwarding assignment until the
forwarding station becomes idle.
A line key defined as Call Forward – All Call set/cancel lights when Call Forward – All Call is set.
The Feature key LED flashes when Call Forward – All Call is set.
H
All internal and transferred calls to the station follow the Call Forward – All Call setting.
H
Tie/DID and DIT/ANA line calls follow Call Forward – All Call setting.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
A station can be the destination of any number of Call Forward – All Call settings.
When the station user sets this feature, the associated red LED winks on any DSS/BLF key
assigned for that station.
H
The destination station is the only station that can call a station with Call Forward – All Call set.
H
Call Forward – All Call has higher priority than any combination of Call Forward – Busy/No Answer.
H
Secondary Incoming Extensions cannot be set for Call Forward – All Call.
H
H
When Call Forward – All Call is set, an indication is not displayed in the LCD of the display Multiline
Terminal where Call Forward – All Call was set.
When a station is logged in as an ACD agent and Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer is set, any
non-ACD call transferred or ringing to that station follows the Call Forward setting.
Restrictions:
H
H
At default, system-wide cancel of Call Forward – All Call from Attendant Positions is denied.
Ring Transfer, Camp-On, and Tone Override cannot be set to a station that has Call Forward – All
Call set.
H
DND and Call Forward – All Call cannot be set at a station at the same time.
H
Setting, canceling or Call Forwarding is allowed only when logged out of ACD.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-9
Call Forward – Centrex
C-10
Call Forward – Display
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise
C-12
Call Forward – Split
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
P-1
PC Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 34
Call Forward – All Call
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦¦
¦¦
¦¦
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BA
+BTS
+BTS
,
Memory
Block
,
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine
Key
030, 032,
033, 034,
142, 143
2-2, 2-3
1-1, 5-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 36
Call Forward – All Call
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer forwards calls directed to one station, to another station, Voice Mail
system, or to the Attendant Position for Busy or Ring No Answer. This permits more efficient call
processing by allowing calls to be routed to another station or to the Attendant Position.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Call Forward settings to
be assigned and saved as part of the database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Press Call Forward – Busy/No Answer ON/OFF key.
2.
Dial the station number or press
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer:
1.
Press Call Forward – Busy/No Answer On/Off key.
2.
Wait for confirmation tone, and restore handset or press
E
.
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at any telephone:
DC
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the station number forwarding is to be set for.
4.
Go on-hook.
.
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at any telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Go on-hook.
DD
.
To set at a destination station (Attendant Positions only):
E
DE
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the station number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
4.
Wait for confirmation tone, and restore the handset or press
(default).
E
.
To cancel at a destination station (Attendant Positions only):
E
DF
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial Access Code
.
(default).
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 38
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Dial the station number where forwarding is to be canceled.
4.
Wait for the confirmation tone, and restore the handset or press
E
.
To cancel Call Forward – All Call, Busy/No Answer, and Do Not Disturb system-wide at the Attendant
Position only:
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
.
.
FH
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When a station with Call Forward assigned receives a second call, and Call Forward is set to a
busy station, the second incoming call does not follow the forwarding assignment until the
forwarding station goes idle.
H
All internal and transferred calls to the station follow the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer setting.
H
Tie/DID and DIT/ANA line calls follow the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer settings.
H
A station can be the destination of any number of Call Forward – Busy/No Answer settings.
H
Call Forward – All Call has higher priority than Call Forward – Busy/No Answer.
H
H
H
When Call Forward – Busy/No Answer is set, camped-on calls and DIT/ANA calls forward after the
No Answer Time expires.
Call Alert Notification has a significant affect on Call Forward – Busy/No Answer.
When a logged in station is an ACD agent and Call Forward – Busy/No Answer is set, any
non-ACD call transferred or ringing to that station follows the Call Forward setting.
Restrictions:
H
Only one Call Forward – Busy/No Answer forwarding destination can be set from one station at a
time.
H
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer forwards to another station only once (cannot chain call).
H
Secondary Incoming Extensions cannot be set for Call Forward – Busy/No Answer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Call Forwarding can be set or canceled only while logged out of ACD.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-9
Call Forward – Centrex
C-10
Call Forward – Display
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise
C-12
Call Forward – Split
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
P-1
PC Programming
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
CO/PBX Busy Forward Station Assignment
4-13
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BA
+BM
+BTS
,
+BTT
+BTS
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
020~025,
140, 141
2-2, 2-3
2-5, 5-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 40
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Call Forward – Centrex
C-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Call Forward Split for Centrex feature allows a station to forward an incoming Centrex CO call to an
outside location using the same Centrex CO line to free the line for additional use.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Call Forward settings to
be assigned and saved as part of the database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations
Required Components:
Centrex/PBX Trunks
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split for Centrex:
E
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split Set Access Code (Default not assigned).
3.
Press
4.
Dial the destination number.
5.
Go on-hook or press
B
.
for Centrex.
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split for Centrex:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split Cancel Access Code (Default not assigned).
3.
Press
4.
Go on-hook or press
B
for Centrex.
E
.
.
To set Call Forward – All Split for Centrex:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – All Split Set Access Code (Default not assigned).
3.
Press
4.
Dial the destination number.
5.
Go on-hook or press
B
.
for Centrex.
E
.
To cancel Call Forward – All Split for Centrex:
E
.
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – All Split Cancel Access Code (Default not assigned).
3.
Press
4.
Go on-hook or press
B
for Centrex.
E
.
To set Call Forward – All Split for Centrex from destination for CAR key:
E
1.
Lift the hand8set or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – All Split Set Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Press
4.
Dial the CAR key extension number.
5.
Dial the Destination number.
6.
Go on-hook or press
B
.
for Centrex.
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 42
Call Forward – Centrex
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Call Forward – All Split for Centrex from destination for CAR key:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – All Split Cancel Access Code (Default not assigned).
3.
Press
4.
Dial the CAR key extension number.
5.
Go on-hook or press
B
.
for Centrex.
E
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
Even when a user is logged on as an ACD agent, an individual call that does not come through the
Pilot Number is forwarded.
Call Forward – Centrex supports the following:
J
J
J
J
J
J
Call Forward – Busy
Call Forward – No Answer
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Call Forward – All for CAR
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer for CAR
Call Forward – Centrex calls transferred from another station are forwarded when the transferred
Trunk is assigned as Centrex in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).
When a Centrex Trunk is DIT to a station with Call Forward – Centrex set with an incorrect
registered number, the Centrex trunk recalls to the same number until the caller hangs up.
The following incoming calls follow Call Forward – Centrex when the incoming trunk is a Centrex
trunk:
J
J
J
J
H
Call Forward – All
DIT/ANA
Station Transfer
Automated Attendant Transfer
DISA Calls
When Call Forward – Centrex is set and all trunks are changed from PBX/CTX to CO, Call Forward
is cleared from memory.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When a station is logged in as an ACD agent and Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer is set, any
non-ACD call transferred or ringing to that station follows the Call Forward setting.
Restrictions:
H
H
Memory Block 3-91 must have at least one trunk assigned as PBX (or CTX) or CTX (Assume 9).
When at least one trunk is not assigned as PBX/CTX, the CTX/PBX=2 option is not displayed.
Call Forward – Centrex is not supported for Call Forward – All Call by the Feature + 60 operation
from destination.
H
Call Forward – Centrex is not supported for Single On/Off toggle key operation.
H
A maximum of 16 digits can be stored as the destination outside number.
H
Least Cost Routing cannot route the Call Forward destination number.
H
H
When a Multiline Terminal with Call Forward – Centrex set has an unplugged extension, the call is
not forwarded.
Call Forwarding can be set or canceled only when an agent is logged out of ACD.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-10
Call Forward – Display
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise
C-12
Call Forward – Split
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
P-1
PC Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 44
Call Forward – Centrex
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+BCT
+BA
Memory
Block
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
+BTM
Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay Selection
4-42
+BM
Call Forward- No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
154~159
2-2, 2-3
1-1,2-5,
5-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 46
Call Forward – Centrex
Call Forward – Display
C-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
When a call is forwarded from one Multiline Terminal to another, the forwarding indication and forward
station number are shown on the Multiline Terminal display.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Call Forward settings to
be assigned and saved as part of the database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
Multiline Terminals with display. Refer to C-7 Call Forward – All Call and C-8 Call Forward – Busy/No
Answer features.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
DIT, ANA, DID, Tie, Automated Attendant transfer, and SCD calls can support Call
Forward – Display.
This feature only supports forwarded calls to a primary station number. When the destination is a
CAR key, the forwarding display information is not shown.
Internal calls do not show forwarding display.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-9
Call Forward – Centrex
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise
C-12
Call Forward – Split
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
P-1
PC Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 48
Call Forward – Display
Call Forward – Off-Premise
C-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Forward – Off-Premise allows a station to forward an internal or outside call to an off-premise
destination, using various trunk types in the Electra Elite IPK system.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Call Forward settings to
be assigned and saved as part of the database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Call Forward – All Call at a forwarding station (Multiline Terminal only):
A
FK
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number where incoming calls are to be forwarded.
4.
Press
A
in the idle mode.
(fixed Access Code).
.
- OR -
Press the Call Forward – All Call ON/OFF key.
5.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
6.
Press
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set Call Forward – All Call at a Single Line Telephone or a Multiline Terminal:
E
DA
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number where incoming calls are to be forwarded.
4.
Restore the handset or press
(default).
E
.
To verify Call Forward – All Call (Multiline Terminals only):
A winking
A
LED indicates the station is in Forward – All Call mode.
- OR The Feature Access or One-Touch key LED (when equipped) remains on while this setting is assigned
on the key.
To cancel Call Forward – All Call (Multiline Terminal only):
Press Call Forward – All Call ON/OFF key or
A
FI A
.
To cancel Call Forward – All Call at a Single Line Telephone or a Multiline Terminal:
E
DB
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Receive confirmation tone, and restore the handset or press
(default).
E
.
To cancel Forward – All Call, Busy/No Answer, and Do Not Disturb system-wide (Attendant Positions
only):
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
.
.
FH
(fixed Access Code).
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 50
Call Forward – Off-Premise
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
E
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Access Code
3.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number where incoming calls are to be forwarded.
4.
Go on-hook or press
E
.
DC
1.
(default).
.
- OR -
1.
Press the Call Forward Busy – /No Answer ON/OFF key.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
3.
Press
E
.
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer:
1.
Press Call Forward – Busy/No Answer ON/OFF key.
2.
Wait for confirmation tone, and restore handset or press
E
.
To set Call Forward – Off-Premise for Call Arrival (CAR) key:
E
.
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Set Access Code for All or busy No Answer from destination.
3.
Dial CAR key extension.
4.
Dial Trunk Access Code and the telephone number where incoming calls are to be forwarded.
5.
Go on-hook or press
E
.
To cancel Call Forward – Off-Premise for Call Arrival (CAR) key:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial cancel Access Code for All or Busy No Answer from destination.
3.
Dial CAR key extension.
4.
Go on-hook or press
E
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
Features like Code Restriction, or forced account codes that are enabled for the Call
Forward – Off-Premise extension apply to any call that follows Call forward – Off-Premise.
The Feature key LED flashes red when Call Forward – Off-Premise (All Calls) is set from a
Multiline Terminal.
The ACD/UCD overflow destination station can be set to Call Forward – Off-Premise.
The Access Codes for Call Forward set and cancel can be programmed on Feature Access keys or
One-Touch keys. Press the key during the conversation with an internal or outside party to place
the call on hold and dial the Access Code.
When a Call Forward ON/OFF key (All Call or Busy/No Answer) is programmed on the line key,
set/cancel toggles. The Trunk Access Code and destination outside number must be dialed after
pressing this key when setting Call Forward – Off-Premise.
H
Incoming calls from a voice mail system follow the Call Forward – Off-Premise setting.
H
The Call Arrival (CAR) key number can be set for Call Forward – Off-Premise.
H
The Speed Dial number cannot be set as the destination forward number.
H
H
When the system is installed in the Key Function (KF) mode, a Specified Line Seizure Access
Code must be used when setting Call Forward – Off-Premise.
The following incoming calls can be forwarded:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
CO/PBX Transfer Call
Ordinary Incoming Internal Call
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Tie Line (TIE)
Automated Attendant (AA)
When the outside party, where the call is forwarded, is busy or does not answer, the call is
terminated when the calling party hangs up.
When a station is logged in as an ACD agent and Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer is set, any
non-ACD call transferred or ringing to that station follows the Call Forward setting.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 52
Call Forward – Off-Premise
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
When the station is set for Call Forward – All Call and an outgoing outside line is unavailable, the
calling party hears a busy tone.
When FT1/Tie/DID call is forwarded from an outside line to another outside line, pad control is
applied according to the System Data assigned on Memory Block 3-31 (Trunk External Transmit
Pad Selection) and Memory Block 3-32 (Trunk External Receive Pad Selection).
After a call is forwarded to an outside line, the call is disconnected when the Tandem Transfer
Automatic Disconnect Time expires.
An alert tone is provided to both the calling party and to the destination outside party one minute
before the Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time runs out.
An outgoing call is charged to the internal calling party even when the destination outside party
does not answer or is busy when printed using Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).
The destination number is output through SMDR as the call record for the station setting Call
Forward – Off-Premise. When incoming outside calls are received, 999 is printed on the report.
When incoming internal calls are received, the station number of the calling party is printed on the
report.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A maximum of 24 digits, including pauses can be stored as the destination outside number. (The
Trunk Access Code is not counted as part of the 24-digit number.)
When Call Forward – All Call is set and an outgoing outside line is not available, the Automated
Attendant call is not forwarded and a busy tone is sent to the calling party or the Automated
Attendant switches to normal Day or Night ringing.
When Call Forward – Busy/No Answer is set, the caller hears ringback tone until a trunk is
available. When an outside line is unavailable, DIT/ANA calls are not forwarded, these calls
remain at the station setting the Call Forward – Off-Premise until a line is available.
Even when Call Forward – Off-Premise is set, Recall, Trunk Queuing, and Automatic Callback calls
directed to the extension line are not forwarded.
The Call Forward destination number cannot be routed by Least Cost Routing.
When a Multiline Terminal in Call Forward – All Call (internal) is unplugged, it follows the all call
forwarding.
When a Multiline Terminal in Call Forward – Off-Premise is unplugged, the call is not forwarded off
premise.
Call Forwarding can be set or canceled only when logged out of ACD.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-9
Call Forward – Centrex
C-10
Call Forward – Display
C-12
Call Forward – Split
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
P-1
PC Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 54
Call Forward – Off-Premise
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BA
,
Memory
Block
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
+BCT
Polarity Reversal Selection
3-90
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+AT
Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time
Selection
1-4-00
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
020~ 025
033, 034,
140~143
2-2, 2-3
5-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 56
Call Forward – Off-Premise
Call Forward – Split
C-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Call Forward – Split feature allows a station to forward internal or external calls to different locations,
such as Voice Mail, Off Site, Attendant position or another station. Split forwarding is allowed for All Call,
Busy, or Ring/No Answer to provide more efficient call processing.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Call Forward settings to
be assigned and saved as part of the database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split:
E
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split Set Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial
4.
Dial the destination number.
5.
Press
A
for Internal or
E
K
.
for External.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split:
E
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split Cancel Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial
4.
Press
AE
for Internal or
.
K
.
for External.
To set Call Forward – All Split:
E
.
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – All Split Set Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial
4.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and the telephone number for the destination number.
5.
Press
A
for Internal or
E
K
for External.
.
To cancel Call Forward – All Split:
E
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Call Forward – All Split Cancel Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial
4.
Press
AE
for Internal or
.
K
.
for External.
To set Call Forward – All or Busy/No Answer Split from destination CAR key:
E
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Set Access Code for All or Busy/No Answer Split from destination (default not assigned).
3.
Dial
4.
Dial CAR key or Station Number to be forwarded.
5.
Dial the Trunk Access Code and the telephone number for the destination number.
6.
Go on-hook or press
A
for Internal or
K
.
for External.
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 58
Call Forward – Split
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Call Forward – All or Busy/No Answer Split from destination CAR key:
E
1.
Lift handset or press
2.
Dial the Cancel Access Code for All or Busy/No Answer from destination (default not assigned).
3.
Dial
4.
Dial CAR key or Station Number to be Forwarded.
5.
Go on-hook or press
A
for Internal or
K
.
for External.
E
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Even when a user logs on as an ACD agent, an individual call not through the Pilot Number is Call
Forwarded.
When a call is transferred to an extension with Call Forward – Split set, the Split feature follows the
Internal destination when the Transfer, Hold, or Conf key is pressed.
Call Forward – Split supports the following:
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
Call Forward – All Call
Call Forward – Busy
Call Forward – No Answer
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer for CAR
Call Forward – Off-Premise can be set for all of the above.
When setting Call Forward, both Internal and External calls have the same forwarding destination
when any other forwarding is used.
The Call Forward On/Off toggle key LED is on when both Internal and External calls have the same
forwarding destination.
When a station is logged in as an ACD agent and Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer is set, any
non-ACD call transferred or ringing to that station follows the Call Forward setting.
Restrictions:
H
The Split feature is not supported for Call Forward – All Call by the FEATURE + 60 operation from
destination.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The Split feature is not supported for Single On/Off toggle key operation.
H
Call Forwarding can be set or canceled only when logged out of ACD.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-9
Call Forward – Centrex
C-10
Call Forward – Display
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
P-1
PC Programming
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BA
,
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
+BTM
Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay Selection
4-42
+BM
Call Forward- No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
+BCT
Truck-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
154~159
2-2, 2-3
1-1, 2-5,
5-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 60
Call Forward – Split
C-13
Call Monitoring
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Monitoring allows selected Multiline Terminal Users to monitor another user conversation with or
without an audible alert tone to that station user. Without the audible alert (silent monitor), no indication
is provided to either the monitored station or the outside party. The alert tone is programmable.
The handset is muted during Call Monitoring. When the MIC key or Feature + 1 is pressed, the transmit
path is opened only to the Monitored station to provide a Coaching ability for the person performing the
Call Monitoring.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Stations
Required Software:
R2000 or higher
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To Call Monitor using a station number:
A
FF
E
1.
2.
Lift the handset or press
Press
.
3.
Dial
4.
Dial the station to be monitored.
5.
Press
6.
Monitor is enabled.
A
, and wait for internal dial tone.
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 61
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To Call Monitor using an outside line number:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press
3.
Dial
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the CO/PBX number to be monitored.
6.
Press
7.
Monitor is enabled.
A
FF
J
, and wait for internal dial tone.
.
.
.
A
.
To Call Monitor using an outside line key:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press
3.
Dial
4.
Press the CO/PBX line key to be monitored.
5.
Monitor is enabled.
A
FF
, and wait for internal dial tone.
.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Each Call Monitoring in progress requires an available conference circuit.
H
The following actions are ignored at the station that initiated Call Monitoring:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Answer Key
Conference Key
Dialing
Hold Key
Recall Key
Redial Key
Transfer Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 62
Call Monitoring
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When Call Monitoring is denied, DENIED is displayed on the LCD.
H
Call Monitoring is allowed even when the monitored station is in Do Not Disturb mode.
H
When the station user being monitored places the call on Hold or Exclusive Hold, the monitoring
station is disconnected and the trunk is placed on hold.
Restrictions:
H
Call Monitoring is not allowed for internal calls.
H
Call Monitoring is not allowed until the Elapsed Call Time starts.
H
Call Monitoring is not allowed for outside lines on hold.
H
Add-On Conference calls cannot be monitored.
H
Busy trunks involved in a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer cannot be monitored.
H
Call Monitoring is not permitted when all 16 Add-On Conferences are busy.
H
Live Record (using Digital Voice Mail) during Call Monitoring is not supported.
H
Call Monitoring is not allowed for private lines.
H
H
H
Call Monitoring cannot be used on outside lines for another tenant unless the lines are assigned to
both tenants.
Data Line Security prevents a station from being monitored, even when Call Monitoring is allowed
in Class of Service.
A Single Line Telephone (SLT) or PSII user cannot activate Call Monitoring; however, the
conversation on an SLT can be monitored.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-20
Automatic Call Distribution
B-3
Barge-In
E-7
Elite ACD Plus
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 63
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
+BTS
System Data Name
, Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
+BCS
Private line Assignment
1-1-29
+BTS
Call Monitoring Alert Tone Assignment
1-1-86
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTT
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-90
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
P6, LK6,
P6, LK7
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 64
Call Monitoring
Call Park – System
C-14
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Park – System allows the user to place a call in one of 10 common Call Park – System locations
from any station in the system. This feature allows the call to be removed to free that station to answer
other calls. The call can be retrieved from System Call Park at any station in the system.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or higher is required to support 40 common Call Park – System locations, and to provide the
System Call Park Keys with the ability to retrieve Caller ID information of the parked call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 65
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set at a Multiline Terminal:
G
1.
With a call in progress, press
2.
Dial the Call Park Set Access Code
3.
Dial the Call Park location number (
tone; the call is parked.
KKKICI
~
(set as default).
~
or
~
), and wait for confirmation
is used when the system is assigned for 10 Call Park Locations;
~
4.
DJ
K I KK CI
, and wait for internal dial tone (the party is placed on Hold).
is used when the system is assigned for 40 Locations.
Restore the handset.
To set at a Single Line Telephone:
DJ
K I KK CI
1.
With a call in progress, press the hookswitch, and wait for internal dial tone (the party is placed on
Exclusive Hold).
2.
Dial the Call Park Set Access Code
3.
Dial the Call Park location number (
tone; the call is parked.
KKKICI
~
~
or
~
), and wait for confirmation
is used when the system is assigned for 10 Call Park Locations;
~
4.
(set as default).
is used when the system is assigned for 40 Locations.
Restore the handset.
To retrieve a parked call at either a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone:
DL
K I KK CI
1.
Go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Call Park Retrieve Access Code
3.
Dial the Call Park location number (
KKKICI
~
or
~
) of the call to be retrieved.
is used when the system is assigned for 10 Call Park Locations;
~
4.
~
(set as default).
is used when the system is assigned for 40 Locations.
Talk with party.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 66
Call Park – System
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a System Call Park Key:
A
B
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
3.
Press Feature Access or One Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Feature Access Code (
.
L A EJ
KK CI
to indicate
~
6.
Press
A
to the Electra Elite system.
plus System Park Location
) depending on system setting data.
KI
~
or
.
To set at a Multiline Terminal using the System Call Park Key:
1.
With a call in progress:
Press the programmed System Call Park Line Key.
- OR Press
G
, and wait for internal dial tone.
Press the programmed System Call Park Line Key.
2.
Restore the handset.
The System Call Park Key is Red.
To retrieve a parked call at a Multiline Terminal using the System Call Park Key:
1.
Go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Press the Red System Call Park Line Key.
3.
Talk with party.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 67
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To view Caller ID information of a parked call at a Multiline Terminal:
1.
A System Call Park key is red.
2.
Press
3.
Press the Red System Call Park key.
A
.
Caller ID information is displayed for five seconds.
To view Caller ID information of a parked call at an Attendant Station:
1.
A System Call Park key is red.
2.
Press
3.
Press the DSS key assigned for System Call Park.
A
.
Caller ID information is displayed for five seconds.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
Any call left in Call Park more than the programmed time recalls to the station where the call was
originally parked. The Call Park location becomes idle after the recall, and the trunk line key
switches to Non-Exclusive Hold.
When attempting to set Call Park to a busy Call Park location, and a busy tone is heard, Step Call
can be used to access an idle location to park the call.
When a station other than the station originally used to park the call retrieves the call, the SMDR
records a transfer to the station where the call is retrieved.
When a Call Park is in recall mode, the call cannot be picked up using the Call Park retrieval
Access Code.
H
Call Park is set and retrieved from internal dial tone.
H
Outside calls and internal calls can be parked from any station.
H
Conference calls cannot be parked.
H
When user attempts to set Call Park and all Call Park locations are busy, a busy tone is heard and
ALL PARK BUSY is displayed on Display Multiline Terminals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 68
Call Park – System
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
When trying to set Call Park, and a busy tone is heard, Step Parking can be used to access an idle
location in the same tens group. For example, when 25 is busy, dial 6 to place the call in Location
26.
R4000 or higher allows System Call Park keys to be assigned to the Attendant Add-On Console.
System Call Park Keys provide a visual indication of the Park location when programmed on either
Feature Access Keys, One Touch Keys, or the Attendant Add-On Console.
Caller ID information can be recalled when a trunk call with Caller ID information is parked using
the System Call Park Keys. Caller ID information is displayed for five seconds.
Station Caller ID information can be recalled when an ICM Call is parked using the System Call
Park Keys. Caller ID information is displayed for five seconds.
H
Station users across K-CCIS can retrieve calls parked in a System Call Park Key location.
H
The System Call Park Key flashes green when the Call Park Recall time expires.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
A station user cannot retrieve a Parked Call that is recalling across K-CCIS.
A Systems being upgraded from R3500 or lower to R4000 or higher, has a Call Park selection of
10 Call Park Locations (LK 1). With R4000 or higher, the CPU defaults to 10 Call Park Locations
(LK 1).
When a user tries to park a current call in an occupied location using the System Call Park Keys,
the current call is placed on hold and the parked call is retrieved.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 69
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BA
+BM
+BTD
,
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
1-2-23
Attendant Add-On Console Key selection
1-6-05
Call Park Selection
1-8-51
+BM
+AC
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
047, 048
Page 3,
LK7
LK1(10)
(default)
LK2 (40)
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Ports 1 and 2 are in Class 1 by
default. All other ports are in Class 2
by default.
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 70
Call Park – System
Call Pickup Direct
C-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Pickup Direct allows station users to answer any call directed at another station. This permits
efficient handling of calls that are directed to unattended stations.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To receive an incoming call:
1.
Unattended station A receives a call.
2.
Press
3.
Dial Access Code
4.
Dial the number for station A and begin talking.
E
FG
or lift the handset at station B.
(set as default).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 71
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The Call Pickup Direct feature answers the following calls:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
Intercom Ringing
Intercom Voice
CO/PBX Incoming
DIT/ANA
VRS/Automated Attendant Transfer
DID/Tie Incoming
ACD/UCD Incoming
Camp-On Recall
Hold Recall
Off-Hook Ringing
Transfer Recall
Call Forward
Delayed Ringing
CO Ring Forward
Ring Transfer
Step Call
Call Park Recall
The Call Pickup Direct Feature cannot answer the following calls:
J
J
J
J
J
J
CAR extension number
Call Alert
A station that is in DND mode
Calls to Private Lines when Private Line is not assigned at the station doing the call pickup
Trunk Queuing Recall
Automatic Callback Ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 72
Call Pickup Direct
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When different calls are received at a station, the following Call Pickup priorities are used by the
system:
1.
Internal Calls
2.
DIT/ANA Calls
N
N
H
DID Calls
E&M Calls
3.
VRS/Automated Attendant Transfer Calls
4.
Ring Transfer Calls
5.
CO/PBX Calls
6.
Calls on SIE/CAR keys
7.
Recalls (DIT/ANA, DID, E&M calls are the same priority)
When two or more calls of the same type are received at a station, the following Call Pickup
priorities are used by the system:
J
Ordinary Incoming CO/PBX Calls
After the first call is picked up, the lowest numbered CO/PBX Trunk is picked up (i.e., when a
call is received on Trunks 01 and 02, Trunk 01 is picked up first).
J
Calls on SIE/CAR keys
First In/First Out
J
DIT, DID, VRS/Automated Attendant Transfer Calls
First In/First Out
J
Ring Transferred CO/PBX Call
After the first call is picked up, the lowest numbered CO/PBX Trunk is picked up (i.e., when a
call is received on Trunks 01 and 02, Trunk 01 is picked up first).
J
Recalls
After the first internal call is picked up, the lowest numbered CO/PBX Trunk is picked up (i.e.,
when a call is received on Trunks 01 and 02, Trunk 01 is picked up first).
H
H
CAR/SIE incoming calls are answered by dialing the station number where the CAR/SIE call is
ringing.
The Call Pickup Direct Access Code can be programmed on a Feature Access key or One-Touch
key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 73
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
SMDR prints the Call Pickup originating station number.
H
Call Pickup Direct is allowed between different tenants.
H
A station that does not have the CO/PBX line key or an available CAP key cannot pick up the
ringing outside line from the ringing station.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BA
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Memory
Block
1-1-46/47/
48
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
042
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 74
Call Pickup Direct
Call Pickup – Group
C-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A Station user can answer a call intended for another station either in the same programmed Call Pickup
group (Tenant Assignment) or another Tenant Group, depending on the Call Pickup Access Code used.
Incoming ringing outside calls to a station can be answered by any station in the same Call Pickup group
or by stations in other Tenant groups. The system can be subdivided into 48 separate Tenant groups,
each with its own outside line assignments.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature at a station:
1.
Station A is receiving a call.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Call Pickup Access Code.
E
or lift the handset at station B.
FH
FI
FJ
Default Access Codes are:
Intra-Tenant Call Pickup
Night Chime Call Pickup
Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant
4.
Use the handset to talk to the party calling station A.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 75
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
Call Pickup Groups are created by assigning Tenant Groups. A maximum of 48 Call Pickup
Groups can be assigned.
All Call Pickup Access Codes are valid for both Day Mode and Night Mode except the Night Call
Pickup Access Code. The Night Call Pickup Access Code is valid when a tenant is in Night Mode
and the Night Chime feature is programmed.
An incoming Tie/DID call is first treated as an internal call. After timeout (default: No Timeout), the
incoming call is treated as an incoming CO/PBX outside call.
When incoming calls terminate on two or more stations simultaneously, the internal call with the
lowest station number is answered first.
To Call Pickup a Secondary Incoming Extension, a user must dial the applicable Access Code to
pick up the original call.
Restrictions:
H
Voice announced internal calls cannot be picked up in the same Tenant Group.
Data Assignment:
H
Use Memory Blocks 1-1-46 and 1-1-47 [Access Code (1- or 2-Digit) Assignment] to assign the
following other Call Pickups that do not have an Access Code at default:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Call Pickup CO/PBX by Tenant (1-digit)
Call Pickup CO/PBX/Centrex by Tenant (2-digit)
Call Pickup CO/PBX for other Tenants
Internal/CO/PBX Transfer Call Pickup in Same Tenant
Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant
Call Pickup (Tie only) in Same Tenant
Call Pickup (PBX only) in Same Tenant
Call Pickup (CO only) in Same Tenant
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 76
Call Pickup – Group
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
052, 053,
057, 060,
061,
066~069
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 77
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 78
Call Pickup – Group
Cascade CPU
C-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature provides a cost effective means to increase the size of a system by connecting multiple
systems using the EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU that allows the functionality of two DTI-U( ) ETUs in one ETU.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Software:
R1700 or higher is required.
Required Components:
EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator
MIFM-U( ) ETU with KMM(1.00)U Unit, MIFM-U20 with KMM-U20 Unit, or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (for call
routing using LCR)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal Call Handling procedures apply.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 79
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The following diagram shows the function of the EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU.
System #2
KSU #1
C
P
U
I
D
T
I
C
C
H
System #2
KSU #1
System #1
KSU #2
E
X
P
C
P
U
I
D
T
I
System #1
KSU #1
C
P
U
I
C
C
H
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #1
KSU #1
C
P
U
I
C
C
H
For System 1, a DTI ETU is assigned in slot S1 of the phantom KSU 2 for System 1 and connected to a
DTI in slot S1 of KSU 1 for system 2. The EXP-U( ) in KSU 2 is connected to the CPU in System 1, KSU
1.
This configuration is replaced by the EXPT ETU assigned as a DTI in slot S1 of KSU 1 for System 2
connected to the CPU in System 1, KSU 1. One EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU replaces the EXP-U( ) ETU, two
DTI-U30 ETUs, and one KSU.
Several configuration examples using the EXPT(2)-U( ) are shown in the following diagrams and table.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 80
Cascade CPU
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Example 2
Two Systems
Three KSU’s
Example 1
Two Systems
Two KSU’s
System #2
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
System #1
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
C
C
H
System #2
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
System #1
Cabinet #2
E
X
P
System #1
Cabinet #1
Example 4
Two Systems
Four KSU’s
System #2
Cabinet #2
E
X
P
System #2
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
System #1
Cabinet #2
E
X
P
System #1
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
C
C
H
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
E
X
P
T
Example 3
Three Systems
Three KSU’s
C
C
H
System #3
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
C
C
H
System #2
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #1
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
C
P
U
I
Example 5
Three Systems
Four KSU’s
C
C
H
Example 6
Four Systems
Four KSU’s
System #3
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #4
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #2
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #3
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #1
Cabinet #2
E
X
P
C
C
H
System #2
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
E
X
P
T
C
C
H
System #1
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
System #1
Cabinet #1
C
P
U
I
C
C
H
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 81
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Number of
KSU's
Number of Number of
CPU's
EXPT(2)-U( )
ETU's
#1
2
2
1
#2
3
2
1
#3
3
3
2
#4
4
2
1
#5
4
3
2
#6
4
4
3
System
Number
1
2
Total(s)
1
2
Total(s)
1
2
3
Total(s)
1
2
Total(s)
1
2
3
Total(s)
1
2
3
4
Total(s)
Number of
Available
IF Slots
(Note 1)
7
6
13
15
6
21
7
6
6
13
15
15
30
15
6
6
27
7
6
6
6
25
Maximum
Number of
Usable
Trunks
(Note 2)
40
40
80 *
40
40
80 *
40
16
40
96 *
40
40
80 *
40
16
40
96 *
40
16
16
40
112 *
Maximum
Number of
Usable
Stations
(Note 3)
80
80
160 *
120
80
200 *
80
80
80
160 *
120
120
240 *
120
80
80
280 *
80
80
80
80
320 *
* The totals for usable Trunks and Stations are achieved by adding the available
capacity for each system. However, each system must be viewed as an individual
system, and only the features supported using K-CCIS are provided between each
system.
Note 1.
The number of available Interface (IF) slots is the number of slots left after the EXPT(2)-U( ) and
CCH(4)-U( ) ETUs are installed.
Note 2.
The calculation of maximum number of usable Trunks is based on the EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU being
assigned as a full T1 (24 Trunks).
Note 3.
The calculation of maximum number of usable Stations is restricted by power limitations of the KSU
(No single KSU can support more than 80 Multiline Terminals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 82
Cascade CPU
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
A maximum of four KSUs can be used for this feature.
H
Each system requires one channel of a CCH(4)-U( ) ETU.
H
Each system requires a CLKG-U( ) Unit.
H
The EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU is viewed as a DTI-U( ) ETU for each system.
H
H
H
H
The EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU is physically located in the second system S1 slot and is assigned as a DTI
ETU, in system programming, in a phantom second or third KSU of the first system.
The EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU is always assigned in Slot S1 regardless of the system or KSU.
A maximum of 23 voice channels can be provided between each system or fractional channels can
be used in increments of four.
The EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU allows pad control the same as the DTI ETU.
Restrictions:
H
For feature transparency, only the features supported using K-CCIS are provided between each
system. A thorough understanding of the limitations of K-CCIS is necessary before this application
is deployed.
H
The EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU must be installed in Slot S1 of the second system.
H
R1600 or lower system software does not support the EXPT(2)-U( ) ETU.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
T-1
T1 Connection
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Refer to the Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual for programming details.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 83
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 84
Cascade CPU
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines) C-18
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Centralized Voice Mail allows two or more systems that are connected by Analog or Digital T1 Lines to
share one Voice Mail (VM) system. This feature allows VM Box access from Intercom (ICM)/CO/
Automated Attendant, VM message LED indication, or Call forward – Off-Premise to a VM port. The
Electra Elite IPK system communicates Message Waiting (MW) LED, Mailbox and other information
using DTMF Signaling between two Electra Elite IPK systems.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
DTI-U( ) ETU
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the Voice Mail manuals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 85
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICES CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
The Voice Mail system controls the Voice Mail Message Indication for systems without Voice Mail
using Analog or Digital Tie Lines.
Centralized Voice Mail does not require upgrade of the Digital Voice Mail System.
When using multiple systems in a network, Internal/External Pad Selection may need adjustment
to compensate for volume loss.
Using Multiple Call forwarding to transfer calls between systems is not recommended.
Use Memory Block 1-2-04 (Call Arrival Key Block Assignment) to assign the CAR key that is used
to deliver message-waiting notification to the systems in the Closed Numbering Network. This is
common to all systems that have Centralized Voice Mail.
Use Memory Block 1-8-47 (Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message Notification Assignment) to assign
the CAR Key used to send Voice Mail Message Notification to other systems in the Closed
Numbering Network.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Each system must have a Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt number assigned, but Voice Mail
Call Back Indication is not supported in the system without Voice Mail.
The Closed Numbering Network is required to support Centralized Voice Mail. Refer to U-4
(Uniform Numbering Network) in this Manual for details.
All systems in the Closed Numbering Network using the same Voice Mail must assign the same
Access codes for Memory Block 1-1-46~48, Functions 502 and 503, to set or cancel message
indication.
Systems without Voice Mail can access DIT/ANA trunks to the Automated Attendant of the
Centralized Voice Mail using a CAR key that has Call Forward – Off-Premise to the Voice Mail
pilot.
Softkey indication is not supported in remote systems. Refer to Features Supported by Digital
Voice Mail: for a detailed list of supported features.
An analog voice mail system cannot be used to support Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie
Lines).
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 86
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Features Supported by Digital Voice Mail:
Feature Name
Main
Remote
Alphabetic Directory
Yes
Yes
Alternate Greeting
Yes
Yes
Automated Attendant
Yes
Yes
Archived Message
Yes
Yes
Audiotext
Yes
Yes
Audiotext Message
Yes
Yes
Auto Dial
Yes
Yes
Automatic Directory
Yes
Yes
Await Answer
Yes
Yes
Broadcast Distribution
Yes
Yes
Call Forward to Personal
Greeting
Yes
Yes
Call Screening
Yes
Yes
Directory Assistance
Yes
Yes
Directory Group
Yes
Yes
Directory Menu
Yes
Yes
Dispatch Distribution
Yes
Yes
Greetings
Yes
Yes
Group
Yes
Yes
Held Message
Yes
Yes
Interview Box
Yes
Yes
Introduction
Yes
Yes
Live Record
Yes
No
Live Monitoring
Yes
No
Message Box Integration
Yes
Yes
Message Delivery
Yes
No
Message Group
Yes
Yes
Message Notification
Yes
Yes
Message Waiting Lamps
Yes
Yes
Names
Yes
Yes
Night Mode
Yes
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 87
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature Name
Main
Remote
Numeric Directory Assistance
Yes
Yes
Open Group
Yes
Yes
One-Key Dialing
Yes
Yes
One-Way Message
Yes
Yes
Opening Greeting
Yes
Yes
Outside Callers
Yes
Yes
Owner
Yes
Yes
Personal ID
Yes
Yes
Personal Secretary
Yes
Yes
Private Group
Yes
Yes
Prompt
Yes
Yes
Public Message
Yes
Yes
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Yes
No
Recorded Name
Yes
Yes
Release
Yes
Yes
Screening Options
Yes
Yes
Softkey Support
Yes
No
Spelled Name
Yes
Yes
Subscriber
Yes
Yes
System Manager
Yes
Yes
Two-Way Message
Yes
Yes
Transaction Box
Yes
Yes
Voice Detect
Yes
Yes
Voice Field
Yes
Yes
Voice Name
Yes
Yes
Voice Response
Yes
Yes
Wait for Ringback
Yes
Yes
Automated Attendant can be supported on the Remote
System only when a DIT call to a CAR key is assigned
Call Forward – Off-Premise to Voice Mail in the main
system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 88
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-3
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-11
Call Forward – Off-Premise
C-12
Call Forward – Split
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
Q-1
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
T-2
Tandem Switching of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines
T-7
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
U-4
Uniform Numbering Network
V-1
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
4-35
Station Number Assignment
4-10
Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message
Notification Assignment
1-8-47
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment
4-15
Station Name Assignment
4-18
+BK
,
+BTI
+BS
,
+AV
,
+BTT
,
+BTT
,
+BTT
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 89
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BA
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-24
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt
Number
1-8-26
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance
Assignment
1-1-49
+AV
¦
,
,
+BA
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BCS
,
+BCS
,
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
1-1-50
+BCT
,
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+BCT
,
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
+BCT
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
3-92
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
+ALN
Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection
Assignment
5-01
+AV
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time Selection
1-3-08
+AV
Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection
1-3-09
+AV
Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit Time
Selection
1-3-10
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BCT
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
007
3-5,5-4
001,
401~416,
502, 503,
020~025,
030, 032,
033, 034,
140~145,
150~159
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 90
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BCT
DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time Selection
3-61
+BCT
DIT Tenant Assignment
3-62
+BCT
DIT Weekend Mode Selection
3-63
+BCT
DIT Night Mode Delay Answer Selection
3-64
+BTT
Call forward - Busy Immediately/Delay
Selection
4-42
+BM
Call forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 91
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 92
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines)
Class of Service
C-19
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Class of Service assigns and controls access to features. Various Class of Service combinations can be
programmed. Stations are then assigned according to the features they can access.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 2000:
With R2000 or higher, The following assignments are added:
H
Call Monitor (Originate)
H
Call Monitor (Receive)
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, The following assignments are added:
H
Save Caller ID Missed Calls
H
Send Caller ID Information to Single Line Telephones
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 93
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Each Class of Service provides 16 different Classes.
The following Attendant features can be allowed/denied in each class for Class of Service
assignment (Attendant) Feature Selection 1:
Features
Default Values
(Station Ports
01 & 02)
Night Mode Switching (System-Wide)
Allow
Night Mode Switching (Tenant)
Allow
System Speed Dial Programming
Allow
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Set/Reset) and
Programming of Outgoing Numbers
Allow
Automated Attendant Mode/DISA Mode (Set/Reset)
Allow
Timed Alarm (Set/Reset) for Single Line Telephones (From
Attendant
Allow
Call Forward – All Call (Set/Reset) from Destination Station
Call forward CAR extensions
Call forward BNA
Allow
System-Wide Reset of Timed Alarm, Call Forward – All Call,
Do Not Disturb, Customized Message, and Callback
Request
Deny
Cancel Station Lockout and Default Password for Another
station
Allow
DISA Password Cancel
Allow
DISA Password Confirmation
Allow
Automated Attendant Weekend Mode (Set/Reset) per
Tenant
Allow
Forced Account Code Programming
Allow
Terminal Exchange Mode Set
Allow
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 94
Class of Service
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The following features can be allowed/denied in each class level for Class of Service (Station)
Feature Selection 2 assignment.
Features
Default Value
(All Stations)
Set/Cancel Call Forward – All Call, Do Not Disturb (DND),
Break Mode
Allow
Trunk Queuing
Allow
Automatic Callback
Allow
Barge-In Originate on a CO/PBX Line (Calling Party)
Deny
Barge-In Receive (Called Party)
Allow
Timed Alarm (Set/Cancel) From SLT
Allow
General Purpose Relay
Allow
Voice Override/Tone Override (Originate)
Allow
Absence Message
Allow
Callback Request Originate
Allow
Station Outgoing Lockout (Set/Cancel)
Allow
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Set
Allow
VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase
Allow
DISA Password Set
Allow
User Ringing Line Preference Set/Reset
Allow
Voice/Tone Override/Camp-On Receive
Allow
LCR Bypass (Trunk Groups 02~32)
Deny
Station Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Deny
Account Code Entry
Deny
Digit Restriction Time Selection
Allow
Call Alert Notification for DIT and DID
Allow
LCR Recall
Allow
DSS Key Transfer Operation
Deny
ANI/Caller ID Indication
Deny
ANI/Caller ID Number/Name Selection
Deny
Manual Live Record Activate
[Memory Block 1-8-26 (Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master
Hunt Number) must be set.]
Deny
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 95
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features
Default Value
(All Stations)
Auto Live Record Activate
[LK5 must be on, and Memory Block 1-8-26 (Voice Mail
Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number) must be set.]
Deny
BGM Selection
Allow
Unsupervised Conference
Deny
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Deny
Group Listening Selection
Deny
Station Relocation
Allow
Set Call Forward – Off-Premise
(Related to page 1 LK1 and page 2 LK5.)
Deny
Pre-set Dialing (Allow/Deny)
Deny
Live Monitoring
Deny
Caller ID Display Selection
(When allow is set, Caller ID Name and Number display at
the same time.)
Deny
ARS Overflow
Deny
Voice Mail Message Indication
Deny
Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Deny
Caller ID for K-CCIS
Allow
Call Monitor (Originate) (R2000 or higher)
Deny
Call Monitor (Receive) (R2000 or higher)
Allow
Save Caller ID Missed Calls (R3000 or higher).
Allow
Send Caller ID Information to Single Line Telephones
(R3000 or higher).
Deny
H
H
H
At default for Attendant Features, Stations 100 and 101 are set for Class 00 and all others stations
are assigned Class 15 using Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment).
At default, Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] Station Class 00
is set to Allow (LED On) most features. Station Classes 01~15 are set to Deny (LED Off) all
features.
At default, all stations are set for Class 00 using Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service
Feature Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 96
Class of Service
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
F-6
Feature Name
Flexible Timeouts
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
+BTS
+BTT
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
All used
Line Keys
All used
Line Keys
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 97
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 98
Class of Service
C-20
Clock/Calendar Display
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Clock/Calendar Display is available on Multiline Display Terminals. This feature displays the time
and day of week on the LCD and is programmable from the first two station ports in the system.
The system can automatically adjust the clock for Daylight Savings Time.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3000
With R3000 or higher, Multilingual LCD indication supports the following multilingual Clock/Calender
display:
English
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Japanese
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
French
DIM
LUN
MAR
MER
JEU
VEN
SAM
Spanish
DOM
LUN
MAR
MIE
JUE
VIE
SAB
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All MultilineTerminals with LCD
Required Components:
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 99
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To set the Clock/Calendar at a Multiline Terminal with LCD connected to Port 01 or 02:
A
I
L
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial
4.
Dial current time (e.g.,
5.
Press
.
.
.
C
H
C
KC BI
:
to toggle AM/PM.
When only setting the time, press
).
A
to end the procedure.
6.
Press
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Use the dial pad to enter the day.
10.
Press
11.
Press
12.
Use the dial pad to enter the last two digits of the year.
13.
Press
L
C
L
A
to advance to the calender.
to select the day of the week.
to move the cursor to the day of month setting.
to select the month.
to move the cursor to the year setting.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The Clock Calendar Display is protected by memory back-up power.
The system automatically adjusts the clock 1 hour ahead on the First Sunday in April or sets the
clock back 1 hour on the last Sunday in October when allowed in Memory Block 1-8-48 (Automatic
Daylight Saving Time Selection).
Restrictions:
H
H
The Clock/Calendar Display can be programmed only from station port 01 or 02.
When the Electra Elite main processor is off during the Automatic Daylight Saving Time
adjustment, the clock does not automatically adjust when system power is returned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 100
Clock/Calendar Display
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
M-5
Feature Name
Multilingual LCD Indication
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
System Data Name
+BM
Time Display (12h/24h) Selection
1-8-04
+BM
Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection
1-8-48
+BTM
Multilingual LCD Indication Selection
4-28
¦
¦
¦
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 101
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 102
Clock/Calendar Display
Code Restriction
C-21
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Code Restriction for outgoing calls is based on the first eight digits dialed. Code Restriction denies
outside calls based on number dialed over a trunk group and accommodates equal access to Other
Common Carriers (OCCs) and CO Feature Codes. This eliminates unauthorized calls and configures
system calling functions to provide cost control.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
When a station user attempts an outside call to a station that is code restricted, the following occurs:
1.
The user goes off-hook, waits for internal dial tone, and dials a Trunk Access Code or goes
off-hook on an outside line.
2.
The user receives an outside dial tone, and dials a restricted telephone number.
3.
A reorder tone is generated, and ERROR is displayed on terminals with an LCD.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 103
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
At default, the 14 programmable station classes are assigned as follows:
Class 01:
Deny 0 and 1+ calls
Class 02:
Deny 0 and 1+ calls, Allow 1-800, 1-888, 1-877 calls
Class 03:
Deny 0, 1+, and 976 calls, Allow 1-800, 1-888, 1-877
calls
Class 04:
Deny only 1+ calls, Allow 1-800, 1-888, and 1-877 calls
Class 05~14:
Allow only 911 calls
H
H
H
H
H
H
All classes deny OCC calls.
Classes 01~04 allow local calls.
Using other common carriers (equal access) can be allowed or denied by the Code Restriction
feature.
Code Restriction applies after CO Feature Code is dialed.
When using Code Restriction with LCR, Code Restriction is applied to the digits dialed by the
system.
System Programming has 16 classes. Two of the 16 classes have fixed restrictions: Class 00
allows all outside calls and Class 15 restricts all outside calls.
Sixteen 8-Digit Matching tables can be assigned for each of the 14 remaining classes. Each
8-Digit Matching table allows eight digits to be entered.
The Recall key or a Drop key cannot be used to bypass Code Restriction. (A Drop key is provided
by programming a Feature Access Code on a Feature Access key or One-Touch key.)
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-14
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
A-16
Authorization Code
C-22
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction
S-19
Station Outgoing Lockout
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 104
Code Restriction
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+AC
,
+AC
,
Memory
Block
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+BA
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
1-1-24
+BA
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
1-1-25
+AC
OCC Table Assignment
1-1-67
+AC
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment
5-03
+AC
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table
Assignment
1-1-68
+AC
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial
Assignment
1-1-66
+AC
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group
Assignment
5-02
+AC
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment
1-1-60
+AC
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment
1-1-61
+AC
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Selection
1-1-65
+AC
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-18
+AC
System Speed Dial Override by Class
Selection
1-1-62
+AC
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
1-1-69
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment when
Lockout is Set
1-1-70
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 105
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTT
Trunk Digit Restriction
4-32
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AC
CO Feature Code Service for Code Restriction
1-1-82
+BTS
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-7
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 106
Code Restriction
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction
C-22
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction eliminates unauthorized calls by restricting the number of digits that
can be dialed from a station on an outside line.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Trunk Digit Restriction applies to all CO/PBX lines.
H
Digits 0~9, ,, and # are counted as digits dialed; pauses are not counted.
H
To reset the digit counter, the outside line must be released.
H
H
H
Press the Recall or Drop key to reset the digit counter. (A Drop key is provided by programming a
Feature Access Code on a Feature Access key or One-Touch key.)
Press Feature Access or One-Touch key (programmed for hookflash) to reset the digit counter.
When the outside line is put on hold, the digit counter retains the number of digits dialed. When a
station user picks up the held line, digit counting continues.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 107
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When Class Selection is set to YS using Memory Block 1-1-62 (System Speed Dial Override by
Class Selection), CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction is not applied.
Restrictions:
H
Code Restriction must be assigned to the station before this feature is used.
H
Single Line Telephone users cannot be restricted by CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Counting after the
PBR is released because the DTMF dial signals are sent to the outside line from the Single Line
Telephone.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-21
Feature Name
Code Restriction
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTT
,
+AC
,
+AC
,
+AC
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Trunk Digit Restriction
4-32
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
1-1-69
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 108
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction
CO Message Waiting Indication
C-23
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature provides a Message Waiting indication when Voice Mail from the Central Office is used.
The CO provides this feature using Visual Message Waiting Indication (VMWI) standards.
VMWI visually indicates to a user that a message is present in their voice mail box. When VMWI is
provided, the Electra Elite IPK provides a flashing LED on a line key assigned with the trunk
appearance.
The VMWI standard supported by the Electra Elite IPK includes:
H
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the MDMF protocol
H
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the SDMF protocol
R4000 or higher is required to support SDMF protocol. For additional information related to these protocols refer
to the TIA Standard ANSI/TIA-777-A-2003.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Software:
R2000 or higher
Required Components:
COIB(4)/(8)-U30 ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 109
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program the System Speed Dial buffer from an Attendant Position:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial Speed Dial buffer to be programmed (
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (four-digit maximum).
5.
Dial the desired telephone number.
6.
Press
- OR -
7.
Press
H
A
.
KK GI KKK III
.
~
or
~
).
, and use the dial pad to enter the name (if desired) using the Character Code Table.
.
The System Speed Dial buffer must be programmed for the telephone number associated with the CO/PBX
line.
To program the CO Message Waiting Indication Callback Speed Dial number from an Attendant
Position:
A
BH
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Press CO/PBX line key with VMWI feature.
4.
Dial System Speed Dial buffer (
5.
Press
.
.
A
.
KK GI KKK III
~
or
~
).
To confirm the CO Message Waiting Indication Callback Speed Dial number from an Attendant Position:
A
BI
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Press CO/PBX Line key.
4.
Display indicates XX>[YY] for 10 seconds.
.
.
XX is the Trunk Number. YY is the System Speed Dial buffer used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 110
CO Message Waiting Indication
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To retrieve CO Messages at a Station with CO Message Waiting Indication:
A
BG
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
3.
Press CO/PBX line key with CO Message Waiting Indication.
4.
Dial the login password when required after being connected to the CO Voice Mail system.
.
When the CO Message Waiting Indication is out of synchronization with the system, an Attendant
Position can clear the indication.
To clear the CO Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position:
A
BK
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Press CO/PBX line key with CO Message Waiting Indication.
.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
When a new message is stored in the CO Voice Mail system, the LED flashes slow green (0.5 sec
ON- 0.5 sec OFF) on the Direct Trunk appearance Line Key at stations assigned for this feature.
When the station is using a DTH-16LD-( ) Telephone, <> flashes on the LCD of a Direct Trunk
appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO Voice Mail System.
A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system.
When additional digits (e.g., for password) are included in the CO Message Waiting Indication
System Speed Dial buffer, they must be separated by pauses to allow for connection to the CO
Voice Mail system.
To clear the CO Message Waiting Indication Callback Speed Dial buffer number, press the Feature
key without entering the Speed Dial buffer.
During programming of the CO Message Waiting Indication system Speed Dial buffer number, The
Conf key can be used to backspace.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 111
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When CO number is not activated in Memory Block 3-73 (CO Message Waiting Yes/NO Selection)
during confirmation of the CO Message Waiting Indication Callback Speed Dial number, ERROR
is displayed and the station returns to idle.
H
When power outage or some other reason causes the CO Message Waiting Indication to be out of
synchronization with the system, an Attendant Position can clear the CO Message Waiting
Indication per CO line.
H
The CO Message Waiting Indication Callback Speed Dial number and System Speed Dial
numbers are backed up by the Battery Backup – System Memory feature.
Restrictions:
H
This feature is supported only at Multiline Terminals assigned with a direct line key appearance of
the CO/PBX line key supporting this feature and with proper Class of Service assignment.
H
The Single Line Telephone or PSII cannot indicate the CO Message Waiting Indication.
H
The Message Display Board does not support the CO Message Waiting Indication.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
B-5
Battery Backup – System Power
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
M-2
Message Waiting
S-13
Speed Dial – System
V-1
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BTS
+BCT
,
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection
1
1-8-07
CO Message Waiting Yes/No Selection
3-73
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
P1. LK3
P3, LK2
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 112
CO Message Waiting Indication
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BTT
+BTT
,
,
Memory
Block
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
CO Message Waiting Indication Assignment
4-69
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 113
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 114
CO Message Waiting Indication
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
C-24
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
CTI integrates computers and telephones to access sophisticated communication services using
telephone lines. The Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) supports speech and data
transmissions, allows a variety of attachment devices, and supports complex functions such as
conference calls, call waiting, and voice mail. Through TAPI, all elements of telephone usage, including
simple dial and voice calls, can be controlled by Windows 95 and higher Windows versions.
CTI is implemented using a Computer Telephony Adapter (CT(A)-R/CTA-U Unit) or CT(U)-R/CTU(S)-U
Unit.
The CT(A)-R Unit can be attached to any DTH/DTR terminal except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL. The CTA-U
Unit can be attached to any DTU/DTP terminal except the DTP-2DT-1 TEL. Either unit provides a serial
RS-232 connector to the PC that allows TAPI applications to control telephony features of the KSU.
The CT(U)-R Unit can be attached to any DTH/DTR terminal except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL. The
CTU(S)-U Unit can be attached to any DTU/DTP terminal except the DTP-2DT-1 TEL. Either unit
provides a Universal Serial Bus (USB) connection to the PC that allows TAPI applications to control
telephony features on the KSU.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any DTH/DTR terminal except the DTR-2DR-1 TEL
Any DTU/DTP terminal except the DTP-2DT-1 TEL
Required Components:
For DTH/DTR terminals:
H
H
CT(A)-R Unit
CT(U)-R Unit
For DTU/DTP terminals:
H
H
CTA-U Unit
CTU(S)-U Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 115
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the CTI product literature.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The CT(A)-R Unit connects to the bottom of any DTH/DTR Multiline Terminal except DTR-2DT-1
TEL. The CTA-U Unit connects to the bottom of any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 TEL.
The CT(U)-R Unit connects to the bottom of any DTH/DTR Multiline Terminal except DTR-2DT-1
TEL. The CTU(S)-U Unit connects to the bottom of any DTU/DTP Multiline Terminal except
DTP-2DT-1 TEL.
Restrictions:
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 116
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Consecutive Speed Dial
C-25
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Consecutive Speed Dial allows using System Speed Dial, Station Speed Dial, and manual dialing for all
stations consecutively. Simplified dialing sequences permit easier access to secondary common
carriers, credit card verification, and other applications that require entry of authorization codes or
customer numbers.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature at a Multiline Terminal:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Use any combination of manual dialing, Station Speed Dial, or System Speed Dial.
. Wait for dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 117
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
A maximum of 24 digits can be stored in Multiline Terminal Speed Dial buffers. Pause, hookflash,
#, and , count as digits when stored in speed dial buffer.
When the system is programmed as a Key Function (KF) system, Consecutive Speed Dial cannot
be used from internal dial tone but can be used from a direct CO line appearance.
When using Single Line Telephones, only manual dialing sequences can follow a Station or
System Speed Dial sequence.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 118
Consecutive Speed Dial
Cordless Telephone Connection
C-26
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Using an AP(R)/AP(A)-R Unit for a DTH/DTR telephone, or an APR/APA-U Unit for a DTU/DTP
telephone, a cordless telephone (2500-type) can be connected to a Multiline Terminal. System
Programming defines whether or not the cordless telephone rings when calls are directed to the Multiline
Terminal associated with it; however, only the AP(R)-R or the APR-U Unit provides ringing.
The SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU and the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP also supports cordless telephones, but this feature
refers to Multiline Terminal cordless connection.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any DTH/DTR terminal with an AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL
Any DTU/DTP terminal with an APA-U or APR-U Unit except the DTP-2ST-1 TEL
Required Components:
2500-type cordless Single Line Telephone
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To make a call using a cordless Single Line Telephone:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the station number or dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 119
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer a call using a cordless Single Line Telephone:
When the Multiline Terminal is ringing, the incoming call can be answered by the cordless Single Line
Telephone user by going off-hook, when ringing line preference is assigned for the Multiline Terminal.
To transfer a call from a cordless Single Line Telephone to its associated Multiline Terminal:
1.
Multiline Terminal user goes off-hook.
2.
Single Line Telephone user goes on-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
Multiline Terminal).
To transfer a call from a Multiline Terminal to its associated cordless Single Line Telephone:
1.
Single Line Telephone user goes off-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
Single Line Telephone).
2.
Multiline Terminal user goes on-hook.
To use Hookflash
Refer to operation for Single Line Telephone Access.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
A voice announced internal call to the Multiline Terminal does not ring the cordless telephone.
Only one cordless Single Line Telephone can be connected to an APR-U, APA-U, AP(R)-R, or
AP(A)-R Unit.
When CO Prime Line is assigned to the associated Multiline Terminal, internal dial tone cannot be
transferred to the cordless telephone.
The cordless telephone requires a PBR circuit while dialing. When all PBR circuits are busy, a busy
tone is heard when the phone goes off-hook.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 120
Cordless Telephone Connection
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
This feature works with 2500-type cordless Single Line Telephones.
Disconnect signal, DTMF sending (to cordless telephone), Message Wait, transferring calls,
placing calls on hold, hookswitch signals, and DP cordless telephones are not supported for
cordless telephones.
A maximum of 120 AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, APA-U, or APR-U Units can be installed in Multiline
Terminals on the Electra Elite IPK Expanded Port system. The maximum for the Electra Elite IPK
Basic Port system is 32.
The Multiline Terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each other.
An AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, APA-U, or APR-U Unit with hookflash enabled follows the same operating
procedures as a Single Line Terminal connected to an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU.
The Multiline Terminal LCD displays normal information for Multiline Terminal when a cordless
terminal is used.
When the Multiline Terminal user goes off-hook before the cordless Single Line Telephone user, a
PBR circuit is not connected for the cordless Single Line Telephone.
The ring pattern for the cordless telephone can be selected by a jumper switch in the AP(R)-R or
APR-U Units. The patterns are:
J
J
H
1 second ON/2 seconds OFF
2 seconds ON/4 seconds OFF
The cordless telephone must be installed within 10 feet of the AP(R)-R Unit or APR-U Unit.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
A-7
Feature Name
Ancillary Device Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 121
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTM
APR Ring Mode Assignment
4-39
+AU
APR/APA Hookflash Selection
4-59
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 122
Cordless Telephone Connection
C-27
Customized Message
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A station with Do Not Disturb set can select a Customized Message that is displayed at any other
Multiline Display Terminal when an internal call is made to that station. The message (10 messages can
be programmed) remains displayed on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal where the message was set.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals equipped with an LCD
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set a message at a Multiline Terminal:
A
GK
JL
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Press
6.
Set Do Not Disturb (
.
to select
.
a message. Continue pressing
J
to scroll through the possible messages.
, and enter date and time. (Date and time are optional.)
.
A
FK A
).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 123
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To receive a message at a Multiline Terminal with LCD:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for dial tone.
2.
Dial the desired station number that has Customized Message set.
3.
A message is received on the LCD from the station that was called.
To cancel a message at a Multiline Terminal:
A
GI
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Press
.
.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Six messages are provided in default. All 10 can be programmed.
H
Default messages are as follows:
J
J
J
J
J
J
DO NOT DISTURB
MEETING
BUSINESS TRIP
NOT IN
WITH GUEST
OUT OF OFFICE
H
The message remains on the LCD where the message was set.
H
When this feature is set, the Feature LED flashes.
H
When calling a station in Do Not Disturb mode, a message displays on the caller terminal. Three
seconds later, the return date and time are displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 124
Customized Message
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions
H
DND must be set to display the message.
H
A maximum of 13 characters and the return time can be set for each message.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BI
Customized Message 1~10 Assignment
1-2-09~18
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1, 2-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
C - 125
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 126
Customized Message
Data Line Security
D-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Data Line Security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as Camp-On or Override)
and denies a station from barging in while busy to prevent disruption of data transmission when using a
modem or facsimile machine.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURE
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
When a Multiline Terminal is assigned for Data Line Security, Tone Override and call alert
notification tone are not heard from the handset; however, Tone Override and call alert notification
tone are sent and heard from the speaker when the Multiline Terminal is off-hook.
A Single Line Telephone connected to an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU or an SLT(1)-U( ) ADP, with Data Line
Security assigned, rings 1 second ON/2 seconds OFF for any ringing or transferred call.
The ringing pattern of a Single Line Telephone, connected to an AP(R)-R Unit or APR-U Unit, does
not change when Data Line Security is assigned.
Data Line Security protects a station from Barge-In, even when Barge-In is allowed in Class of
Service.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-1
Call Alert Notification
C-19
Class of Service
Guide to Feature Programming
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BTT
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-90
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-8
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D-2
Data Line Security
Delay Announcement
D-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Delay Announcement activates when an incoming call to an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group encounters all ACD/UCD stations busy or receives no answer
within a programmed time. The call is queued and receives a recorded announcement after a
programmed time. First and second Delay Announcements are available. The incoming call can be
Direct Inward Termination (DIT/ANA), CO Ring Transfer, Automated Attendant Transfer, or DID/Tie line.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU is required for recorded announcement.
MIFA-U( ) ETU is required for UCD.
In the Electra Elite IPK system, MIFA-U( ) ETU and KMA(1.0)U are required for ACD.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To record a Delay Announcement:
Refer to A-17 Automated Attendant for these instructions.
To process an incoming call:
1.
An incoming call to an ACD/UCD group is received.
2.
The First Delay Announcement answers the caller.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
After the message, the call is connected to Music on Hold.
4.
The Second Delay Announcement answers the caller after a programmed time.
5.
After the message, the call is connected to Music on Hold again.
6.
The Second Delay Announcement answers the caller again after a programmed time.
7.
Steps 5 and 6 continue until the caller is answered by an Agent in the ACD/UCD group.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This feature is not used with Elite ACD Plus.
H
DIT/ANA, CO Ring transfers, Automated Attendant Transfers, and DID/Tie line calls must be
directed to the ACD/UCD Pilot number to receive Delay Announcement.
H
When all Delay Announcement circuits are busy, the incoming caller continues to hear ringback
tone or Music on Hold until a Delay Announcement circuit is available.
H
Each caller hears every announcement from the beginning.
H
When an ACD/UCD Agent is available, the caller is immediately connected to the Agent, even with
a recorded announcement in progress.
H
This feature provides eight channels of two Delay Announcements. All four ACD/UCD groups
share the two Delay Announcements.
H
The Delay Announcement feature is programmed per trunk.
Restrictions:
H
Two VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the Electra Elite IPK system.
H
Four calls can be connected to a single VRS(4)-U( ) ETU at the same moment.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-20
Automatic Call Distribution
U-3
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
___________________________________________________________________________________
D-4
Delay Announcement
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+AR
,
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-12
+AR
,
VRS Message Function Assignment
1-8-13
+BA
,
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Delay Announcement Assignment
3-41
+AR
First Delay Announcement Start Time
Selection
1-1-71
+AR
First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
1-1-72
+AR
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval
Time Selection
1-1-73
+AR
Second Delay Announcement Repeat
Selection
1-1-74
+AR
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval
Time Selection
1-1-75
+AR
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
501
2-6
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D-6
Delay Announcement
Delayed Ringing
D-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Delayed Ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on incoming calls after a
programmed time. This feature applies to CO/PBX lines, Secondary Incoming Extensions, and Call
Arrival Keys.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To process an incoming call:
1.
Receive delayed incoming ring.
2.
Answer the call normally.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The following incoming calls support Delayed Ringing:
J
J
J
J
J
Normal incoming CO/PBX ringing.
DIT/ANA, internal calls to Secondary Incoming Extension, and Call Arrival Key.
Incoming DID/Tie line call.
DID/Tie line/Automated Attendant call that converts to normal CO ringing call.
Incoming outside line that appears at the Attendant Add-On Console.
H
Single Line Telephone users can receive CO/PBX Delayed Ringing.
H
Delayed Ringing is provided to an off-hook terminal that is assigned for Off-Hook Ringing.
H
Single Line Telephones assigned Delay Ringing follow Station Hunting.
H
Use Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment) to resolve Tenant Ringing conflicts by
Trunk to Tenant Assignment. The lower number assigned tenant is used as the ringing control.
H
When a CO line is assigned DIT/ANA to a station that also has Delay Ringing assigned, the DIT/
ANA does not occur until the Delay Ringing time expires.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-19
F-5
Feature Name
Class of Service
Flexible Ringing Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
D-8
Delayed Ringing
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BTM
Line Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BCM
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (CO)
1-1-77
+BI
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)
1-2-26
+AU
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed
Ringing Time Selection
1-4-02
+ALM
Tie/DID Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-07
+ALN
Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-53
+BM
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time
Selection
1-1-06
+BTT
,
+BTM
+BTT
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 10
Delayed Ringing
Dialed Number Indication Service (DNIS)
D-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
DNIS allows a name to be assigned to inbound DID digits. This feature allows more efficient call
handling.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or higher is required for DNIS Display for transferred calls.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DID(4)-U( ) ETU, TLI(2)-U( ) ETU, DTI-U( ) ETU, or PRT(1)-U( ) ETU with firmware 2.00 or higher
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
DNIS is always displayed in the center line of the LCD.
H
DNIS is displayed for an incoming MIF ACD/UCD and SCD calls.
H
During Call Forward – All Call, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer, the incoming DID call
terminates, and the forwarding extension number is not displayed, but DNIS is displayed on the
Center row of the LCD of the forwarding destination.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
With R4000 or higher, the following service conditions apply:
J
J
J
When DNIS number and name are available, they are displayed after answering the trunk
call for 5 seconds.
A new Class of Service option is added to Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station)
Feature Selection 2] to assign DNIS Display for Transferred calls.
DNIS number and name display after answering a CO call requires assigning the following
Memory Blocks:
N
N
J
1-2-22 DID Digit Conversion Table with DNIS Data assigned.
DNIS number and name display during transferred ringing requires assigning the following
Memory Blocks:
N
N
N
N
N
J
1-2-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment set to YES.
1-2-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment set to YES.
1-2-22 DID Digit Conversion Table with DNIS Data assigned.
1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2], Page 4, LK3, ANI/Caller ID set to allow.
1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2], Page 7, LK6, DNIS Display for
Transferred Calls (New) set to allow.
Memory Blocks 4-37/38 [Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day/Night) Mode] set to ring
(CAR/SIE key).
DNIS number and name display after answering a transferred call requires assigning the
following Memory Blocks:
N
N
1-2-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment set to YES.
1-2-22 DID Digit Conversion Table with DNIS Data assigned.
For the second row of the display, DNIS number and name display has priority over Caller ID
when both are assigned.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
A maximum of eight characters can be used to assign the DNIS name in Memory Block 1-1-22
(DID Digit Conversion Table).
A DNIS name can be assigned for a maximum of 200 DID numbers. The name applies for both
Day and Night Mode conversion.
To enter a name, refer to Dial Pad Character Assignment in Electra Elite IPK Programming
Manual.
During call termination, Feature + Line Key, Feature + CAR, or Feature + Answer key combination
cannot be used to enable the DNIS display.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 12
Dialed Number Indication Service (DNIS)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
DNIS is displayed only during call termination. It cannot be displayed during the conversation by
pressing the extension key or CAP key. Caller ID is displayed according to system programming.
When a forwarding destination is set with Memory Block 1-1-23 (DID Forward Station Number for
Busy Station or undefined digit), DNIS is displayed only when the forwarding destination is busy.
DNIS is not displayed when the call is forwarded with an undefined digit.
DNIS is not displayed for incoming ACD Plus calls (R3500 and lower).
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
I-10
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
T-1
T1 Connection
T-2
Tandem Switching of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
Station Number Assignment
4-10
+BK
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+ALN
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking
Assignment
5-00
+BS
,
+ALN
,
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-20
+ALN
,
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-21
+ALN
,
DID digit Conversion Table
1-1-22
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
DID Forward Station Number for Busy station or
Undefined Digit
1-1-23
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+Al
Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode
1-1-78
+AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
4-49
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+ALN
+BTS
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3,4-4,
5-7,7-6
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 14
Dialed Number Indication Service (DNIS)
Dial 0 For Attendant
D-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Stations can access a system Attendant Position by dialing 0 (zero).
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal:
K
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial
3.
Lift the handset to talk with Attendant.
,
and wait for internal dial tone.
to call the Attendant (set at default).
Using a Single Line Telephone:
K
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial
3.
Talk with the Attendant.
to call the Attendant (set at default).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Any station can be called by dialing 0 (default: All stations call station 100).
H
The Attendant can also be called by dialing the applicable station number.
H
When dialing a busy Attendant and receiving call waiting tone, the Step Call feature can be used to
advance to an idle station.
Restrictions:
H
The system can have multiple Attendants. Only one can be called by dialing 0. When that
Attendant dials 0, an error tone is received.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-11
Attendant Add-On Console
A-13
Attendant Positions
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BA
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46
+BA
Specified Station Access Code Assignment
1-2-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
176
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 16
Dial 0 For Attendant
Digit Insertion
D-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Digit Insertion provides user friendly operation when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex
Central Office. When a system user originates an outgoing call, the system automatically inserts the
PBX/Centrex Trunk Access Code. This feature saves the user from dialing an additional Access Code.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To make a call using Digit Insertion:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code, then dial the desired telephone number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The Trunk Access Code of the Electra Elite IPK should be the same number as the Trunk Access
Code of the PBX/Centrex.
H
An outside call by Digit Insertion feature complies with Code Restriction.
H
Digit Insertion can be assigned per Trunk group.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Digit Insertion can be assigned to a maximum of 16 Trunk groups.
H
When you press a CO/PBX line key to originate an outside call, a digit is not inserted.
H
When a station user originates an outside call using the Digit Insertion feature, the Least Cost
Routing (LCR) feature cannot be accessed.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
+BA
System Data Name
,
+BCT
+BCS
,
+BCS
,
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance
Assignment
1-1-49
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
1-1-50
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
401 ~ 416
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 18
Digit Insertion
Digital Line Extender (Dterm ®
ISDN EXTender Plus)
D-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus allows a user with an NEC Multiline Telephone to make/receive calls from a
remote location while maintaining a station appearance from the office KTS and permits data access to
the office LAN.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTP-32DE-1 (Dterm Series E)
Required Components:
Electra Elite KTS with 1 ESI port
ISDN BRI at office and remote site
Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus Office Module
Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus Remote Module
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Same as Multiline Terminal.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Refer to Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus System Administrator’s Guide for more information.
H
TAPI is not supported.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The user must use a line that is not connected to the Dterm EXT Plus to make 911 calls. When a
call is made from the remote terminal, the telephone number at the KTS location is sent to the
emergency center.
Zone and voice paging must be turned off using KTS programming. The remote telephone should
be programmed to ring for all incoming calls.
When the remote Multiline Terminal is programmed to answer multiple calls, these calls should ring
at the terminal. Contact your authorized NEC dealer when system changes are required.
Synchronous ringing does not operate on the remote telephone. Incoming trunk calls
automatically ring 2 sec. on/2 sec. off.
Analog fax machines and modems cannot operate with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal that is
connected to an APR-U Unit optional adapter.
Dterm Cordless terminals cannot be used with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal or Dterm ISDN
EXTender Plus.
CTA-U Unit and CTU(S)-U Unit cannot be installed to a KTS remote Multiline Terminal to provide
TAPI functionality with the KTS.
The HFU-U/HF-R Unit handsfree adapter cannot operate with a DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal or
Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus used in a home environment because of FCC restrictions, but it can
operate in an office environment.
Use Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] or 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring
Assignment (night Mode)] to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on Multiline Terminals.
Use Memory Block 4-31 (Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection) to disable paging for the
station (set to NO).
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 20
Digital Line Extender (Dterm ® ISDN EXTender Plus)
Digital Voice Mail
D-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The VMS(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU, FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU, CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU, VMP(2)/(4)/(8)-U(30/40 ) ETU
or CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU provides Digital Voice Mail Service, Automated Attendant (AA),
Audiotext, Fax Detection, Message Notification, Live Record, and Centrex Transfer. The VMS, FMS,
CMS and VMP ETUs are complete voice mail applications (EliteMail) built on a single ETU. This method
has advantages that include tighter application integration and built-in battery backup for the complete
system. The CTI/VP(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU is built on two ETUs.
Descriptions are provided below.
Voice Mail Service
Voice Mail allows a caller to leave a recorded message in their voice and exact words for another
individual.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant answers a call, determines the extension, and transfers the call to that
extension.
Audiotext
Audiotext provides around the clock information and allows an organization to present it with natural
voice, music, or whatever they want callers to hear.
Fax Detect Routing and Notification
Incoming faxes are detected and automatically delivered to a fax machine. When using the fax machine
handset, the fax originator can record a voice message that can be sent to the attendant.
Live Record
Live Record simplifies Message and note taking by permitting all or a portion of the conversation in
progress to be recorded.
Centrex Transfer by Digital Voice Mail Port
A Digital Voice Mail Centrex Transfer feature allows the SLT Hookflash dial access code to be accessed
by a Digital Voice Mail (DVM) port to send a Hookflash to the outside network.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ENHANCEMENTS
VMP( )-U30/U40 ETU Q51531(VMS)
H
Orderly Shutdown using the Shut Down Switch
The Shut Down Switch provides orderly shutdown of the voicemail Application and turns off the
ETU when placed in OFF. When no calls are active on voicemail, this procedure takes about 30
seconds. The voicemail application waits until all active calls are finished before shutting down.
H
Subscriber-Based Multilingual
When an additional language license is added, the system manager can select a specific language
for a specific subscriber at the console. The subscriber hears that language after login is
completed. The default language is the system default language.
H
Entity-Based Multilingual
When an additional language license is added, this feature allows an outside caller to select a valid
system language to use during the call. This feature allows any caller to hear any installed
language regardless of which voicemail port answered the call. A new database entity, the
Language Selection Box, is added to allow callers to choose between the installed languages.
Each database entity (e.g., personal message box, transaction box, or interview box) can have a
language associated with it.
Q50131
The following features are added in EliteMail Q50131 software and are only available in U.S English.
H
Timestamp Before Message
This option allows a subscriber to hear the message timestamp before the message is played back.
H
Multiple Entity Addressing
This option allows a subscriber to send or redirect a message to a number of subscribers, groups,
or guests simultaneously. This feature is enabled at default and is accessed by dialing 77 when
sending messages from a subscriber mailbox.
H
Password Security – Require Password
This option allows the system Administrator to require passwords. When this setting is enabled,
subscribers cannot opt out of setting a password during first-time enrollment or when changing a
password.
H
Password Security – Default Password
This option allows the system Administrator to change the default password for new subscriber
mailboxes.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 22
Digital Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Control Access to Notification field
This option adds a subscriber setting called Allow Notification Access. This field controls whether
or not a subscriber transfer option, the extension destination for auto attendant transferred calls,
and pager notification numbers are accessible by the user in mailbox setup. When access is
denied, these changes can be made only by the technician using console programming or from an
internal station using softkeys.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations (available for all features except Live Record).
Multiline Terminals (available for all features).
Required Components:
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
VMP(2)/(4)/(8)-U(30/40) ETU
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program the Feature Access key for Live Record at a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
.
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Live Record feature code.
B
KK
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
.
.
Feature codes are:
= Record
= Pause
= Rerecord
= Erase
= End
= Urgent Page
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
KF
KG
A
Press
= Address
= Live Monitor
.
To program a One-Touch key for Live Record at a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press One-Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Live Record feature code.
B
KK
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KG
.
.
.
Feature codes are:
6.
Press
A
= Record
= Pause
= Rerecord
= Erase
= End
= Urgent Page
= Address
= Live Monitor
.
To set up personal mailboxes:
1.
Lift handset and receive an internal dial tone.
2.
Follow the verbal instructions to personalize the mailbox.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 24
Digital Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Digital Voice Mail Messages
To retrieve message at a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Go off-hook; receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the assigned station number to access Voice Mail.
3.
Follow the verbal instructions provided by the Digital Voice Mail system or use the Softkeys on the
telephone.
4.
Follow the verbal instructions or use the Softkeys to navigate the system.
To program a One-Touch key for easy message access:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press One-Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Press
AA
.
.
, followed by Voice Mail extension number.
.
Live Record
To record an incoming CO/PBX conversation using Automatic Live Record:
1.
Go off-hook to answer an incoming call. Live Record automatically starts. RECORD is displayed in
the lower section of the LCD on a Multiline Terminal.
2.
To store the recorded conversation in a different mailbox, dial a mailbox number or press a
One-Touch key or Feature Access key programmed with the mailbox number. RECORD XXXXXX
is displayed in the lower section of the LCD on a Multiline Terminal. (XXXXXX is the station name/
number where the conversation is stored.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To record a CO conversation in progress using Manual Live Record:
1.
Press the Feature Access key programmed as the Record key. The Record key flashes red when
Live Record begins and flashes green when Live Record is addressed. RECORD is displayed in
the lower section of the LCD on a Multiline Terminal.
2.
To store the recorded conversation, dial a mailbox number or press a One-Touch key or Feature
Access key programmed with the mailbox number. RECORD XXXXXX is displayed in the lower
section of the LCD on a Multiline Terminal. (XXXXXX is the station name/number where the
conversation is stored.)
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Digital Voice Mail
General:
H
H
H
H
When a call is transferred to a station that is call forwarded to Voice Mail, or the Quick transfer to
Voice Mail feature is used, the call must be released (blind transferred) before Voice Mail answers
the call. During the transfer, the transferring party hears ring back tone, and the external party
hears Music on Hold (MOH) or ringback tone until the transfer is completed. MOH or ring back
tone is determined by Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection). This condition
applies to the following software versions:
R2000
R2500
R3000
3500
R1.71
R2.01
R2.50
R3.00
R3.50
R2.02
R2.51
R3.01
R3.51
An Electra Elite IPK system supports up to 32 DVM ports.
A VMP(X)-U(30/40) ETU, VMS(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU, FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU, CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU or
CTI/VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU must be installed to provide Digital Voice Mail.
All Multiline Terminals (with or without an LCD) and Single Line Telephones (with a Message Wait
Lamp) receive an indication that a Voice Mail message is waiting.
J
J
J
H
R1700
Multiline Terminals equipped with an LCD receive a message in the LCD indicating a
message is waiting.
The Large LED and Feature (FNC) LED flashes red to indicate message waiting on all
Multiline Terminals.
Single Line Telephones supported by an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU have the Message Wait LED On to
indicate a message is waiting.
A Feature Access key or One-Touch key can be assigned for easy message access.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 26
Digital Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
When a call transferred from a Voice Mail port is not answered in three minutes (fixed time), the
call recalls to the Voice Mail port.
When a station is programmed for multiple Call Forward (e.g.,100 CFWD - 101 CFWD - VM Hunt
Group) and a call is made to station 100, the caller is forwarded to the mailbox for station 100.
H
Voice Mail Message Waiting can be set/canceled only from a Voice Mail port.
H
The Digital Voice Mail recognizes the CO/PBX busy tone.
H
Refer to S-16 Station Hunt for specific information about station hunt groups.
H
The following major features are provided:
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
Voice Mail Service
Automated Attendant
Audiotext
Fax Detect, Routing and Notification
Optional Multilingual Prompts
The VMS( )-U30 ETU offers a standard built-in modem. Any port of the VMS( )-U30 ETU can be
used to access the built-in modem by dialing an assigned extension number from the main
greeting. The built-in modem is V.34 compatible and supports all standard speeds up to
28,800 bps
The VMP( )-U(30/40) ETU offers a standard built-in modem. Any port of the VMP( )-U(30/40) ETU
can be used to access the built-in modem by dialing an assigned extension number from the main
greeting. The built-in modem is V.34 compatible and supports all standard speeds up to
28,800 bps.
Restrictions:
H
When calling digital VM, the Pilot number assigned in Memory Block 1-8-26 (Voice Mail Quick
Transfer Master Hunt Number) must be used.
H
Live Monitoring is not supported on CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) or VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU.
H
Live Record is not supported on CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU.
H
Live Monitoring is supported on CTI(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU only when using ViewCall Plus.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
H
When Voice Mail Message Waiting status is required to be sent across the K-CCIS link to a remote
system, the Closed Number Blocks must be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Live Record
CAUTION
Using the Live Record feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the telephone
line may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor before implementing
any practice to monitor or record a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require a party
monitoring or recording a telephone conversation to use a beep-tone(s), notify all parties to the
telephone conversation, and/or obtain consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. To monitor or
record sound activities at the other end of the telephone line using the Live Record feature, the sound of
the alert tone at the beginning of Live Record may or may not be considered sufficient under applicable
laws. Some applicable laws provide for strict penalties for illegal monitoring or recording of telephone
conversations.
General:
H
H
Tone Override, Call Alert, Barge-In, Camp-On, and Voice Over Split feature tones are denied
during Live Record.
When a Multiline Terminal user completes Live Record without specifying a mailbox where the
conversation should be stored and Automatic Recall is not assigned in Digital Voice Mail
programming, the conversation is stored in the mailbox assigned to the Multiline Terminal. When a
Multiline Terminal user completes Live Record without specifying a mailbox where the
conversation should be stored and Automatic Recall is assigned in Digital Voice Mail
programming, the conversation is stored in the mailbox assigned to the Multiline Terminal and the
system recalls the Multiline Terminal and plays the recorded conversation.
(Auto Callback rings - 4 times, Waiting Time - 3 minute, Redial - 5 times.)
H
Live Record can be used only from Multiline Terminals.
H
Individual trunks must be assigned for the Live Record feature to operate.
H
H
H
The system can be programmed to allow/deny an alert tone for Live Record. The 0.5 second alert
tone is heard by both the outside party and the Multiline Terminal user when the recording starts or
at specified intervals during recording. The interval between alert tones is assigned in the Digital
Voice Mail System Programming.
Up to seven feature keys can be programmed for use with Live Record. These feature keys can be
assigned to Feature Access keys, One-Touch keys, or DSS keys (on a DSS/BLF console). When
the feature keys are assigned to One-Touch keys, no LED indications are provided.
The following feature keys can be programmed:
Record Key
Use this key to manually start Live Record. The associated LED flashes red while recording. The
associated LED goes off when recording ends or a pause occurs and flashes green when a live
record message is addressed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 28
Digital Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Pause Key
Use this key to pause and restart live record. The associated LED flashes green when recording
has paused.
Erase Key
Use this key to erase the Live Record conversations. After the Erase key is pressed, the Voice Mail
port remains off-hook until the call is terminated.
End Key
Use this key to end the Live Record. The conversation continues without being recorded.
Rerecord Key
Use this key to erase a recorded conversation while recording is in progress and start a new
recording.
Urgent Page Key
Use this key to change the Live Record assignment from dial out to pager. (Message Notification
to Pager Assignment cycles ON/OFF when this key is pressed while recording.)
Address Key
Use this key to confirm Live Record, erase Live Record, change the mailbox number where Live
Record is stored, or add a recorded prelude to a recorded conversation.
H
During each Live Record, a conference circuit and Voice Mail Port are used.
H
Live Record is not allowed when all Add-On Conference circuits are busy.
H
Additional internal parties cannot be added to a live record conversation during conferencing.
H
Only CO/PBX, Tie, and DID calls can be recorded using Live Record. Internal calls cannot be
recorded using Live Record.
H
The Record key LED is on when all conference circuits or all Digital Voice Mail ports are busy.
H
Any station user can direct a live record message to another station user.
H
H
H
Any Multiline Terminal can change the Message Notification mode to Pager Notification mode by
first directing a live record message to another station and then pressing the Urgent Page key.
The station that is put into the Urgent Page mode must have a pager telephone number assigned.
When a Multiline Terminal (with LCD) is in Pager Notification mode, , is displayed in the far right
corner of the lower LCD.
Live Record is not allowed on conference calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Centrex Transfer by Digital Voice Mail Port
General:
H
Centrex Transfer is supported for Release Transfer and Await Answer transfer modes.
H
All existing Voice Mail systems can support this transfer.
H
No new Memory Blocks are required.
H
The access code for SLT Hookflash (default 6#) must be assigned in system programming for this
feature to operate.
Restrictions:
H
H
The CO used for Centrex transfer must be assigned as PBX in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type
Selection).
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
CoSession
Description
CoSession, a communication software tool available from NEC, is used for EliteMail to perform
configuration, maintenance, and backup functions.
H
H
H
CoSession Client 7.0 is supported with the following operating systems:
J
J
J
J
Windows 9x
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000/2000 Pro
Windows XP Home/Professional
Computer
J
The computer used as the CoSession client must be an x86-based PC desktop or notebook
system meeting the minimum requirements for the chosen operating system.
Modem/Serial cable
J
J
J
An AT-command set modem is required for remote connections via modem. A null-modem
cable is required for use in a direct-connection.
When using CoSession on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP, COM ports can
be initialized for use at up to 57,600 bps. Using those operating systems, COM ports cannot
be initialized for use at 115,200 bps.
CoSession file transfer operations perform reliably up to 38,400 bps.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 30
Digital Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Digital Voice Mail Features
EliteMail
CMS
EliteMail
FMS
EliteMail
VMS
EliteMail
VMP
EliteMail
VP
EliteMail
CTI
Live Record
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Live Monitor
No
Yes
Q05631
or higher
Yes
Q00631
or higher
Yes
No
Yes
Note 5
Caller ID Display
No
Yes
Q05631
or higher
Yes
Q00631
or higher
Yes
No
Yes
Note 1
Note 3
Caller ID Call
Return
No
Yes
Q05931
or higher
Yes
Q00931
or higher
Yes
No
Yes
Note 2
Note 4
Softkeys
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TeLANophy (View
Mail, VMM, View
Call Plus, View Fax)
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Multiple Languages
No
No
Yes
Yes, Note 6
Yes
Yes
Hotel/Motel
Features
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Centrex Transfer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pager Notification
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Attendant
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax Detect and
Routing
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Timestamp Before
Message
NO
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
NO
NO
Multiple Entity
Addressing
NO
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
NO
NO
Password Security
– Require Password
NO
Yes
Q50131or
higher
Yes
Q50131or
higher
Yes
NO
NO
Password Security
–Default Password
NO
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
Q50131or
higher
Yes
NO
NO
Control Access to
Notification Field
NO
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
Q50131 or
higher
Yes
NO
NO
Feature
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Note 1: With Q941 or lower, the EliteMail CTI gathers Caller ID information only for Loop Start trunks
directly inward terminated to the pilot of the CTI, and the user mailbox must be set to await
answer transfer.
Note 2: With Q941 or lower, the EliteMail CTI Does not gather Caller ID information for Loop Start Caller
ID trunks that forward to the pilot of voice mail nor ANI DID calls on T-1 or PRI trunks.
Note 3: Starting with Q944 or higher, the EliteMail CTI gathers Caller ID name or number but not both for
any call with Caller ID information that leaves a message. This includes forwarded calls and
messages left in mailboxes set for Release transfer. The information can be displayed using
ViewApps only.
Note 4: The EliteMail CTI only performs Caller ID Call Return using ViewCall Plus only when the number
is displayed. This feature is not available when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used.
Note 5: The ELiteMail CTI performs live monitor only when using TeLANophy.
Note 6: Multiple Languages are supported on hard-drive based units only.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-18
Feature Name
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines)
L-4
Live Monitoring
Q-1
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
S-16
Station Hunt
V-1
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 32
Digital Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Digital Voice Mail (Installation)
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
,
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BS
,
Station Number Assignment
4-10
+BTT
,
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
+BTT
,
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Selection
4-15
+AV
,
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt
Number
1-8-26
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-24
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BCM
Hookflash Time Selection
1-1-02
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+AV
Live Record Trunk Selection
3-45
+AV
Live Record Auto Delete Selection
4-46
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BA
+BTS
+BTT
+BA
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
007
1-1, 2-5,
4-5, 4-6
020 ~
025,
030, 032,
033, 034,
140~143,
027
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Digital Voice Mail Caller ID Display with Call Return
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+BTT
LCR Class Selection
4-40
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time
Selection
1-4-00
+BTT
,
+AT
,
Memory
Block
+AB
,
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-01
+AB
,
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
+AB
,
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-03
+AB
,
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number
Assignment
1-14-04
+AB
,
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-05
+AB
,
ARS Digit Add Assignment
1-14-06
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 34
Digital Voice Mail
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
D-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines can be connected to the system. With DID, incoming calls from the CO
can reach any station in the system without Attendant intervention.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R4000 or higher, the BRT(4)-U( ) ETU using 3.00 or higher firmware can support DID for
ISDN-BRI trunks.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DID(4)-U( ) ETU, PRT(1)-U( ) ETU, DTI-U( ) ETU, or PRT(1)-U( ) ETU with firmware 2.00 or higher
BRT(4)-U20 with Firmware 3.00 or higher.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When the number of DID incoming calls is not over the limit, and DID Forward Station Number for
Busy Station or Undefined Digit is active, forwarding is activated.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
A total of 16 DID(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the Expanded Port Package system. A total of
four DID(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the Electra Elite IPK Basic Port Package.
Each DID(4)-U( ) ETU provides connection circuitry to handle up to four DID lines. The Electra Elite
IPK Expanded Port Package is limited to 64 trunks and the Basic Port Package is limited to 16
trunks.
H
Each port of the DID(4)-U( ) ETU can be set to receive DTMF or DP (10 pps or 20 pps) signaling.
H
Incoming calls on DID lines follow Call Forward and Station Hunting.
H
DID calls can be routed to an ACD or UCD Hunt group.
H
Incoming DID calls can be assigned for voice announcement from the outside party, system-wide.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Outgoing restriction can be assigned, per station, to DID lines to prevent access when the line is
assigned on a line key.
DIDs can be routed to specified tenants using Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table).
When a call is terminated to a tenant, termination indication and ringing is performed only on
telephones in that tenant. On the telephones in other tenants, the red CO line key LED is on and
ringing is not assigned.
Termination to a tenant can also be specified as the destination for the Busy Station or undefined
digits.
DID incoming call termination can also be performed to the destination in the DID conversion table
(Day or Night) according to the day and night modes for that specified Tenant.
When the number of DID incoming calls is over, a busy signal is sent to the network. User Busy is
displayed when an incoming ISDN call is refused. The reason is Cause #17.
The following DID calls are counted against the number of total calls:
J
J
J
H
H
A call that is placed on hold, transferred, or conferenced.
A call received by one Tenant and Transferred to another Tenant counts against the first
Tenant.
A call that is received and disconnected.
Incoming DID numbers can be routed to any station in the system regardless of the numbering
plan. When an incoming DID number is invalid, the call can be sent to a preassigned station or
hunt group pilot number.
Use Memory Block 5-00 (Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking Assignment) to add and/or delete a
maximum of two digits per trunk group, from the incoming DID digits provided by the DID trunk for
incoming address signaling. Setting 0 allows DID Full Digit Modification that collects the incoming
digits and sends the call to a specified station number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 36
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
When a DID incoming call is not answered before a time specified in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie
Line Delay Ringing Time Selection) (default: ∞, no timeout), the call can switch to normal Day or
Night ringing assignment.
Use Memory Block 1-1-55 (DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection) to change the ringing pattern
(default: A) for an incoming DID call.
Use Memory Block 2-09 (DID Limit to Tenant Assignment) to specify the number of calls allowed to
ring at a specified Tenant.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
Memory Block 1-4-02 (Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection) is not
required to time out before incoming DID calls can be answered by the Automated Attendant (can
be set to No Limit).
A DID call does not activate External Tone Ringer or Night Chime.
When an incoming DID call changes to normal ringing, the call is still counted toward the number of
effective calls to the Tenant.
When the number of DID incoming calls is over the limit, and DID Forward Station Number for
Busy Station or Undefined Digit is active, forwarding is not activated, and the outside party
receives a Burst Tone.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, DID Digit Conversion is not supported.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BCT
,
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
,
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+ALT
Tie Line Type Assignment
3-14
+ALN
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-34
+ALN
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-53
+ALN
DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection
1-1-55
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+ALM
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
3-16
+ALM
Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout
Selection
3-25
+ALM
Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection
3-17
+ALM
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-07
+ALM
Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection
3-18
+ALM
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection
3-21
+ALM
Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection
3-22
+ALT
Tie Line Send Tone Selection
3-27
+ALT
Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection
3-28
+AN
ISDN-BRI/PRI Directory Number Checking
Selection
3-77
+ALN
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking
Assignment
5-00
+ALN
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-20
+ALN
DID Forward Station Number for Busy or
Undefined Digit
1-1-23
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-21
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-22
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BN
DID Limit to Tenant Assignment
2-09
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4
5-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 38
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 40
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
D-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows an outside caller to access the system from an outside line
without Attendant or station assistance. The outside user may originate a call over any system facility
such as a Tie line network or CO/PBX trunk after successfully entering a password.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU to hear a message telling the caller which digits to enter for DISA access. A message
is not required for DISA to work.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To place a call using DISA:
1.
Dial the desired number to connect to the system.
2.
A special tone is heard after ringback tone. When a VRS(4)-U( ) ETU is programmed for DISA, a
voice announcement can be provided instead of a special tone.
3.
Dial the DISA Access Code.
H
H
When accepted, internal dial tone is heard.
When denied, error tone is heard.
4.
Dial the DISA ID code (Station Number).
5.
Dial the password.
6.
Dial a Trunk Access Code and the desired outside number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To place an internal call using DISA:
1.
Dial the desired number to connect the system.
2.
Dial the station number.
To change a DISA password:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the DISA password set Access Code XX (default not assigned, System Programmable).
3.
Enter the ID code (station number is default).
4.
Enter the DISA password (default:
5.
Enter the new DISA password (maximum: 10 digits).
6.
Go on-hook.
KKKKKKKKKK
).
To reset the DISA password at the Attendant Position:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the DISA password reset Access Code XX (default not assigned, System Programmable).
3.
Enter the ID code (station number is default). Password is reset.
4.
Go on-hook.
To confirm a DISA password at the Attendant Position:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the DISA password confirmation Access Code XX (default not assigned, System
Programmable).
3.
Enter the ID code. Current password is displayed.
4.
Go on-hook.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 42
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set/cancel a CO/PBX line used for DISA at the Attendant Position:
A
HA
KK
A
.
HBKK FD
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Enter the CO/PBX line number (
to set or
to cancel.
~
).
= All Trunks
4.
Press
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
When the DISA feature is activated, the incoming outside caller hears a special tone when DISA
trunks are called. These trunks can still be used for outgoing calls.
A maximum 64 trunks for DISA can be installed in the Electra Elite IPK Expanded system, or 16
trunks in the Electra Elite IPK Basic system. Each trunk can be programmed for Day Mode or
Night Mode.
H
Code Restriction depends on setting a station that has a DISA ID number.
H
Outgoing calls using DISA cannot access LCR.
H
DISA ID Codes are printed in the SMDR record.
H
DISA Password is not printed in the SMDR record.
H
H
H
DISA feature is not available on DID. During DISA access and before entry of a DISA ID Code is
completed, press the key to return the caller to the beginning of the call. The caller must then
begin dialing the DISA Access Code.
With a VRS(4)-U( ) ETU installed, the incoming DISA caller can hear a message telling the caller
which digits to enter for DISA access.
The DISA feature allows outgoing trunk calls and internal call including Voice Mail access (when
equipped). Call Forwarding and VRS(4)-U( ) ETU access are not allowed.
Restrictions:
H
DTMF signaling is required from the outside caller.
H
Internal calls must be made before the DISA Access Code is entered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
Only trunks assigned AA in Memory Block 3-05 (Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection) are set
or canceled for Automated Attendant/DISA Mode when an Attendant enters 00 during the set or
cancel operation.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, the DISA ID Code is only four digits.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Access Codes (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Automated Attendant Message Day/Night
Mode Selection
1-4-11
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to PBR
Selection
1-8-01
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-05
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BD
DISA ID Code Assignment
1-9-00
+BD
DISA Password Effect/Invalid Selection
1-9-02
+BD
DISA ID Number Station Assignment
4-26
Automated Attendant Message Access Code
(1-Digit) Assignment
1-4-14
+AU
Automated Attendant Message Access Code
(2-Digit) Assignment
1-4-15
+BTS
Specified Station Access Code Assignment
1-2-08
+AU
Automated Attendant PBR Start Time
Selection
1-4-09
+BA
+AU
,
+BTI
,
+BCT
,
+AU
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
251~
253,
1-8, 2-5,
2-6
2-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 44
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AU
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release
Time Selection
1-4-01
+AU
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response
Selection
1-4-08
+AU
PBR Receive Level Assignment for
Automated Attendant/DISA
1-8-02
+AU
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed
Ringing Time Selection
1-4-02
+AU
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern
1-1-54
+AU
Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect
Time Selection
1-4-03
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
Tone Assignment
1-8-15
(Tone Table)
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension
Assignment
1-4-04
+BI
+AT
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 46
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
D-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Direct Inward Termination (DIT) allows CO/PBX lines to be programmed to bypass the Attendant and
ring directly at stations or tenants. A separate Assigned Night Answer (ANA) ringing assignment is
available. A System or Tenant group can be set to the Night Mode independently.
System software supports delay ringing to DIT or to DIT trunks to a tenant.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
No manual operation is required.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
When an idle station programmed for DIT receives an incoming DIT call, internal ring tone is heard
at the station(s) where a Secondary Incoming Extension is assigned to ring.
DIT incoming ringing is assigned for Distinctive Ring or Synchronous Ring system-wide.
When a busy station programmed for DIT receives an incoming DIT call, the system provides
Camp-On tone for the busy station. The calling party receives ringback tone until the call is
answered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
When a busy station receives an incoming DIT Camp-On tone, the existing call can be terminated,
held (including Call Park), automatically held, or transferred to enable the station user to answer
the incoming DIT call.
CO/PBX lines can be assigned to ring a station number, CAR key, a hunt group master number, or
an ACD/UCD Pilot number.
Multiple CO/PBX lines can be assigned to ring at the same station, hunt group master number, or
MIF ACD/UCD Pilot number. Incoming DIT calls follow the station Call Forward setting.
Incoming DIT calls follow the station Call Forward setting.
Restrictions:
H
Incoming DIT calls cannot be answered directly at the CO line key appearance. The CO line key
indicates Other Use (red LED).
H
An incoming call cannot be DIT/ANA to a station in a remote system.
H
A DIT call does not activate External Tone Ringer or Night Chime.
Data Assignment:
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-8
Answer Hold
C-1
Call Alert Notification
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BCT
,
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
,
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BCT
DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time Selection
3-61
+BCT
DIT Tenant Assignment
3-62
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 48
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BCT
DIT Weekend Mode Selection
3-63
+BCT
DIT Night Mode Delay Answer Selection
3-64
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
Call Forward - Busy Immediately/Delay
Selection
4-42
+BM
Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BTM
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 50
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
Direct Paging Access
D-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Attendant Add-On Console Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) keys allow direct
access to Internal or External Page Zones or All Call Paging. Feature Access and One-Touch keys on
the Multiline Terminals can be used for Direct Paging Access.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals and Attendant Add-On Consoles
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU for External Zone Paging
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature at a Multiline Terminal with a Feature Access or a One-Touch key programmed for
Direct Paging Access or with the Attendant Add-On Console assigned:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Press the Direct Paging Access key.
3.
Make the paging announcement.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
When a Direct Paging Access key for All Internal Zone or Internal Zone Page on the Attendant
Add-On Console is pressed, a paging announcement is made over the speakers of all idle Multiline
Terminals programmed in a zone.
Paging access through external speakers is available when a system has external speakers. An
optional ECR-U( ) ETU is required.
Single Line Telephone users can access Internal and External Paging and Meet-Me by using an
Access Code, but cannot receive a paging announcement.
Feature Access and One-Touch keys on Multiline Terminals can be assigned for paging allowed in
System Programming, including the features listed previously and All Internal Call Paging, Internal/
External Paging, and specific Tenant Internal Paging.
All Attendant Add-On Consoles have eight Direct Paging Access keys. Default Memory Block
1-6-05 (Attendant Add-On Console Key selection) DSS key assignments are shown below:
DSS
Key No.
H
DSS
Key No.
1.
Internal Zone A
50
5.
External Zone A
56
2.
Internal Zone B
51
6.
External Zone B
57
3.
Internal Zone C
52
7.
External Zone C
58
4.
All Internal Zone
53
8.
All External Zone
59
Default Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] Dial Numbers are shown below:
Dial No.
Dial No.
1.
All Internal Zone
51
5.
All External Zone
55
2.
Internal Zone A
52
6.
External Zone A
56
3.
Internal Zone B
53
7.
External Zone B
57
4.
Internal Zone C
54
8.
External Zone C
58
Restrictions:
H
H
All Internal/External Page Access cannot be programmed to a key on the Attendant Add-On
Console.
Internal Zones A, B, and C are not active until zone assignments are made.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 52
Direct Paging Access
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-8
Answer Hold
E-17
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
I-6
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
Memory
Block
Function
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
070 ~079,
081
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
¦
¦
¦
+BA
System Data Name
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 54
Direct Paging Access
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
D-13
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Direct Station Selection (DSS) allows all Multiline Terminal users to press one key to make station calls.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals and Attendant Add-On Consoles
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal with a Feature Access or a One-Touch key programmed for DSS:
1.
Press the programmed Feature Access key. Hear ringback tone or make voice announcement.
2.
When the called party answers, talk with called party.
Using a Multiline Terminal with the Attendant Add-On assigned:
1.
Lift the headset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Press the DSS/BLF key on the Attendant Add-On Console. Hear ringback tone or make voice
announcement.
3.
When called party answers, talk with party.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
When station numbers are assigned to Feature Access or One-Touch keys on a Multiline Terminal,
the user can press the DSS key to call the station.
When you press a DSS key to call a busy station, a call waiting tone is sent to the calling station.
Any other station that calls the original busy station receives a busy tone while the first calling
station is receiving call waiting tone.
A station user may press a different DSS key on the station or Attendant Add-On Console to
directly call another station.
When a station user, with a completed internal call, presses a key on the Attendant Add-On
Console to call another station user, the first internal call is placed on hold (Conf key).
With an outside call in progress, press any DSS key to place the outside call on Non-Exclusive
Hold.
When the DSS key has an LED associated with it, BLF indication is also provided.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
B-6
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 56
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
Assignment
1-6-01
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BTD
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-6-03
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 58
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Distinctive Ringing
D-14
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Distinctive Ringing feature distinguishes between internal and incoming outside calls and provides
distinct ring audible signals and patterns.
System Software allows Distinctive Ring Patterns to be assigned per outside CO line or per telephone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Incoming outside and internal calls use flexible ringing tones and patterns.
H
Distinctive ringing patterns are as follows:
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
Internal ring tone has a pattern of 1 sec. On/2 sec. Off (default).
Incoming CO/PBX outside calls are assigned synchronous ring. The ringing pattern
connected from the exchange to the CO/PBX/Centrex lines is repeated at all stations
assigned to ring, except for Single Line Telephones connected to AP(R)-R Unit or APR-U
Unit.
When synchronous ringing is disabled, an incoming CO call can be assigned to ring at one
pattern and an incoming PBX/Centrex call can ring at a different pattern.
Incoming TIE/DID outside calls provide a distinctive ring pattern of 2 seconds ON/4 seconds
OFF (system default).
Incoming TIE/DID is 0.25 sec. ON/0.25 sec. OFF (default).
AA transfer call is 0.5 sec. ON/0.5 sec. OFF (system default).
DIT/ANA calls to stations also provide Distinctive Ringing (Synchronous ring pattern).
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for detailed in information about ringing
patterns and ring tones.
Restrictions:
H
The transfer tone and pattern are used for the transferred calls regardless of the tone and pattern
initially used by the trunk.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 60
Distinctive Ringing
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Incoming Trunk Call
CO
TEL
Priority?
M.B. 4-57
Yes
A~H
M.B. 3-67?
DIT, AA, or DID
Call?
Tone Follows
M.B.3-07
– (None)
Individual
DIT, AA, or DID
Call?
No
Yes
M.B. 4-55?
for Ringing Port
– (None)
No
Determine Pattern by Trunk Type:
M.B. 1-1-51 CO
M.B. 1-1-52 PBX
M.B. 1-1-53 Tie
M.B. 1-1-54 DID
M.B. 1-1-55 AA
M.B. 1-1-34 Tie (individual)
The ringing tone follows M.B. 3-07 and
M.B. 4-91 determined by setting of
M.B. 1-1-28.
Tone Follows
M.B.4-91
– (None)
M.B. 3-67?
A~H
No
CO/PBX Trunk?
Tone Follows
M.B.3-07
Yes
No
M.B. 1-1-59
Synchronous?
Yes
Synchronous
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 61
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+BTT
,
+BTT
,
+BCT
,
Memory
Block
CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection
4-57
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection for
Telephone Mode
4-55
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection for CO/PBX
Line Mode
3-67
Synchronous Ringing Selection
1-1-59
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO
Selection
1-1-28
+BCT
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
3-07
+BTM
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection
4-91
+BCS
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
1-1-51
+BCS
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection
1-1-52
+ALN
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-53
+BM
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time
Selection
1-1-06
+ALM
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-07
+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-13
+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
1-1-14
+BI
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
1-2-20
+BCS
+BTS
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 62
Distinctive Ringing
Do Not Disturb (DND)
D-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Do Not Disturb (DND) temporarily eliminates all audible signals for incoming calls to isolate the station
from others in the system.
ENHANCEMENTS
With 2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows Do Not Disturb (DND)
settings to be assigned and saved as part of the site database.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Do Not Disturb using a Multiline Terminal:
A
FK
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
in idle mode.
.
.
- OR -
Press the DND On/Off key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 63
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set Do Not Disturb at any station:
E
DKP
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial DND set:
3.
Go on-hook or press
.
(default).
.
To cancel Do Not Disturb using a Multiline Terminal:
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
FI
in idle mode.
.
.
- OR -
Press the DND ON/OFF key.
To cancel Do Not Disturb at any station:
E
DBE
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial DND cancel;
3.
Go on-hook or press
.
(default).
.
To cancel Call Forward - All Call and Do No Disturb System-Wide at Attendant Positions only:
A
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
.
FH
1.
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 64
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
The Do Not Disturb set and cancel Access Codes can be programmed on separate Feature
Access or One-Touch keys. The DND set key LED (if equipped) does not light when DND is set.
When a station has a Do Not Disturb single ON/OFF key assigned, the LED lights when DND is
set.
When a station user sets this feature, the associated red LED winks on any DSS/BLF key assigned
for that station.
Transferred/Hold Recalls, Trunk Queues, Automatic Callback, and Barge-In override the DND
setting.
Setting DND eliminates most audible signals that are sent through the speaker, including Voice
Announcement. However, a call to this station can still be answered.
H
An incoming doorphone call overrides the DND mode allowing the doorphone chime to be heard.
H
Callback Request may be set to a Multiline Terminal in DND mode.
H
H
When DND is set, a Customized Message is displayed in the LCD (when equipped) of the Multiline
Terminal. The user can select any of the 10 messages assigned in System Programming.
Internal calls to a station in DND result in a Call Waiting Tone. The LCD on the calling party
Multiline Terminal displays a Customized Message indicating the called party is unavailable.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
Automatic Callback cannot be set to a station in DND mode.
When DND and Call Forward – All Call are set at the same time at a station, Call Forward – All Call
takes priority.
Ring Transfer, Camp-On, and Tone Override cannot be set to a station that has DND set.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 65
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-27
Customized Message
P-1
PC Programming
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
2-3
1-1
4-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 66
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Door Lock Release Relays
D-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The DPH(4)-U( ) ETU provides four doorphones and four Door Lock Release Relays. While a station
user is talking to a Doorphone, an Access Code can be dialed to operate the relay associated with that
Doorphone.
The time the door lock release is active depends on the digit code dialed.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
DP-D-1A Doorphone
OPERATING PROCEDURES
While a Multiline Terminal is connected to a Doorphone:
1.
Dial a single digit code
2.
BI
AJ
~
to control the door-to-lock release make time.
Make means shorted or closed.
Dial a single digit code
or
to make the relay break again. This step is optional as the relay
breaks after some time anyway (controlled in step 1).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 67
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Relay make times are flexible.
Dial
H
Time
2
2 seconds
3
4 seconds
4
6 seconds
5
8 seconds
6
10 seconds
7
12 seconds
8
14 seconds
9
15 seconds
1
Break (Open)
,
Break (Open)
The relay is controlled by the last entry. For example, 5 was dialed (8 seconds) then 9 is dialed.
The relay should remain active for 15 more seconds.
Restrictions:
H
Door Lock Release Relays cannot be controlled by Single Line Telephones, PSII, or Wireless
Telephones.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-17
Feature Name
Door/Monitor Telephone
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 68
Door Lock Release Relays
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦¦
¦¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BTP
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-00
+BTP
Doorphone Display Time Selection
1-7-01
+BTP
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
1-7-04
+BTP
Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection
1-7-05
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-03
+BCP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-04
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 69
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 70
Door Lock Release Relays
Door/Monitor Telephone
D-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK system supports up to four Door/Monitor telephones. A doorphone can be called by
a station user or a station (or number of stations) can be signaled when a doorphone call button is
pressed. When a station answers the doorphone ringing, a 2-way speech path is established.
In addition to the doorphone ringing assignment, both the tone and cadence of doorphone ringing can be
defined. This allows the station user to distinguish a doorphone call from any other call.
The Door/Monitor Telephone works closely with the Door Lock Release feature, and the DPH(4)-U( )
ETU that supports both features.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
Up to four DP-D-1A Doorphones
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To call a Doorphone at a Multiline Terminal:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the desired Doorphone Access Code (default is not defined).
3.
Door Lock Release can be controlled while you talk with the doorphone user.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 71
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer a Doorphone at a Multiline Terminal:
While the Multiline Terminal requiring doorphone is ringing, lift the handset or press
E
.
To answer a Doorphone that is ringing at another Multiline Terminal:
1.
When the Doorphone Ringing is ringing at another station, dial the DP1, DP2, DP3, or DP4 Access
Code for the specific doorphone that is ringing.
2.
The Door Lock Release Relay can be controlled while you talk with the doorphone user.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Doorphones 1 and 3 share a speech path and doorphones 2 and 4 share a speech path. When a
doorphone is busy, the speech path is busy. Ringing indication works, but the other doorphone
cannot be answered until the speech path is idle.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
Doorphone Ringing cannot be assigned to Single Line Telephones, including those supported by
analog port adapters.
Doorphone Ringing cannot be assigned to PSII or Wireless Telephones.
An incoming doorphone call overrides Do Not Disturb (DND) mode to allow the doorphone chime
to be heard.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-16
Feature Name
Door Lock Release Relays
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 72
Door/Monitor Telephone
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
,
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BTP
,
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-00
+BTP
,
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-03
+BTP
,
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
4-04
+BTP
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
1-7-04
+BTP
Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection
1-7-05
+BTP
Doorphone Display Assignment
1-7-01
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 73
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 74
Door/Monitor Telephone
DP to DTMF Switching
D-18
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
DP to DTMF Switching is required for systems connected to Dial Pulse (DP) Tie lines that communicate
with computers that require DTMF signaling.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU or DTI-U( ) ETU assigned to support Tie lines.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To switch an outside call in progress on the Dial Pulse line:
J L
1.
Dial
2.
Dial desired number.
and
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
After a DP line is switched to DTMF using an Access Code, the connection can be switched back
to DP only by going on-hook.
DP/DTMF switching operations can be programmed as part of the Speed Dial program.
This feature is not required for DTMF Single Line Telephones. These telephones send their own
DTMF signals over the voice path to the outside equipment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 75
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Code Restriction, Outgoing Restriction, and LCR are not bypassed when this feature is used.
Restrictions:
H
H
This operation can be performed only on Tie lines.
Dial Pulse Single Line Telephones cannot send DTMF signals, and cannot be used with this
feature.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
E-6
Feature Name
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BCT
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
3-92
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 76
DP to DTMF Switching
D-19
Drop Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Drop Key abandons a call while retaining the PBX/Centrex line to originate another call. The Drop
Key is provided by programming a Feature Access or One-Touch key. This feature allows the Recall
key to be used to provide a hookflash to the PBX or Central office.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program a Feature Access key as a Drop key:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial
6.
Press
L
EA
.
.
.
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 77
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a One-Touch key as a Drop key:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the One-Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial
6.
Press
L
EA
.
.
.
.
.
To use the Drop key from a Multiline Terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press the Feature Access or One-Touch key programmed as a Drop key.
2.
Receive new CO/PBX dial tone.
3.
Dial the desired number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When on a CO/PBX call, you can press the Feature key and dial 5 to use the Drop key feature.
Restrictions:
H
H
The Drop key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO/PBX lines. The time of a disconnect signal
is fixed at 1.5 seconds and cannot be changed by System Programming.
The Drop key cannot be used for internal, DID, or Tie line calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 78
Drop Key
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
R-1
Feature Name
Recall Key
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 79
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 80
Drop Key
Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal
D-20
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The NEC Dterm Analog Cordless terminal may be used with the Electra Elite IPK KTS. The DTR-1R-1
TEL terminal uses 2.4 GHz Digital Spread Spectrum (DSS) Technology and is connected to an analog
port using SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) or OPX(2)-U( ) ETU, SLT(1)-U( ) ADP, or an APR-U Unit connected to a
multiline terminal. This terminal does not have an LCD display.
The 2.4 GHz frequency range provides secure conversation with the clarity of digital sound and reduced
interference. The operating range is 50 to 250 feet.
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without interference
varies.
Features include:
2.4 GHz Digital Spread Spectrum
30 Channel Autoscan
10-Number Memory DiaLing
Desk Or Wall-Mount Option
Tone/Pulse dialing
Handset Volume Control
32-Digit Redial
Page/Find
AutoTalk
AutoStandby 
AutoTalk and AutoStandby are trademarks of Uniden America Corp.
6-Hour Talk Time
7 Day Standby Time
Hearing Aid Compatible
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 81
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTR-1R-1 TEL
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To connect Base Unit:
1.
Connect the telephone line between the TEL LINE connector on the Base and a telephone outlet.
2.
Connect AC Adapter between DC IN 9V connector on the Base and 120 VAC wall outlet.
3.
Place the Base on a desktop/tabletop.
4.
Place the handset on the Base.
5.
Place the antenna vertical.
To answer a call:
When the telephone rings, remove the handset from the Base to access AutoTalk.
- OR When the handset is off the Base, press any key.
To place a call:
1.
Remove the handset from the Base, and press talk.
2.
The talk/battery low LED flashes green and is then on continuously.
3.
Listen for dial tone.
4.
Dial the number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 82
Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To hang up:
Return the handset to the base to access AutoStandby.
- OR When the handset is off the Base, press talk.
To redial:
1.
Pick up the handset, and press talk.
2.
Listen for dial tone.
3.
Press redial to dial the last number called.
To store a pulse-dialed number in memory:
1.
Remove the handset from the Base, and press memory. The talk/battery low LED flashes.
2.
Enter the telephone number (up to 20 digits) to be stored.
3.
Press memory, and enter the memory location (0~9) to be used for storage.
4.
Listen for a long beep, and the talk/battery low LED goes off to indicate the number is stored.
5.
When any key other than 0~9 is selected, the handset beeps rapidly to indicate that a number was not
stored.
Log the number entered.
To enter a pause in memory dialing:
1.
After entering the number to be stored in memory, press pause to enter a pause in the number
sequence.
2.
When pause is to be entered it counts as a digit, and the number can have only 19 digits.
Complete steps 3~5 of the memory store procedure.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 83
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To store a tone-dialed number in memory:
1.
Remove the handset from the Base, and press memory.
2.
Press tone.
When tone is pressed it counts as a digit, and the number can have only 19 digits.
3.
Enter telephone number (up to 19 digits) to be stored.
4.
Press memory, and enter the storage location (0~9).
When you store a number in an occupied memory location the new number replaces the one
previously stored.
5.
Listen for long beep, and wait for talk/battery low LED to go off to ensure that the number is stored.
6.
Log the stored number.
To dial a stored memory number:
1.
Press talk.
2.
Press memory.
3.
Press memory location (0~9).
4.
The telephone dials the stored number.
To chain dial a special Access Code:
1.
Store the access code in a memory location.
2.
Dial the main number.
3.
Press memory and memory location (0~9) to enter access code as applicable.
To erase a stored number:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Press memory twice.
3.
Press memory location to erase.
4.
A long beep confirms that the number is erased.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 84
Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Mute operation:
1.
During a call, press mute to turn off the microphone.
2.
To cancel mute, press mute or talk.
To select a different channel:
1.
When interference interrupts a call, press channel.
2.
The talk/battery low LED flashes to indicate that the telephone is switching to another channel.
Factory set channels (30) are provided for switching.
This feature operates only when the telephone is in use.
To access Call Waiting:
1.
When you receive a call during conversation, press flash to access the new call.
2.
Press flash to return to the previous call.
To use page/find feature to locate the handset:
1.
Press page/find on the Base.
2.
The handset beeps for five seconds.
3.
Press and hold page/find for more than two seconds to get a continuous beep from the handset for
one minute.
4.
Hold page/find down for more than one minute, and the handset beeps until page/find is released.
5.
Press talk to end the page.
6.
Press talk again to make a call.
This feature does not work when the telephone is in use.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 85
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 86
Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal
Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal
D-21
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Terminal may be used with the Electra Elite IPK KTS. The DTR-4R-1 TEL
uses 900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum (DSS) Technology and must be connected in tandem to a
Multiline Terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and Multiline Terminal
operation.
Dterm Cordless II
(DTR-4R-1)
Feature
Digital Technology
900 MHz Spread Spectrum
LCD
2 x 16
Silent Alarm
Yes
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN,
REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Dedicated Keys
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range
,
Message Waiting Indication
4
50~350 feet
Icon
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
10
, Determined by environmental conditions.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTR-4R-1 TEL
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 87
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program the Dterm Cordless II:
1.
Press and hold down , and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red.
2.
Press R/VOL repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key F1.
3.
Press MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line Key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press R/VOL to toggle between /TALK for ON or /NO TALK for OFF.
5.
Press MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F4).
6.
After programming F4, press MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press R/VOL to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing ON/OFF (LCD indicates ON or OFF).
8.
Press TALK to exit.
Function keys F1 ~ F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS),
Feature (FNC), or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC Multiline
Terminal.
When initially installed, function keys F1~F4 default to Line Keys 1~4 respectively and Off-Hook
Ringing defaults to ON.
Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any Function key to work with Off-Hook Ringing.
To place an internal call:
icon is displayed.
1.
Press TALK.
2.
Dial Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4) programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
3.
Announce call after tone burst or wait for call to be answered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 88
Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To place an outside call:
icon is displayed.
1.
Press TALK.
2.
Dial Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4) programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
3.
Announce call after tone burst or wait for call to be answered.
To answer an Incoming Ringing Call:
icon is displayed.
1.
When the handset is in the charger, lift it.
2.
When the handset is out of the Base Unit, press TALK if ringing line preference is assigned.
icon is displayed.
3.
Talk.
To place a call on Hold (internal or outside):
With a call in process, press HOLD.
To retrieve a held call, press flashing F1~F4.
After a programmed time, the held call recalls to the originating terminal.
To redial a number:
1.
Press REDIAL.
2.
The previously dialed number is called.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 89
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To transfer a call:
1.
With a call in process, press TRANSFER.
2.
Dial Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4) programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
3.
Announce call (optional).
4.
Press TALK to complete transfer.
To place a conference call:
1.
With a call in progress, press CONF.
2.
Place second internal or external call.
3.
Announce conference.
4.
Press CONF again. A 3-party conference is established. When any party hangs up, the
conference still includes the remaining parties.
To adjust ring volume:
While the telephone is not being used, press R/VOL (upper key on left side) repeatedly to select desired
setting display:
Ring Type A High
Ring Type A Low
Ring Type B High
Ring Type B Low
Ring Type C High
Ring Type C Low
Ring Off (Vibration)
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 90
Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To adjust receive volume level:
1.
With a call in progress, press R/VOL to decrease volume.
2.
Press R/VOL to restore normal volume.
To Mute the Microphone:
1.
Press and hold MUTE (lower key on left side).
2.
Release MUTE to activate microphone.
To use the Charging Unit:
1.
Place handset and/or spare battery in the charging slots.
2.
The Charge 1 LED is on red during and after charging the handset.
3.
The Charge 2 LED is on red while charging the spare battery and turns after charging is complete.
If the handset is placed in the charger without an installed battery, the Charge 1 LED flashes.
To Switch from Cordless to Desk Using Base Unit:
1.
When Cordless II is associated with a terminal, use the Base Unit to switch between Cordless II
and the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Cordless II Base Unit Controls illustration on the next page.
2.
Either press Cordless to select Dterm Cordless II.
3.
Or press Desk to select Multiline Terminal.
Switching must be accomplished while both terminals are idle.
A call in progress cannot be switched. When tried, it is dropped.
Switching held calls is not recommended because LED indications are not provided.
The Power LED and the applicable position LED are on to indicate selection.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 91
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Cordless II Base Unit Controls
To switch from Desk to Cordless using Redial Key:
1.
Verify that the Base Unit is in Desk mode.
2.
Remove battery.
3.
Press and hold
4.
Install the battery while holding these keys.
5.
After the handset beeps one time, release the keys.
6.
The handset is in Setup mode.
7.
Press HOLD to display the current mode (Digital/Redial).
8.
Press F2 and then HOLD.
9.
The handset displays Digital (F8), and changes the REDIAL key program to Desk/Cordless
Softkey Switching mode.
10.
Press TALK to restore standby mode.
11.
Press REDIAL to test this feature.
12.
The Base Unit automatically changes from Desk to Cordless.
J L
and
on the handset.
This is a one time operation, but one of the F1~F4 keys can be programmed for the redial function.
13.
To restore the normal redial function, enter setup mode, and press F3 and HOLD to display Digital
(Redial).
14.
Press TALK to restore standby mode.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 92
Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When a message is received the icon is displayed.
H
When the RING OFF/ON switch on the right side is down the
H
When the battery is low, the
H
H
H
LOW
OFF icon is displayed.
icon is displayed.
When there is no transmission between the Base Unit and the handset for about five minutes,
there are no LCD or LED indications on the cordless terminal handset. Ringing off-hook or
pressing keys resumes LCD and LED indications.
The ring pattern for the cordless terminal can be selected by System Programming and Multiline
Terminals.
When a cordless terminal is ringing, press the flashing function key programmed for DSS to
answer the call.
H
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.
H
A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.
H
H
H
H
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
Multiple Base Units and handset units should not be closer than 20 feet anytime.
Radio interference causes interruptions in conversation. When this happens, your unit is not
defective. When noise continues, move to a different location while you talk. (You might even need
to move the base unit.) When the situation persists, contact NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., National
Technical Assistance Center (NTAC).
Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings have been found to reduce
telephone performance.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 93
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 94
Dterm ® Cordless II Terminal
Dterm ® Cordless Lite II Terminal
D-22
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Terminal may be used with the Electra Elite IPK KTS. The DTH-4R-( ) TEL
uses 900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital) Technology and is connected in tandem to a Multiline Terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and Multiline Terminal
operation.
Dterm Cordless Lite II
(DTH-4R-1)
Feature
Digital Technology
900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital)
LCD
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm
Yes
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN,
REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Dedicated Keys
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range
,
Message Waiting Indication
4
50~150 feet
Yes (Icon)
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
30
, Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices
and, therefore, some interference may take place when operating in the
same environment as other wireless devices which operate within the
same frequency spectrum.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTH-4R-( ) TEL
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 95
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
REQUIRED COMPONENTS:
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
- OR ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
- OR ESIE(8)-U( ) Unit
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set up and program the Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1):
1.
Press and hold down , and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red and F1=LK01 is
displayed on the LCD.
2.
Press Ring/Vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key
F1.
3.
Press On/Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press Ring/Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off.
TALK is selected when the F1~F4 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys. NO
TALK is selected when F1~F4 function keys are programmed for functions not requiring an off-hook state
(e.g., Log On/Off or DND.)
5.
Press On/Off MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F4).
6.
After programming F4, press On/Off MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press Ring/Vol to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing On or Off (LCD indicates ON or OFF as
appropriate).
8.
Press TALK to exit.
Function keys F1 ~ F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS),
Feature (FNC), or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC Multiline
Terminal.
When initially installed, function keys F1~F4 default to Line keys 1~4 respectively and Off-Hook
Ringing defaults to ON.
Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any function key to operate with off-hook ringing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 96
Dterm ® Cordless Lite II Terminal
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone Using the
Base Unit:
When the Dterm Cordless Lite II is associated with a Multiline Telephone the following is applicable:
H
Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are
idle.
H
A call in progress can not be switched between the Dterm Cordless Lite II and the associated
Multiline Telephone.
H
Switching held calls between the Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone and the associated Multiline
Telephone is not recommended because line key LED indications are not provided.
Switching from Multiline Telephone and Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone:
1.
Press the Cordless button on the base unit.
- OR Press REDIAL key from the Dterm Cordless Lite II handset. ,
, This applies only if the REDIAL key is programmed to perform desk to cordless switching.
To switch from Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone to Multiline Telephone:
1.
Press the DESK button on the base unit.
For additional Operating Procedures, refer to the Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1) Owner’s Guide.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
When the Dterm Cordless Lite II can be used in conjunction with the Electra Elite, Electra Elite IPK,
and Dterm Series E and Series i Digital Multiline Telephones.
Battery Capacity is 700 mAh, 3.6V with a Talk Mode of six hours (typical) and a Standby Mode of
five days (typical).
The battery can be hot swapped while on a call. The battery must be replaced with another
charged battery pack within 20 seconds, otherwise the connection is lost.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 97
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition.
H
When a message is received, the message icon is displayed.
H
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.
H
A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
A spare battery is available as an Optional Available Part. A second battery is not shipped with the
product.
The battery can be charged only when it is installed in the handset and the handset is in the
charger. A stand-alone battery charger is not available.
Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings have been found to reduce
telephone performance.
When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office, they must operate on different channels
and be at least 20 feet apart (including the base unit and the telephones).
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-26
Cordless Telephone Connection
D-20
Dterm ® Analog Cordless Terminal
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 98
Dterm ® Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm ® Handset Cordless
D-23
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal is a stand-alone telephone with a direct connection to one digital
port on the ESI(8)-U( ) ETU.
The Dterm Handset Cordless Terminal has the following features:
40 separate Channels for Base unit communication
3-Channel semi-auto scan (MCA)
900 MHz Analog FM spectrum with Voice Scramble
MW Lamp for incoming call and voice mail message notification
30-100 foot operating range between Handset and Base unit without obstructions or other
environmental factors
Auto Talk Feature
Any Key Answer
LED Low Battery Warning
Talk (Talk), Transfer (Trf), Mute (Mute), Channel (Ch), Volume (Vol), and Ringer On/Off keys
4-hour Talk Time
40-hour Standby Time
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTP-16HC-1 TEL
AC(A)-U Power Adapter
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 99
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
All Operating Procedures assume these features are assigned to the DTP-16HC-1 terminal:
Prime Line Pickup to the Primary Extension
Ringing Line Preference
To change the Auto Talk mode:
1.
Hold down Trf key while changing the Ringer On/Off switch from Off to On.
2.
When mode changes a confirmation tone is generated:
Auto Talk Off: 3 Beeps
Auto Talk On: 2 Beeps
Answering calls:
1.
When the Handset is on the Base Unit, only the Base Unit rings and the Large LED flashes as
usual.
2.
When in Standby mode, the handset and Base Unit both ring and the message waiting LED
flashes rapidly in conjunction with the Base Unit Talk/Batt.low LED.
When Ringer On/Off switch is in Off mode, the Handset does not ring, but the message waiting LED
flashes.
With Auto Talk off:
1.
When the Handset is on the Base Unit, lift it and press any key.
2.
The Talk/Batt.low LED flashes then lights continuously to indicate established communication path
between the Handset and the Base Unit.
3.
Talk to the caller. The Message waiting LED is Off.
4.
When finished, press the Talk key or place Handset back in the Base Unit to disconnect the call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 100
Dterm ® Handset Cordless
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
With Auto Talk On:
1.
When the Handset is on the Base Unit, lift it.
2.
The Talk/Batt.low LED flashes then lights continuously to indicate established communication path
between the Handset and the Base station.
3.
Talk to the caller. The Message waiting LED is Off.
4.
When finished, press the Talk key or place Handset back in the Base Unit to disconnect the call.
5.
In Auto Standby, the Talk key does not have to be pressed to disconnect. Place the Handset in the
Base Unit to disconnect the call.
After call is disconnected the Message Waiting LED becomes active again when messages are
waiting.
Setting handset ringer On/Off Volume in Standby Mode:
1.
Press Vol key to adjust volume normal or high.
2.
While Vol is pressed, the ringer starts to ring based on the current setting.
Ringer Volume can be adjusted with Ringer On/Off key in Off.
To Adjust Receiver Volume with a call in progress:
Press the Vol key repeatedly to adjust from Medium High Low Normal in this order.
When call is disconnected, default volume returns to Normal.
To Mute Handset to disable the microphone:
1.
Press Mute key.
2.
The Talk/Batt.low Led Blinks 500 msec On, 500msec Off during Mute.
3.
Press Mute again to reactivate the microphone.
Voice is not transmitted during Mute.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 101
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To make a call with Auto Talk Off:
1.
Lift the Handset from the Base Unit.
2.
Press Talk key.
3.
The Talk/Batt.low LED flashes then lights continuously to indicate an established communication
path between the Handset and the Base Unit and dial tone is generated.
4.
Dial the number.
5.
Talk to the party.
6.
When finished, press the Talk key or place Handset back in the Base Unit to disconnect the call.
To make a call with Auto Talk On:
1.
Lift the Handset from the Base Unit.
2.
The Talk/Batt.low LED flashes then lights continuously to indicate established communication path
between the Handset and the Base Unit and dial tone is generated.
3.
Dial the number.
4.
Talk to the party.
5.
When finished, press the Talk key or place Handset back in the Base Unit to disconnect the call.
To Hold a call in progress at the Base Unit:
1.
Press Hold and return the Handset to the Base Unit.
2.
To return to the held party press the flashing green line key and press Talk or pick up the Handset.
After a programmed time, the held call recalls to the originating terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 102
Dterm ® Handset Cordless
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To Hold a call in progress at the handset:
1.
Press Trf.
2.
An Internal Dial tone is generated.
3.
To return to the held party press the flashing green line key.
After a programmed time the held call recalls to the originating terminal.
To establish a conference call at the Base Unit:
1.
With a call in progress, press Conf on the Base Unit.
2.
Dial another station number.
3.
Announce Conference (Optional).
4.
Press Conf on the Base Unit to establish the conference.
To Install the battery:
1.
Slide the battery compartment cover on the lower Handset back down to remove it.
2.
Remove the IMPORTANT charging NOTE from the battery compartment.
3.
Align the guides on the bottom of the battery plug and insert it in the connector.
4.
Put the battery in the compartment with the description visible.
5.
Replace and push up the cover to snap it in place.
Ensure that the wires are inside the cover.
To install the belt clip:
1.
Position clip to the back side of the Handset unit with the clip spring pointed up.
2.
Align the four prongs of the clip to the four slots on the sides of the Handset.
3.
Gently press belt clip to snap the prongs into place.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 103
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The Handset Cordless terminal provides 40 different channels for communication with the Base
Unit.
When communication is stopped for about 30 seconds during handset conversation, the Handset
Cordless terminal automatically searches for a clear channel. An error tone rings the handset
when it is not on the Base Unit.
When reception becomes garbled or static occurs during conversation, channels can be changed
manually. Press the Ch key to activate the 3-channel automatic scan (MCA). When channel
change fails, an error tone is generated and the channel does not change. While the channel is
changing, the Talk/Batt.low LED flashes (On 100 msec., Off 100 msec.).
When a communication path is established between the Handset Cordless terminal and the Base
Unit, the Talk/Batt.low LED is on and dial tone is generated.
When a communication path cannot be established in 5 sec., an error tone is generated and the
Handset returns to standby.
A pencil eraser or contact cleaner should be used monthly to clean the battery contacts on the
Handset and Base Unit to maintain stable charge.
When the battery is low during standby, the Talk/Batt.low LED blinks (On 50 msec., Off 50 msec.).
When the battery is low during a call, an alarm tone is generated, and the Talk/Batt.low LED blinks
(On 50 msec., Off 50 msec.). The Handset must be returned to the Base Unit.
The battery is charged by the line voltage.
Restrictions:
H
Only one Handset Cordless terminal can be connected per ESI port.
H
A provided RF line cord should be used for best performance.
H
The Handset Cordless is a stand-alone terminal.
H
H
H
Base units of the Handset Cordless terminals should be installed at least 17 feet apart for optimum
performance. The distance range between the Base Unit and the handset is 30~100 feet without
obstructions, depending on the environment.
Distance of DTP-16HC-1 from the switch is 60 Meters (197 Feet). Condition is less than 10 ohms
loop resistance. Maximum distance when ACA-U Unit is connected, is 330 meters (1,083 Feet).
Condition is less than 57 ohms loop resistance.
The Handset does not ring when the battery is low.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 104
Dterm ® Handset Cordless
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The standard charged nickel-cadmium battery may last four hours for conversation and 40 hours
for standby. Initially the battery must be charged without interruption for 17.5 hours. The charge
LED (below the Base Unit contacts) is red during charging and remains on after charging is
completed.
After continuous charging, the Handset battery may fail to charge or discharge quickly. In either
case, operate the Handset until the low battery alarm sounds, auto shutoff occurs, and the battery
is fully discharged. Charge the battery without interruption for 17.5 hours. When the battery no
longer charges, replace it.
The ACA-U Unit is the only adapter that can be used for the Handset Cordless Terminal.
Using the ACA-U Unit minimizes normal display blanking when the cordless handset is returned to the Base
Unit.
The Dterm Handset Cordless is not wall mountable.
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
Multiple base and handset units should not be closer than 20 feet anytime.
Radio interference causes interruptions in conversation. When this happens, your unit is not
defective. When noise continues, move to a different location while you talk. (You might even need
to move the Base Unit.) When the situation persists, contact NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., National
Technical Assistance Center (NTAC).
Data Assignment:
H
The Ring Pattern for the Handset can be selected in System Programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 105
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 106
Dterm ® Handset Cordless
Dterm ® IP Gateway System
D-24
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Dterm IP Gateway system converts traditional voice traffic and its accompanying signaling for call
setup and networking to IP for transport across a managed IP network. The system allows users at
branch offices or telecommuters to take advantage of the rich feature set of the company central site
Key Telephone System as though they were connected locally without loss of functionality. Traditional
voice traffic (plus call setup and networking signaling) travel from the KTS to the Gateway where they
are converted to IP packets that are shipped to a 10 Mb (Gateway) or 10/100 (Gateway II) Ethernet LAN
port. They are then picked up by the enterprise router and sent to the Corporate WAN.
At the branch office, the local router receives the WAN signals and feeds them to the local 10/100 LAN.
From there they reach the Dterm IP Branch unit that converts the IP packets back to standard (TDM)
voice signals for distribution to attached Dterm Series E/Electra Elite telephones. The Dterm IP Branch
supports up to 12 voice circuits. When the remote site is a telecommuter at home or only a few users,
the remote IP/TDM conversion is performed by a Dterm IP Adapter that fits easily on the bottom of a
standard Dterm Series E telephone.
This system:
supports circuit-/packet-based Networks
allows mix and match IP-capable EXTender clients up to eight or 12 users
connects to the digital-line side of the Electra Elite KTS
allows virtual configuration, management, and troubleshooting of EXTender clients from a central
location
allows synchronous transmission
supports an asynchronous Terminal Adapter (TA)
allows encrypted user name and password on each port
supports call suspend mode on ISDN line with Asynchronous TA
supports IP Precedence and DiffServ QoS mechanisms
allows choice of network topologies and variable compression rates
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 107
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SOFTWARE SUPPORT
TCP/IP protocol supports IP traffic and management.
RVPoIP uses UDP/IP protocol for voice transmission.
Serial RVP uses HDLC encapsulation for voice transmission.
Management and utilities include Telnet, inband RVP, RS-232 console interface (Gateway and
Branch), SNMP, and HTML.
Software upgradable, using FTP, between the Gateway and the branch, RS-232 serial port to PC,
or inband connection.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTU/DTP/DTR Multiline Terminals
DTP-32DE-1 for home environment
REQUIRED COMPONENTS
Components include the following:
Electra Elite IPK KTS with 1 ESI port for each Branch port and IP Adapter
Gateway unit
Branch unit and/or IP Adapters with total ports not exceeding the number of ports supported by the
Gateway unit
Power Cord
RS-530 cable
2 RJ-21 50 pin cables to connect Gateway to DTS and Branch to punch block – connectors
required include a female connector to attach to Dterm IP, and a male connector to attach to the
KTS.
Punch blocks that can crossconnect the Dterm IP Gateway to the KTS and Dterm telephones to the
branch locations
Installation hardware for Gateway and Branch units
System Administrator’s Guide
Quick Installation Guide
Application Guide
PC for configuration
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 108
Dterm ® IP Gateway System
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
T1, Fractional T1, ISDN, Frame Relay or ATM circuit that can connect the Branch unit to the
Gateway location
A networking terminating device that can interface with the Gateway and Branch/Adapter units and
support synchronous serial protocol using RS-232, V.35, or RS-530 interface, or 10BaseT Ethernet
for an IP connection
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS
The Gateway must be installed on an existing LAN or WAN network.
Each unit requires a network device that supports a synchronous serial interface or an Ethernet
connection to a TCP/IP network.
The network must be operational and active to complete installation of the Gateway.
The network device must support one of the following:
Synchronous serial signaling on its data port using an RS-232, V.35, or RS-530 interface
10BaseT Ethernet connection
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Same as Multiline Terminal
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Refer to Dterm IP Gateway System Administrator’s Guide or Dterm IP Gateway II System
Administrator’s Guide for more information.
TAPI is not supported.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
When you dial 911 on your Dterm telephone, the 911 facility reached is the one that serves the
Gateway facility. To reach the correct 911 service for your area, use a telephone connected
locally. The Dterm IP Branch unit provides an analog port for local dialing.
Synchronous ringing does not work on the remote telephone. Incoming trunk calls automatically
ring 2 seconds on/2 seconds off.
Analog Fax machines and modems cannot operate with a Dterm Multiline Terminal that is
connected to an APR-U Unit or AP(A)-R Unit optional adapter.
The CT(A)-R Unit, CTA-U Unit, or CTU(S)-U Unit cannot be installed to a KTS remote Multiline
Terminal to provide TAPI functionality with the KTS.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
D - 109
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The DTP-32DE-1 Multiline Terminal is the only one certified for use in a home environment. None
of the other Dterm Series E or Electra Elite Multiline Terminals are certified for home use because
of FCC restrictions, but they are approved for use in an office environment.
The HFU-U/HF-R Unit handsfree adapter cannot operate with a KTS remote Multiline Terminal for
home use because of FCC restrictions, but it is approved for use in an office environment.
An applicable network terminating device must be installed and functioning at both the corporate
facility and the branch office.
The data connection between the corporate facility and the branch office must be configured
properly and operational.
Network termination equipment must support an RS-232, V.35 or RS-530 synchronous interface or
support IP devices over Ethernet.
The system operates from 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz. Power must not be applied to the Gateway
unit until specified in the installation procedures.
The Gateway power supply and cables should be installed away from high power/high RF noise
devices such as computers, fans, fluorescent ballast, or power supplies.
Good wiring practices are required. Do not run wires across devices such as fluorescent lights,
computers, or air conditioners to avoid introducing noise in the modems.
H
The distance between the PBX/KTS and the Gateway unit must not exceed 500 feet.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
D - 110
Dterm ® IP Gateway System
Elapsed Call Time
E-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Elapsed Call Time displays how long the station has been connected to an outside line on Multiline
Terminals with an LCD.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD
Required Components:
Not applicable
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
The elapsed call time is shown on the LCD when a Multiline Terminal user is talking on an outside
line.
The maximum Elapsed Call Time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds. When the time reaches this
maximum, the display resets to 00 minutes and 00 seconds.
When a call is placed on hold (Exclusive or Non-Exclusive) or Transfer Recall, the Elapsed Call
Time continues.
When a transferred call is answered, the Elapsed Call Time is reset to 00:00.
For outgoing CO/PBX calls, the starting time is set at 20 seconds (default) after the last digit is
dialed. For incoming outside calls, the starting time is immediate. However, there is a 5-second
delay after the call is answered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The starting time for outgoing Tie line calls is when the called party answers the call.
H
The Elapsed Call Time display clears during dialing and returns five seconds after the last digit is
dialed.
H
The Elapsed Call Time for each outside line operates independently. When several outside calls
have been made from a station, the LCD displays the elapsed time when talking on each individual
call.
H
During a 2-line conference call, the LCD displays the elapsed time of the last individual line call.
H
The Elapsed Call Time display clears when a Tone Override is received.
H
During a conference call that includes one outside party and two internal parties, the Elapsed Call
Time shows on the display of the two internal parties.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Start Time Selection
This memory block applies only to
Copper Trunks.
1-1-05
+BM
Station to Timer Class of Service
Ports 1 and 2 are in Class 1 by default.
All other ports are in Class 2 by default.
4-71
+AC
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E-2
Elapsed Call Time
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals provide ergonomic form and user-friendly functions. With advanced
digital circuitry, the IPK Terminals consists of distinct models to meet diverse user telephone terminal
needs.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, the LCD Name Assignment of Feature Access keys on DTH-16LD-1 telephones
can be user programmed.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
DTH-32D-1 TEL
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTH-8-1 TEL
DCR-60-1 CONSOLE
(IP) ITH-16D-2 TEL
ITH-8D-2 TEL
Required Components:
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIE(8)-U( ) UNIT
(IP) IPD(4/8)-U( ) ETU (for IP Terminals)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Optional Components:
AD(A)-R UNIT (Adapter for Call Recording)
AP(A)-R UNIT (Analog Port Adapter [without Ringer])
AP(R)-R UNIT (Analog Port Adapter [with Ringer])
CT(A)-R UNIT (TAPI Adapter connect by RS-232C)
CT(U)-R UNIT (TAPI Adapter connect by USB)
HF-R UNIT
(Adapter for Full Duplex Handsfree)
IP-R(IPK) UNIT (IP Adapter)
BS(F)-R UNIT (French Button Unit)
BS(S)-R UNIT (Spanish Button Unit)
WM-R UNIT
(Wall Mount Unit)
AC-2R Unit
(AC Adapter)
AC-3R Unit
(AC Adapter, PC Type)
(IP) AD(A)-2R UNIT (Adapter for Call Recording)
ILPA-R (In Line Power Adapter)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to individual feature for details.
Specifications
DTH-16LD-1
DTH-32D-1
DTH-16D-1
DTH-8D-1
DTH-8-1
ITH-16D-2
ITH-8D-2
Dedicated Function
Keys
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
Line/Feature Access/
Programmable Feature
Access Key
16
32*
16
8
8
16
8
LCD (3x24)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Call/Message Indicator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable Base
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Built-in Wall Mount
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Headset Jack (Built-in)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DESI Label by LCD
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Handset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Speakerphone
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Headset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ring Volume Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Receiver Volume Control for:
___________________________________________________________________________________
E-4
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Specifications
DTH-16LD-1
DTH-32D-1
DTH-16D-1
DTH-8D-1
DTH-8-1
ITH-16D-2
ITH-8D-2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
White or
Black
White or
Black
White or
Black
White or
Black
White or
Black
White or
Black
White or
Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
LCD Contrast Control
Housing Color
Soft Keys
* A maximum of 24 keys may be programmed as Line Keys.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals, with an adjustable display, offer softkey operation. The LCD
panel has three lines of display, each with 24 characters. Standard features include headset jacks,
wall mount units, and adjustable-base units.
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals support dedicated function keys to provide easy one-touch access
to the most common telephone operations. These keys include: Feature, Recall, Conference,
Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer, Speaker, Microphone, Directory, and Message.
The dial pad is detachable allowing for easy customization for a foreign language (French or
Spanish), or for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications.
All Electra Elite IPK Terminals are Class B devices and comply with U.S. FCC regulations for office
and residential use. They also comply with requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
With the DTH-16LD-1 TEL, the 16-Line Keys are labeled by the LCD by assignment in system
data. The LCD also supports the LED status for trunks, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys , DSS/BLF
keys, and select Feature keys/Feature Access keys.
Use Memory Block 4-68 (Line Key Name Assignment) to assign a name to each LCD Line Key of
the DTH/DTR-16D-1 Telephone. Up to eight characters can be assigned.
The LCD of the Electra Elite IPK Terminal provides a volume bar indication, while adjusting the
following volume levels or controls:
J
J
J
J
J
Speaker Volume
Handset/Headset Volume
BGM Volume
Ring Volume/Off Hook Ring Volume
LCD Contrast
Only English displays are provided (SPEAKER, HANDSET, RING, LCD).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The MIC Key controls the built-in microphone during speakerphone mode and controls the handset
mute feature during handset/headset operation.
H
The DIR Key performs the same function as the Caller ID Scroll Key.
H
The MSG Key acts as a VM access key to call the VM pilot number.
H
The distance from the KSU for IPK Multiline Terminals (DTH type) can be extended when local AC
power is provided. When the IPK Terminal is powered by a local AC-R Unit (AC Adapter), a built-in
Long Line Adapter allows these telephones to be connected up to a distance of 2000 feet by
Twisted 1-Pair Cable at 24 AWG.
Restrictions:
H
For compatibility of Adapter Units and Terminals, refer to the following table:
Terminal
Adapter Unit
DTH-16LD-1
DTH-32D-1
DTH-16D-1
DTH-8D-1
DTH-8-1
ITH-16D-2
ITH-8D-2
AD(A)-R
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
AP(A)-R
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
AP(R)-R
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
CT(A)-R
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
CT(U)-R
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
HF-R
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
IP-R(IPK)
X
X
X
X
–
–
–
BS(F)-R( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BS(S)-R( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
WM-R UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AC-R UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AD(A)-2R UNIT
–
–
–
–
–
X
X
ILPA-R
–
–
–
–
–
X
X
Button Units
Other
IP Telephone Adapters
X = Comparable
–
= Not comparable
___________________________________________________________________________________
E-6
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
With non-IP Electra Elite IPK Terminals, up to two adapters can be installed in a phone. For
compatibility of multiple adapter units, refer to the following table:
AD(A)-R
AP(A)-R
AP(R)-R
CT(A)-R
CT(U)-R
HF-R
IP-R(IPK)
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
X*
X
–
X
X*
X
–
–
X
–
X
–
AD(A)-R
H
H
H
X
AP(R)-R
X
–
CT(A)-R
X
X
X
CT(U)-R
X
X*
X*
-
HF-R
X
X
X
X
X
IP-R(IPK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
X
= Compatible
–
= Not compatible
*
= The Voice Application of CT(U) cannot be used when installed with AP(A/R)-R Unit.
An AC-2R Unit/AC-3R Unit (AC Adapter) is required when any of the following adapters is installed
in an IPK Terminal:
J
J
J
J
J
H
AP(A)-R
AP(R)-R Unit.
CT(U)-R Unit.
HF-R Unit.
IPR-R Unit. (When in-line power is used, power over Ethernet, is not provided.)
DCR-60-1 Console
An AC-2R Unit/AC-3R Unit (AC Adapter) is required for the ITH-16D-2 and ITH-8D-2 telephones
when in-line power, power over Ethernet, is not provided or the ILPA-R is not used.
The distance from the KSU for Electra Elite IPK DTH Multiline Terminals can be extended when
local AC power is provided. When the Electra Elite IPK terminal is powered by a local AC-2R/
AC-3R Unit (AC Adapter), a built in Long Line Adapter allows these telephones to be connected
up to 2,000 feet by Twisted 1-pair 24AWG Cable.
The WM-R Unit (Wall Mount Unit) is required when any adapter is installed in an Electra Elite
Terminal and the terminal is to be wall mounted.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-3
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
E-5
Electronic Volume Control
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
F-7
Full Duplex Handsfree
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
I-8
IP Station (MEGACO)
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing
S-10
Softkeys
U-7
User Programming Ability
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
4-50
+BTM
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
4-68
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E-8
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
E-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Electra Elite Terminal Migration allows an Electra Elite customer to protect their investment in terminals
when purchasing Electra Elite IPK systems. Electra Elite Multiline Terminals can be easily used with the
Electra Elite IPK systems. With very few exceptions, all terminal features and abilities that are possible
on Electra Elite 48/192 are also possible with the Electra Elite IPK system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to individual feature for details.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Restrictions
H
Dedicated Function Keys for Microphone, Directory, and Message are not provided with Electra
Elite Multiline Terminals.
H
The Full Duplex handsfree feature is supported only by the Electra Elite Terminals with an HFU-U
Unit installed.
H
Electra Professional Multiline Terminals are not supported with the Electra Elite IPK system.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-5
Electronic Volume Control
F-7
Full Duplex Handsfree
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing
S-10
Softkeys
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
4-50
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 10
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
Electra Professional Terminal Migration
E-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Electra Professional Terminal Migration allows an Electra Elite IPK customer to protect their investment
in terminals when purchasing Electra Elite IPK systems. Electra Professional Multiline Terminals can be
easily used with the Electra Elite IPK systems. With very few exceptions, all terminal features and
abilities that are possible on Electra Professional Level II/IIA/120 are also possible with the Electra Elite
IPK system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Electra Professional Multiline Terminals
Required Software:
System software R1600 or higher is required to support Electra Professional terminals.
Required Components
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Not Applicable
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Q key is the P key on the Electra Professional terminal.
The Electra Elite T key is the N key on the Electra Professional terminal.
The Electra ELite
Restrictions:
H
The Off-Hook Voice Announcement feature supported by the ETW-24DS-1/2 is not provided by the
Electra Elite IPK.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 12
Electra Professional Terminal Migration
Electronic Volume Control
E-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Electronic Volume Control is provided on all Multiline Terminals to allow easy changes to the LCD
contrast on Multiline Display Terminals, Off-Hook Ringing volume, Station Ringing volume, and
Handset/Station Speaker volume.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To change the LCD contrast for Multiline Display Terminals:
E
1.
Press
2.
Dial default Access Code
3.
Dial
4.
Press
5.
Go on-hook.
FK
to go off-hook.
BUV
.
from the dial pad.
to adjust LCD contrast (^ to increase or v to decrease).
- OR -
While the station is idle, press
UV
to adjust LCD contrast (^ to increase or v to decrease).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To change the off-hook ringing volume:
FK
1.
Go off-hook with the handset.
2.
Dial default Access Code
3.
Dial
4.
Press
5.
Go on-hook.
AUV
.
from the dial pad.
to control off-hook ringing volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
To change the station ringing volume:
E
H
Press
6.
Dial default Access Code
7.
Dial
8.
Press
decrease).
9.
Go on-hook.
FK
to go off-hook.
AUV
.
from the dial pad.
while the station is ringing to control ringing volume (^ to increase or v to
To set the handset receiver volume:
UV
1.
Go off-hook with the handset.
2.
Press
to control handset receiver volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
To set the speaker volume:
E
UV
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Go on-hook.
to go off-hook.
to control speaker volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
- OR -
While using the speakerphone, press
decrease).
UV
to adjust the volume (^ to increase or v to
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 14
Electronic Volume Control
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Multiline Terminal users can further increase station volume by pressing Feature + 2 during
internal calls.
LCD contrast, off-hook ringing volume, station ringing volume, and speaker volume adjustments
are saved in system memory.
The LCD of the Electra Elite IPK Terminals provide a volume bar indication while adjusting the
following volumes or controls:
J
J
J
J
J
Speaker Volume
Handset/Headset Volume
BGM Volume
Ring Volume/Off Hook Ring Volume
LCD Contrast
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-3
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BTT
+BTT
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Receiving Volume Selection
4-92
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
049
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 16
Electronic Volume Control
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
E-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire) can be connected to the system to provide communication between remote
systems and facilities. The system can receive and/or transmit DTMF or DP signals on E&M Tie Lines.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate a call:
1.
Dial the Trunk Group Access Code assigned for E&M Tie Lines.
2.
Dial the station to be called, or when using Uniform Numbering Network, dial the distant system
number and the station to be called, or dial the Trunk Access Code and number to be called.
- OR -
1.
Press the line key with direct E&M Tie Line appearance, and wait for a dial tone.
2.
Dial the station to be called when using Uniform Numbering Network, dial the distant system
number and the station to be called, or dial the Trunk Access Code and number to be called.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
Each TLI(2)-U( ) ETU supports two 4-wire E&M Tie Lines.
When a call from/to the remote end is made to a busy station in the Electra Elite IPK systems, the
caller cannot set Callback Request, Step Call, or Camp-On.
The incoming ringing pattern for Tie line calls can be changed in System Programming, or voice
announcement can be selected system-wide (default: 2 seconds ON/4 seconds OFF).
Immediate start, wink start, delay start, or second dial tone (default) loop supervision can be
selected per trunk using System Programming.
When voice announcement for incoming Tie calls is selected, the outside party cannot switch the
call to a ringing call.
The Recall key and Drop key are ignored when Tie lines are used.
Restrictions:
H
Use Memory Block 1-1-69 (Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment) to assign YS (outgoing Tie Line
dialed digits are code Restricted) or NO (no restriction). Default is YS. With code restriction
assigned, an access code must be entered in front of the dialed number in the 8-digit matching
tables to dial out of a distant system.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
F-4
Flexible Numbering Plan
T-2
Tandem Switching of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines
T-7
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
U-4
Uniform Numbering Network
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 18
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+BCT
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
3-92
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+ALT
Tie Line Type Assignment
3-14
+BCT
Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
3-15
+ALM
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
3-16
+ALM
Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection
3-17
+ALM
Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection
3-18
+ALM
Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout
Selection
3-25
+ALM
Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection
3-20
+ALM
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection
3-21
+ALM
Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection
3-22
+ALM
Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection
3-24
+BCT
Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal Detect
Time Selection
3-19
+ALN
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking
Assignment
5-00
+ALN
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-34
+ALM
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-07
+ALN
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-53
+AC
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
1-1-69
+BCT
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection
3-29
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BCT
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
3-30
+BCT
Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection
3-31
+BCT
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection
3-32
+ALT
Tie Line Dial Tone Selection
3-27
+ALT
Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection
3-28
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTT
Trunk Digit Restriction
4-32
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 20
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
Elite ACD Plus
E-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Elite ACD Plus is an Automatic Call Distribution ETU that supports up to 40 agents and 12 supervisors
logged on at the same time. This feature allows any incoming DIT, ANA, DID, or CO Ring Transfer call
to terminate at a prearranged ACD Group of agents. The incoming call is either distributed to the agent
that has been idle the longest or in accordance with a programmed preference level. Operation includes
Automatic Attendant (AA), ACD only, or both AA and ACD.
The Administration Program uses a Local Area Network (LAN) that allows one administrator and up to
five remote PCs, depending on site license, to monitor ACD statistics and generate reports.
An agent or supervisor can be an active member in up to four ACD Groups and can be logged on and
receive calls from all four groups.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With R4000 or higher, Elite ACD Plus 2.20 or higher is required to support the following enhanced
features:
H
Displaying the DNIS number and name to an agent display during the ringing of an ACD call.
H
Recalling the display of the DNIS number and name while talking on the ACD call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Electra Elite IPK or Dterm Series i Multiline Terminals with softkeys
- OR Electra Elite or Dterm Series E Multiline Terminals with softkeys
Required Components:
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
MIFM-U( ) or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (for PC Programming during setup)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the Elite ACD Plus Manual.
System Conditions:
H
H
H
H
The Flash ACD hardware connects to the Electra Elite through ports recognized by the KSU as
Digital Voice Mail ports. Eight ACD ports are supported.
Voice Prompts and firmware are stored in Flash Memory on the Elite ACD(8)-U( ) ETU.
When a K-CCIS trunk is on hold, the Specified Line Seizure access codes can be used to retrieve
the call from its held state.
The Elite ACD Plus can support and distribute incoming calls from a remote K-CCIS office.
However, incoming calls into ACD Plus that result in a link reconnect are not supported. These
calls must first be answered by a local station, then can be transferred into ACD Plus as long as it
is not an internal (intercom) call.
CALL PROCESSING
DESCRIPTION
Abandoned Call Search
Abandoned incoming calls are not connected to agent positions. The system removes them from the
queue on trunks that provide calling party disconnect supervision.
Call Distribution to Agents
Two methods can be used:
H
H
Longest Idle
Calls are automatically and uniformly distributed to the agent in an ACD Group that has been idle
the longest. When incoming calls are holding, the oldest call is connected to the first available
agent.
Preferred
Calls are automatically distributed among idle agents according to an assigned priority level of 1
(first) to 9 (last) When agents have the same priority, the system connects the call to the longest
idle agent in that priority.
When an agent or supervisor priority level is changed, the agent or supervisor must log out and then log-in
for the new priority level to take effect.
Call Transfer to ACD Group Queue
CO Trunk calls that terminate to a normal station, ACD agent, or supervisor can be transferred to an
ACD Group Queue.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 22
Elite ACD Plus
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Night Service
The administration program assigns ACD Groups to follow or ignore night mode. When an ACD Group
is in night mode, the system can route incoming ACD calls to an Internal Station/Attendant or Night
Announcement, or perform a Centrex Transfer.
Overflow
When all agents are busy, and calls have been held in queue for more than a specified time, overflow
allows calls to be directed to an assigned station, Station Hunt Group, another ACD Plus queue, or
Off-site using Centrex Transfer.
Queuing
All incoming calls for ACD Groups are placed in queue when no agent is available. A queue provides
first in-first out sequence for call processing.
Pilot Numbers
A system programmed pilot number is the entry point for callers to an ACD Group. A pilot number
corresponds to a Call Arrival key appearance in the Electra Elite IPK system. Each queue has an
individual CAR key. Do not program an ACD Group Pilot Number in a station hunt group because
Station Hunt has priority over ACD.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
PC Programming (SAT) is required to assign One-Touch keys on the ports of the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
during installation and/or add or remove phones to be used by Agents.
When Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment) is used to assign any station port in the
system, any ACD Plus agent logged on is logged off. The ACD Plus agents must manually log
back on.
H
ACD Plus resets when System Refresh is performed, and all ACD Agents are logged off.
H
Calls are answered first in-first out.
H
Calls are distributed to the longest-idle agent or according to the priority level assigned to an agent.
H
Elite ACD Plus can be programmed per Queue to follow or ignore night mode.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Maximum programming assignments for ACD Groups and Agents are listed below:
J
J
J
J
108 total Agents and Supervisor IDs per system
108 Agent IDs assigned to one ACD Group
40 Agents and 12 Supervisors logged in at the same time
When a supervisor logs in as an agent, it counts toward the 40 agent maximum.
Four ACD Groups per system
Restrictions:
H
H
H
For Multiline Terminals system wide, direct trunk appearances of CO lines that are handled by
ACD Plus are not supported. Multiline Terminals must have a Call Appearance (CAP) key
assigned to handle ACD Plus calls.
Only 40 agents and 12 supervisors can be logged on at the same time to any or all of the ACD
queues, depending on programming.
When the agent in the ACD Group where a call terminates does not answer after a programmed
number of rings, the call is put back in the queue and goes to the next available agent or follows
overflow.
H
Only one system administrator can be connected to the server anytime.
H
Up to five remote monitors can be connected to the server at the same time.
H
DNIS display is not supported for incoming calls to Elite ACD Plus agents.
H
H
When ACD Plus calls are assigned to overflow offsite using Centrex Transfer and the called
Centrex line is busy, the caller waiting in queue receives a busy tone.
This feature is not available when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used.
AGENT AND SUPERVISOR FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
Assistance
During an ACD call, An agent can press a programmed Feature Access or One-touch key to
automatically place the active call on hold and call the supervisor for assistance.
Break Mode
The agent can use a softkey to take a position out of ACD Mode for a break from work without logging
off.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 24
Elite ACD Plus
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Wrap Mode
The agent can use a softkey to take a momentary break to process the previous call. This allows the
agent to finish paper work and discuss the call with a supervisor.
Logon/Logoff
An agent can logon by dialing the pilot number for the ACD port and following displayed prompts.
Operating statistics are collected until the agent performs logoff by pressing the logoff softkey on the
agent position.
Non-ACD Call
An agent or supervisors can receive a transferred call or a call directly from dial trunks (e.g., Tie Line,
DID, or DIT). Transferred ACD calls from another agent or ACD calls on hold by another agent are
counted as non-ACD calls by MIS when they are picked up by agents in another Group.
Headset Answer/Release
An agent using a headset can press a programmed Headset On/Off Line Key to answer or release an
ACD call.
Headset Volume Control
An agent can control the volume of the headset independently of the volume of the handset.
Control of Night Mode
The supervisor can activate or deactivate Night Mode using an NT key programmed on a Feature
Access or One-Touch key on the supervisor terminal. A supervisor can also place an individual queue in
night mode after logging on, using softkeys. Each queue can be set to follow or ignore night mode.
Monitoring (Barge-In)
The supervisor can monitor calls at an agent position using a key operation on the supervisor terminal.
The conference LED is on at each involved terminal during monitoring.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
The LED for a Call Appearance key used to transfer a call to an ACD pilot number remains on until
the call is answered.
After the agent dials the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU, all agent functions are accessed using softkeys.
Any agent in an ACD Group can press the logoff key to busy out the station. The station user can
then originate calls or receive calls directed to the station number but not to the ACD Group
number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
A default alert tone is provided for Barge-In Monitoring. The tone can be disabled in system
programming.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
An agent can logoff or enter Break or Wrap mode only when the station is idle. The agent can
request these conditions by pressing the applicable softkey during an ACD call. The last entered
request is carried out when the telephone returns to idle.
An agent cannot receive another ACD call while an existing ACD call is on hold. After the held call
is terminated, the agent can then receive ACD calls.
Agents and supervisors must have a DTU/DTP or DTH/DTR terminal with softkeys.
When an ACD Plus agent sets Call Forwarding, incoming calls, including ACD Plus calls, follow the
Call Forward setting. To prevent ACD Plus calls from forwarding, Memory Block 1-2-22 (Call
Forward – No Answer Time Selection) should be set at least five seconds longer than the Time
Agent Rings Without Answer timer. When an agent sets Call Forward – All Call, the agent is
viewed as busy and does not receive ACD Plus calls.
Incoming ACD calls cannot be received during Break or Wrap Mode.
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT FUNCTION
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
For Centrex lines, the AA can transfer a call to any valid Centrex number using Centrex service.
After the call is transferred at the Central Office, it does not use any Electra Elite IPK trunk lines.
Additional hardware is not required to support Automated Attendant.
The answering time after the incoming CO/PBX call rings can be programmed per trunk when
using Automated Attendant.
Restrictions:
H
H
Supervisors can record AA and ACD queue messages again using the telephone. The maximum
message lasts 90 seconds.
Automated Attendant (AA) allows a caller to direct dial a valid extension defined by the
Administration application or one-key dialing only while a message is playing, when direct dial is
enabled.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 26
Elite ACD Plus
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
When caller does not select an Automated Attendant transfer option after the AA message finishes
playing, the caller is automatically transferred to the default transfer number. When a default
transfer number is not assigned, the AA message replays.
Elite ACD Plus can be programmed to answer lines with AA while sending others directly to the
ACD queue.
The DIT assignment bypasses the Automatic Attendant function for any trunk.
ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
By default, all announcements except the AA and On-Hold message are recorded. Using the
Administration program, most messages can be allowed or denied per group. Both AA messages and
the Numbers in Queue messages are shared by all groups. The supervisor can logon by telephone to
ACD and change any message when granted access rights for the group. Recordings can also be
changed using the Administration program by uploading a voice file in the correct format from the PC.
All prompts must be recorded or converted to 8KHz OKI ADPCM format.
The numbers prompt must be in BICOM Indexed Play File Format with silence compression in addition
to the requirement listed above.
Automated Attendant Messages
A standard greeting that is not recorded at default and an error message that plays when an invalid
selection is dialed are included. Both messages are shared by all groups.
ACD Greeting Message
A caller hears the message that is recorded per group when agents are not available to answer a call.
The Administration program can set this message to play first even when available agents are idle.
Numbers in Queue Messages
These messages are shared by all groups, can be recorded by the Supervisor using a telephone, and
contain the numbers played for queue depth. During recording by telephone, the number to speak is
shown in the display. When a voice file from a PC is used, the message must be in indexed play format
or the queue depth feature does not work.
ACD On-Hold Message
This message (recorded and enabled per group) plays after the ACD Greeting and Refresh 1 and
Refresh 2 messages. By default this message is not recorded.
ACD Refresh Message 1
This message (recorded and enabled per group) plays at programmed intervals for callers that remain in
queue. It plays after the ACD Greeting and before ACD Refresh Message 2.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
ACD Refresh Message 2
This message (recorded and enabled per group) plays at programmed intervals for callers that remain in
queue. It plays after ACD Refresh Message 1, and/or On-Hold messages.
Night Message
This message (recorded and enabled per group) is played when a group is in night mode and the
message is enabled for that queue.
ACD Queue Status Header
This message (recorded and enabled per group) is used with the queue depth feature to indicate the
place in the queue. By default it states: “you are caller number” followed by the prompt that plays the
correct place for the caller. This message plays after the ACD Greeting, ACD Refresh 1 and ACD
Refresh 2 messages.
ACD Queue Status Trailer
A message (in queue) that is recorded and enabled per group is played after the Queue status header
and Numbers Message.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
When all agents in the ACD group where a call is terminated are busy, the call waits in queue until
an agent is available. The caller receives announcements, queue depth indication or Music on
Hold.
Each caller hears every announcement from the beginning.
When an agent becomes available, the caller is immediately connected even when an
announcement is in progress.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
The maximum time for any message is 90 seconds.
DIT/ANA, CO Ring transfers, AA transfers, or DID/Tie Line calls must be directed to an ACD pilot
number to receive announcements.
When all ACD ports are busy, the incoming caller continues to hear ringback tone or Music on Hold
until an ACD port is available.
Only seven calls can be connected to the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU and receive announcements at the
same time. Port 1 is reserved for agents to logon during heavy traffic. A maximum of 64 trunks
can be supported.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 28
Elite ACD Plus
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
REAL TIME DISPLAY (RTD)
DESCRIPTION
The Real Time Display (RTD) consists of a server application that is installed on the same PC running
the ACD Plus server software, and client software that is installed on agent PCs. This application
provides real time queue and agent information to the individual desktop as a cost effective alternative to
expensive wall displays that display queue status information. In addition to the queue and agent status
information, the application also allows text messaging to be sent to individual agents and groups of
agents.
Elite ACD Plus Software Suite V 2.0.2 or higher is required to support the RTD feature.
A sample display of the RTD is shown below.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
An optional RTD License Key is available to support additional RTD clients:
J
J
H
With an RTD License Key, up to 100 RTD clients are supported.
For each queue, the RTD lists the following statistics:
J
J
J
H
Without an RTD License Key, up to three RTD clients are supported.
Number of agents logged into the queue
Number of calls waiting in the queue
Wait time of the call that has been in the queue the longest
By default, the top line on the Real Time Display shows the headers for each statistic column. The
bottom row of the Real Time Display shows text messages as they are received from other users.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
The following appearances of the RTD can be customized:
J
J
J
J
Turning headers off/on
Resizing
Repositioning
Keeping the RTD image visible
The Real Time Display application allows text messages to be sent between RTD clients. This
ability can be used to send general announcements to groups of users or direct comments to
individual agents. All RTD clients can receive text messages; however, the ability to send text
messages is controlled through settings in the ACD Plus server.
When an RTD client receives a text message, the message is scrolled across the bottom line of the
display. The message continues to scroll until the message duration has expired or the user
selects the Clear function. When multiple messages are received, they are displayed sequentially
in the order in which they were received.
A threshold can be defined on the ACD Plus server for each statistic shown on the Real Time
Display. The threshold represents a critical level that indicates the efficiency of call center
operations. Threshold levels are shown on the RTD by changing the color of the individual statistic
when the threshold is reached. A green level indicates that field is within an acceptable range. A
yellow level is a warning level for that field. A critical threshold is indicated by a red level.
The RTD can also provide additional alerts (a Tone or a Popup) as threshold levels are reached.
Restrictions:
H
The PC requirements for Elite ACD Plus Software Suite V 2.0.2 or higher running the RTD feature
are as follows:
J
J
Software Requirements
N
Microsoft Windows 98, 2000, Me, or XP
Hardware Requirements
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IBM-compatible machine with at least a 500Mhz CPU
ACD Plus and RTD Server -- 256MB RAM
RTD Client -- 128MB RAM
Minimum 40 MB of available hard disk space
CD-ROM drive
Unused Serial port or LAN to connect to the ACD Plus ETU
Unused Parallel/USB port to connect to the Client key
Mouse
Printer (optional)
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 30
Elite ACD Plus
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Feature List
Feature
Number
S-10
Feature Name
Softkeys
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
Station Number Assignment
4-10
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment
4-15
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BK
+BA
,
,
+BM
+BTS
,
+BTT
,
,
,
,
+BTT
,
+BS
+BTM
+BTT
+BTM
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
042, 064
3-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTM
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-41
+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 32
Elite ACD Plus
Elite CallAnalyst
E-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Elite CallAnalyst is an easy to use, graphically oriented software package that allows you to monitor and
analyze telephone calls, understand telephone usage, and cut costs. Incoming and outgoing calls are
tracked accurately along with the date and time of the call. When the incoming telephone call must be
tracked with name and/or telephone numbers, Elite CallAnalyst requires Caller ID service from the local
telephone company.
Elite CallAnalyst increases productivity, facilitates billing, and helps detect toll fraud and telephone
abuse. It also has powerful tabular (text) and graphic report generating ability. Reports include
extension/line summaries, date, time, and department summaries, longest/most expensive calls, and
most frequently called numbers. These reports can be used to analyze your telephone as a critical
business communication tool, improve its business effectiveness, and reduce your telephone costs. A
report can be generated showing calling patterns by volume or duration on a color-coded United States
map. This can help a Customer Support, Sales Order, or Telemarketing business become more
focused, more productive, and more cost effective.
Highlights of Elite CallAnalyst and Elite CallAnalyst Lite:
H
Network based
H
Fraud monitoring
H
Automatic report and data archival scheduling
H
Real-time inbound/outbound call monitoring
H
Call costing and user configurable rate plans
H
Time billing
H
Variety of customer configurable report categories:
J
J
J
Date/Time and area code
Filter reports based on date, time, extension, line, duration, account code, forced account
code, name, and number
Customized reports
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Terminals
H
Incoming CO/PBX Call
H
Outgoing CO/PBX Call
H
Conference CO/PBX Call
H
Transferred CO/PBX Call
Required Components:
MIFM-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
Minimum PC Requirements:
H
PC with Pentium Processor
H
64 Mb Ram
H
VGA monitor 800 X 600 res. (SVGA 1024 X 768 recommended)
H
Windows 95/98 Me, NT-SP 3 or later, 2000
H
80 Mb free hard drive space
H
CD-ROM drive (When using CD for installation)
H
Available serial port and RS-232 cable
H
Printer for reports
The Elite CallAnalyst software should be installed on a separate PC, but other applications may be installed.
Performance depends on the need for memory and processing for the other applications.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 34
Elite CallAnalyst
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The following software items are installed on the PC:
J
J
J
J
H
Call Data Manager (CDM) to collect call records from the system.
Elite CallAnalyst and Elite CallAnalyst Lite (version depends on license purchased) to allow
reports and other analyst features.
Scheduler (default installed) to allow reports and database archival depending on the Elite
CallAnalyst version.
Elite CallAnalyst Manual (default installed, PDF format).
The following optional modules of Elite CallAnalyst Software require license upgrade:
J
Network Client
Network clients must then call NEC for additional licensing. The license is issued on the
CallAnalyst Server installation. All license information is maintained on the server PC.
Because the license is unique to the PC where the server is installed, you must follow the
help files in the license screen to move the license to another location.
J
Fraud alert
This protects against telephone abuse. (No additional license is required.)
H
H
H
H
H
H
Refer to the Elite CallAnalyst Manual installed with the software for more detailed information.
When the printer or other I/O device fails to operate, approximately 100 call records are saved in
the MIFM-U10 ETU or approximately 200 call records are saved in the MIFM-U20 or SPE(M)-U( )
ETU. When the buffer is full, the earliest call record is lost when the next call record is stored.
Call record data provides Start Time, Trunk Number, Trunk Group, Call Type, Station Number,
Duration, Number Dialed, LCR, Calling Station number, and Transferred Station Number.
A maximum of 24 digits is allowed for output of a telephone number.
When the printer is assigned, but a printer is not connected to the system, PRINTER TROUBLE is
displayed on the LCD and an audible alert tone is provided at the first two Multiline Terminals
(Stations 100 and 101) connected to the system.
When the MIFM-U( ) ETU or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is not installed or disabled an alarm indication is not
provided.
Restrictions:
H
Call records are not provided for internal calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Caller ID name is not printed on SMDR.
H
DNIS digits are not printed with SMDR Records.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension number
are printed (provided) by SMDR.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AS
SMDR Print Format
1-5-02
+AS
Printer Connect Selection
1-5-13
+AS
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-14
+AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
1-5-26
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
+BS
MIF (SMDR ) Assignment
7-3-02
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 36
Elite CallAnalyst
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
E-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server is a Call Accounting and Telemanagement solution suitable for
installations with large call volumes or multiple locations/switches requiring consolidation of call data
(SMDR/CDR) and centralized reporting. It is an easy to use, graphically oriented software solution that
allows the user to monitor and analyze telephone calls, understand telephone usage, and cut costs.
Each server accurately tracks both incoming and outgoing calls along with the date and time. When
tracking incoming calls using telephone numbers, Caller ID services are required from the local
telephone company.
The Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server increases productivity, facilitates billing, and helps to identify toll
fraud and telephone abuse. It also has powerful tabular text and graphic report generating abilities.
Reports include extension/line summaries, date/time and department summaries, longest and most
expensive calls, most frequently called numbers, and other commonly used summaries. These reports
help the user to analyze the telephone as a critical business communication tool to improve business
effectiveness. For example, a report can be generated showing call patterns by volume or duration on a
color-coded map of the U.S. that can be used to help Customer Support, Sales Order, or Telemarketing
business become more focused, more productive, and cost effective.
The following Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server features are provided:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Centralized data administration from multiple call data sources
Consolidation of call data from remote locations/switches
Collection of call data over a TCP/IP Network
Customized reports
Automatic scheduling of reports and data archival
Fraud monitoring
Call costing and rate tables
Real-time inbound/outbound call monitoring
Data analysis from multiple locations
For detailed information, refer to the Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server manual provided with the
software.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Software:
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
CallAnalyst Network Client (optional)
CallAlert! (optional)
Microsoft SQL Server 2000
- OR Microsoft Database Engine (MSDE)
Required Components:
MIFM-U( ) ETU
- OR SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server installation CD includes:
J
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server (CES)
N
N
N
J
J
J
J
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server - Network Client
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server - CallAlert
MSR Thin Client
Microsoft Database Engine (MSDE) installer
Internet Explorer 6.0 (IE)
Adobe Acrobat reader 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 38
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related items of the Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server are described in the table below:
Product
Description
Includes:
Server Software with MSDE installer
(1) Site License for SMDR
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server (CES)
Support for 120 Stations
Support for 64 Trunks
Requires Activation Code
Additional Site License
Required for each additional remote site
connected to Server site. A license file that
allows the total number of sites to be
monitored is also required.
Additional Network Client License
(Activation Code)
Required for each additional Network Client
that accesses the CES Server for reports.
An Activation Code is required.
The Site Key/License issued on the server
allows the required number of Network Clients
to have concurrent access to the server for
reporting.
Multi-Site Reporter Thin Client
Required to be installed on a PC at remote
locations to collect serial data locally and
forward it to the central CES hub over TCP/IP
Network.
Different installation configurations available for the Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server and the
requirements for each are described in the table below:
Type of Installation
PC Requirements
Notes
Single PC with the following installed:
Single Site, Single PC
MSDE or SQL Server 2000
(Database server)
CES
CallAlert! should be installed only if
telephone abuse/fraud or call patterns
need to be detected to generate an
alarm.
CallAlert! Installed (optional)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Type of Installation
PC Requirements
Notes
Server PC with the following installed:
MSDE or SQL Server 2000
(Database server)
CES
Single Site, Multiple Network
Clients accessing Server for
reports
CallAlert! Installed (optional)
Client PC(s) with the following
installed:
When MSDE is used for the
Database, only five Network Clients
are allowed.
CallAnalyst Client
CallAlert! Installed (optional)
Main Site with Single PC and the
following installed:
MSDE or SQL Server 2000
(Database server)
Multi-Site monitoring with
Single PC Installation
CES
CallAlert! Installed (optional)
MSR Thin Client installed on a local
PC converts SMDR serial data to
Ethernet data packets.
Remote Sites with SPE or PC running
Thin Client connected to the Main Site
over a TCP/IP Network
Server PC with the following installed:
MSDE or SQL Server 2000
(Database server)
CES
Multi-Site Installation with
Multiple Network Clients
accessing Server for reports
CallAlert! Installed (optional)
Client PC(s) with the following
installed:
CallAnalyst Client
When MSDE is used for the
Database, only five Network Clients
are allowed.
MSR Thin Client installed on a local
PC converts SMDR serial data to
Ethernet data packets.
CallAlert! Installed (optional)
Remote Sites with SPE or PC running
Thin Client
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 40
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Example of Single PC/Server Installation
with Direct Serial to PC Com Port (RS-232)
Serial
Cable
PC/Server with the following installed:
• SQL 2000 or MSDE
• CES
• Call Alert Installed (optional).
Example of Single Site/Single Network
Client Installation with Direct Serial to PC
Com Port (RS-232)
Serial Cable
LAN / WAN
PC/Server with the
following installed:
• SQL 2000 or MSDE
• CES
• Call Alert Installed
PC with the following
installed:
• CallAnalyst Client
• Call Alert Installed
Note: If MSDE is used for
the Database only 5
Network Clients are
allowed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Example of Multi Site Installation with Multiple
PC/Server Installation
with a Direct Serial to PC Com Port (RS-232) and
a Direct Ethernet to PC connection.
Site 1
Site 2
Site 1
Site 2
Serial Cable
PC with Serial
Thin Client
Serial
Cable
Serial
Elite LAN PC
Programming Device
Ethernet
Elite LAN
PCSPE
LAN
from
Programming Device
PC with Thin Client
LAN / WAN
LAN / WAN
CallAnalyst Clients
CallAnalyst
Clients
Server with MSDE or SQL 2000
Server with MSDE or SQL
2000
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 42
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
PC requirements for the Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server include the following:
J
J
H
Software Requirements
N
N
N
N
WIN NT 4.0 with SP 6
Windows 2000 with SP 3
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2000 Server
Hardware Minimum Requirements
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Pentium III Processor
512 MB RAM
2 GB of free hard drive space
SVGA 1024 X 768 is recommended
CD-ROM drive when using CD for installation
Available serial port and RS-232 cable
Network Card
Printer if reports are required
PC requirements for the Database Server include the following:
J
Software Requirements
N
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (Customer provided)
- OR -
N
J
MSDE for Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server Database creation (included with feature)
The Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server should be installed on a separate PC, but
other applications may be installed. Performance depends on the memory and
processing needs for the other applications.
Hardware Requirements
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Pentium III Processor
512 MB RAM
2 GB of free hard drive space
SVGA 1024 X 768 is recommended
CD-ROM drive when using CD for installation
Available serial port and RS-232 cable.
Network Card
Printer if reports are required
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
PC requirements for CallAnalyst Clients and/or CallAlert! include the following:
J
J
H
N
N
N
N
WIN NT 4.0 with SP 6
Windows 2000 with SP 3
Windows XP Professional
Internet Explore 5.0 or higher
Hardware Requirements
N
N
N
N
Pentium III Processor
256 MB RAM
1 GB of free hard drive space
Network Card
Requirements for Database Server Types includes:
J
J
H
Software Requirements
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (Customer provided)
Pentium III Processor
MSDE restrictions include:
J
J
Maximum recommended size:
1 GB
Maximum Network Clients:
5
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 44
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response
E-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is a software application that accepts a combination of voice
telephone input, database information, and telephone keypad selection to provide audio (usually voice)
information to callers and databases, place calls, transfer calls, and send e-mail messages. IVRs also
allow callers to provide voice and data information to be stored in databases used by other user
applications. Common IVR applications include:
H
Bank and stock account balances and transfers
H
Surveys and polls
H
Call center hold and forwarding
H
Order entry tracking
H
Simple order entry transactions
H
Selective information lookup (movie schedules, etc.)
The IVR application uses pre-recorded voice, optional text-to-speech, call flow logic, access to relevant
data, and records voice input for later handling. Using computer telephony integration (CTI), the IVR can
hand off a call to someone that can view data related to the caller at a display.
The programmable IVR uses open database connectivity (ODBC) connections to databases to allow
complete customizing of call flows and information anytime. The IVR can generate e-mail messages and
can be remotely monitored and configured using a LAN or WAN in a totally secure environment.
Basically, the IVR receives calls, collects information, and forwards the call.
A customer can use NEC Professional Services to customize the IVR to meet a unique user application.
The following major functions are provided:
H
Call control
J
J
J
Answer an inbound call.
Place an outbound call.
Collect DTMF digits from a caller.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
Play text to a caller as digits, number, date, time, or money.
Record from a caller into a file.
Select a menu item.
Access caller ID information.
Set all call control parameters.
Supervise normal and Blind transfers.
Announce a call prior to connection to another port.
Multilingual support
Database Access (ODBC)
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
Play one or more audio files to a caller.
Open a Data Source Name (DSN).
Close an opened DSN.
Execute a direct SQL statement to query, insert, update, and delete records.
Get data fields from a selected record.
Get the next selected record.
Use database information to control program logic or present data to callers.
Program Control
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Script driven for total control
if, else, else if, end if logic control with up to 20 levels of nesting
goto for branching to a label
exec to start a whole new program
run and return to execute a function (with nesting) and continue
User embedding of comments and tracing information
User generation of events
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 46
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Logging
J
J
J
H
Audio files are automatically cached in Zeus cache.
Memory is available for caching that can be configured.
No user actions are required.
Modified audio files are automatically updated in cache.
Pause for configured number of milliseconds.
Mark the current date and time.
Get the number of seconds from a marked time now.
Assign a new script to be executed after user specified number of seconds.
Suspend a timer.
Cancel a timer.
Variables
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
Date and time stamping of all log entries.
Timers
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
User specified information in logs.
Caching
J
J
J
J
H
Unlimited number of user definable logs.
Variables are user definable.
Variables can be integer or string type.
Set a variable to the result of an expression.
Set a variable to a string.
Set a variable to another variable.
Set a variable to the results of a function( ).
Use variables anywhere in script syntax.
Strings
J
J
String extraction: Left, Mid, Right
String replacement
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
System information: current day of month, day of week, year, month, hour, minute, date
Temporary unique name generation
File Control
Rename files
Remove files
Copy files
Test the existence of a file or directory.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
IVR(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Operating Procedures depend on the application.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The IVR(8)-U( ) ETU is assigned as VMS 8 in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment),
and Digital VM is assigned in Memory Block 7-2 (Telephone Type Assignment).
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
E-7
Elite ACD Plus
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 48
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BS
Station Number Assignment
4-10
+BTT
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
+BTT
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment
4-15
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 50
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response
EliteApps - PC Attendant
E-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The EliteApps - PC Attendant provides easy access to the most common functions required by an
operator or receptionist. Using this application, the attendant can easily manage call handling tasks
without having to switch attention between the telephone and the PC. Additional features, such as a
company directory, recording ability, and PC-to-PC messaging, provide additional value to the NEC
attendant position. The EliteApps - PC Attendant has three main components:
1.
EliteApps - PC Attendant Application Software
This application runs on a PC and provides the PC based GUI (Graphical User Interface) and
features.
2.
CTU Adapter
The adapter is installed on the Multiline Terminal and interfaces the Electra Elite IPK KSU with the
USB (Universal Serial Bus) port on the PC.
3.
Headset (optional)
A headset can be plugged into the Multiline Terminal and used when making or receiving calls with
the EliteApps - PC Attendant.
The EliteApps - PC Attendant runs on the PC and communicates with the Electra Elite IPK through a
normal digital station port using the CTU Adapter that is attached to the telephone. When a call comes
into this station, the PC Attendant displays it on the PC and provides several features that allow the user
to handle the call quickly. EliteApps - PC Attendant can be minimized to run in the background and pop
to the front when call activity occurs. Calls can then be handled using either the keyboard or the mouse.
The attendant speaks to the caller through the telephone handset, headset, or speakerphone.
The following major features are described below:
Company Directory
Entire company directory or selected records can be printed.
Call Log
The Call log can be archived to a separate file and accessed by other applications such as Microsoft
Excel.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp Field
The PC Attendant can display up to 120 BLF keys, when used with a compatible Voicemail or ACD Plus
ETU.
Recording
The PC Attendant can be configured to automatically record all calls handled by the attendant.
Quick Message
Quick Message allows the attendant to send a message to another employee PC. The message
automatically pops up on the recipient screen and allows a response to be sent back to the attendant.
This is Ideal for message notification when an employee is on the phone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
When Extended DSS/BLFs ARE NOT required:
H
Any DTH/DTR Terminal with a CT(U)-R Unit installed
- OR Any DTU/DTP Terminal with a CTU(S)-U Unit installed
When Extended DSS/BLFs ARE required:
H
DTH/DTR-8-1 Terminal with a CT(U)-R Unit installed
- OR DTU/DTP-8-1 Terminal with a CTU(S)-U Unit installed
Required Components:
H
CT(U)-R Unit for DTH/DTR type Multiline Terminal
H
AC-R Unit for CT(U)-R Unit
- OR CTU(S)-U Unit for DTU/DTP type Multiline Terminal
H
ACA-U UNIT for CTU(S)-U Unit
H
CMS/FMS/VMS( )-U20/30 ETU or higher
- OR ACD(8)-U( ) ETU when 96 Extended DSS/BLFs are required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 52
EliteApps - PC Attendant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
System Administration Terminal (SAT) software and MIFM-U( ) or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU (for PC
Programming during setup)
PC requirements for EliteApps - PC Attendant
J
J
Software Requirements
N
Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, Windows ME, or Windows XP
Hardware Requirements
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Intel Pentium III, Celeron or higher compatible processor with a minimum speed of 500MHz
256MB RAM (minimum)
A minimum of 15 MB of free hard disk space for installation. Additional hard disk space is
required for calls to be recorded.
CD-ROM drive
Mouse
Unused USB port to connect to the Client key
Optional PC speakers and microphone
Printer is required when using the printing features of the PC Attendant.
MAPI compliant e-mail application is required when using the e-mail features of PC Attendant.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
This depends on the application.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Multiple user profiles can be defined on a single PC. This allows different individuals to use the
attendant workstation and maintain their own configuration settings.
A list of the parked call locations provides the attendant with a reminder of the last call that
application parked at each location. The attendant can click on the Parked Call list to retrieve a call
from a parked call location.
The PC Attendant can monitor the same BLFs that are defined for ACD Plus, as long as they are
within the first 96 One Touch keys on the ETU. The application for the PC Attendant sends the
state information for the first 96 keys to the PC. Within the PC Attendant configuration, you specify
which of these 96 keys are to be interpreted as console BLF keys. So you do not have to define
two BLF keys to have the PC Attendant monitor an agent telephone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The Clock used on display is from the PC, not from the Electra Elite IPK system.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
All incoming calls to the EliteApps - PC Attendant must ring into Call Arrival (CAR) Keys. All other
incoming calls are not supported [i.e., Day/Night Ring assignment calls and direct inward
terminating calls (DIT/DID/E&M Tie Line/K-CCIS/Intercom/Dial 0 For Attendant and transferred
calls)] (EliteApps – PC Attendant Version 1.00 only.
A maximum of 8 Call Appearance (CAP) Keys are supported with this application and need to be
programmed on Line Keys 1~8.
For the first 24 DSS/BLF indications to work, you must program the Feature Access and One
Touch keys on the attendant phone and the EliteApps PC Attendant application must be set to find
those keys in Tools/Preferences/BLF/DSS. The telephony configuration must be set in Tools/
Telephony Configuration/Button to match KSU programming.
When Extended DSS/BLFs are required, PC Programming (SAT) is required to assign Line Keys
9~16 and One-Touch keys 1~16 for the station using the EliteApps PC Attendant.
Only one station can use the Expanded BLFs (more than 24).
PC Programming (SAT) is required to assign One-Touch keys on the ports of the ACD(8)-U( ) or
FMS/VMS(8)-U20/30 ETU during installation and/or to add or remove phones when Expanded
BLFs are required.
For the Extended DSS/BLF indications to work you must program the One Touch keys on the
lowest port of the EliteMail CMS/FMS/VMS(8)-U20/30, or ACD(8)-U( ) and the EliteApps PC
Attendant application must be set to find those keys in Tools/Preferences/BLF/DSS.
Each port of the CMS/FMS/VMS( )-U20/30 ETU or ACD(8)-U( ) provides 20 extended DSS/ BLFs
up to the maximum shown in the table below.
ETU
H
H
H
Available Extended DSS/BLFs
CMS/FMS/VMS(2)-U20/30
40
CMS/FMS/VMS(4)-U20/30
80
CMS/FMS/VMS(8)-U20/30 or ACD(8)-U( )
96
EliteMail FMS/VMS(8)-U10 does not support the Extended DSS/BLFs.
When using the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU for the 96 Expanded BLFs, any phone that you want the PC
Attendant to monitor must be defined within the first 96 ports on the ETU. ACD agents that you do
not want monitored by the PC Attendant, can be defined anywhere within the first seven ports.
When they are within the first 96 buttons, the PC Attendant configuration could be setup to ignore
their state.
The Extended DSS/BLF indications cannot show DND/Forward conditions, only busy/idle.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 54
EliteApps - PC Attendant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Message waiting on line key is not supported for DSS/BLF indications on EliteApps – PC
Attendant.
H
For night mode indication to work, a Feature Access key must be programmed in Memory Block
4-12 (Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode) on the EliteApps PC Attendant telephone, and the
EliteApps PC Attendant application must be set to find that button in Tools/Preferences/BLF/DSS.
H
For Auto Head Set to work, a Feature Access key must be programmed in Memory Block 4-12
(Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode) on the PC Attendant telephone, and the EliteApps – PC
Attendant application must be set to find that key in Tools/Telephony Configuration/Operation
Mode.
H
When installing the TAPI driver on the EliteApps PC Attendant Console PC always select
telephone type 32/32D no matter what type of telephone is actually used.
H
Incoming calls to a CAR key are supported only by Line Keys assigned for the incoming CAR key.
Incoming CAR keys are not supported by DSS/BLF keys or by Extended DSS/BLF keys.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available (R2500 or higher).
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-12
Attendant Camp-On
A-13
Attendant Positions
A-15
Attendant Transfer
D-5
Dial 0 For Attendant
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-2-22
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 56
EliteApps - PC Attendant
Elite Q-Master
E-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Elite Q-Master is a modular multimedia Contact Center solution providing skills-based routing (SBR) and
blending customer contacts using Telephone, Email, Web Callback, and Web Chat. Elite Q-Master
provides much more than a conventional Automatic Call Distribution system. Starter Packs incorporate
the physical EliteMail CTI ETU to provide the basic hardware platform: A Windows 2000 PC with voice
ports that resides inside the Electra Elite IPK telephone system and comes with the core Administration
and Reports modules installed.
Elite Q-Master is licensed according to the modules required by the customer, and the number of
concurrent users. For specific information regarding each module, refer to the separate product
manuals. These manuals are common for all NEC platforms, and the feature restrictions described in
the document may limit availability of some features for installations on the Electra Elite IPK telephone
system.
Elite Q-Master supports up to 60 concurrent Agents and Supervisors (9999 agents can be defined, but
only 60 can be active at the same time). Telephone calls (incoming DIT, ANA, DID, CO, or ring
Transfer) terminate to a programmed queue (up to 32 queues are supported). Each queue is
programmed as a Call Arrival (CAR) Key so the number of queues depends on the total number of
configured devices in the Electra Elite IPK system. A maximum of 120 extensions and CAR keys are
supported, and the user must remember to count voicemail ports and Q-announce ports. Any agent can
take calls from any queue, based on customer Caller ID, agent skills, or routing choices made using the
Q-Master graphical user interface (GUI) administration tool. Q-Master delivers the incoming call either
to the agent that has been idle the longest or in accordance with a programmed preference level.
Consideration can be made for concurrent activity by the agent on other medias (for example, queue
Telephone calls can be blocked when the agent is currently engaged in a Web Chat with another
customer). Please refer to the Q-Control product manual for additional information.
The Q-Master Announce Module
This module helps the customer improve customer service levels and reduce abandonment rates to
improve the effectiveness of the customer contact center. Up to 99 queue progress announcements can
be defined for each queue to provide Estimated Time To Answer (ETA) and position in queue (PIQ) that
update dynamically to keep the customer informed of the progress while waiting in queue. The customer
can control the Announce module using the GUI Administration tool on their PC desktop. Queue specific
delay messages can be pre-recorded and real-time customer announcements can be made.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
An example follows:
If you are calling about a problem with your email, please be aware that we are currently working to
resolve a problem with the email server; we expect to have this resolved by midday. If you require
assistance for another matter please hold for the first available team member.
For additional information, please refer to the Q-Announce product manual.
The Q-Callback Module
This module enhances the Q-Announce Module to give a customer waiting in queue the option of leaving a
callback request. This helps to both reduce abandonment and balance call center workloads during peak
periods. Q-Callback takes the telephone number and a message and allows the caller to drop out of queue.
The callback request becomes a virtual call, and when an agent becomes available, the call is returned to the
customer. When the customer is unavailable when the agent calls back, the request is scheduled again and
the original caller message, complete with callback attempt history, is presented to another agent at a later
date and time. Callbacks and Callback attempts are tracked and extensively incorporated in the Q-Reports.
Q-Callback is commonly used to allow customers to leave messages during CSR team meetings and after
call center normal business hours. Customer requests are queued and agents can address requests as soon
as they log in. For additional information please refer to the Q-Callback product manual.
The Desktop Application
This application interfaces the agent with the multimedia contact center and provides a real-time indication of
contact center activity. Details include the number of calls in queue (including individual Caller ID and wait
time) and the number and status of agents available to answer calls from each queue. Q-Desktop also
provides after call resolution or wrap-up. For additional information, please refer to the Q-Desktop product
manual.
The Q-Email Module
This module integrates the telephone system with the email server for a blended call center where
configured skill profiles determine which agent should receive the call. The administration can specify
the time to recover and present the unanswered emails to another available agent, restrict the number of
concurrent emails each agent can handle, and determine whether or not an agent is allowed to receive
an email while on a queue telephone call. NEC professional services are frequently required to support
the initial deployment of this module. For additional information, please refer to the Q-Email Whitepaper
and product manual.
The Q-Web Module
This module provides web users an Internet form that generates the request for either an agent callback or a
web chat. Q-Web Callback presents the agent with a text message to initiate a telephone call back to the
web user. Q-Web Chat is a direct text-based interaction between the agent and the external web user. Both
modules allow customer contacts from an Internet Web site to be blended with other customer contact
activities, such as Telephone Calls and Queue Emails. NEC professional services are frequently required
to support the initial deployment of this module. For additional information, please refer to the Q-Web
Callback and Q-Web Chat Whitepapers and product manuals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 58
Elite Q-Master
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Q-IVR Module
This optional module allows customer self-help solutions to be implemented. IVR voice prompts are
administered using the standard Q-Master Administration GUI tool, and call flows are implemented as
customer-specific professional services using Java Script or Visual Basic coding. Customer information (for
example, account numbers) can be passed to an agent where personal assistance is required. Queue
statistics can be reported using the Q-Reports application, and detailed call flow reporting can be
incorporated in the call flow scripting when required. Please contact the NEC sales support team for
assistance with quotations for this module, and for more information refer to the Q-IVR Whitepaper and
product manual.
The Q-Outdial Application
This application allows significant improvement to agent productivity by blending outbound customer calls
with incoming customer contact activity, reducing agent reluctance between calls, and managing customer
call campaigns. Call lists can be imported from a formatted .CSV/text file or scheduled to be dynamically
pulled from a live database based on a schedule. Campaigns can be Prevue Dial (agents can review
information and then click to dial) or Power Dial (agent telephone is presented with a call and the telephone
number is automatically dialed without delay). NEC professional services are frequently required to
support the initial deployment of this module. For additional information, please refer to the Q-Outdial
Whitepaper and product manual.
One unique aspect of the Elite Q-Master solution is support for migration directly to the NEC IPS or IPX
telephone system when customer requirements change, and they need more than the 60-agent limit of the
Electra Elite IPK system (Maximum of 64 trunks are supported). Customers that upgrade can retain all their
end-user environmental tools, including the Q-Desktop GUI application and in some cases the physical
telephone set.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Supported Electra Elite/ Electra Elite IPK Firmware versions:
Electra Elite IPK R2000 or higher
Terminal Type:
Electra Elite IPK or Dterm Series i Multiline Terminals
- OR Electra Elite or Dterm Series E Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
CTI-U10 ETU loaded with the Elite Q-Master application
Local PC for each agent (for Log On/log Off)
A server PC when the full version of the Elite Q-Master is used
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Q-Master provides a comprehensive suite of online help for end users, customer administrators, and call
center supervisors. Refer to the product manuals for the core applications: Q-Control, Q-Reports,
Q-Desktop and the supplementary products such as Q-Callback, Q-Chat, Q-IVR, and Q-Outdial for a
more detailed review of specific functionality. Alternately, refer to the online help for configuration
information.
SYSTEM CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The Q-Master hardware connects to the Electra Elite IPK through ports recognized by the KSU as
Digital Voicemail Ports.
The Elite Q-Master connects to the customer LAN using a standard RJ45 Ethernet adapter; a
patch cable should be provisioned from the telephone system to the LAN data switch prior to
installation.
Voice Prompts and firmware are stored on the CTI-U10 ETU loaded with Elite Q-Master
application.
The end-user GUI software for Administration, Reports, and real-time agent status is installed to an
existing customer file server and is accessed using a shortcut from the desktop of the Agent Client
PC. To host these applications, 200 Mb of available space is required.
The client software and the server communicate using TCP/IP; the customer network should
support this network protocol before implementation (most do).
All calls must be announced on arrival to the queue: This greeting can be any of the following: an
Auto Attendant offering key entry selections and direct dial, a welcome greeting specific to the
queue, or a Query for a key entry PIN (e.g., customer code, job number, or invoice number).
Following the initial announcement, callers are placed on Non-Exclusive hold.
Between queue progress announcements, the caller is placed on Non-Exclusive hold and hears
the KTS Music on Hold (MOH).
The Elite Q-Master can support IP Phones for remote users; however, special consideration
regarding network performance and installation of the client Q-Desktop GUI software is required.
When a K-CCIS trunk is on hold, the specified Line Seizure access code is used by the system to
retrieve the call from a held state for delivery to an available agent, or play a queue delay
announcement.
The Elite Q-Master can support an distribute incoming calls from remote K-CCIS offices. However,
incoming calls into Elite Q-Master that result in link reconnect are not supported. These calls must
be answered by the local station, and then transferred into the Elite Q-Master when they are not
internal (intercom) calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 60
Elite Q-Master
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
As part of the software installation process, the software must be registered through the internet.
This process can be accomplished from the server or from any PC on the customer LAN that has
access to both the server and the Internet. The server should be configured for Internet access.
The server leaves the factory configured for DHCP and therefore automatically gets this access for
most customer installations.
The Elite Q-Master operates as a “Black box” to minimize vulnerability to viruses and simplify the
installation. The CTI-U10 ETU loaded with the Elite Q-Master application is not intended to be
joined to the customer network domain.
Restrictions:
H
The Elite Q-Master is factory configured to use the machine name, necqmaster; this name should
not be changed. When compliance to a customer computer naming convention is required or
where customer has multiple Q-Master installations as part of a wide area network (WAN), please
ask the NTAC for assistance before making this change.
H
ETW Telephones are not supported when Q-Master is used.
H
Internal (intercom) calls to an Elite Q-Master queue are not supported.
H
DNIS display is not supported for incoming calls to the Elite Q-Master.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
CALL PROCESSING
DESCRIPTION
Abandoned Call Search
Abandoned incoming calls are not connected to agent positions. The system removes them from the
queue on trunks that provide calling party disconnect supervision. Q-Reports can be run to provide
details of queue abandonment including time of arrival, wait time and (subject to trunk type and telco
services provided) Caller Line Identification (CLI/ANI).
Call Transfer to ACD Queue
Trunk calls that terminate to a normal station, ACD agent, or supervisor can be transferred to an ACD
queue. Calls must be blind transferred to the queue (the transferring party cannot wait with the caller on
line and announce the caller). In some cases, transferred calls may create an extra call record; to
ensure accuracy of reporting, the transfer timer or minimum abandon timer must be configured in the
Administrator.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 61
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Queuing
When agents are not available, all incoming calls for ACD queues are placed in the queue that provides
first in/first out call processing. This can be overridden (higher or lower priority) based on either
customer PIN entry or ANI/CLI recognition. Q-Master skills-based routing (SBR) allows an agent to take
calls from any queue; each queue is defined with a relative priority that can escalate over time. Unlike
many ACD systems, Q-Master does not escalate caller priority by moving calls from one queue to
another; instead more agents become available to answer the call as it gets older. Reporting is based
on the one queue.
Pilot Numbers
A system-programmed pilot number is the entry point for callers to an ACD queue. The Pilot number
corresponds to a Call arrival key appearance in the Electra Elite IPK system. Each Queue has an
individual CAR key. Do not program an ACD Pilot number in a station hunt group because station hunt
has priority over ACD.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Calls are answered first in/first out unless specifically identified for higher or lower priority.
H
Calls are distributed to the longest idle agent or according to the priority level assigned to an agent.
H
H
H
When an ACD agent does not answer a call after a programmed time, the call is pulled back to the
front of the queue and offered to the next available agent.
Elite Q-Master uses a weekly schedule to determine the queue mode. Queue modes determine
the initial action to be taken for the call. Each queue is programmed typically for different modes:
for day and night, team meetings, or emergencies (to allow for building evacuation, drills, or other
such activities). Queue modes allow Auto Attendants, Greeting Announcements, Customer PIN
queries, Q-Callback (callers are prompted to leave a message and telephone number that is
treated as a virtual call), IVR (optional), Greet and Transfer, or redirect to an internal extension
number (after hours mailbox). Call Center supervisors can change the queue mode in real time to
reflect current activity.
Maximum programming assignments for ACD queues and agents are listed below:
J
J
J
J
9999 Agent and Supervisor IDs can be assigned.
9999 Agents and Supervisors can be assigned to one Queue.
60 agents can be logged on at the same time.
32 ACD/Auto Attendant queues can be assigned per system (a total of 120 extensions, voice
ports and queues (CAR keys) are supported by the Electra Elite IPK).
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 62
Elite Q-Master
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The Elite Q-Master schedule can be programmed per queue to automatically change mode for
individual holidays or entire date ranges such as New Year holiday, state holidays, and Yom
Kippur. These holidays can be programmed years in advance and viewed by the administrator
using the GUI tool.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
For Multiline Terminals, direct trunk appearances of CO lines are not supported system wide.
Multiline Terminals must have a Call Appearance (CAP) key assigned to answer the calls.
System performance can be affected by the appearance of SIE/CAR keys that should be
minimized to prevent overloading the CTI link. Extension names programmed in the Electra Elite
cannot start with a number.
For the following Q-Master functionalities, the extension must be monitored by the Q-Master
system: Logging into queues, advanced Q-Master/Q-Desktop telephone control features, or
display of extension real-time status regardless of login. During this time Q-Master takes over
control of the softkeys, and softkey interaction is not supported.
AGENT AND SUPERVISOR FUNCTIONS
DESCRIPTION
Assistance
During an ACD queue call, an agent can click a button in the Q-Desktop application to request
supervisor assistance (Visual and Audio alert to supervisor running Q-Desktop).
Break Mode
Using Q-Desktop, an agent can sign out of ACD mode for a break without logging off. The agent can
choose a predefined break reason or build a custom reason (depending on agent permissions).
Work Mode
An agent can be put in momentary Worktime to process the previous call. This can be done
automatically after the previous call for a programmed time or manually entered/ended using a
Q-Desktop button. During this time, queue calls are not presented. Each queue can have a Worktime
Override set so that when too many callers are waiting in queue, the agent is automatically denied after
call Worktime.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 63
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Logon/Logoff
An agent can log on or off using the Q-Desktop application. Operating statistics are collected until the
agent logs off. Agent hot seating is supported because Q-Master tracks agent skill profile and statistics
against the agent logon ID instead of the station number. When hot seating is not required, the agent
extension can be set to also log non-queue activity when logged on and report inbound/outbound calls
for the agent. This feature requires that the always monitor option be selected against the agent
extension.
Non-ACD Call
An agent or supervisor can receive a transferred call or a direct trunk call (e.g., Day/Night Ringing, DIT,
DID, or Tie line call). Transferred ACD calls from another agent, or ACD queue calls when the caller is
placed on hold and subsequently picked up by another agent are considered non-ACD calls.
Headset Answer/Release
An agent using a headset can press a programmed Headset ON/Off Line Key to answer or release an
ACD queue call; Q-Master can be set to activate this key automatically for queue calls delivered to the
agent.
Headset Volume Control
An agent can control the volume of the headset independent of the volume of the handset.
Monitoring (Barge-In)
The supervisor can monitor agent calls using a key operation on the supervisor terminal. The
conference LED can be on or off depending on programming for each terminal involved during
monitoring.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
When a call is transferred to the ACD Pilot number using a call appearance key, the LED for that
key remains on until the Elite Q-Master answers the call in typically 1~5 seconds depending on the
traffic volume.
Call forward and DND do not affect calls offered from Q-Master. An agent with these functions set
is still delivered a queue call.
A default alert tone (that can be disabled in system programming) is provided for barge-in
monitoring.
An agent in an ACD queue can log out to prevent receiving ACD calls. The station user can then
originate calls or receive calls directed to the station number but cannot receive calls from the ACD
queue.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 64
Elite Q-Master
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
An agent can log on/off from the telephone using the Q-Master Analog Login feature. The agent
dials the analog login number and is answered and prompted for the Agent login ID.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
Incoming ACD queue calls cannot be received when the agent is on break; a queue depth
parameter allows calls to deliver through Worktime when callers have been waiting longer than the
prescribed threshold.
When an ACD queue call is being offered to an agent and the agent receives a non-ACD call, the
queue call is recalled and offered to the next available agent.
When an agent is logged on to Q-Master, softkeys do not function.
ANNOUNCEMENT FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
There are no Default announcements, Progress announcements, or Position in Queue announcements
for the Elite Q-Master. Each announcement can be recorded either using the Administrator application
audio editor with audio recorded from the telephone or PC microphone or by importing it from.WAV or.
VOX files. Optimum recording settings for studio recordings are available in the online help. Each
announcement can be used by any queue. Each announcement can be edited using the Administrator
GUI .WAV editor to delete or paste audio content. All announcements are stored in the Q-Master
internal database.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
When all agents in the ACD queue are busy, the caller waits in queue until an agent becomes
available. In addition to MOH, the caller can receive Welcome and Please Hold progress
announcements that can include Position in Queue and Estimated Time to Answer.
Each caller hears every announcement from the beginning; an optional system-wide setting allows
callers hearing delay messages to be interrupted and delivered to an agent when one becomes
available during a queue progress announcement.
The first announcement is played for the caller even when an agent is available because Q-Master
requires a forced announcement for all callers; this can be an Auto Attendant, Welcome Greeting,
Request for PIN (Query), or greet and transfer. After initial greeting, the caller is placed on KTS
trunk hold and hears the system MOH.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 65
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
When all Q-Master ports are busy, the caller continues to hear ringback or MOH until a Q-Master
port becomes available. The number of licensed Q-Announce ports determines the number of
available ports. Q-Master exception reporting allows auditing of how often callers had to wait for
an announcement port to become available.
H
A maximum of eight calls can be receiving announcements at the same time. The maximum
number of calls receiving announcements depends on the number of Q-Announce licenses.
Between announcements, callers are placed on trunk hold and the port is available for other calls.
While on trunk hold, the caller hears the telephone system MOH. A maximum of 64 trunks can be
supported by the telephone system.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
Station Number Assignment
4-10
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BK
+BA
,
,
+BM
+BTS
+BS
+BTM
,
,
,
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
042, 064
When the system is at default, this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 66
Elite Q-Master
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Q-MASTER ELECTRA ELITE/IPK VS. Q-MASTER IPS/IMX
DESCRIPTION
Almost all features of the Q-Master application suite are the same between the NEC systems, and the
customer can upgrade from one system to the other with minimal changes. The following table of
feature restrictions is provided to highlight functionality between the platforms.
Feature
Elite/IPK
IPS/IMX
Dialed Number
Identification (DNIS)
Routing/Reporting
Each DNIS requires a
separate queue pilot to
enable reporting
Different DNIS/DID/DTI
can be directed to the
same queue and priority
can be adjusted; the call
is tagged to identify the
dialed destination to the
agent and for reporting.
Internal CTI ETU/blade
server/multiple servers
Supported for Q-Master
Lite, the same ETU is
used for
announcements and
CTI interface for Elite QMaster installs. An
external server is
required for installations
greater than 15 agents/
Desktop, four
announce, or when
optional modules (e.g.,
Outdial or IVR) are
installed
An internal CTI ETU is
not supported; an
external server
connects using analog
extensions (one per
announce port) to the
PBX OAI TCP/IP
interface.
Q-Announce
Supported on internal
Elite/IPK CTI ETU.
Announce – Initial
action for callers.
Q-Announce is required
for all installations;
every call must be
greeted to obtain
incoming trunk and
caller information. After
the initial
announcement, callers
are placed on PBX hold
and hear MOH.
Telephone Login
(without Q-Desktop)
Comment
A separate server is recommended for
IVR installations, or Enhanced routing
because of the nature of customer
database interactions required by these
modules.
The Elite/IPK CTI ETU is an
internal ETU supported by PBX
battery backup.
External server required
with Dialogic/Aculab
hardware.
Normal queuing mode
is supported to allow a
call to be presented to
an agent without
greeting.
Most customers implement at least a
greeting (e.g., Welcome to ACME Co.
Your call may be monitored for quality
assurance; an associate will be with you
shortly).
Analog login and Dterm
DTMF keys are
supported.
Most installation are deployed with
Q-Desktop.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 67
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Elite/IPK
IPS/IMX
Agents with Analog
extensions
Not supported. No CTI
visibility of Analog
extension activity
provided by the CTI link.
Supported – Q-Desktop
is recommended.
Announce – IVR
maximum capacity
Eight concurrent callers
can listen to an
announcement or IVR
script anytime.
Between
announcements, callers
are placed on hold to
allow ports to manage
multiple calls.
Maximum Concurrent
Agents
UP to 60 concurrent
agents and supervisors
can be logged in
anytime. Additional
supervisors can run QDesktop for call center
visibility, but can’t take
calls
Elite Q-Master Lite
Supports up to 15
concurrent agents and
Q-Desktop users, plus
four ports of
Q-Announce and
Q-Callback.
Not Available
This is a platform-specific promotion. The
customer can upgrade to the standard
(complete) Q-Master product license
when required.
Not Available
Supports up to 100
concurrent agents and
a maximum of 10
concurrent Q-Desktop
users plus Q-Announce.
Does not support QCallback.
This is a platform-specific promotion. The
customer can upgrade to the standard
(complete) Q-Master product license
when required.
NEC Q-Master Voice
Only
Q-Fax
A maximum of 108 total
IVR and Queue
Announce ports are
supported across up to
three servers.
IPS typically supports
up to 150 concurrent
agents and supervisors.
The IMX is targeted for
call centers for up to
250 concurrent agents.
Comment
Most customer deployments are between
four and 12 ports.
Allocation of the functionality is dynamic.
Each port can dynamically change from
Announce features such as Auto
Attendant to IVR as required. The total
ports in use any one time for a specific
feature depends on the site licenses.
Concurrent usage licensing is based on
active agents logged in to take queue calls
or run the Q-Desktop software; These
functions are licensed separately.
The agent tools, including customer
screen pop applications, can normally
transition from one PBX platform to
another during an upgrade, but product
licensing must be applicable to the PBX
platform.
Available now and
supports multiple
separate queues.
Same announcement
ports are used, but
hardware has
restrictions for number
of concurrent faxes
depending on
configuration.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 68
Elite Q-Master
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Elite/IPK
IPS/IMX
Comment
Redundancy, fallback
for PBX CTI link failure
An appearance of the
queue CAR key can be
programmed on a
supervisor telephone
with delayed ring.
When a CTI link failure
occurs, calls can be
manually answered and
transferred using this
key.
The NEC and CTI
server handshake; for
loss of connectivity, the
NEC reverts to FIFO
UCD call delivery to a
core group of
nominated extensions.
When a CTI connectivity fault occurs, calls
can be answered manually on all
platforms.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 69
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 70
Elite Q-Master
Emergency 911 – Cut Through
E-13
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
When all trunks that belong to the Dial Access Code 9 are busy, and a 911 call is placed, an assigned
trunk in the Trunk Group/Route Advance Block is dropped and accessed again by the system to place
the 911 call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature at any terminal:
E
I AA I IAA
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial
3.
Talk.
or
+
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 71
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The station user can dial 9+911 or 911 to place a call to the Emergency services.
H
Emergency 911 – Cut Through overrides the following features:
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Outgoing Restriction
LCR
ARS
Forced Account Code Verified/Unverified
Emergency 911 is displayed on the terminal at the originating station of the 911 call.
RELEASED FOR 911 is displayed on the display Multiline Terminal at the station that was
disconnected.
DROPPED 911 is displayed on PS II terminals that are disconnected.
When the line specified by Memory Block 3-69 is set for Trunk Queuing, the system automatically
disconnects the line and originates 911.
When the line specified by Memory Block 3-69 is held for the Call Park feature, the system
automatically disconnects the line and originates 911.
When a PBX/CTX access code was assigned using Memory Blocks 1-1-24 (PBX/CTS Access
Code Assignment I) or 1-1-25 (PBX/CTS Access Code Assignment II) and a 911 call is originated
on a PBX/CTX trunk, the system automatically inserts the PBX/CTX access code.
When the line is dropped by Emergency 911 – Cut Through, SMDR prints the dropped call as a
normal completed call.
When 911 is dialed, SMDR prints the call as a normal call with 911 in the digits dialed.
When 911 is dialed, the Attendant Position (Port 1 or Port 2) displays 911 Call at XXXX (the station
number used to dial 911) for 30 seconds.
When the station user is talking on a line that is to be dropped for 911 – Cut Through, an alert tone
is provided for 2 seconds before the line is disconnected.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 72
Emergency 911 – Cut Through
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Calls are dropped for 911 – Cut Through in the following priority:
1.
Talking State
2.
Holding State
3.
Parked State
4.
Conferencing, Live Record, or Live Monitoring State
Restrictions
H
The station user cannot press a busy Direct CO Line and dial 9+911or 911.
H
When 911 is not dialed continuously (e.g. dial 9+1+RECALL+1), the 911 call is not placed.
H
H
H
H
When Memory Block 3-92 is assigned as NIL and Memory Block 3-69, is set to YES, Emergency
911 – Cut Through feature is not supported.
When all trunks in Memory Block 3-69 are set to No, the Emergency 911 - Cut Through feature is
not supported.
CAMA trunk and Emergency 911 – Cut Through cannot be used at the same time.
Even when Yes is specified by Memory Block 3-69, the call is not dropped and/or disconnected
when the CO line status is as follows:
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
Receiving DIT call
Incoming Automated Attendant
Originating 911 call
Receiving ACD Incoming call
Emergency 911 – Cut Through does not override the following features:
J
J
J
J
H
Receiving Normal Incoming call
Digit Restriction set in Memory Block 4-32 (Trunk Digit Restriction)
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (outgoing trunk only)
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
FAX branch Connection
When a station dials 911 while a line is being used by the Fax Branch Connection, this line is not
dropped.
When a station with Live Record or Live Monitoring activated is dropped for 911 – Cut Through, no
indication is provided to the station or CO line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 73
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Data Assignment
H
H
H
H
H
Use Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] to Assign Access Code 9 to access
the appropriate Trunk Group or Route Advance Block.
Use Memory Block 3-69 (911 Cut Through Trunk Selection) to assign YES to All trunks used for
Emergency 911 – Cut Through. Default is all trunks assigned NO.
Use Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection) to assign trunk type to all trunks used for
Emergency 911 – Cut Through. Default is CO.
Use Memory Block 1-1-24 (PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment 1) and Memory Block 1-1-25
(PBX/CTX Access Code Assistant 2) to assign access codes when CTX/PBX trunks are assigned.
Use Memory Block 3-33 (Disconnect Recognition Time Selection) to assign the time the dropped
line remains idle before the line is seized for 911 calls.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BA
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment 1
1-1-24
+BA
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46
+BCT
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
3-33
+AE
911 Cut Through Trunk Selection
3-69
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 74
Emergency 911 – Cut Through
E-14
Enhanced 911
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK system supports Enhanced 911 by defining an available loop start trunk as a
CAMA or an ISDN PRI trunk. When a station user dials 911, 9+ 911, or CO line key + 911, the E911
trunk is selected and the Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) is called. The PSAP is provided
callback information generated from the Electra Elite E911 trunk.
The Electra Elite IPK system administrator must maintain and update the callback telephone number
database per station.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
COI(4)/(8)-U( ), COID(4)/(8)-U( ), COIB(4)/(8)-U( ) or COIB(4)-U20 ETU
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU V2.12 or higher
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature at any terminal:
I AA
I I AA
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial
.
- OR -
Dial
+
.
- OR -
Select a CO line key, and dial
I AA
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 75
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Restrictions:
H
H
The E911 trunk cannot be seized if user dials 911:
J
J
J
J
after seizing Hot Line.
after answering an incoming call.
after accessing the system using DISA.
during Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
The system attendant is not notified when an E911 call is made from the system.
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The Caller ID can now be used instead of the CESID. The E911 operator database uses either the
CESID or Caller ID to provide a callback number and location for emergency response.
A system that provides service to a different address using OPX circuits must provide a specific
CESID for that station. The CESID is provided by the TELCO when the OPX circuit is provided.
The KTS administrator must file a callback number along with this CESID to the E911 system that
then places this information in the E911 system database.
When the E911 trunk is busy, the system allows the call to be routed over another trunk. This is
software selectable. No Alternate Routing is the default (with a warning not to change it to Allow)
because of the concern that under catastrophic conditions a single location could overload the
emergency system with multiple 911 calls.
When a call is originated using Enhanced 911, the CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk is seized even when a
CESID code is not registered.
The E911 trunk should not be assigned to a line key, trunk group, route advance block, Specified
Tenant on CO/PBX/Centrex Line Seizure (1- or 2-digit), or Outgoing (CO only) Access in Same
Tenant.
Enhanced 911 is available only when a CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk is connected and assigned to the
system.
The Facility Interface Code (FIC) for a dedicated CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk is 02RV-O. This code is
provided when service is ordered to indicate the trunk type.
The following features cannot restrict the station ability to dial 911:
J
J
J
J
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Station Outgoing Lockout
LCR
Caller ID Blocking
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 76
Enhanced 911
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Enhanced 911 (CAMA Trunk)
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+AE
911-Cut Through Trunk Selection
3-69
+AE
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-43
+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-44
+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
(Maintenance Busy)
1-8-45
+AE
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-8-46
+AE
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Assignment
4-54
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
Enhanced 911 (ISDN PRI)
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AE
911-Cut Through Trunk Selection
3-69
+AE
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-43
+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-44
+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
(Maintenance Busy)
1-8-45
+AE
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-8-46
+AE
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Assignment
4-54
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 77
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Enhanced 911 (ISDN PRI)
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+AN
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 78
Enhanced 911
Equal Access Accommodation
E-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Equal Access Accommodation permits Speed Dial memories and Code Restriction to be applied to
CO/PBX lines that provide access to a Specialized Common Carrier (SCC).
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal:
AKAK
1.
Press an outside line key.
2.
Dial Equal Access Code
3.
Dial the long distance number.
4.
Talk with called party.
+ XXX. Equal Access inspection is applied.
Using a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial a trunk Access Code, and wait for outside dial tone.
3.
Dial Equal Access Code
AKAK
+ XXX.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 79
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Dial the applicable long distance number. Code Restriction inspection is applied.
5.
Talk with called party.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Code Restriction applies after an Other Common Carrier (OCC) code is dialed.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-21
Code Restriction
C-22
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+AC
OCC Table Assignment
1-1-67
+AC
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment
5-03
+AC
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table
Assignment
1-1-68
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment
1-1-61
+AC
,
+AC
,
+AC
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 80
Equal Access Accommodation
External Tone Ringer
E-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The External Tone Ringer provides a common audible tone with relay contacts for control when
incoming CO/PBX calls are received in Day or Night Mode. The relay contact closures may be used for
external bells or chimes. When an Attendant is not available, station users may respond to the external
ring and answer incoming calls. This feature provides wide area coverage or loud ringing for noisy
locations where incoming CO/PBX calls are answered.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU for common audible and control relays
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
An ECR-U( ) ETU is required for common audible and control relays (10 relays are provided).
H
The external ringing equipment must be locally provided.
H
Incoming calls to an External Tone Ringer can be answered by Call Pickup (Intratenant/
Intertenant).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 81
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
A maximum of four relays are programmable for External Tone Ringer control.
H
Tie lines, DIT/ANA calls, and DID trunks do not activate the External Tone Ringer control relays.
H
The External Tone Ringer does not operate on a trunk that is not assigned to a Tenant group.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BP
General Purpose Relay Assignment
1-8-37
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
2-08
External Ring Relay Cycle Selection
1-7-07
+BN
+BP
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 82
External Tone Ringer
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
E-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me) allows up to three zones of External Zone Paging plus All Zone
External Paging. The user can locate personnel quickly using external paging. An external speaker can
be installed in a noisy area where a telephone would not be appropriate. All Zone External Paging
enables emergency announcements to be made to all areas quickly. The Meet-Me function allows the
paged party to respond quickly to the paged call.
With the Electra Elite IPK system, a single external paging zone output is built into and provided with the
basic B64-U( ) KSU.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU for Zone Paging
1- or 2-way amplifier and speakers
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate using a Multiline Terminal:
EE EI
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Access Code
~
(as set in default) for the required zone, or press the
programmed Feature Access or One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 83
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
2.
Lift the handset.
EL
EJ
Dial the Meet-Me Access Code (
, when the page is an Internal/External Page, or
, when the page is an External Page, as set in default), or press the programmed Feature
Access or One-Touch key.
To originate using a Single Line Telephones:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the desired Access Code
EE EI
~
(as set in default) for the required zone.
To answer using a Single Line Telephones:
1.
2.
Lift the handset.
EL
EJ
Dial the Meet-Me Access Code (
, when the page is an Internal/External Page, or
, when the page is only an External Page, as set in default).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Default Access Codes are:
All External Zones
55
External Zone A
56
External Zone B
57
External Zone C
58
All Internal/External Zones
59
External Meet-Me
5#
Internal Meet-Me
5,
Default Access Codes can be changed
during installation.
After a page is established and the Meet-Me code is dialed, the paging circuit is released and
another party may page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 84
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
A Multiline Terminal user can conference an outside line with an External Zone Page to allow a
conversation to be monitored by people within speaker range.
Talk Back Paging is supported.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
When an External Zone Page is in progress (either Zone A, B, C, or All Zone), no other station can
activate External Zone Paging until all zones become idle again.
The built-in single external paging zone output with the Electra Elite IPK, B64-U( ) KSU, can
provide a pre-alert tone if assigned. The Chime control (4-Tone Chime) is not supported.
Only three external paging zones and All Zone external Paging are possible.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
B-1
Feature Name
Background Music Over External Speakers
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Assignment
1-6-05
+BP
External Speaker Connection Selection
1-7-02
+BP
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
1-7-03
+BP
External Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-06
+BP
External Speaker Pre-Tone/Chime Selection
1-7-08
+BP
External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection
1-7-09
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
074 ~
079,
081
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
E - 85
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
E - 86
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
F-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK system provides branch connection of locally provided facsimile machines to
CO/PBX lines. Additional dedicated CO/PBX lines are not required for a facsimile to operate. The
facsimile shares the last CO/PBX line on the COI(4)-U( ) ETU, or COIB(4)-U( ) ETU through the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) where the CO line is connected from TELCO.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not Applicable
Required Components:
COI(4)-U( ) ETU or COIB(4)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
The Electra Elite IPK systems require a COI(4)-U( ) ETU or COIB(4)-U( ) ETU to connect a
facsimile in branch to a direct CO/PBX line.
Connection of the facsimile machine does not require extra system ports.
The Electra Elite IPK systems cannot distinguish between an incoming facsimile call and a
CO/PBX call. Ringing assignments should be turned off for fax lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
A facsimile call terminating at the CO/PBX line where the Fax Branch Unit is connected in branch
is automatically answered by the Fax machine. Delayed Ringing Line assignment to stations for
the Fax Branch Line are recommended.
H
When the facsimile is in use, the loop detection information turns on the associated CO/PBX line
key LED on a Multiline Terminal.
H
When the facsimile is not in use, the Fax Branch CO/PBX line can be used as an outside line.
H
Code restriction does not apply to outgoing calls from the Fax machine.
Restrictions:
H
For this feature to work properly using the COIB(4)-U10 ETU, switch SW400 must be set to Loop
Start (LP).
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
L-6
Loop Start Trunks
U-5
Universal Slots
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
F-2
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Feature Access – User Programmable
F-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The User-Programmable Feature Access keys and One-Touch keys on the Multiline Terminals can be
used for System/Station Speed Dial and many system features.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, the LCD Name Assignment of Feature Access keys on DTH-16LD-1 telephones
can be user programmed.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program the Feature Access key for DSS/BLF:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the station number.
A
.
.
W.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
A
A
(optional step, refer to Note).
Dial
Dial
7.
Press
A
to switch the call from Voice to Tone or Tone to Voice.
.
To program the Feature Access key for Station Speed Dial:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum 4 digits).
6.
Dial the telephone number to be dialed.
7.
Press
K
.
.
W.
.
A
.
To program the Feature Access key for a dial code feature:
A
B
.
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the station number.
6.
Press
A
.
W.
.
A
.
To program a Feature Access key for a Feature key + code feature:
A
B
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Feature Access Code.
6.
Press
.
L L
. The
A
W.
indicates
A
to the Electra Elite system.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
F-4
Feature Access – User Programmable
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a Feature Access key for Digital Voice Mail function at a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Dial
5.
Dial Digital Voice Mail feature Code.
B
KK
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KG
.
W.
.
Feature Codes include:
= Record
= Pause
= Rerecord
= Erase
= End
= Urgent Page
= Address
6.
Press
A
= Live Monitor
.
The Operating Procedures below are for DTH-16LD telephones with Name Assignment (R3000 or
higher).
To program a Feature Access key with name for DSS/BLF:
A
B
G
.
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Press
5.
Dial
6.
Dial Station Number.
7.
Dial
8.
Press
9.
Press
10.
Enter name using the dial pad.
11.
Press
A
AH
.
W.
(when data is present).
.
(optional) to switch the call from Voice to Tone or Tone to Voice.
G
A
.
(when data is present).
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a Feature Access key with name for Station Speed Dial:
A
B
G
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Press
5.
Dial
6.
Dial Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum of four digits).
7.
Dial telephone number to be dialed.
8.
Press
9.
Press
10.
Enter name using the dial pad.
11.
Press
.
.
K
W.
(when data is present).
.
H
G
A
.
(when data is present).
.
To program a Feature Access key with name for a dial code feature:
A
B
G
.
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Press
5.
Dial
6.
Dial the station number.
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Enter name using the dial pad.
10.
Press
.
A
W.
(when data is present).
.
H
G
A
.
(when data is present).
.
To program a Feature Access key with name for a Feature Key +code feature:
A
B
G
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Press
.
.
W.
(when data is present).
___________________________________________________________________________________
F-6
Feature Access – User Programmable
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
L
5.
Dial
(indicates Feature to the Electra Elite IPK system).
6.
Dial Feature Access Code.
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Enter name using the dial pad.
10.
Press
H
G
A
.
(when data is present).
.
To program a Feature Access key with name Digital Voice Mail function:
A
B
G
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press (Feature Access)
4.
Press
5.
Dial
6.
Dial Digital Voice Mail feature Code.
.
.
B
KK
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KG
W.
(when data is present).
.
Feature Codes include:
= Record
= Pause
= Rerecord
= Erase
= End
= Urgent Page
= Address
H
G
A
= Live Monitor
.
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Enter name using the dial pad.
10.
Press
(when data is present).
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Line keys, not used for CO/PBX line access, may be assigned as Feature Access keys in System
Programming. The user can then program the Feature Access keys for Speed Dial, DSS/BLF, and
selected features (e.g., Call Pickup, Paging, DND set, or DND cancel).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
Each Feature Access key can store up to 16 digits.
When programming Feature Access or One-Touch keys, press the Answer key, then press: Recall,
Feature, Conf, Redial, Speaker, Answer, Transfer, or Hold to enter and store the applicable feature
keys.
Feature Access keys and One-Touch keys are similar in purpose and ability. Unused Line keys
can be assigned as Feature Access keys. One-Touch key availability is controlled by the type of
Multiline Terminal.
General: (for LCD Name Assignment of Feature Access keys on DTH-16LD-1 telephones by user
programming)
H
H
H
H
H
UP to eight characters can be assigned for DTH-16LD-1 Telephones with Name assignment with
Name assignment.
The feature key code for DTH-16LD-1 Telephones with Name assignment can be changed without
changing or erasing the name assigned to the Feature Access key, and the feature key Name can
be changed/edited without changing or erasing the feature key code assigned to the Feature
Access key.
When user is programming Feature Access keys on DTH-16LD-1 Telephones, The Transfer key is
used to delete data that is present.
When user is programming Feature Access keys on DTH-16LD-1 Telephones, The Conf key is
used to backspace/delete existing data one character at a time.
When a user programs or modifies a Name for a Feature Access key, changes are displayed in
Memory Block 4-68 (LCD Line Key – Name Assignment).
Restrictions: (for LCD Name Assignment of Feature Access keys on DTH-16LD-1 telephones by user
programming)
H
Only line keys assigned as Feature Access keys allow user to program Name for DTH-16LD-1
Telephones with Name assignment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
F-8
Feature Access – User Programmable
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-13
Feature Name
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
F-3
Flexible Line Assignment
N-2
Nesting Dial
O-3
One-Touch Feature Access
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-13
Speed Dial – System
U-7
User Programming Ability
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 10
Feature Access – User Programmable
Flexible Line Assignment
F-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Each Multiline Terminal has complete flexibility of line key assignments to meet individual needs.
Functions can be programmed on Flexible Line Keys, including DSS numbers and a variety of Feature
Access Codes to simplify the use of these functions. Outside line appearances and Secondary Incoming
Extensions can also be assigned to Flexible Line keys.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Each Flexible Line key can be assigned one of the following options:
J
J
J
J
J
J
NON (not assigned)
CO Outside Lines (01~64)
Trunk Groups (01~32)
Route Advance Blocks (01~32)
Call Appearance keys (for Groups 00~47, Locations 01~24)
Feature Access keys (01~16)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
MIC ON/OFF key
Headset ON/OFF key
Scroll Key for Caller ID Indication
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Call Forward – All Call
Do Not Disturb/Break On/Off
Log On/Off
Background Music On/Off
ICM key
Secondary Incoming Extensions (01~120)
SIE extensions are used for incoming call pickup operation only. Outgoing calls cannot be made
using this feature.
The DTU-8D-1 or DTP/DTH/DTR-8D-2 TEL, and DTU/DTP or DTH/DTR-8-1 TEL have eight
Flexible Line keys.
The DTP/DTU-16-1 TEL, and DTU-16D-1 or DTP/DTH/DTR-16D-2 TEL each have 16 Flexible
Line keys.
The 32D Telephones have 16 Flexible Line keys or 24 Flexible Line keys assigned by System
Programming.
Only one MIC ON/OFF key and one Headset ON/OFF key can be assigned for each Multiline
Terminal. The DTH/DTR Terminals have a dedicated MIC ON/OFF key.
Feature Access keys are programmed by the user for DSS, Speed Dial, or Feature Access Codes.
At system default, Flexible Line keys 01~08 are assigned as CO 01~08 (if a 8-port trunk card is
installed). Any remaining Line keys are unassigned (vacant).
Use Memory Block 4-50 (Multiline Terminal Type Selection) to assign a 32-button terminal with 16
(default) or 24 line keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 12
Flexible Line Assignment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The following Digital Voice Mail integrated functions can be assigned to a Line Key assigned as a
Feature Access key on a Multiline Terminal:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Record Start
Record Pause/Restart
Record Erase
Record Finish
Record Erase/Restart
Urgent Page (Pager) ON/OFF
Record Confirmation
Live Monitor
Restrictions:
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, the Digital Voice Mail integrated functions (e.g.,
Record Start) are not supported.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-11
Attendant Add-On Console
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
O-3
One-Touch Feature Access
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
4-50
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 14
Flexible Line Assignment
Flexible Numbering Plan
F-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A Flexible Numbering Plan is automatically assigned by the Resident System Program when the system
power is first turned on. The Station Numbering Plan may be changed using System Programming to fit
customer needs. A station can be assigned a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit station number. An Automated Attendant
Numbering Plan is also available with the Flexible Numbering Plan.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
With Release R2500, the Electra Elite IPK can support 2~7-digit station numbers that can be assigned
by the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, by the 100s group for 5-digit station numbers, by the 1,000s
group for 6-digit station numbers, or by the 10,000s group for 7-digit station numbers.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The default station numbers are 100~399 (depending on system configuration).
H
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for the Numbering Plan Access Code defaults.
H
Automated Attendant/DISA Numbering Plan, and Uniform Numbering plan can be assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
When Voice Mail Message waiting is required to be sent across the K-CCIS link to a remote
station, the Closed Number Blocks must be used.
H
Extension numbers cannot start with 0 or 9.
H
Only one Station Numbering Plan can be used at a time.
H
Station Numbering Plan can be 2, 3, or 4 digits (R2000 or lower).
H
With R2000 or lower, station numbers are assigned by the 100s group for 4-digit station numbers.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, the following example shows how the assignment
is made for Station Number Port 01 with a 7-digit station number of 7650000:
J
J
J
J
J
J
Memory Block 1-2-03 (2~7-digit Station Number Selection) set to 7 digits
Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) set to 765
Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-digit) Assignment], No ACs, set to 001
Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-digit) Assignment], AC 76, set to 301
Memory Block 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-digit) Assignment], Table 1, Dial No. 5, set to 001
Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment) Port 01 set to 0000
Station Number Port 01 = 765 0000
Assigned in Memory Block 4-10.
Assigned in Memory Block 1-2-34
H
The following features are not supported or have limitations when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers
are used.
Feature
Comment
Account Code Entry
Only the last four digits of the extension are printed when 5-, 6-,
or 7-digit station numbers are used.
Account Code – Forced/Verified/
Unverified
Only the last four digits of the extension are printed when 5-, 6-,
or 7-digit station numbers are used.
Add-On Conference
Only the last four digits of the extension are printed when 5-, 6-,
or 7-digit station numbers are used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 16
Flexible Numbering Plan
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Comment
Analog Line Extender (Dterm Aanalog
EXT)
Not supported.
Attendant Add-On Console
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, Digital Voice
Mail integrated features are not supported.
Authorization Code
Only the last four digits of the extension are printed when 5-, 6-,
or 7-digit station numbers are used.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Not supported.
Callback Request
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only two
Callback Requests can be set to a Multiline Terminal.
Caller ID Call Return
Not supported.
Centralized Voice Mail
Not supported.
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Not supported.
Delay Announcement
Not supported.
Digital Line Extender
EXTender PLus)
(Dterm
ISDN
Not supported.
Digital Voice Mail
Not supported.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, DID Digit
Conversion is not supported.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, the DISA Code
supports only four digits.
Dterm IP Gateway System
Not supported.
Elite ACD Plus
Not supported.
Elite CallAnalyst
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last
four digits of the extension are printed.
EliteApps – PC Attendant
Not supported.
Elite Q-Master
Not supported.
Flexible Line Assignment
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, Digital Voice
Mail integrated features (e.g., Live Record) are not supported.
IP CPU & Media Gateway
Not supported.
IP Station (MEGACO)
Not supported.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Key - Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling (K-CCIS)
Comment
Direct Inward Dialing - K-CCIS
DID Digit Conversion is not supported when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit
station numbers are used.
Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)
This feature is not supported when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station
numbers are used.
IP (K-CCIS)
This feature is not supported when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station
numbers are used.
Voice Mail Integration - K-CCIS
The Voice Mail must be installed in the PBX (NEAX System).
Live Monitoring
Not supported.
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Not supported.
Simplified Call Distribution
Not supported.
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last
four digits of the extension number are printed.
Unified Messaging
Not supported.
Unified Call Distribution (UCD)
Not supported.
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Not supported.
Wireless
Not supported.
Wireless – DECT
Not supported.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
U-4
Uniform Numbering Network
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 18
Flexible Numbering Plan
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
2~7-Digit Station Numbering Selection
1-2-03
+BTS
Expanded Station Number Assignment
1-2-34
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Station Number Assignment
4-10
+BA
+BS
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
001
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 20
Flexible Numbering Plan
Flexible Ringing Assignment
F-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Flexible Ringing Assignments for incoming outside calls and Secondary Incoming Extension
appearances can be programmed to ring at specified Multiline Terminals. Separate day and night ring
assignments are available, and Delayed Ringing is an option for Multiline Terminals.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Single Line Telephones can be assigned to ring for any line.
H
Single Line Telephones support Delayed Ringing.
H
Default values assign Attendants 1 and 2 (stations 100 and 101) to have CO/PBX lines 01~08
ringing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTT
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without
Ringing Assignment (Day Mode)
4-52
+BTT
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without
Ringing Assignment (Night Mode)
4-53
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-03
+BTP
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
4-04
+BTS
Distinctive Ring by Telephone or CO
Selection
1-1-28
+BCT
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
3-07
+BTM
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection
4-91
+BI
Intercom Ring Pattern Selection
1-2-19
+BI
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
1-2-20
+BTM
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
4-51
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 22
Flexible Ringing Assignment
F-6
Flexible Timeouts
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Flexible Timeouts feature provides a variety of over 40 timeouts in the Resident System Program to
allow the system to operate without initial programming. The system timeouts can be changed to meet
customer needs according to the system application requirements.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, the following timers are modified to allow assignment at 1-second intervals, and
a Flexible Timeout Class of Service is added. Refer to the table below:
Memory
Block
Title
Timeout
Class
Default
Minimum
Maximum
Comment
1-1-03
Hold Recall Time Selection
(Non-Exclusive Hold)
Yes
060s
001s
255s
000s
(Infinity)
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
Yes
02s
01s
99s
00s
(Infinity)
1-1-06
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing
Alarm Time Selection
N/A
000s
(Infinity)
001s
255s
000s
(Infinity)
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time
Selection
Yes
000s
(Infinity)
001s
255s
000s
(Infinity)
1-1-12
Transfer/Camp-On Recall
Time Selection
Yes
060s
001s
999s
000s
(Infinity)
1-1-37
Trunk Queuing Timeout
Selection
Yes
10s
01s
99s
00s
(Infinity)
1-1-63
Hold Recall Time Selection
(Exclusive)
Yes
060s
001s
999s
000s
(Infinity)
1-1-81
ISDN Dial Interval Selection
N/A
04s
01s
99s
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout
Selection
Yes
090s
001s
255s
000s
(Infinity)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Memory
Block
Title
Timeout
Class
Default
Minimum
Maximum
Comment
Automatic Callback Release
Time Selection
Yes
30m
01m
99m
00s
(Infinity)
1-2-22
Call forward – No Answer
Time Selection
Yes
12s
01s
99s
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time
Selection
Yes
060s
001s
999s
1-3-03
First Digit PBR Release Time
Selection
N/A
10s
01s
99s
1-4-01
Automated Attendant First
Digit PBR Release Time
Selection
N/A
20s
01s
99s
1-4-02
Automated Attendant
Transfer Delayed Ringing
Time Selection
Yes
00s
(Infinity)
01s
99s
1-4-03
Automated Attendant No
Answer Disconnect Time
Selection
N/A
120s
001s
255s
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time
Selection
N/A
10s
01s
99s
1-7-06
External Paging Timeout
Selection
Yes
300s
000s
999s
,
1-2-02
00s
(Infinity)
000s
(Infinity)
, This Memory Block is assigned in 1-minute intervals.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 24
Flexible Timeouts
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
Memory Block 4-71 (Station to Timer Class of Service) is used to assign each station to a Timer
Class of Service.
Telephone Ports 01 and 02 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default All other
ports are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Flexible Timeouts above are reset to default
value during the upgrade.
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for more information.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-19
Feature Name
Class of Service
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AU
Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time
Assignment
1-4-13
+AU
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release
Time Selection
1-4-01
+AU
Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect
Time Selection
1-4-03
+AU
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed
Ringing Time Selection
1-4-02
+BCM
CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection
1-1-57
+BCM
DP Interdigit Time Selection
1-1-01
+BCM
Hookflash Time Selection
1-1-02
+BCM
Pause Time Selection
1-1-00
+BCT
Automatic Release Signal Detection Time
Selection
3-40
+BCT
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
3-33
+BCT
Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
3-15
+BCT
Tie Line CO/PBX Incoming Signal Detect
Time Selection
3-19
+AR
First Delay Announcement Start Time
Selection
1-1-71
+AR
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval
Time Selection
1-1-73
+AR
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval
Time Selection
1-1-75
+BP
External Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-06
+BM
Automatic Callback Release Time Selection
1-2-02
+BM
Call Forward – No Answer Time Selection
1-2-22
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 26
Flexible Timeouts
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BM
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time
Selection
1-1-06
+BM
PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection
1-8-10
+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
+BM
System Refresh Time Assignment
1-8-11
+BM
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection
1-1-37
+ALM
Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection
3-24
+ALM
Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection
3-22
+ALM
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection
3-21
+ALM
Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection
3-20
+BP
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-2-00
+ALM
Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection
3-17
+ALM
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
3-16
+ALM
Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection
3-18
+ALM
Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout
Selection
3-25
+BM
Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/CampOn Recall Time Selection
1-1-64
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-1-63
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive
Hold)
1-1-03
+BTT
Station to Timer Class of Service
(R3000 or higher)
4-71
+BM
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection
1-1-12
+BM
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
1-2-23
+BTI
Bounce Protect Time Selection
1-3-01
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTI
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
1-3-03
+BTI
Hookflash End Time Selection
1-3-06
+BTI
Hookflash Start Time Selection
1-3-05
+AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
+ALM
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-07
+AT
Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time
Selection
1-4-00
+AV
Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection
1-3-09
+AV
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time Selection
1-3-08
+AV
Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit Time
Selection
1-3-10
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 28
Flexible Timeouts
Full Duplex Handsfree
F-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The HF-R Unit is an add-on device to the Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals that provides a full duplex
speakerphone for small conference rooms. An external microphone is also provided that has a locking
push-to-mute control button to turn the microphone off.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals with an HF-R Unit installed
Required Software:
R1500 or higher
Required Components:
HF-R Unit
AC-R Unit (AC Adapter)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use the HF-R using an Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal:
E
1.
Press
, and make an internal or external call.
2.
When muting is desired, press the Mute key on the external microphone. To cancel muting, press
the Mute button again.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This full-duplex unit does not work as well as a conference-room-type speakerphone. The echo
cancellation works best in a smaller area (such as an office) with average acoustics. Large
environment areas with hard surfaces that tend to bounce sound have an adverse affect on the
speakerphone.
H
A full Duplex Handsfree Unit (HFU-U Unit) is also available for Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
(DTU/DTP-( )-1 Telephones).
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-3
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
,
+BTM
System Data Name
,
HFU Selection
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-29
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 30
Full Duplex Handsfree
Full Handsfree Operation
F-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Built-in half-duplex handsfree operation is included with all Multiline Terminals for internal and external
calls. The MIC ON/OFF key or Feature Access Code allows the microphone to be muted.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To turn the built-in Microphone ON/OFF:
A
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
- OR -
Press the Flexible Line key assigned as a MIC ON/OFF key or One-Touch key programmed as a
Microphone Control key or fixed MIC ON/OFF key on DTH/DTR Terminals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Using this feature with Multiline Terminal:
Originating:
E
1.
Press
2.
Dial the desired internal or outside number.
3.
Talk with the party when the call is answered.
.
- OR -
1.
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key programmed for Speed Dial.
2.
Talk with the party when the call is answered.
Answering:
1.
Press the line key receiving an incoming call or press
2.
Talk with the calling party.
F
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
One Override can be received during handsfree conversation.
H
The microphone must be ON to answer calls handsfree.
H
H
A Flexible Line key can be assigned as a MIC ON/OFF key, or a One-Touch key can be
programmed as a Microphone Control key.
While engaged on an outside line conversation using built-in Handsfree Operation, the
conversation may be interrupted (half-duplex) if both parties speak simultaneously.
H
During a conversation, the MIC ON/OFF key can be used to mute the microphone.
H
Monitoring volume can be adjusted using the volume control on the Multiline Terminal.
H
H
When a Multiline Terminal user lifts the handset, monitoring is automatically released, and the
Speaker LED goes off.
The built-in Speakerphone is a half-duplex speaker phone. Noisy or poor acoustical environments
have a large impact on the speaker phone switching from transmit to receive calls and vice versa.
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 32
Full Handsfree Operation
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-3
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
F-7
Full Duplex Handsfree
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTM
,
System Data Name
,
HFU Selection
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-29
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
F - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
F - 34
Full Handsfree Operation
General Purpose Relays
G-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Two relays are provided on the ECR-U( ) ETU to use as an application dictates. These relays are either
off or on, and do not change state until a station user manually makes the change.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Attendant Add-on Console
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To control the General Purpose Relay at the Attendant Add-On Console:
1.
Press the key assigned GPR0 or GPR1.
2.
The GPR LED is on (red) to indicate the relay is closed (on), or Off to indicate the relay is open
(off).
To turn a General Purpose Relay on:
A
K
K
A
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial the relay number
3.
Dial
L
and dial
and press
.
or
(for GPR0 or GPR1).
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
G-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To turn a General Purpose Relay off:
A
K
K
A
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial the relay number
3.
Dial
J
and dial
and press
.
or
(for GPR0 or GPR1).
.
To toggle the relay from on to off (or off to on):
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial the relay number
3.
Press
A
K
KA
and dial
.
.
or
(for GPR0 or GPR1).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
The General Purpose relays are rated for 24 Vdc at 500 mA.
The red LED indication is provided to indicate on or off when the GPR Access Codes are assigned
to a Feature Access key.
The LED indication is provided to all Feature Access keys and Attendant Add-on Consoles that are
assigned to GP Relay 0 or GP Relay 1 functions.
Use Memory Block 2-08 (ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment) to specify Tenant Assignment for
External Tone Ring/Night Chime function. Default is not assigned.
Use Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) to specify the ECR-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
G-2
General Purpose Relays
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BP
General Purpose Relay Assignment
1-8-37
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
2-08
+BP
External Ring Relay Pattern Selection
1-7-07
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BN
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-7
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
G-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
G-4
General Purpose Relays
Ground Start Trunks
G-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Ground Start Trunks can be connected to the system. Assignment of trunks as Ground Start is per trunk
(by switch settings) at the associated COI(8)-U( ) or COIB(4)-U10 ETU. Ground and Loop Start Trunks
can be mixed in the system per trunk. Ground Start Trunks are provided with line supervision to reduce
call collisions.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
COI(8)-U( ) or COIB(4)-U10 ETU to interface Ground Start Trunks to the system
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Each COI(8)-U( ) ETU has eight switches (one for each port) that can be used to select either Loop
or Ground Start per trunk.
Each COIB(4)-U10 ETU has four switches (one for each port) that can be used to select either
Loop or Ground Start per trunk.
When the serving CO sends a disconnect signal, after the outside party abandons a call, the trunk
is automatically released.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
G-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Sixty-four trunks (Ground Start, Loop Start, E&M Tie Lines and DID Trunks) can be installed in the
Electra Elite IPK system.
H
Each Multiline Terminal can have a Drop key assigned (when allowed in System Programming) to
be used for abandoning a call and seizing the same CO line on either a Flexible Line or One-Touch
key.
H
The Recall key can be used for a flexible timed hookflash when Least Cost Routing is installed.
Restrictions:
H
The following analog trunk interface cards do not support Ground Start Trunks COI(4)-U( ),
COIB(4)-U20, and COIB(8)-U( ).
H
Ground Start Trunks do not support Caller ID.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
G-6
Ground Start Trunks
G-3
Group Listening
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Group Listening allows the user to press the Speaker key so others in the room can listen to a
conversation over the built-in speaker of a Multiline Terminal. While Group Listening is active, the
Multiline Terminal user can continue to talk on the handset or headset.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To activate/deactivate Group Listening:
1.
While using the handset/headset, press
2.
Press
E
E
to activate Group Listening.
or go on-hook to end Group Listening.
To mute the handset during Group Listening using Electra Elite Multiline Terminals (DTP/DTU-( )-( )
TEL):
When MIC LED is on, press
A
and
A
to turn off the LED to mute the handset.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
G-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Group Listening applies to the following conditions:
J
J
J
J
J
H
During an internal call
During an outside call
During a conference call
During a Voice Over call
During a Whisper Page call
A feedback loop is possible when Group Listening is not canceled before the handset is placed in
the cradle. The outside caller hears a feedback squeal. When switching to Handsfree Monitor
Mode or Speakerphone Mode, mute the handset before placing it in the cradle.
H
When the user goes on-hook during Group Listening, the call is automatically placed in Handsfree
Monitor/Speakerphone Mode and Group Listening is canceled.
H
Off-hook ringing is provided with this feature.
H
Camp-on tone and Tone Override are heard over the handset, headset, or speakerphone.
H
During Group Listening, speaker volume can be adjusted using the Multiline Terminal volume
control. The handset volume cannot be adjusted.
H
During Group Listening, the user cannot use the built-in microphone for handsfree use. The MIC
key is pressed to control handset mute and the MIC LED flashes red during handset mute mode.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BTS
+BTT
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
5-2
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
G-8
Group Listening
H-1
Handset Mute
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Handset Mute is provided to most terminals connected to the Electra Elite IPK system. While talking on
the Multiline Terminal handset, a station user can dial a feature code or press the MIC button to mute the
transmit speech path. The station user can still hear the outside (or intercom) voice.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
While talking on a Terminal Handset:
Press
- OR Press
I
A
(DTH/DTR terminals only).
A
and dial
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
F-2
Feature Name
Feature Access – User Programmable
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTM
System Data Name
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
H-2
Handset Mute
Handsfree Answerback
H-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Each Multiline Terminal has a microphone for Handsfree Answerback during internal voice calls.
Microphone status is indicated by the MIC LED located on each Multiline Terminal. The MIC key or
Feature Access Code mutes the microphone to ensure privacy.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To turn microphone ON/OFF:
1.
Press
- OR -
Dial
A
A
Press
2.
I
.
.
.
- OR -
Press the programmable line key assigned as a MIC ON/OFF key.
- OR -
Press the Push to Mute button on the external microphone on the HFU-U Unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To use this feature when receiving an internal voice call:
1.
Ensure MIC LED is on.
2.
Talk with calling party.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Multiline Terminal MIC LED must be on.
H
The calling station controls the voice announcement or ringing signal.
H
Multiline Terminal users can receive voice calls from Single Line Telephone users.
H
Group Call Pickup and Call Forwarding do not operate for voice announcement calls.
Restrictions:
H
When a station is signaled by a tone signal, the station user cannot respond with Handsfree
Answerback, unless the calling party changes to voice call.
H
This feature works only for incoming internal voice calls.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
I-5
Feature Name
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
___________________________________________________________________________________
H-4
Handsfree Answerback
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
System Data Name
+BI
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-2-01
+BTD
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-6-03
+BA
Intercom Feature access Code Assignment
1-2-24
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
001
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H-6
Handsfree Answerback
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring enables all Multiline Terminal users to dial and monitor calls without
using the handset. This feature frees the user to perform other tasks while waiting for a call to be
answered or while on hold.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use handsfree dialing:
E
1.
Press
2.
Use any dialing method allowed by the system.
3.
When the party answers, talk using the handset or built-in Handsfree Unit if enabled.
4.
When there is no answer or busy tone is received, press
.
E
to disconnect the line.
To use monitoring with a call in progress:
E
1.
Press
.
2.
Restore the handset.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
A Multiline Terminal is considered off-hook by the system when this feature is used.
H
This feature may be used for internal and outside calls.
H
Monitoring volume may be adjusted using the volume control on the Multiline Terminal.
H
When a Multiline Terminal user lifts the handset, the monitoring condition is automatically released,
and the Speaker LED goes off.
H
The Multiline Terminal must remain in monitor mode when Automatic Redial is being used.
Restrictions:
H
This feature is available only on Multiline Terminals.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
A-24
Feature Name
Automatic Redial
___________________________________________________________________________________
H-8
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
Headset Connection (Built-In)
H-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A headset can be connected directly to an Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal. This eliminates the need
for an external headset switch. A headset ON/OFF key can be assigned to the terminal to allow easy
operation of the headset.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
Headset
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To make a call:
1.
Press the headset ON/OFF key.
2.
Dial the desired number and talk.
To end a call:
1.
At the end of a conversation, press the headset ON/OFF key.
2.
Call is disconnected.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This feature works with several compatible capsule-only type headsets.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
F-3
Feature Name
Flexible Line Assignment
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant
2-06
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
H - 10
Headset Connection (Built-In)
Hold With Recall (Exclusive
and Non-Exclusive)
H-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A station user can place a call on Hold to free the station for other calls. A Multiline Terminal user can
use Exclusive Hold (call picked up only where it was put on hold) or Non-Exclusive Hold (call picked up
at any station that has access to that line). A Single Line Telephone user can place calls on Exclusive
Hold. A call on hold for longer than a programmed interval generates a recall at the originating station.
When the recalled Multiline Terminal is idle, an audible signal and an LCD indication (when equipped)
are provided to indicate that the line is recalling.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals (Both Exclusive and Non-Exclusive Hold)
All Single Line Telephones (Exclusive Hold)
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal with an outside call in progress (Non-Exclusive Hold):
H
1.
Press
2.
To retrieve a Non-Exclusive Hold call, press the flashing line key or Call Appearance Key.
.
Using a Multiline Terminal with an outside call in progress (Exclusive Hold):
A
and then
H
1.
Press
.
2.
To retrieve an Exclusive Hold call, press the flashing line key or Call Appearance Key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Using a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress:
1.
Momentarily press the hookswitch; the call is placed on Exclusive Hold. When the handset is
returned to the cradle, the call recalls immediately.
2.
To retrieve a held call, momentarily press the hookswitch; the held call is connected.
- OR -
To retrieve a held call, return the handset to the cradle.
3.
When recall begins, lift the handset and the call is connected.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Multiline Terminal
Non-Exclusive Hold
H
H
H
H
H
After Non-Exclusive Hold is set, the user can originate or answer other calls.
Any station with the same outside line or programmed Call Appearance key can pick up the held
call.
A CO/PBX call on Non-Exclusive Hold can be picked up by dialing an Access Code (Specified Line
Seizure) when assigned in System Programming.
Use Memory Block 1-1-03 [Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)] to specify the time
(default: 25 seconds) that the call is held or parked before it recalls to the station where the call
was placed on Hold.
The station where the Hold originated receives an I-Hold indication (flashing green LED). The LED
associated with the held line key flashes red on all other Multiline Terminals.
Exclusive Hold
H
H
H
H
After Exclusive Hold is set, the user can originate or answer other calls.
When assigned, a call is held on a CO line key appearance. When not assigned, the call is
exclusively held on a Call Appearance key.
Only at the station where the Exclusive Hold was set can a user retrieve the held call, until the call
recalls.
Use Memory Block 1-1-63 [Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)] to specify the time (default: 1
minute) that the call is held or parked before it recalls to the station where the call was placed on
Hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
H - 12
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
The LED of other Multiline Terminals for the held line have a red LED on until the call recalls.
Exclusive Hold and Non-Exclusive Hold Recall time intervals can be adjusted independently of one
another.
Hold Recall
H
H
H
H
H
Use Memory Block 4-30 (Hold Transfer Recall Display Selection), to enable (default: YS) or disable
(NO) the Hold Recall indication on the LCD.
When a held line recalls, Multiline Terminals equipped with an LCD receive the following
information: the upper LCD line shows the recalling outside line number, the lower LCD line shows
the station number the call was held at and the station number where the call was transferred
(used for recalling Ring Transfer or Camp-On calls).
Non-Exclusive Hold, Ring Transfer, Hold Recall, Call Park System, and Attendant Ring
Transfer/Camp-On have separate Recall Timers.
For Multiline Terminals, internally held calls do not recall.
A Recall Tone is provided when the handset is on-hook. Off-hook ringing is not provided if the
handset is off-hook.
Single Line Telephone
H
H
H
When the user goes on-hook during Exclusive Hold, recall immediately follows.
When a line is holding on a Multiline Terminal, the red LED is on until the Exclusive Hold Recall
Time expires.
The System Call Park feature can be used to put calls on hold.
Restrictions:
Only the first 13 digits of a 16-character name are displayed while a Hold Recall is recalling to a Display
Terminal (R4000 or higher).
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
I-1
Feature Name
I-Hold Indication
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive
Hold)
1-1-03
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-1-63
+BTM
Hold/Transfer Recall Display Selection
4-30
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
H - 14
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
Hot Key Pad
H-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature allows Multiline Terminals to make an outgoing or internal call by pressing digits on the Dial
Pad of the Multiline Terminal without pressing the Speaker key or Trunk Key before going off-hook.
R4000 or higher is required to support this feature.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
From Multiline Terminal:
1.
Dial the desired digits on the dial pad.
2.
Converse when dialed party answers.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Hot Key Pad has priority over Preset Dialing when both features are allowed in the same class of
service.
LCR and ARS can be used with Hot Key Pad when placing outside calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
This feature uses the system assigned access codes to determine if the call is internal or outside.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-19
Class of Service
P-4
Preset Dialing
P-5
Prime Line Assignment
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTS
System Data Name
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Memory
Block
1-8-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7,4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H - 16
Hot Key Pad
H-7
Hot Line
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Hot Line enables a station user to go off-hook to automatically dial an outside number or another station.
This feature is provided for Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To execute at any station programmed for Hot Line:
1.
Lift the handset to go off-hook, or press
2.
The station or outside number is called.
E
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Only hardware abilities limit the number of Hot Lines that can be supported in the system.
H
Up to 10 digits can be stored for dialing, including Trunk Access Codes.
H
Multiline Terminal users assigned Hot Line can press the Feature key and Access Code 6, or
press Feature + Speaker to receive internal dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
With Hot Line assigned, internal dial tone can be received by pressing the Hold, Conference, or
Transfer key while on call.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
F-2
Feature Name
Feature Access – User Programmable
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
4-23
+BA
+BTT
,
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
001
101~ 132,
176~199,
201~232,
401~416
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
H - 18
Hot Line
Howler Tone Service
H-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Howler Tone Service provides a Howler Tone when a station remains off-hook after a call is completed
or when a station is off-hook and digits are not dialed in a programmed time.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Howler tone is generated 30 seconds after a call is disconnected and the telephone is left off-hook
or the telephone is left off-hook without dialing.
The Howler tone is continuously modulating at 2400 Hz and 16 Hz, by system default. This cycle
can be programmed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
H - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BI
System Data Name
Tone Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-8-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
H - 20
Howler Tone Service
I-Hold Indication
I-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature DESCRIPTION
I-Hold Indication provides a flashing green LED line key indication for external calls held at a Multiline
Terminal. Calls held at other stations provide a flashing red LED line key indication. This feature allows
easy identification of calls the user placed on hold.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To place a call on Hold:
Press
- OR Press
H
A
(the call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold).
, and then
H
(the call is placed on Exclusive Hold).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
H
The I-Hold and other hold-flash rates are the same, 0.25 seconds ON/0.25 seconds OFF.
H
When a call is placed on Exclusive Hold, all other Multiline Terminals with that line appearance
receive a busy indication (steady red LED).
H
Internal calls can be put on Exclusive Hold only.
H
Answer Hold, Transfer Hold, and Conference Hold use the I-Hold indication.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
H-5
Feature Name
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive
Hold)
1-1-03
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-1-63
+BM
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection
1-1-12
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
I-2
I-Hold Indication
Incoming Call Identification
I-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Incoming Call Identification (provided for Internal Ring Transfer, Call Forward, and CO Transfer Ring)
displays caller name or station number on Multiline Terminals with an LCD. Internal calls are identified
by caller name and station number. A ringing Tie line/DID call generates a display on the LCD of the line
number. When Caller ID is provided, the CO incoming caller directory number or name is displayed.
System software allows both name and number to be displayed by Caller ID.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with LCD
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
For an incoming internal call:
1.
The ICM LED flashes.
2.
The caller station number and name (when assigned) are displayed on the LCD.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When an internal call is received at a station, that station user number is displayed to the left, and
the station number and name (when assigned) of the station where the call was initiated are
displayed to the right on the LCD. When the call is placed on hold, the station user number remains
and the number of the station where the call was initiated disappears.
H
In an Add-On Conference, the station numbers of the parties are displayed.
H
Each station can be assigned a name (six-character maximum, including spaces) (R3500 or
lower).
H
Each station can be assigned a name (16-character maximum, including spaces) (R4000 or
higher).
H
Incoming Call Identification is provided for Internal Ring Transfer, Call Forward, and CO Transfer
Ring.
Restrictions:
Only the last 13 characters of a 16-character name are displayed while a Hold Recall is recalling to a
Display Terminal.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BCT
+BTT
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
3-00
Station Name Assignment
4-18
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I-4
Incoming Call Identification
Incoming Trunk Name or Number Display
I-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Incoming Trunk Name or Number Display allows names or numbers to be assigned to each trunk of the
system. These names or numbers appear on the Multiline Terminal LCD when receiving an incoming
call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any Multiline Terminal with LCD
Any TAPI Terminal
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Each CO/PBX trunk can have a name (13 character-maximum, including spaces) or number
assigned.
H
This display function is valid for general incoming CO/PBX calls.
H
A maximum of 13 digits or characters can be displayed.
H
H
When a Caller ID CO call is terminated to a trunk assigned trunk name/number, the trunk name/
number is displayed. In this case, the Caller ID data is not stored.
When an ACD/SCD/UCD call is received, the trunk name/number is displayed when assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
This display function is not available for Intercom (ICM) calls.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
3-00
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
Mode
1-1-78
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX
Line
3-44
+AI
Caller Name Indication Selection
3-53
+BTT
Station Name Assignment
4-18
+BCT
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I-6
Incoming Trunk Name or Number Display
Internal Hub
I-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
In data communications, a hub is a place of convergence where data arrives from one or more directions
and is forwarded out in one or more other directions. A hub may include a data switch (a product called
a switch could usually be considered a hub as well). The hub is where data comes together using
individual Ethernet ports, and the switch determines how and to which port the data is forwarded. When
multiple ETUs requiring Ethernet data connections are installed in an Electra Elite IPK KSU, the HUB
ETU can provide a neat and simple installation.
System Software R1500 or higher is required.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an in-skin, fast Ethernet switching HUB unit that provides the following services:
H
Auto Negotiation for Port Configurations
This feature can allow/deny Auto Negotiation for port speed and duplex mode for each port. When
this function is allowed, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU negotiates with linked equipment to determine the
speed (10Mbps or 100Mbps) and operating duplex mode (Full or Half).
H
Port Speed Selection
Data switching speed can be manually set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps for each port. This feature is
allowed only when Auto Negotiation is denied.
H
Duplex Mode Selection
Duplex mode can be manually set to Half Duplex or Full Duplex for each port. This feature is
allowed only when Auto Negotiation function is denied.
H
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
MDI/MDIX mode can be set to MDI, MDIX or Auto detection. When this mode is set to Auto
detection, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can automatically determine whether or not it needs to cross over
between pairs so that an external cross over cable is not required. If Auto Negotiation for port
configuration is not allowed, this Auto MDIX mode must not be used. Only fixed MDI or MDIX mode
can be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Port Mirroring
The HUB-U( ) ETU is an 8-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port and one port
can be set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor data traffic. The data on the Source port can
then be monitored on the mirror port (target port). When VLAN tagging is configured, the source
and target ports must be in the same VLAN(s).
H
VLAN Tagging
A Virtual LAN (VLAN) subdivides a local area network by logical, rather than physical or
geographical, means.
For example, voice traffic can be put on one VLAN, and data traffic can be put on another VLAN.
Ports on the same switching hub assigned to different VLANs are logically separated, and a router
is required to pass traffic from one VLAN to another. A router would be put on a port configured to
allow traffic from multiple VLANs. Using the Quality of Service (QoS) related memory blocks, the
VLAN carrying voice traffic could be assigned a higher priority than VLANs carrying data traffic.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU supports the IEEE 802.1q standard for VLAN tagging for up to 16 VLAN
Groups.
H
Flow Control
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU supports two methods of flow control that are configured per port. For
congestion on a full-duplex port, the ETU supports IEEE 802.3x flow control that allows a device to
momentarily stop the flow of traffic from a transmitting device, by sending a pause frame.
For congestion on a half-duplex port, back pressure flow control is supported. Back pressure
generates collision-detection signals in the CSMA/CD MAC-layer (media access control) protocol
of Ethernet when a port is overloaded. These collision-detection signals from the congested port
trick the sending port into believing a collision is imminent, and cause it to back off. This, in turn,
forces a throttling back of the LAN segments experiencing congestion. When the sending ports try
to transmit after the standard Ethernet delay time, the congested port may again send
collision-detection signals or accept the incoming frames if ready.
H
QoS
The HUB-U( ) ETU has two priority assignment methods. One is Port-based Priority (frame
received) and the other is IEEE 802.1q/p Tag-based Priority. Unknown Unicast Frames have a
fixed low priority.
The Port based Priority feature can assign the priority for all frames except the Unknown Unicast
Frames:
J
J
J
When set to High, the switching priority of a received frame on the port is always assigned as
High.
When set to Low, the priority of a received frame is always assigned as Low.
When Not Assigned (set to No), this feature is disabled.
The Tag based Priority is allowed only when the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is set as Tag VLAN mode, and
Port-based Priority Assignment is denied.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I-8
Internal Hub
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
Priority Assignment For Received Frame
Memory Block 1-16-07 (High Priority RX Tag Threshold) selects which priority field value is
assigned as High. When a received frame contains a tag (per IEEE 802.1q definition), the
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can assign the priority (0~7) as High for the frame based on this
assignment.
Frames with the highest priority are processed from the receive queue prior to any other
priority frames.
J
Transmit Tag Priority Assignment
When the HUB-U( ) ETU transmits a frame in VLAN mode, the priority field value can be
assigned for each untagged frame that is transmitted by the following assignments.
Memory block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX Tag Assignment) assigns the priority field value for
frames that are High priority.
Memory block 1-16-09 (Low Priority TX Tag assignment) assigns the priority field value for
frames that are Low priority.
This feature can be assigned for each port. Frames tagged the highest priority are sent from
the transmit queue prior to any other priority frames.
J
Tag Mode Switching
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU provides Tag-based VLAN implementation. Each arriving frame to the
switching hub is tagged by the sender as belonging to a VLAN. When VLAN Memory Blocks
(4, 5, 13, 14, 15) are programmed with the Tagging information, the Hub(8)-U( ) provides
support for Tag-based VLAN. Behavior of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU for frames belonging to a
VLAN is described below.
When the Destination is a Unicast address and the entry was found in the Address table, the
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU acts as follows:
N
N
N
N
When the Port Number is the same as the Port number on which the frame was received, the
frame is discarded. (It is first received and checked for errors to update RMON counters).
When the Port Number is different, the frame is forwarded to the applicable local port. The tag is
stripped or added according to the T field in the Address table entry. The tag is overwritten when
the received frame is Priority tagged (i.e. Vid=0 in the tag) when forwarding on a tagged port.
When the Destination is a Unicast address and it is Unknown, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU uses the Vid
of the frame (either from frame tag or default of input port) to index to the VLAN table and
forwards the frame to all ports (except source port) that are members of this VLAN. The tag is
stripped or added according to the System data. The tag is overwritten when the received frame
is Priority tagged (i.e. Vid=0 in the tag) when forwarding on a tagged port.
When the Destination is a Multicast address and the address entry is found, the HUB(8)-U( )
ETU uses the Vid to index into the VLAN table to retrieve the local ports that this frame should
be forwarded to. Again, the tag may be removed added or changed by setting of the system
data.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When Auto Negotiation is denied and port speed is set to 100Mbps, the yellow LED located on
RJ45 connector is On. When port speed is set to 10Mbps, this LED is off.
Restrictions:
H
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed per cabinet.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-24
V-3
Feature Name
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Trunk
Card
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 10
Internal Hub
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+AB
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-00
+AB
Port Speed Selection - 10/100 Base-T
1-16-01
+AB
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-02
+AB
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-03
+AB
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-04
+AB
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment
1-16-05
+AB
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-06
+AB
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
1-16-07
+AB
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
+AB
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
+AB
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-10
+AB
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-11
+AB
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-12
+AB
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-13
+AB
Port VLAN Group Membership
1-16-14
+AB
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-15
+AB
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-16
+AB
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 12
Internal Hub
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
I-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling allows a Multiline Terminal user to be signaled on incoming internal calls
by voice announcement or by ringing, depending on System Programming. The caller can dial an
additional digit to switch a voice announcement call to a ringing call, or switch a ringing call to voice
announcement. This feature allows Voice/Tone switching from the calling side only.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
When programmed for Voice/Tone:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number.
3.
Receive voice page alert tone.
4.
Voice announce the call.
5.
Called party can reply handsfree.
A
- OR -
Dial
(set as default). (Called party lifts the handset to respond to ringing.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
When programmed for Tone/Voice:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number. (Called party station rings.)
3.
Talk with party after the call is answered.
A
- OR -
Dial
(set as default).
4.
Voice announce the call.
5.
Called party can reply handsfree.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Voice or Tone can be selected as often as needed by dialing 1 (default) during a call.
H
When the station is receiving a handsfree call, the MIC must be activated for reply.
H
H
H
H
A Single Line Telephone user can switch from voice to tone or from tone to voice by dialing 1
(default) during an internal call to a Multiline Terminal.
When a voice announcement is received at a Multiline Terminal, other audible signals cannot be
received.
When the Intercom (ICM) key is pressed during a normal incoming CO/PBX call, intercom dial tone
is provided to allow an internal call.
The incoming call is answered when the Intercom (ICM) key is pressed.
Restrictions:
H
Single Line Telephone users can voice announce to Multiline Terminal users but cannot receive
voice announcements.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 14
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BI
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-2-01
+BTD
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-6-03
+BA
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-24
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
001
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 16
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
I-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Internal Zone Paging (Meet Me) allows for up to three internal paging zones. The zones, consisting of
Multiline Terminals, can be paged individually or all zones can be paged at once. Any station user can
answer the page and speak privately to the originator of the page with the Meet-Me feature.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate a page:
E
1.
Press
2.
Dial the Access Code. Default values are as follows:
EA
EB
EC
ED
EI
EJ
or lift the handset.
All Internal Zones
Internal Zone A
Internal Zone B
Internal Zone C
All Internal/External Zones
Internal/External Meet-Me
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Use the handset to page.
- OR -
Press a Feature Access key or One-Touch key programmed for one of the above Access Codes.
4.
Use handset to page.
To answer a page (Meet-Me):
E
EJ
1.
Press
or lift the handset.
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Use the handset to talk with party.
(default).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Simultaneous internal zone paging (A, B, and C) can be established.
H
A station can be assigned to one Internal Page Zone or No Zone.
H
H
H
H
Terminals assigned to No Zone receive All Internal Zone Pages unless restricted by Memory Block
4-31 (Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection).
Internal Emergency All Call or Internal Paging by Tenant Group overrides No Page Receive.
Any station user can answer an All Internal Zone Page, Internal Emergency All Call Page, or All
Internal/External Zone Page.
All Internal/External Zone Paging uses External Paging Timeout Selection (MB 1-7-06).
Restrictions:
H
H
Terminal users cannot receive internal pages during a call.
All Internal Zone Paging or Internal Emergency All Call Paging cannot be performed if any other
internal page is in use.
H
Only stations in the Internal Zone being paged can answer.
H
Single Line Telephone users can originate but not receive a page and Meet-Me answer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 18
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
Memory
Block
Function
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
070 ~ 074,
081
Internal Zone Paging Selection
4-93
+BTT
Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection
4-31
+BP
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection
1-2-25
+BP
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-2-00
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BP
External Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-06
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BA
+BTM
,
,
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 20
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
IP CPU & Media Gateway
I-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The IPCA( )-U( ) ETU is an IP communication system that integrates voice terminals with peer-to-peer
connections over a Data Communication IP Network (Intranet). When the MG(8)-U( ) ETU (Media
Gateway) is installed, the IPCA( )-U( ) ETU can communicate with the CPUI( )-U ( ) ETU (Electra Elite
IPK Legacy system) to accommodate both IP Multiline Terminals (Dterm IPK terminals) or IPK Video Soft
Phones and Electra Elite IPK Legacy terminals. The IP Multiline Terminals and/or IP soft telephones are
controlled by the IPCA( )-U( ) ETU. The Legacy terminals are controlled by the CPUI( )-U. The
MG(8)-U( ) ETU provides the actual speech path between the two CPUs.
The IPCA( )-U( ) ETU (Version 2.0) also provides 12 IP Tie lines to communicate with another IPK with an
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU. With the MG(8)-U( ) ETU, both IP and legacy terminals can use these IP trunks.
For detailed information concerning the IP CPU & Media Gateway, refer to the IPC System Manual.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3500:
With R3500 or higher, enhancements include the following:
H
12 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Trunks are supported.
H
SIP Trunks can access from Legacy side (e.g., Legacy Dterm, Tie Line, or others).
H
Transfer, Call Forward, and Add-On Conference are supported for SIP Trunks.
H
The SIP server is not required for an SIP connection between IPC systems.
H
Legacy Trunks can access through an SIP Trunk for a remote IPC system.
H
WebDial Video is supported by the SIP Trunk.
H
Message Waiting Indication for Centralized Voice Mail is supported.
H
Link Reconnect is applied to SIP Trunks between IPC systems.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal type:
ITH-16D-2 Multiline Terminal
ITH-8D-2 Multiline Terminal
Any IPK Multiline Terminal with IP-R(IPK) Unit installed
IPK Video Soft Phone
Required Software:
R2500 or higher software is required for the CPUI( )-U ( ) ETU.
V1.11 or higher Software is required for ITH(8)/(16)D-2 Multiline Terminals.
Required Components:
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU
MG(8)-U( ) ETU
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Up to 30 IP Multiline Terminals and/or IPK Video Soft Phones can be connected to the IPCA( )-U( )
ETU.
The IPCA( )-U( ) ETU has its own feature set. However, some features can be assigned to use
resources from the CPUI( )-U ( ) ETU (Legacy system).
When the CPUI( )-U ( )/CPUB( )-U ( ) ETU is assigned to control features for the IPC IP
telephones, the maximum station port capacity for the Legacy system is reduced by the number of
IPC IP telephones in groups of four.
H
When all 12 SIP Trunks are in use, a caller attempting to access an SIP Trunk hears a busy signal.
H
Incoming SIP Trunk calls follow the Station External Ring Pattern and Tone Selection.
H
H
H
H
Account Code Entry can be used when accessing SIP Trunks; however, digits dialed as an
outgoing call using an SIP Trunk must match the SIP IP Address Matching Table Assignment.
Only the IPCA( )-U( ) ETU supports individual SIP incoming calls.
When the call is placed on hold during an SIP Trunk call, the Music on Hold (MOH) of the opposite
system is heard.
Additional DTMF digits can be dialed during an SIP Trunk call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 22
IP CPU & Media Gateway
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
When properly configured, the CPUI( )-U ( )/CPUB( )-U ( ) ETU can provide features for IPC IP
telephones as shown in the table below.
The IPCA( )-U( ) ETU can support up to six simultaneous tandem calls across the IP trunks.
Allow set in M.B. 1-2-33 (IP Telephone Block
Assignment)
Feature
H
Extension No. Not Assigned
in M.B. 4-67
Centralized Billing K-CCIS
Extension number provided
from M.B. 4-67 (IP Station
Number Assignment).
Billing Information provided
from M.B. 1-4-04 (Tandem
Transfer SMDR Print
Extension Assignment).
Code Restriction
CPUI Code Restriction using
M.B. 4-07/4-08 [Code
Restriction Class Assignment
(Day/Night) Mode].
Simple Code Restriction ability Simple Code Restriction
provided by the IPCA( )-U( )
ability provided by the
ETU.
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU.
Enhanced 911
CPUI Enhanced 911 applies.
Not provided
Not provided
ISDN-PRI Trunk
Connections Calling Party
Number (CPN)
Presentation from
station
CPUI Calling Party Number
(CPN) Presentation from
Station applies.
Not provided
Not provided
Least Cost Routing
(LCR)
CPUI LCR from M.B. 5-04
(LCR Class to Trunk Group
Selection) applies.
Not provided
CPUI LCR from M.B.
5-04 (LCR Class to Trunk
Group Selection) applies.
Station Message
Detail Recording
(SMDR)
Extension number provided
from M.B. 4-67 (IP Station
Number Assignment).
Billing Information provided
from M.B. 1-4-04 (Tandem
Transfer SMDR Print
Extension Assignment).
Not provided
Billing information not
provided.
The following functions are supported on an SIP Trunk:
J
J
J
J
J
H
Deny set in M.B. 1-2-33
Extension No. Assigned in
M.B. 4-67
One-Touch Key
Speed Dial
Redial
SMDR (On IPC side)
Code Restriction (on IPC side)
The Account Code Entry feature can be used with SIP Trunks, but Ringback Tone (RBT) must be
heard before the Account Code is entered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
Only one MG(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed to provide eight speech paths between the CPU ETUs.
H
The MG(8)-U( ) ETU reduces the maximum Trunk port capacity by eight.
H
This feature is not available when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used.
H
E911 is not supported on SIP Trunks.
H
The Recall key is not supported during an SIP Trunk call.
H
SIP Trunks support G729a RTP Packet Size 40ms only.
H
Hookflash and Pause programmed into Speed Dial are ignored by SIP Trunks.
H
Outgoing Restriction does not work when an SIP trunk accesses a Legacy trunk.
H
H
The IP trunks have a fixed codec setting and support only G.729, 40 milliseconds. G.711 is not
supported.
The IP trunks have a fixed Type of Service (ToS) field setting. Voice and signaling packets have
ToS fields marked with a decimal value of 192. The network Quality of Service (QoS) settings of
your network should be configured accordingly.
IPK VIDEO SOFT PHONES
DESCRIPTION
The IPK Video Soft Phone displays a task bar in the upper or lower part of the PC screen and the IPK
Video Soft Phone icon in the windows task bar. When an incoming call is present at the key telephone,
the telephone number is displayed in the task bar incoming call notification view or, when the telephone
number is registered with an associated name, the name is displayed. To make a call, the user can
enter the number using the computer keyboard and run the call from an IPK Video Soft Phone. The IPK
Video Soft Phone has a database, where number and name and other information can be registered,
that permits user to import or export a database in CSV format and to link to a mailer program to send an
e-mail to a telephone number registered user.
The following IPK Video Soft Phone Features are provided:
Make a Telephone Call:
A call can be made through the IPK Video Soft Phone task bar by entering the number on the PC
keyboard.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 24
IP CPU & Media Gateway
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Copy and Call:
Using the PC mouse, a telephone call can be made by pasting the telephone number in the task bar.
This telephone number can be retrieved from an e-mail, internet page or any document that uses the
clipboard function.
Phone Book:
IPK Video Soft Phones register data such as name, company name, telephone number, e-mail, or other
similar data in Personal or Shared phonebooks. The Personal phonebook is intended for an individual
PC. The Shared phonebook can be shared between several PCs.
Link to Mail Software:
An IPK Video Soft Phone user can use an e-mail software program to send an e-mail message to an
address that was previously registered with a telephone number by clicking an e-mail button.
Restrictions:
The PC Requirements for IPK Video Soft Telephones include the following:
H
Software Requirements
J
J
J
H
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows XP professional or home edition
Hardware Minimum Requirements
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Pentium III or Celeron Processor with a speed of at least 1 GHz (with Video)
Pentium III or Celeron Processor with a speed of at least 600 MHz (without Video)
512 MB RAM
40 MB free hard drive space
SVGA 10243 X 768 is recommended
CD-ROM drive (when using CD for installation)
Network ETU
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
C-21
Feature Name
Code Restriction
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Number
Feature Name
E-14
Enhanced 911
I-8
IP Station (MEGACO)
I-10
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
L-3
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
V-3
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Trunk
Card
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 26
IP CPU & Media Gateway
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
For K-CCIS programming, refer to the Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual for
details.
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+AH
IP Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-32
+AH
IP Telephone Block Assignment Allow/Deny
Selection
1-2-33
+AT
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension
Assignment
1-4-04
+AS
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-13
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
+BTT
LCR Class Selection
4-40
+AN
ISDN Directory Number Selection
4-47
+AE
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Assignment
4-54
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
+AN
ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection
4-62
+BTT
IP Station Number Assignment
4-67
+AW
Common Signaling Channel Route
Assignment
5-05
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 28
IP CPU & Media Gateway
IP Station (MEGACO)
I-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU with IP Station (MEGACO) application loaded is an optional interface package for
the Electra Elite IPK system that converts digital station ports into MEGACO IP station ports. An onboard
10/100 base T connector provides a WAN/LAN connection. Voice and signaling data from/to the IP
stations are converted into IP Frames and transmitted through the Data Communication IP Network
Intranet or Internet. The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU supports station to station direct RTP connections
(peer-to-peer) for calls between IP telephones. Each IAD(8)-U( ) ETU supports up to eight IP
telephones.
The IAD ETU contains a regular TCP/RTP/IP stack that can handle real time media, supports industry
standard MEGACO (H.248) communication on the WAN side, and interfaces with the Electra Elite IPK
as a regular Electronic Station Interface board [ESI(8)-U( ) ETU].
From the network administration perspective, the IAD ETU is an end point on the IP network.
This interface can provide:
H
MEGACO (H.248) signaling Protocol
H
DTMF generation
H
RTP port number designation
H
TOS field QOS support
H
Tone generation
H
General Tone detection
H
G.711 and G.729a voice compression
H
10/100 BASE-T LAN interface
H
Echo Canceller
H
Remote configuration and maintenance
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal type:
ITH-16D-2 Multiline Terminal
- OR ITH-8D-2 Multiline Terminal
- OR Any IPK Multiline Terminal with IP-R(IPK) Unit installed.
- OR IPK Soft Phone
Required Software:
R1500~R1700 or R2500
Required Components:
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU with IP Station (MEGACO) application loaded
AC-R UNIT (AC Adapter) (When in-line power is used, power over Ethernet, is not provided.)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal Multiline Terminal call handling procedures apply.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
For this feature, the IAD(8)-U( ) ETU is installed and assigned as an ESI (8)-U( ) ETU. Each
IAD(8)-U( ) ETU supports up to eight IP Phones and reduces the maximum capacity of stations in
the system by eight.
H
A maximum of 14 IAD(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed supporting the maximum of 112 stations (refer
to KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations in Universal Slots of the Features and
Specifications manual).
H
The IAD (8)-U( ) supports only those vocoders that are approved to provide toll-quality speech
path. The following voice compression methods are supported for the IP Station (MEGACO)
application:
J
J
G.711 u Law - Highest Bandwidth
G.729 - Mid-Range Bandwidth
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 30
IP Station (MEGACO)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Each voice call requires at least the specifications listed in the following table.
This includes all the overheads of VoIP communication, including signaling).
Receive
Data Rate
Time
Between
Packets
Packetization
Delay
Default Jitter
Buffer Delay
G711u Law
90 Kbps
90 Kbps
20 ms*
1.5 ms
2 datagrams
(40 ms)
4.4
G729
34 Kbps
34 Kbps
20 ms*
15.0 ms
2 datagrams
(40 ms)
4.07
*
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Theoretical
Maximum
MOS
Transmit
Data Rate
Codec
In voice communication, particularly Internet telephony, the mean opinion score (MOS) provides a
numerical measure of the quality of human speech at the circuit destination. The scheme uses subjective
tests (opinionated scores) that are mathematically averaged to obtain a quantitative indicator of the system
performance. The maximum MOS is 5.0.
When an IP Soft Phone is connected, set Time Between Packets to 100ms.
The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU contains a regular TCP/RTP/IP stack that can handle real time media. The
IAD ETU is an end-point on the IP network from the network administration perspective.
The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU uses MEGACO (H.248) Protocol to provide telephony services between
remote stations through the IP Network. This is an IETF/ITU standards-based protocol. Currently,
this protocol does not allow for communications across networks where Network Address
Translation (NAT) is performed.
Speech-connection audio quality depends greatly on the available bandwidth between the stations
in the data network. Because Internet is an uncontrolled data network compared to an Intranet,
using this application in Intranet WAN environment with known (or controlled and assured) Quality
of Service (QoS) is highly recommended.
When any network where the IAD(8)-U( ) ETU or any of its IP terminals is connected uses NAT for
connecting the voice calls (including firewall), consulting your network provider/administrator to
specifically request service for VoIP or real-time media support on your networks is recommended.
A static IP Address is required for each IAD(8)-U( ) ETU in the network.
The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU supports station to station direct RTP connections (peer-to-peer) for calls
between IP Phones that provide the following benefits:
J
J
Improved voice quality for calls between two IP Phones
Improved bandwidth performance for voice between IP Phones
The operating mode can be configured per IAD(8)-U( ) ETU on each port.
Pad and echo canceler controls are built-in and are programmable in the IAD(8)-U( ) ETU.
The LAN/WAN connection is provided by a 10/100 Base T Ethernet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RESTRICTIONS:
H
The Synchronous Ringing feature is not supported for IP Terminals. The ITH-16D-2 and ITH-8D-2
Multiline Terminals have user programmable ringing options.
H
H
H
Group listening is not supported by (MEGACO) IP stations.
Station Relocation is not supported by (MEGACO) IP stations or IPK Soft Phones.
Not all data networks are suitable to support Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP). A good VoIP
network solution requires low-latency, low jitter, and low packet loss. Accordingly, the network
must be evaluated for these factors to determine whether or not it can provide toll-quality speech
paths.
H
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
Night Mode is indicated as N on an IPK Soft Phone.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
E-2
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
V-3
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Trunk
Card
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 32
IP Station (MEGACO)
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
I-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Integrated Service Digital Network - Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI) is a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) service that provides two B channels and a D channel (2B + D) for voice call trunking.
The B channels provide two CO/PBX connections. Caller ID is usually a standard feature on ISDN-BRI
provided trunks. Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal for CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication path only.
ENHANCEMENTS
With System Software R1.03 or higher and BRI firmware 1.31 or higher, Caller ID Name is supported on
ISDN-BRI trunks when the Telco provides this ability.
For R4000 or higher, BRT(4)-U20 with Firmware 3.00 or higher is required to support DID for ISDN-BRI
trunks.
This feature allows BRI and DID callers with non-matching SPID Numbers to determine whether or not
the system checks the called party number with the SETUP message and the SPID setup. Depending
on Memory Block 3-77 (ISDN-BRI/PRI Directory Number Checking Selection) DID calls can be received
on BRI trunks and directed according to Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Translation Table).
Special Conditions Related to Ordering Did Service For ISDN-BRI
Telcos may refer to this in different ways. The reference Verizon uses to order such service is Additional
Directory Numbers with no new terminating equipment (only a dialable number). When you want
Additional Directory Numbers to hunt when a B-Channel is busy, the service may be called Busy
Diversion.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
To provide ISDN trunk connection:
H
BRT(4)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
CLKG-U( ) Unit
H
NT-1 for each BRI (locally provided)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal call handling procedures apply.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
BRT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any Cabinet (1~3).
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic port package, a maximum of two BRT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed to support 16 ISDN trunks (B channels).
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded port package, a maximum of eight BRT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed to support 64 ISDN trunks (B channels).
H
ISDN Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection is effective after Answer Supervision is received
from the CO.
H
When an ISDN line Layer 1 or Layer 2 down condition occurs, the CO line key red LED is on, and
the following message is displayed on the second line of the LCD of the Multiline Terminals
connected to Port 01:
J
J
H
Layer 1 Down: COxx Layer1 DOWN
Layer 2 Down: COxx Layer2 DOWN
xx represents the CO Trunk number (01-64).
Layer 1 down display has a higher priority than Layer 2 down. This error display disappears
automatically when Layer 1/Layer 2 error is recovered. The T1 line error display has a higher priority
than ISDN line Layer 1/Layer 2 down.
When ISDN-BRI trunks are used for DID, the last four digits of the 10 digit Directory Number can
be used for routing the number with digit conversion.
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
The Electra Elite IPK ISDN-BRI provides voice communication only.
The system does not support multipoint access.
The Electra Elite IPK supports the NI-1 (National ISDN-1) protocol. The AT&T and Nortel
proprietary protocols are not supported.
The BRT(4)-U( ) ETU supports the S/T-type interface but not the U interface.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 34
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
Caller ID Name to Single Line Telephone is NOT supported for ISDN (BRT/PRT) Trunks.
ISDN-BRI DID Service
When two BRI Directory Numbers have assigned Service Profile Identifiers (SPIDs) and Terminal
Endpoint Identifiers (TEIs), Additional Directory Numbers must be pointed to the existing TEIs and
be able to hunt between the existing B-Channels. An example of a BRI circuit with DID service is
shown below:
J
J
J
J
214-262-0121 first Directory Number
214-262- 0122 second Directory Number
21426201210101 first SPID
21426201220101 second SPID
Additional Directory Numbers (dialable numbers terminating to existing TEIs) for the ISDN-BRI
circuit can include:
J
J
J
J
J
J
214-262-0013
214-262-0014
214-262-0015
214-262-0016
214-262-0017
214-262-0018
Some Tariffs limit the number of Additional Directory Numbers that can be assigned to an ISDNBRI circuit. A programming example is provided below:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Memory Block 3-91(Trunk Type Selection) assigns DID for the ISDN-BRI trunks.
Memory Block 3-03 (Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment) assigns a trunk group for the
ISDN-BRI trunks.
Memory Block 3-50 (ISDN line SPID Assignment) assigns SPID numbers for the ISDN-BRI
trunks.
Memory Block 3-52 (ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment) assigns Directory Numbers
for the ISDN-BRI trunks.
Memory Block 3-77 (ISDN-BRI/PRI Directory Number Checking Assignment) is set to NO to
allow the Directory Number received in the Setup Message to be passed to the CPU and
analyzed by the digit conversion table.
Memory Block 1-1-20 (DID Digit Length Selection) assigns the number of digits that must be
analyzed based on the last four digits of the 10-digit number received.
Memory Block 1-1-21(DID Digit Conversion Assignment) allows Digit Conversion.
Memory Block 1-1-22(DID Digit Conversion Table) enters the digits to be analyzed and
assigns them to the applicable station number for each Directory Number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
I-10
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
M-6
Multiple Trunk Groups
U-5
Universal Slots
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
(CO Line Services)
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
+AN
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
1-1-80
+AN
ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection
1-1-81
+BCT
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection
3-29
+BCT
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
3-30
+BCT
Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection
3-31
+BCT
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection
3-32
+BS
+AD
,
+AN
,
ISDN Line SPID Assignment
3-50
+AN
,
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
+AN
ISDN-PRI/BRI Directory Number Checking
Selection
3-77
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 36
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
(Calling Party Number [CPN] Service)
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
+ AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
Mode (R1600 or lower)
1-1-78
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+ AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
(R1600 or lower)
3-44
+ AI
Caller Name Indication Selection
3-53
ISDN-PRI/BRI Directory Number Checking
Selection
3-77
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTS
+AN
,
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4,
5-7, 6-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+ AI
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
+ AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
(R1600 or lower)
4-49
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 38
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
I-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ISDN-PRI (Integrated Service Digital Network - Primary Rate Interface) is a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) service that provides 23 B channels (16 B channels for the Electra Elite IPK - Basic port
package) and a single D channel (23B+1D) for trunking. The Electra Elite IPK supports CO Line or DID
Line type connections. The following services are available with an ISDN-PRI circuit.
CO Line Service
When configured for CO Line Service, the trunks emulate Loop Start or Ground Start trunks for both
outgoing and incoming calls.
DID Line Service
When configured for DID Line Service, the trunks emulate Loop Start or Ground Start trunks for outgoing
calls and DID trunks for incoming calls.
Call By Call Service
Call By call Service allows multiple services to share a PRI line. When a call is originated or terminated,
an Information Element (IE) called the Network Specified Facility (NSF) is added to the SETUP message
to identify the service associated with the call.
Calling Party Number (CPN) Service
Calling Party Number (CPN) Service can display the calling party telephone number and/or name on the
LCD of the Multiline Terminal for incoming calls. This emulates Caller ID Indication of Analog Trunks.
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station allows each unique station 10-digit number
(representing the DID number of the originating station) to be sent out over the PRI circuit.
Enhanced 911 Service with ISDN PRI
Enhanced 911 Service is supported by defining an available ISDN PRI trunk as a E911 trunk. When a
station user dials 911, 9+ 911, or CO line key + 911, the E911 trunk is selected and the Public Safety
Answering Point (PSAP) is called. The PSAP is provided callback information generated from the
Electra Elite IPK system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any cabinet (1~3) without requiring
adjacent slots to be vacant.
H
When an ISDN line layer 1 or layer 2 down condition occurs, the CO line key LED in On (Red), and
the following error message is displayed on the first line of the LCD of Multiline Terminals
connected to port 1:
J
J
J
J
J
H
Layer 1 Down: COxx Layer 1 DOWN
Layer 2 Down: COxx Layer 2 DOWN
xx is the CO Trunk Number (01~64).
Layer 1 has a higher priority than Layer 2.
This display disappears automatically when the error is recovered.
A PRT Firmware Upgrade Kit can be used to upgrade the firmware loaded in PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs.
Restrictions:
H
PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be assigned in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) with the
following configurations:
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
PRT4 (4 ports, 4 B channels)
PRT8 (8 ports, 8 B channels)
PRT12 (12 ports, 12 B channels)
PRT16 (16 ports, 16 B channels)
PRT20 (20 ports, 20 B channels)
PRT24 (24 ports, 23 B channels)
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic port package, a maximum of 16 ISDN trunks (B channels) can be
assigned.
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded port package, up to 62 ISDN trunks (B channels) can be
assigned when three PRT ETUs are installed. The first two ETUs provide 23 B channels, and the
third ETU provides 16 B channels (23+23+16 = 62).
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic port package, a maximum of four PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed. When four PRT ETUs are installed, up to four trunks each can be assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 40
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded port package, a maximum of eight PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed. When eight PRT ETUs are installed, up to eight trunks each can be assigned.
H
The ISDN-PRI interface provides voice communication only.
H
The Electra Elite IPK system does not support Multipoint Access.
H
The ISDN-PRI services available depend on the PRT(1)-U( ) firmware version. Refer to the
following table to determine the required firmware version.
Version
Services
Comments
1.00
CO Line emulation only
Initial Release
2.00
Call By Call and DID functions
MIFM-U( ) Software 2.00 or higher and LCR
PC Software 2.00 or higher are required for
Call By Call functions.
2.12
E-911 Service and Calling Party
Number (CPN) Presentation from
Station
3.60
Calling Party Number (CPN) Name
4.0
Individually Channel Assignment
and PRT B Channel-to-Trunk
Group
Restrictions for Calling Party Name:
H
H
Caller ID Name to Single Line Telephone is NOT supported for ISDN (BRT/PRT) Trunks.
The Electra Elite IPK supports receiving the name from the Network in supported formats only and
cannot send the Calling Name. Refer to the following table.
Protocols
Name Delivery Formats
NI-2
Facility Information Element
4ESS (AT&T Custom)
Not Supported
AT&T 5ESS Lucent Custom
Facility Information Element
DMS-100 (Custom)
,
DMS-100 (National; ISDN)
,
Facility Information Element,,
Display Information Element
,,
,Nortel Specification NIS-A211-1
,,Nortel Specification NIS-A233-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions for Calling Party Number Presentation from Station:
H
Redirecting Name is not supported by the Electra Elite. Redirecting Name (originally called name
and last redirecting name) is sent when an incoming call is forwarded from another Telco or
system.
H
The Electra Elite IPK can only display 13 characters of the provided Name or Number from the
ISDN Network.
H
The Electra Elite IPK does not display the name presentation status as private or unavailable.
H
When Memory Block 4-47 (ISDN Directory Number Selection) is assigned as YES, and Memory
Block 4-62 (ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection) has a number assigned, the setting in Memory
Block 4-62 overrides the number set in Memory block 3-52 (ISDN Trunk Directory Number
Assignment) when the station places an outgoing call using PRI. PRT Firmware 2.12 or higher is
required.
H
PRT trunk types must be assigned as DID in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection) for
Memory block 4-62 (ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection) to provide the number to the
ISDN-PRI Network.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
E-14
Enhanced 911
M-6
Multiple Trunk Groups
U-5
Universal Slots
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 42
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
ISDN – PRI Installation
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+AD
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
+AN
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
1-1-80
+AN
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-00
+AN
PRT Signal Format Selection
1-13-01
+AN
Clear Channel Selection
1-13-02
+AN
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-03
+AN
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection
1-13-04
+AN
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-13-05
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection
3-29
+BCT
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
3-30
+BCT
Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection
3-31
+BCT
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection
3-32
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
CO Line Services
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
+AN
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Checking
Selection
3-77
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BCT
+AN
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
DID Line Service
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BCT
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
+ALN
Digit Add/Delete for Tie Line Networking
Assignment
5-00
+ALN
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-20
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-21
+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-22
+ALN
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station
or Undefined Digit
1-1-23
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 44
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Call By Call Service
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+AY
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-03
+AY
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-00
+AY
Call By Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-01
+AY
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-02
+AY
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-03
+AY
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-04
+AY
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment
(Service)
1-10-05
+AY
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment
(Feature)
1-10-06
+AY
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-07
+AY
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-08
+AY
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group
Assignment
1-10-09
+AY
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-20
+AY
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG
Assignment
1-10-21
+AY
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-10-22
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Calling Party Number (CPN) Service
Order
and
Shortcut
System Data Name
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
Memory
Block
+BS
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
Mode (R1600 or lower)
1-1-78
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX
Line (R1600 or lower)
3-44
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AI
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
+AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
(R1600 or lower)
4-49
+BTS
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4,
5-7, 6-5
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BCT
System Data Name
,
+AN
+AN
,
,
Memory
Block
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
ISDN Directory Number Selection
4-47
ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection
4-62
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 46
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Enhanced 911 Service with ISDN-PRI
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
,
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-43
+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-44
+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
(Maintenance Busy)
1-8-45
+AE
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-8-46
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Assignment
4-54
+AE
+BCT
,
+AN
+AE
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 48
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
I-Use Indication
I-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
I-Use Indication provides a green LED line key indication for the line being used on Multiline Terminals.
Other busy line keys are indicated with red LEDs. This quickly identifies the line being used by the
station user.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
The indication is a green LED when a CO/PBX line is in use or a winking green LED when the line
is on hold.
All other Multiline Terminals with that line appearance show a red LED.
When a Multiline Terminal does not have a CO/PBX line appearance on a Flexible Line key, the
I-Use is indicated on a Call Appearance key LED.
When a Multiline Terminal has the CO/PBX line appearance on a Flexible Line key, the I-Use
indication is indicated on the CO/PBX line key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
I - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
I - 50
I-Use Indication
Key-Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling (K-CCIS)
K-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) allows multiple systems to be connected together
to provide additional feature compatibility, above what normal Tie Lines provide. The system is
configured with the 24-channel Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), a Common Channel Handler (CCH) for
receiving or transmitting common signaling data from/to a distant office, and a CLKG-U( ) Unit for
network synchronization. The system can provide a variety of interoffice service features such as
Calling Name display, Centralized Voice Mail Integration, or Link Reconnect.
MIFM-U( ) Software and LCR PC software are required to program the expanded Route Advance Block
Assignments in LCR.
The following features are provided:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Call Forwarding – All Calls - K-CCIS
Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer - K-CCIS
Call Transfer – All Calls - K-CCIS
Calling Name Display - K-CCIS
Calling Number Display - K-CCIS
Call Park Retrieve - K-CCIS (R3000 or higher)
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station – K-CCIS (R4000 or higher)
Centralized Billing - K-CCIS
Centralized BLF - (K-CCIS) (R1500 or higher)
R3000 or higher is required for Centralized BLF (K-CCIS) on an Attendant Add-On Console.
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS
Centralized E911 (K-CCIS) (R2000 or higher)
Dial Access to Attendant - K-CCIS
Direct Inward Dialing - K-CCIS
Dual hold - K-CCIS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
K-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Elapsed Time Display - K-CCIS
Flexible Numbering of Stations - K-CCIS
Hands-Free Answerback - K-CCIS
Hot Line - K-CCIS
IP (K-CCIS) (R1500~R1700 only)
IP (K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint) (R2500 or R3500)
Link Reconnect - K-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls - K-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer - K-CCIS
Paging Access - K-CCIS
R3000 or higher is required for Paging Access - K-CCIS Internal/All Call Paging across K-CCIS.
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail - K-CCIS (R3000 or higher)
Station-to-Station Calling - K-CCIS
Uniform Numbering Plan - K-CCIS
Voice Call - K-CCIS
Voice Mail Integration - K-CCIS
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
DTI-U30 ETU or higher
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU with applicable firmware
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator)
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-2
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
MIFM-U10 ETU with KMM( )U installed for Call Routing using LCR
When expanded Route Advanced Block assignments for Least Cost Routing (LCR) are required, MIFM-U( )
firmware V4.00 or higher and LCR PC software 3.00 or higher are required.
- OR MIFM-U20 ETU with KMM-U20 Upgrade Chip installed When Call Routing using LCR is required
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
When Centralized Billing - K-CCIS is required, MIFM-U( ) firmware V5.00 or higher is required.
The following tables show the KSU system software compatibility with CCH(4)-U( ) firmware and K-CCIS
feature compatibility.
KSU Software/CCH Firmware Compatibility
KSU Software
CCH V1.XX
CCH V2.XX
CCH V3.XX
CCH V4.XX
IPK R1000 R1.0X
–
X
X
X
IPK R1500 R1.5X
–
–
X
X
IPK R1600 R1.6X
–
–
X
X
IPK R1700 R1.7X
–
–
X
X
IPK R2000 R2.0X
–
–
–
X
IPK R2500 R2.5X
–
–
–
X
IPK R3000 R3.0x
–
–
–
X
IPK R3500 R3.5x
–
–
–
X
IPK R4000 R4.0x
–
–
–
X
IPK R4500 R4.5x
–
–
–
X
X
–
= Compatible
= Not compatible
K-CCIS Feature Compatibility
Minimum
CPU
Software
Required
CCH
V2.XX
CCH
V3.XX
CCH
V4.XX
NEAX
Compatible
Call Forwarding– All Calls - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Call Park Retrieve - K-CCIS
R3000
–
–
X
No
Call Transfer – All Calls - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
K-CCIS Feature
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
K-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-CCIS Feature Compatibility
Minimum
CPU
Software
Required
CCH
V2.XX
CCH
V3.XX
CCH
V4.XX
NEAX
Compatible
Calling Name Display - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Calling Number Display - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from
Station – K-CCIS
R4000
–
–
X
Yes
Centralized Billing - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Conditions
Centralized BLF-IPK to IPK (K-CCIS)
R1500
–
X
X
No
For Attendant Add-On Console support
R3000
–
–
X
No
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Conditions
Centralized E911(K-CCIS)
R2000
–
–
X
Yes
Dial Access to Attendant - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Direct Inward Dialing - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Dual Hold - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Elapsed Time Display - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Flexible Numbering of Stations - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Handsfree Answerback - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Hot Line - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
R1500~R1700
(only)
–
X
X
No
R2500 or
R3500 (only)
–
–
X
Yes
Link Reconnect - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy/No
Answer- K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Yes
Paging Access - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
For Internal/ All Call Paging across K-CCIS
support
R3000
–
–
X
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail - K-CCIS
R3000
–
–
X
Station-to-Station Calling - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Uniform Number Plan - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
Voice Calls - K-CCIS
R1000
X
X
X
K-CCIS Feature
IP (K-CCIS) *
IP (K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint)
*
No
No
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-4
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-CCIS Feature Compatibility
K-CCIS Feature
Voice Mail Integration - K-CCIS
Minimum
CPU
Software
Required
CCH
V2.XX
CCH
V3.XX
CCH
V4.XX
NEAX
Compatible
R1000
X
X
X
Conditions
X = Compatible
– = Not compatible
Conditions: Refer to the detailed feature and specification.
* The CCH(4)-U( ) ETU and CLKG-U( ) Unit are not required when only IP(K-CCIS) or IP(K-CCIS) to NEAX
(Point-to-Multipoint) is used. When traditional K-CCIS (with Point-to-Point T1s) is used with IP (K-CCIS), the
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU and CLKG-U( ) Unit are required.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Each Electra Elite IPK system can have up to four K-CCIS routes.
H
One DTI(1)-U30 ETU can be used to support/connect a maximum of four K-CCIS Links.
H
The Basic Port Package can have up to 15 DTI trunks for K-CCIS Voice path.
H
The Expanded Port Package can have up to 63 DTI trunks for K-CCIS Voice path.
H
The K-CCIS feature shares the CO/PBX/Tie/DID trunks available for the system.
H
H
H
H
The Electra Elite IPK uses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) table 1, 2, or 3 to assign the Open
Numbering Plan.
When all K-CCIS voice channels are busy, the Electra Elite IPK originator of a K-CCIS call hears a
busy tone from the system.
Outgoing CO calls in a K-CCIS network can be routed over the K-CCIS link and use the distant
system CO lines.
Distant system extension numbers in the K-CCIS network can be assigned to Feature Access or
One Touch keys and Speed Dial buffers.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
K-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
When a K-CCIS trunk is on hold, the Specified Line Seizure access codes can be used to retrieve
the call from its held state.
Caller ID Name data received from a Telco Central Office is not passed across the K-CCIS
network.
The Elite ACD Plus can support and distribute incoming calls from a remote K-CCIS office.
However, incoming calls to ACD Plus that result in a link reconnect are not supported. These calls
must first be answered by a local station, then can be transferred to ACD Plus as long as it is not
an internal (Intercom) call.
Restrictions:
H
When using Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station – K-CCIS (R4000 or higher)
the remote system must assign 9 to access the K-CCIS network.
H
The Electra Elite IPK can support only 2-, 3-, or 4-digit station numbers (R2000 or lower).
H
The Electra Elite IPK can support 2~7-digit station numbers (R2500).
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
With R2000 or lower, Station Numbers are assigned by the 100s group for 4-digit station numbers
only.
With R2500, Station Numbers are assigned by the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s
group for 5-digit station numbers, 1000s group for 6-digit station numbers, 10000s group for 7-digit
station numbers.
When Voice Mail Message Waiting status must be sent across the K-CCIS to a remote system, the
Closed Number Blocks must be used.
For a Closed Numbering Plan network using Closed Numbering Blocks, a maximum of 16
Numbering Blocks are available allowing a maximum of 17 connected systems per K-CCIS
network.
When a Closed Numbering Plan Network is used, a user can call another station by dialing the
distant extension number, but extensions in the network cannot have the same prefix.
When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K-CCIS is required, the
Closed Number Blocks must be used.
When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K-CCIS is not required, the
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) table 4 can be used.
For an Open Numbering Plan network, the ARS feature, table 1, 2 or 3 must be used to place
station-to-station calls over K-CCIS.
For an Open Numbering Plan network, a user can dial another station by dialing the office location
number plus an extension number and the extension number can have the same prefix, but the
office location cannot be the same.
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-6
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
H
When an Electra Elite IPK system is a tandem system (in the middle) between systems with higher
K-CCIS feature support (including NEAX PBXs), only the K-CCIS features supported by the
tandem system (Electra Elite IPK) are passed through and supported.
An Electra Elite IPK K-CCIS network should never have more than five hops (tandem connections)
because of the message delay through each tandem system.
A Star topology network supports only five systems because of the CCH channels in the Main/Hub
system.
A Tree topology network is supported. The maximum number of systems depends on the
Numbering Plan used and the maximum number of hops (tandem connections).
Mesh topology is not supported by the Electra Elite only network.
K-CCIS requires assigning a point code for each office. Point codes differentiate between an
originating office and a destination office in the K-CCIS Network. Assigning point codes requires
the following considerations:
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
J
The point code must be unique in the network.
When a system has two or more CCH channels, the same originating point code must be
assigned to all channels in the system.
The Electra Elite IPK can have a maximum of 255 codes assigned to distant systems.
Using an Electra Elite IPK-to-Electra Elite IPK network, centralized voice is not supported when an
Open Numbering Plan is used.
Each Electra Elite IPK system in a K-CCIS network must have at least one local trunk for
Emergency 911 calls (R1700 or lower).
With R2000 or higher, Centralized E911 - K-CCIS is supported, but when it is not used, each
Electra Elite IPK system in a K-CCIS network must have at least one local trunk for Emergency
911 calls.
Using a NEAX-to-Electra Elite IPK network, the PBX must supply centralized voice mail.
Multiline terminals must have an available Call Appearance (CAP) key to originate or answer a
K-CCIS trunk call.
Direct access of K-CCIS voice or data channels using Line keys or Specified Line Seizure access
codes is prohibited.
A Single Line Telephone or PSII user cannot transfer a trunk or K-CCIS call to another user on a
remote system across K-CCIS (R1700 or lower).
With R2000 or higher, A Single Line Telephone or PSII user can perform a trunk-to-Trunk transfer,
including the transfer of a trunk or K-CCIS call to another user on a remote system across K-CCIS.
Recall key or Drop key does not function on K-CCIS calls. When either key is pressed, operation is
ignored, and the call continues.
Trunk queuing is prohibited on a K-CCIS trunk route.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
K-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The ability to route an incoming DID call directly across a K-CCIS link (Direct Inward DialingK-CCIS) is supported only when a Closed Numbering Plan using Closed Numbering Blocks is
used.
H
H
H
H
This feature is not supported by the TLI(2)-U( ) Analog Line interface.
Only one CCH(4)-U( ) ETU can be assigned per system.
Extension numbers cannot start with 0 or 9.
Internal Calls, transferred calls, and K-CCIS calls do not provide Caller ID to Single Line
Telephones.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
T-1
T1 Connection
U-5
Universal Slots
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual for more
details.
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-8
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Key Function/Multifunction Registration
K-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The system can be registered as either a Key Function (KF) or a Multifunction (MF) telephone system.
This feature is set by a switch on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU for the Electra Elite IPK system during
installation.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
When the system is set as KF, CO/PBX lines must appear on Multiline Terminals. Outside calls
cannot be made by dialing a Trunk Access Code from internal dial tone except when specified
trunk seizure is used.
When a system is set as KF, the following CO/PBX calls are prohibited:
J
J
J
J
Route Advance key
Trunk Group key
Hot Line/Prime Line with Automatic Trunk Selection
Trunk Group Access Call, Route Advance Access Call
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
K-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
J
J
H
H
H
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Speed Dial with Automatic Trunk Selection
Last Number Redial with Automatic Trunk Selection
When the system is set as multifunction, CO/PBX lines can be accessed from internal dial tone by
dialing a Trunk Access Code.
KF or MF selection is set by a hardware switch on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU in the B64-U( ) KSU. To
change the KF/MF selection after First Initialization of the system, First Initialization must be
performed again.
In KF mode, Single Line Telephones can be used for internal calls and can access an outside line
using the specified trunk seizure Access Code or Prime Line Pickup assignment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
K - 10
Key Function/Multifunction Registration
L-1
Large LED Indication
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
All Multiline Terminals have a Large LED to indicate incoming calls or messages sent from the Attendant
or a Voice Mail system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
H
Visual Indications for the Large LED include the following:
Incoming CO/PBX Call
Flashing Green
0.125 sec. ON
0.125 sec. OFF
Incoming Internal Call
Flashing Red
0.125 sec. ON
0.125 sec. OFF
Message from Attendant
Add-On Console
Flashing Green
0.5 sec. ON
0.5 sec. OFF
Message from Voice Mail
Flashing Red
0.5 sec. ON
0.5 sec. OFF
CO Ring Transfer Calls
Flashing Green
0.125 sec. ON
0.125 sec. OFF
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Calls are in the following priority order:
1.
Internal
2.
CO Ring Transfer
3.
CO/PBX
4.
Message from Attendant Add-On Console
5.
Message from Voice Mail
___________________________________________________________________________________
L-2
Large LED Indication
Last Number Redial
L-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Last Number Redial allows the user to press the Redial key and to redial the last outside number
dialed. This is useful when a busy or no answer is received when trying to place a CO/PBX call.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or higher is required to support the last 10 numbers that were dialed.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press an idle CO/PBX/Tie line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial
B
J
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
J
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
Using a Multiline Terminal (R4000 or higher):
Key Function:
1.
Press an idle CO/PBX/Tie line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial
B
J
.
Repeatedly press this key to display up to 10 Last Numbers Dialed.
.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
1.
2.
Dial
B
J
Press
.
Repeatedly press this key to display up to 10 Last Numbers Dialed.
.
Confirming Last Number Redials using a Multiline Terminal (R4000 or higher):
1.
Press
2.
Press
D
B
.
.
Repeatedly press this key to display up to 10 Last Numbers Dialed.
Using a Single Line Telephone:
Multifunction (Dial Access) Only:
J
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial
(set as default).
___________________________________________________________________________________
L-4
Last Number Redial
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Last Number Redial memory is protected by battery backup.
Last Number Redial stores up to 24 digits (plus the Trunk Access Code).
The Access Code
is fixed in system software for use with the Redial key.
This feature can be assigned to a Feature Access or One-Touch key.
To store the last Dial Access number dialed in a Station Speed Dial buffer, press the Feature key
and Redial key, dial the Speed Dial buffer number, and press Redial key, then the Feature key.
To display the Last Number Redial memory buffer, press the Conf key, Redial key, and then .
A Private Line must be accessed by Direct CO access for Redial to operate.
Manually dialed numbers, Speed Dial numbers, Save/Store and Repeat numbers, One-Touch dial
numbers, or combinations can be redialed using the Last Number Redial feature when the last
number dialed is less than 24 digits.
A Trunk Access Code is automatically inserted when the last call was made by manually selecting
an outside line.
When the last number in the Redial buffer is displayed, pressing the Redial key again starts with
the first stored Redial buffer.
When the last number in the Redial buffer is used to perform a call back, this number becomes the
first number in the Redial buffer.
The top row of the display can be used to identify the location of the Last Number Redial buffer.
The display reads: LNR[*]1/SPD[ ] (1) (Redial buffers 1~0, 0=10) is the Last Number Redial buffer.
The middle row of the display shows the number within the buffer.
Restrictions:
H
Internal calls do not apply to this feature.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BA
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
Memory
Block
1-1-46/47/
48
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
096
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
L-6
Last Number Redial
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
L-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Least Cost Routing allows outside calls to use the least expensive available route. The MIFM-U( ) ETU
and KMM(1.0)U provide cost effective call routing based on the time of day, day of week, weekend or
holiday based on the Central Office number dialed. Call costs are minimized by automatically selecting
the least expensive available connection for outgoing calls.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, Least Cost Routing (LCR) can be used with the new MIFM-U20 ETU with the
KMM-U20 or the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
MIFM-U10 ETU with KMM(1.0)U
- OR MIFM-U20 ETU with KMM-U20
- OR SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The following table compares the MIFM-U10, MIFM-U20 and SPE(M)-U( ) ETUs:
Feature
MIFM-U10 ETU
MIFM-U20 ETU
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
LCR Serial Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCR Modem Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCR Ethernet Programming
No
Yes
Yes
Serial SMDR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ethernet SMDR
No
Yes
(simultaneous on serial also)
Yes
(simultaneous on serial also)
Approximately 100 call
records
Maximum of 2000 records
in
non-volatile Memory
Maximum of 2000 records
in
non-volatile Memory
50 per Station
50 per Station in
non-volatile Memory
50 per Station in
non-volatile Memory
VM CoSession using KSU
serial port (no open box)
No
No
Yes
VM CoSession using
modem not on VM ETU
No
No
Yes
VM CoSession using
Ethernet
No
No
Yes
BRT/PRT/CCH Remote
Debugging
No
No
Yes
SMDR Record Storage
when Printer is not
connected
Caller ID Storage
___________________________________________________________________________________
L-8
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Some LCR functions depend on the LCR PC software and the MIFM-U( ) ETU firmware version. Use the
following table to determine the required versions.
LCR PC Software
MIFM-U10 ETU
Firmware
V1.00
V1.00
V2.00
V2.00
To Print SMDR data per station - Memory Block
4-56 (SMDR Telephone Print Selection)
Not Affected
V3.00
To assign Expanded Route Advance Block
assignments (from 16 to 32)
To add extra code digits to Operator/International
and OCC calls routed through LCR
To analyze the incoming digits from a trunk group
to be routed through LCR
V3.00
V4.00
Supports Centralized Billing - K-CCIS
Supports 50 Caller ID scroll buffers (not LCR
related)
Not Affected
V5.00
Tab Based LCR PD Programming Software
Supports IP Connection - LAN/WAN
Communication method
V4.00
Not Affected
Supports SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
Supports MIFM-U20 ETU with KMM-U20
V4.03
Not Affected
V5.00
V6.10
Function
Initial Release
To route Operator/International and OCC calls
through LCR
To assign Route Advanced Blocks in a Route
Table for use with ISDN-PRI Call-by-Call
Latest software and firmware Version
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature:
I
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Code
3.
Dial the desired number.
and receive LCR dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
LCR is programmed using a Personal Computer through the MIFM-U( ) ETU. This is the PC
programming connection.
PC Requirements:
J
J
J
J
J
J
Pentium Processor
Microsoft Windows 95, 98, ME, XP, 2000 or NT 4.0 (or higher) operating system
At least 15 MB of free hard disk space
Unused PC serial communication port (COM Port)
MNP Class 5 compatible modem when remote programming is required
Network Interface Card (NIC) when programming via LAN/WAN is required
H
All Trunk groups in the system (except 00) can be accessed using LCR.
H
Trunk Group 1 Access Code (default: 9) activates LCR at stations assigned for LCR.
H
LCR is based on the first six digits (Area Code and Office Code) dialed.
H
When being used with LCR, Code Restriction is applied to the digits dialed by the system.
H
H
Extra Code Tables can be programmed to provide OCC Access Codes and pauses for the
distant-end system.
The maximum number of extra code digits is 32, including pauses (each pause counts as one
digit).
H
LCR provides up to eight different routes for each call.
H
When the station user seizes the most expensive trunk, alarm tone is not provided.
H
When the interdigit time exceeds 10 seconds, the outgoing call, using LCR, is disconnected.
H
When the station user places an outside call using LCR, Trunk Queuing cannot be set.
H
Trunk groups 2~32 are programmable in station class of service to bypass LCR at stations
assigned for LCR.
H
Local Call Override of LCR is available in LCR Programming.
H
The Priority Selection in the Route Advance Table is set using LCR Programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 10
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is programmed as an MIFM-U( ) ETU.
Restrictions:
H
Trunk directly assigned on Line Keys bypass LCR.
H
Route Advance Blocks assigned on a line key bypass LCR.
H
Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), LCR/ARS Bypass applies
only when the station is assigned to a LCR/ARS Class (1~4) in Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class
Selection).
H
When the Electra Elite IPK system has KF registration, this feature is not available.
H
Outgoing calls using DISA cannot access LCR.
H
H
When the Elite LAN PC programming device is used, the system can be programmed via the LAN
or WAN. Version V4.00 LCR PC software is required.
When the JP5, DFLTS jumper is installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU or Switch SW4-2 on the
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is On, all SMDR, LCR, and Caller ID records are cleared, and the IP address,
User Name, Password, and other possible like items are all set to the factory default values.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
,
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
,
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
+BA
,
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
LCR Class Selection
4-40
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
Tone Assignment
1-8-15
+BTS
+BTT
+BCT
+BI
,
Memory
Block
,
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
101
3-4
Tone
Table 10
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 12
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Live Monitoring
L-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
An Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal user can listen to voice mail messages as the message is being
recorded by the EliteMail VMS/FMS. Live Monitoring is password protected and can be used in
automatic or manual mode. When Live Monitoring is in use, the audio is played from the Multiline
Terminal Speaker. The terminal user can pick up the handset and speak to the caller anytime during the
recording.
EliteMail VMS version Q00631 or higher or an EliteMail FMS version QOS531 or higher are
required.
EliteMail ETI supports Live Monitoring ONLY using View Call Plus. It does not support Live
Monitoring via telephone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
CTI(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
EliteMail FMS/VMS
To enable Live Monitoring:
1.
2.
3.
Press the feature access key assigned as Live Monitoring.
KKKKKKKKKK
Dial the password (same as Station Outgoing Lockout password); default is
.
Live Monitoring key flashes green while this feature is being set.
To cancel the Live Monitoring Feature when not in use:
Press the Live Monitoring Feature Access key.
To start Manual Live Monitoring while the caller is leaving a voice mail message:
1.
Press the Start softkey while the CO caller is leaving a message.
2.
Press the Cancel softkey to stop Live Monitoring.
- OR -
Pick up handset to retrieve the call from voice mail.
To start Live Monitoring without display or softkeys using Automatic mode:
The caller is heard through the speaker when the caller receives the beep tone to start recording the
message.
To stop Live Monitoring while the caller is leaving a voice mail message in Automatic mode:
Press the Cancel softkey.
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 14
Live Monitoring
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To stop Live Monitoring without display or softkeys using Automatic mode:
Press the Live Monitoring feature access key.
To retrieve a call during the Live Monitoring Feature:
Pick up the handset.
- OR Press
E
.
EliteMail CTI
Live Monitoring on EliteMail CTI is only supported using View Call Plus. In addition the caller must be
routed to the Auto Attendant of the CTI first.
To start manual Live Monitoring while the caller is leaving a message:
1.
In View Call Plus application press the Monitor button while the CO caller is leaving a message.
2.
Press the Take Call button in View Call Plus to stop Live Monitoring and connect with the caller.
- OR Wait until the caller has finished leaving a message.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Visual indications for Live Monitoring line key LED include the following:
J
J
H
H
H
Red flash
Setting up Live Monitoring Mode
Red
In Live Monitoring Mode (Station is available to receive Live Monitoring)
When the Live Monitoring key is assigned on a One-Touch or Feature Access key, the key toggles
Live Monitoring On/Off.
When multiple calls are recording to the same mailbox, user can Live Monitor the first call only.
When you press Feature, Conf, Redial, Speaker, Answer (flashing key), or Line/DSS key (with
assigned function), Live Monitoring is canceled, and the key you press is activated.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
A Feature Access key must be available to assign to Live Monitoring. Feature code for Live
Monitoring is 07.
The EliteMail VMS/FMS must have Live Monitoring set per mailbox for one of the following:
J
J
J
Manual Mode
Automatic Mode
Not Available (Default)
Restrictions:
H
Live Monitoring is not available for internal calls but is available for the following outside calls:
J
J
J
Calls forwarded to Voice Mail
Calls transferred to Voice Mail
DIT/DID calls to Voice Mail
H
Manual Mode is available only on terminals with softkeys.
H
Live Monitoring is not available for the following conditions:
J
J
J
J
H
During an internal call to a station
When a station places a conference call on hold
For Voice Mail messages sent to multiple mailboxes
For Voice Mail messages sent to mailboxes that do not correspond to the actual station
number.
When DND, Call Forward – All Call, or Station Outgoing Lockout is set during Live Monitoring
Mode, Live Monitoring is canceled. When required, a station user must set up Live Monitoring
mode after setting Call Forward – All Call.
H
Live Monitoring call cannot be picked up by Call Pickup feature.
H
The EliteMail VP does not support live monitoring.
H
H
H
The EliteMail CTI only supports Live Monitor TeLANophy application via view call plus, not via
Softkeys, Feature Access or One-Touch keys.
The Live Monitor feature on the EliteMail CTI requires that all incoming calls be answered by the
Automated Attendant on the CTI. It also requires the individual mailbox to be set for await answer
transfers.
This feature is not available when 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 16
Live Monitoring
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTS
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
5-6
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 18
Live Monitoring
Live Record
L-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Live Record simplifies Message and note taking by permitting a portion of the conversation in progress
to be recorded automatically or manually.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
CTI(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To record an incoming CO/PBX conversation using Automatic Live Record:
1.
Go off hook to answer an incoming call. Live Record automatically starts.
2.
RECORD is displayed in the lower section of the LCD on the Multiline Terminal.
3.
To store the recorded conversation in a different mailbox, dial a mailbox number or press a
One-Touch key or Feature Access key programmed with the mailbox number.
4.
RECORD XXXXXX is displayed in the lower section of the LCD on the Multiline Terminal (XXXXXX
is the station name/number where the conversation is stored).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To record an incoming CO/PBX conversation using Manual Live Record:
1.
Press the Feature Access key programmed as the record key. The Record key flashes red when
Live Record begins and flashes green when Live Record is addressed.
2.
RECORD is displayed in the lower section of the LCD on the Multiline Terminal.
3.
To store the recorded conversation in a different mailbox, dial a mailbox number or press a
One-Touch key or Feature Access key programmed with the mailbox number.
4.
RECORD XXXXXX is displayed in the lower section of the LCD on the Multiline Terminal (XXXXXX
is the station name/number where the conversation is stored.
CAUTION
Using the Live Record feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the telephone
line may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor before implementing
any practice to monitor or record a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require a party
monitoring or recording a telephone conversation to use a beep-tone(s), notify all parties to the
telephone conversation, and/or obtain consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. To monitor or
record sound activities at the other end of the telephone line using the Live Record feature, the sound of
the alert tone at the beginning of Live Record may or may not be considered sufficient under applicable
laws. Some applicable laws provide for strict penalties for illegal monitoring or recording of telephone
conversations.
General:
H
H
Tone Override, Call Alert, Barge-In, Camp-On, and Voice Over Split feature tones are denied
during Live Record.
When a Multiline Terminal user completes Live Record without specifying a mailbox where the
conversation should be stored and Automatic Recall is not assigned in Digital Voice Mail
programming, the conversation is stored in the mailbox assigned to the Multiline Terminal. When a
Multiline Terminal user completes Live Record without specifying a mailbox where the
conversation should be stored and Automatic Recall is assigned in Digital Voice Mail
programming, the conversation is stored in the mailbox assigned to the Multiline Terminal and the
system recalls the Multiline Terminal and plays the recorded conversation.
(Auto Callback rings - 4 times, Waiting Time - 3 minute, Redial - 5 times.)
H
Live Record can be used only from Multiline Terminals.
H
Individual trunks must be assigned for the Live Record feature to operate.
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 20
Live Record
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
The system can be programmed to allow/deny an alert tone for Live Record. The 0.5 second alert
tone is heard by both the outside party and the Multiline Terminal user when the recording starts or
at specified intervals during recording. The interval between alert tones is assigned in the Digital
Voice Mail System Programming.
Up to seven feature keys can be programmed for use with Live Record. These feature keys can be
assigned to Feature Access keys, One-Touch keys, or DSS keys (on a DSS/BLF console). When
the feature keys are assigned to One-Touch keys, no LED indications are provided.
The following feature keys can be programmed:
Record Key
Use this key to manually start Live Record. The associated LED flashes red while recording. The
associated LED goes off when recording ends or a pause occurs and flashes green when a live
record message is addressed.
Pause Key
Use this key to pause and restart live record. The associated LED flashes green when recording
has paused.
Erase Key
Use this key to erase the Live Record conversations. After the Erase key is pressed, the Voice Mail
port remains off-hook until the call is terminated.
End Key
Use this key to end the Live Record. The conversation continues without being recorded.
Rerecord Key
Use this key to erase a recorded conversation while recording is in progress and start a new
recording.
Urgent Page Key
Use this key to change the Live Record assignment from dial out to pager. (Message Notification
to Pager Assignment cycles ON/OFF when this key is pressed while recording.)
Address Key
Use this key to confirm Live Record, erase Live Record, change the mailbox number where Live
Record is stored, or add a recorded prelude to a recorded conversation.
H
During each Live Record, a conference circuit and Voice Mail Port are used.
H
Live Record is not allowed when all Add-On Conference circuits are busy.
H
Additional internal parties cannot be added to a live record conversation during conferencing.
H
Only CO/PBX, Tie, and DID calls can be recorded using Live Record. Internal calls cannot be
recorded using Live Record.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The Record key LED is on when all conference circuits or all Digital Voice Mail ports are busy.
H
Any station user can direct a live record message to another station user.
H
H
H
Any Multiline Terminal can change the Message Notification mode to Pager Notification mode by
first directing a live record message to another station and then pressing the Urgent Page key.
The station that is put into the Urgent Page mode must have a pager telephone number assigned.
When a Multiline Terminal (with LCD) is in Pager Notification mode,
corner of the lower LCD.
is displayed in the far right
Live Record is not allowed on conference calls.
Refer to Feature D-8 (Digital Voice Mail) for more information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 22
Live Record
Loop Start Trunks
L-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Loop Start Trunks can be connected to the Electra Elite IPK system. Loop Start is assigned per trunk at
the associated ETU. Ground Start and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in the system per trunk. The
COI(4)-U( ), COIB(4)-U20, and COIB(8)-U( ) ETU are Loop Start only.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
COI(8)-U( ), COI(4)-U( ), COIB(4)-U( ), or COIB(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
L - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
Each COI(8)-U( ) ETU has eight switches (one for each port) that can be used to select either Loop
or Ground Start per trunk.
Each COIB(4)-U10 ETU has four switches (one for each port) that can be used to select either
Loop or Ground Start per trunk.
Each COI(4)-U( ), COIB(4)-U20, or COIB(8)-U( ) ETU supports loop start only.
When the serving CO sends a disconnect signal after the outside party abandons a call, the trunk
is automatically released.
Sixty-four trunks (Ground Start, Loop Start, ISDN, E&M Tie Lines, and DID Trunks) can be
installed in an Expanded Port Package, or 16 trunks, in a Basic Port Package.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
L - 24
Loop Start Trunks
Message Display Board
M-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Message display Board indicates voice mail messages left for those without telephones. Message
Display Boards include a basic board and expansion boards. Each basic and expansion board provides
up to eight messages.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not Applicable
Required Components:
DBM(B)-U( ) Box
DBM(E)-U( ) Box
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
The DBM(B)-U( ) Box is the Basic Message Display Board that is connected to an ESI port and
provides eight large LEDs to indicate up to eight voice mail messages. The provided AC adapter is
required to provide power for this board.
Only the DBM(B)-U( ) requires an ESI port and AC adapter.
A maximum of 384 LEDs can be assigned to the Message Display Boards, but only 200 mail boxes
can be indicated.
When a voice mail message is left for someone, the corresponding large lamp on the board is on.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The large lamp goes off after a person retrieves all new voice mail messages.
H
Message Display Boards can be wall mounted.
H
The number of Message Display Boards is included with the maximum number of terminals.
H
One mail box can be assigned to multiple Message Display Boards.
Restrictions:
H
A maximum of eight basic DBM(B)-U( ) Boxes, can be installed per system.
H
A maximum of five expansion DBM(E)-U( ) Boxes, can be connected to each basic DBM(B)-U( )
Box.
H
When networking multiple systems, The Message Display Board supports only the stations
installed in the same system with the Message Display Board.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
S-16
Station Hunt
V-1
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BTB
Display Board LED Assignment
1-6-07
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
M-2
Message Display Board
Message Waiting
M-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Message Waiting is set from the Attendant Add-On Console or from a Voice Mail Unit to allow the large
LED to provide a distinctive message indication to the station. The station user is alerted to contact the
Attendant or Voice Mail Unit for the message.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals that are assigned on the Attendant Add-On Console, except Single Line
Telephones supported by an SLT Adapter.
Required Components:
DCU/DCR-60-1 Console for Attendant Message Waiting
ACA-U/AC-R Unit (AC Adapter)
Voice Mail Unit for Voice Mail Message Waiting
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set a Message at the Attendant Position using the Attendant Add-On Console:
1.
Press the Message key on the Attendant Add-On Console.
2.
Press the DSS key on the Attendant Add-On Console that is associated with the station where
Message Waiting indication is to be set.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel a Message at the Attendant Position using the Attendant Add-On Console:
1.
Press the Message key on the Attendant Add-On Console.
2.
Press the DSS key on the Attendant Add-On Console that is associated with the station where
Message Waiting is to be canceled.
To respond to Message Waiting indication:
Dial K or the associated Attendant station with the Attendant Add-On Console used to set the
message.
- OR Call the Voice Mail System, and retrieve the messages.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A Message Waiting indication is provided on the large LED on the recipient Multiline Terminal.
Message Waiting indications from the Attendant Add-On Console flash green; indications from a
Voice Mail Unit flash red.
To confirm a Message Waiting indication at an Attendant Add-On Console, ensure that the green
LED associated with the station is on. A Message Waiting indication remains on until the message
is canceled at the Attendant Add-On Console where it was set.
When two or more (maximum of four per system) Attendant Add-On Consoles are installed, the
message is displayed only on the Attendant Add-On Console where the setting was made.
All Attendant Add-On Consoles can be used to set a Message Waiting to the same station.
Single Line Telephones supported by an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU with a Message Waiting LED receive a
flashing Message Waiting indication when set.
A Voice Mail system can be used to set and cancel the messages to stations.
Message Waiting from an Attendant Add-On Console has higher priority than Message Waiting
from a Voice Mail Unit.
An Attendant Add-On Console with a Message Waiting key assigned on it cannot be used to set
the Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout feature.
Message Waiting status is retained in memory by the memory backup battery.
___________________________________________________________________________________
M-4
Message Waiting
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
Assignment
1-6-01
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
M-6
Message Waiting
Microphone Control
M-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Microphone Control allows ON/OFF status indication on all Multiline Terminals. A Flexible Line key or
One-Touch key programmed for Microphone Control or an Access Code is used to mute the microphone
for privacy during incoming voice announcement calls and during calls using the built-in speakerphone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
When the MIC ON/OFF feature is assigned on Feature Access key or a One-Touch key on a Flexible
Line key:
1.
When the MIC LED is off, press the MIC key to turn the MIC LED on and to activate the
microphone.
2.
When the MIC LED is on, press the MIC key to turn the MIC LED off and to deactivate the
microphone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
When the terminal does not have a dedicated MIC key and when the MIC ON/OFF feature is not
assigned on a Feature Access key or a One-Touch key:
When the MIC LED is off:
A
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
The MIC LED comes on.
.
.
When the MIC LED is on:
A
.
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
The MIC LED goes off.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
DTH/DTR Multiline Terminals have a built-in MIC key.
H
The MIC key controls the built-in microphone during speakerphone mode and controls the handset
mute feature during handset/headset operation.
H
The microphone is activated when the MIC LED is on, and an internal voice signal call is made to a
Multiline Terminal.
H
When full handsfree is denied in System Programming, Handsfree Dialing/Monitoring does not
activate the microphone.
H
The microphone status is indicated by the LED labeled MIC (not the Flexible Line key, when
assigned). When the MIC LED is on, the microphone is on.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-1
Handset Mute
H-2
Handsfree Answerback
___________________________________________________________________________________
M-8
Microphone Control
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTM
System Data Name
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 10
Microphone Control
M-4
Multiline Conference Bridge
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multiline Conference Bridge allows any intercom or outside caller to call the CNF(8)-U( ) ETU to place a
multiparty conference call. Each CNF(8)-U( ) ETU supports one 8-party conference or two 4-party
conferences regulated by a switch setting. Two CNF(8)-U( ) ETUs may be installed. DSP based
amplification provides a higher quality conference call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
SETUP PROCEDURES
To set the Supervisor Password:
KKKK LL
1.
Call the Conference Bridge extension number, and wait for the voice prompt.
2.
Dial the default Supervisor Password (
3.
Follow the voice prompt, and enter the setting verification mode (
mode.
4.
Follow the voice prompt to change Supervisor Password (4~8 digits).
), then dial
.
). Then enter system set
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To set the Conference 1 and/or the Conference 2 Password:
KKKK
L
1.
Call the Conference Bridge extension number, and wait for the voice prompt.
2.
Dial the default Supervisor Password (
3.
Skip the steps until Conference Setup mode is available for conference 1 or conference 2.
4.
Follow the voice prompt, and set the conference 1 or the conference 2 password (4~8 digits).
), then dial
.
To record new Customized Greeting:
KKKK
L
1.
Call the Conference Bridge extension number, and wait for the voice prompt.
2.
Dial the default Supervisor Password (
3.
Skip options until the Customized Greeting option is selected.
4.
Follow the voice prompt and record new a Customized Greeting.
), then dial
.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To start a Conference Call at an internal extension:
1.
Call the Conference Bridge extension number.
2.
When you hear the voice prompt, enter the Conference Bridge 1 or 2 password, and dial
3.
Start the conference.
L
.
To start a conference call using outside DID:
L
1.
Call DID number for the Conference Bridge.
2.
When the voice prompt is heard, enter the Conference Bridge 1 or 2 password, and dial
3.
Start the conference.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 12
Multiline Conference Bridge
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To start a conference call using outside DIT:
L
1.
Call a trunk that is set as DIT to Conference Bridge.
2.
When the voice prompt is heard, enter the Conference Bridge 1 or 2 password, and dial
3.
Start the conference.
.
To start a conference call on an incoming CO call using an Automated Attendant:
1.
Call a trunk that is set as an Automated Attendant.
2.
Select the option for an extension connected to the Conference Bridge.
3.
When the voice prompt is heard, enter the Conference Bridge 1 or 2 password, and dial
4.
Start the conference.
L
.
To start a conference call from an incoming CO call using an Attendant:
L
1.
Call the Attendant, and ask to be transferred to an extension connected to the Conference Bridge.
2.
When the voice prompt is heard, enter the Conference Bridge 1 or 2 password, and dial
3.
Start the conference.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The CNF(8)-U( ) ETU can be used with any version of software on the Electra Elite IPK system.
When CNF is set for two, four-party conferences, ports 1~4 can be set to the same Master Hunt
Group, and ports 5~8 can be set to a different Master Hunt Group using Memory Blocks 4-14
(Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection) and 4-15 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment). This allows two different Pilot Numbers for each conference.
- OR -
If only one Pilot number is needed, put all eight ports in one hunt group using Memory Block 4-15
(Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment). When the password is entered, the
conference selected is the conference you enter.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
The supervisor must perform the Setting Procedures before the conference Bridge can be used.
H
Up to 16 analog Voice Mail ports are available. The CNF(8)-U( ) ETU reduces this number by
eight.
H
Each CNF(8)-U( ) ETU reduces the number of stations, wireless stations, and CAR keys by eight.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
4-35
Station Number Assignment
4-10
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment
4-15
+BTT
Station Name Assignment
4-18
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BTI
,
+BS
,
Memory
Block
+BTT
,
+BTT
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 14
Multiline Conference Bridge
M-5
Multilingual LCD Indication
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multilingual LCD Indication provides the option for English, French, Japanese, or Spanish characters on
Multiline Terminals with an LCD. Language selection is made per station using System Programming.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 3000
With R3000 or higher, Multilingual LCD indication supports the following multilingual Clock/Calender
display:
English
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Japanese
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
French
DIM
LUN
MAR
MER
JEU
VEN
SAM
Spanish
DOM
LUN
MAR
MIE
JUE
VIE
SAB
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Multiline Terminals with LCD
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Multilingual Indication per station only applies for fixed LCD messages.
Programmable messages (station name or Customized Messages) are programmed per message.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
Language changes for softkeys do not take affect on the DTH/DTR or DTU/DTP terminal until the
power to the terminal is shut off and then restored.
H
The LCD of the Electra Elite IPK Terminal provides a volume bar indication, while adjusting the
following volume levels or controls:
J
J
J
J
J
Speaker Volume
Handset/Headset Volume
BGM Volume
Ring Volume/Off Hook Ring Volume
LCD Contrast
Only English displays are provided (SPEAKER, HANDSET, RING, LCD).
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-20
Clock/Calendar Display
C-27
Customized Message
I-3
Incoming Trunk Name or Number Display
S-4
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BTM
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Multilingual LCD Indication Selection
4-28
+BTT
Station Name Assignment
4-18
+BI
Customized Message 1~10 Assignment
1-2-09 ~ 18
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 16
Multilingual LCD Indication
Multiple Trunk Groups
M-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A maximum of 32 Trunk groups may be assigned. Each group can have a separate Trunk Group Access
Code. Assigning Trunk groups provides access to different outside trunks. With Tenant Service,
different tenants can be programmed to access only their Trunk group.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not Applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature at any station:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Group Access Code.
3.
Wait for outside dial tone.
4.
Dial the desired telephone number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Dial Access is provided only on Multifunction registered systems.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
At default, CO/PBX lines 01~ 08 are assigned in Trunk Group 1, all Tie lines are assigned in Trunk
group 2, and no additional CO/PBX lines or DID lines are assigned to a Trunk group.
H
The system provides for 32 Trunk groups.
H
Trunks can be assigned to any or all Tenant groups.
H
Various features such as Code Restriction (outgoing), LCR, and Route Advance Block are based
on Trunk groups.
H
Trunk groups can be assigned to a Flexible Line key as a Pooled Line (outgoing).
H
Default Trunk Access Codes include the following:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Dial 9
Trunk Group 1
Dial 8
Trunk Group 2
Dial 70
Trunk Group 3
Dial 71
Trunk Group 4
Dial 72
Trunk Group 5
Dial 73
Trunk Group 6
Dial 74
Trunk Group 7
Dial 75
Trunk Group 8
Restrictions:
H
A trunk can be assigned to only one Trunk group.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BCT
+BA
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
101 ~ 132
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 18
Multiple Trunk Groups
Music on Hold
M-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A locally provided external music source or an internal music source can be used to supply music to
parties on hold, to assure them that they are still connected to the system.
System Software allows CO ports to provide multiple music sources to different COs in the system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
External source connected to the RCA jack on the basic B64-U( ) KSU.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Music On Hold (MOH) is provided for all outside and internal calls on hold.
H
Music On Hold can be disabled when required.
H
H
Use Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection) to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for
the outside party when a trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Dterm, or hook flash
from a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold keys at a PSII station.
Music On Hold is provided using the built-in tone melodies or an external source connected to the
RCA jack on the basic B64-U( ) KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Internal Source:
Program one of two melodies (American Folk Song melody, or Christmas Song melody) as an
internal source. A volume control for the built-in MOH source can also be programmed.
H
External Source:
J
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
Music source (radio, tape player, or CD) must be provided locally.
Source output levels should be less than 0.6 RMS signal level with 600
Ω impedance.
Optional interface ETUs are not required for this feature.
A CO line that is assigned as a CO external music on hold source cannot be seized, even when the
CO trunk is assigned on a line key of a Multiline terminal.
A CO line that is assigned to a CO external music of hold source is skipped without being seized,
even when that CO is assigned to a trunk group.
When Memory Block 3-11 (CO External Source Selection) contradicts Memory Block 3-12
(Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment) MOH works according to the Memory Block 1-8-31 (Hold Tone
Source Assignment) setting.
Use Memory Block 3-11 (CO External Source Selection) to specify whether the MOH source is
from the CO (default) or an EXT SOURCE. Unused circuits on a COI/COID ETU can be assigned
as MOH inputs.
Use Memory Block 3-12, (Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment) to assign the external music source to
each trunk.
Example:
Trunks 09 and 10 are assigned as external sources. Trunk 09 is programmed as the external
source for Trunks 01~05 when a call is placed on hold. Trunk 10 is programmed as the external
source for Trunks 06~08 when a call is placed on hold.
H
The Internal Music on Hold source for CPUI( )-U20 and CPUI( )-U10 ETUs Lot 3XXX or higher
provides the following options in Memory Block 1-8-09 (Music on Hold Pattern Selection):
J
J
LK1 (Option A):
Hold Tone (default)
LK2 (Option B)
American Folk Song Medley
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 20
Music on Hold
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-8
Answer Hold
A-15
Attendant Transfer
A-22
Automatic Hold
H-5
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
S-21
Station Transfer
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AU
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
Hold Tone section
1-4-17
+BCS
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-09
+BCS
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-31
+BCS
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
1-8-32
+BCT
CO External Source Selection
3-11
+BCT
CO External Hold Memory Selection
3-12
+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
M - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
M - 22
Music on Hold
NEC Elite PC Assistant
N-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The NEC Elite PC Assistant provides a desktop application to allow basic telephone functionality through
a software interface. This feature uses the CT(U)-R/CT(A)-R Adapter as the TAPI device for the
application to control the user telephone. Using this application, the user can easily manage call
handling tasks without switching attention between the telephone and the PC. Advanced features such
as recording ability, E-mail integration, and personal greeting available with the Professional version
provide additional assistance to meet the industry need for this product. The NEC Elite PC Assistant
has three main components:
H
NEC Elite PC Assistance software
This application runs on a PC and provides the PC-based GUI (Graphical User Interface) and
features.
H
CT(U)-R/CT(A)-R Adapter
This adapter is installed on the Multiline Terminal and interfaces the Electra Elite IPK with the USB
(Universal Serial Bus) port or an available Serial port on the PC.
H
Headset (Optional)
A headset can be plugged into the Multiline Terminal and used when making or receiving calls with
the NEC Elite PC Assistant.
The NEC Elite PC Assistant runs on a PC and communicates with the Electra Elite IPK through a normal
digital station port using the CT(U)-R/CT(A)-R Adapter attached to the telephone. When a call comes
into this station it is displayed on the PC and provides several features that allow the user to handle the
call quickly. The NEC Elite PC Assistant can be minimized to run in the background and pop to the front
when call activity occurs. Calls can be handled with the keyboard or the mouse. The user speaks to a
caller through the handset, headset, or speakerphone of the Multiline Terminal the application is running
on.
The following sections define the basic operation and look and feel of the NEC Elite PC Assistant.
Personal Directory
Because the NEC Elite PC Assistant can integrate with Outlook, each separate user can establish a
personal directory.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Call Log
The Call Log is similar to that of the PC Console applications. An inbound or outbound indicator is in the
left most column followed by a telephone number dialed or received. When there is a name in the CLID
information on an inbound call, it is included in that same column. On outbound calls, when a directory
entry is selected, that name is displayed.
Busy Line Key Indicators
The busy line indicators are located below the number in each field and appear when the telephone is
taken off hook to originate or answer a call. A green indicator means the line is active. When the call is
placed on hold, the indicator turns yellow. When an inbound call is ringing, the indicator is red. When
the call is terminated, there is no line status indicator.
UP to eight line key indicators can be displayed at the same time. When the mouse is placed on top of a
line indicator, the display for that line is shown. This could help when multiple calls are on hold and the
user needs to confirm which line is linked to a specific caller.
Supported KTS Features
The following KTS features have corresponding icons that can be placed on the Control Bar. At a
minimum, features visible by default are indicated.
H
Automatic Redial
H
Background Music
H
Barge-In
H
Call Pickup Direct
H
Call Pickup Group
H
Conference (default)
H
DND
H
Forward (default)
H
Night Call Pickup
H
Page (default)
H
Park (default)
H
Transfer (default)
H
UnPark (default)
H
Voice Over Split
___________________________________________________________________________________
N-2
NEC Elite PC Assistant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
In addition to these feature keys, a Dial/Hang UP icon (telephone) controls the hook state and a Hold key
that are always on the Control Bar. When too many keys are selected for display on the Control Bar, the
UI expands and a second row of icons is displayed under the top row.
Certain KTS features like Transfer, Conference, or Park, require additional information and control.
When one of these features is initiated by pressing the icon while a call is active, a separate control box
with the necessary commands or keys to join the callers or complete the call park operation is displayed.
Recording
A Record key (Professional Version) is a default key on the application. When this Record key is
pressed, the icon transitions to a Stop Record key. Recording continues until the call has ended or the
Stop Record key is pressed. When a call is recorded, a tape icon is displayed in the call log next to the
call record. When a Hold key is pressed during a recorded conversation, the white (empty) space is not
recorded.
Outlook Integration
The NEC Elite PC Assistant (Professional Version) can integrate with Microsoft Outlook. When this
option is enabled, and an inbound call is received with an associated number that matches an entry in
the Outlook database, the Outlook window for that user is automatically displayed.
An option is also provided in preferences to allow a contact window to popup when a call is received
from outside the KTS. This allows a user to ignore Outlook popup on internal calls.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Supported Electra Elite/IPK Firmware:
Electra Elite IPK: R1000 or higher
Terminal Type:
Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
Standard Package
H
CT(U)-R or CT(A)-R Unit for DTH/DTR Multiline Terminals
H
AC-2/3 Unit for the CT(U)-R or CT(A)-R Unit
Professional Package
H
CT(U)-R Unit for DTH/DTR Multiline Terminals
H
AC-2/3 Unit for the CT(U)-R Unit
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
PC Requirements for NEC Elite PC Assistant
Software Requirements
H
Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, Windows ME, or Windows XP Professional
Hardware Requirements
H
Pentium class machine with 500MHz minimum speed
H
256 MB RAM (minimum)
H
10 MB available disk space (38 MB additional when .NET framework is not already installed)
H
CD-ROM Drive
H
Mouse
H
Available USB/Serial Port
H
MAPI compliant e-mail application (required for e-mail features of the NEC Elite PC Assistant)
H
Optional PC speakers and microphone
H
Printer (required for NEC Elite PC Assistant printing features)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the online help for configuration information.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
The NEC Elite PC Assistant application resides on each individual PC; therefore, each PC must be
configured separately.
When line keys on the Multiline Terminal do not match those of NEC Elite PC Assistant, the line
keys can be changed in the NEC Elite PC Assistant by looking in File/Telephony/Telephony
Configuration/Button Config.
A check of the button mapping on the Multiline Terminal can be performed by looking in File/
Telephony/Check Button Mapping. Anytime Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection for Telephone
Mode) has been changed for the NEC Elite PC Assistant Multiline Terminal, this check must be
performed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
N-4
NEC Elite PC Assistant
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
Advanced features (recording ability, e-mail integration, and personal greeting) are available only
in the Professional Package.
For Call Park to work, Memory Block 1-8-51 (Call Park Selection) should be set to LK1 to support
10 park locations (R4000 or higher)
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
Only eight line key indicators can be displayed at one time with the NEC Elite PC Assistant
application.
The NEC Elite PC Assistant and ACD using the MIFA-U( ) ETU are not supported simultaneously
from the same Multiline Terminal.
When installing the TAPI driver on the NEC Elite PC Assistant, always select 32/32D telephones
no matter what model is actually used.
For Auto Headset Seize to work, a Feature Access Key must be programmed in Memory Block
4-12 (Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode) on the NEC Elite PC Assistant telephone, and the
application must be set to find that key in File/Telephony/Telephony Configuration/Operation
Mode.
The CT(U)-R Unit is required when using the voice functions associated with the Professional
Package. The CT(A)-R Unit does not support voice functions.
H
In a CCIS network, multiple extension lengths are not supported by this application.
H
When 5, 6, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
H
Currently, the DTH-16LD terminal is not supported when using the Elite PC Assistant to program
Speed Dial or DSS/BLF keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
+BA
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46 ~48
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BS
,
Station Number Assignment
4-10
+BTM
,
Line Key selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-3
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
N-6
NEC Elite PC Assistant
N-2
Nesting Dial
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multiline Terminal users may store up to four System or Station Speed Dial numbers in one Station
Speed Dial buffer. The user can press the Redial key and dial a single Station Speed Dial buffer number
to consecutively dial all four buffers.
System software permits input stored characters to be entered on the dial pad, but does not allow the
character code table to be used.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program Nesting Dial for a Speed Dial buffer:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (
~
).
.
KKK III
.
KK II
~
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum 4 digits).
5.
Press
6.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be nested (
~
).
F
KKK III
.
KK II
~
or
or
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 up to three times if required.
8.
Press
H
, and enter name using the Character Code Table.
- OR -
9.
Use the dial pad to enter the name.
10.
Refer to Speed Dial Stored Characters.
Press
A
.
To program Nesting Dial for the Feature Access key:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access key.
4.
Dial (Function) code
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
6.
Press
7.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be nested (
8.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 up to three times when required.
9.
Press
F
H
.
.
K
.
.
KK II
~
).
, and enter name using the Character Code Table.
- OR -
10.
Use the dial pad to enter the name.
11.
Refer to S-12 Speed Dial Stored Characters on page S-47.
Press
A
.
To program Nesting Dial for a One-Touch key:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the One-Touch key.
4.
Dial (Function) code
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
.
.
K
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
N-8
Nesting Dial
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
F
Press
7.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be nested (
8.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 up to three times when required.
9.
Press
A
.
KK II
6.
~
).
.
Using a Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
4.
Use Handsfree Answerback or lift the handset, and talk with the called party.
B
.
KK II
~
) with nested buffer(s).
- OR -
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
5.
Press the desired Feature Access key or One-Touch key.
6.
Use Handsfree Answerback or lift the handset, and talk with the called party.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
.
KK II
1.
Press
2.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
3.
Use Handsfree Answerback or lift the handset, and talk with the called party.
~
) with nested buffer(s).
- OR -
Press the desired Feature Access key or One-Touch key.
4.
Use Handsfree Answerback or lift the handset, and talk with the called party.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Using a Single Line Telephone:
Multifunction (Dial Access) Only:
GGKK HI
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for dial tone.
2.
Dial Speed Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
4.
Talk with called party.
(default).
~
) with nested buffer(s).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Each nested buffer reduces the number of digits allowed in a Speed Dial buffer by three.
H
System and Station Speed Dial buffers can be nested in a Station Speed Dial buffer.
H
Station Speed Dial buffers cannot be nested in a System Speed Dial buffer.
H
Up to four System Speed Dial buffers can be nested in one System or Station Speed Dial buffer.
H
A Speed Dial buffer with nested number(s) cannot be nested in another Speed Dial buffer.
H
Nesting Dial is allowed under Feature Access keys and One-Touch keys.
H
Single Line Telephone users cannot program Nesting Dial in Station Speed Dial buffers.
Restrictions:
H
A maximum of 24 digits can be programmed in a Speed Dial buffer.
H
A maximum of 22 digits can be programmed in a Feature Access key.
H
A maximum of 16 digits can be programmed in a One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
N - 10
Nesting Dial
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters
S-13
Speed Dial – System
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
N - 12
Nesting Dial
N-3
Night Call Pickup
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Night Call Pickup functions when the system is in Night Mode and an incoming call rings. When the
Night Chime is ringing, a station user can dial the Night Call Pickup Access Code or press a Feature
Access key programmed for Night Call Pickup to answer incoming calls.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU for common audible tone and control relay
External common audible tone equipment
OPERATING PROCEDURES
For a Night Mode incoming outside call (Night Chime Ringing):
FI
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Night Call Pickup Access Code
- OR -
(default).
Press the Feature Access key programmed for Night Call Pickup.
3.
Connection to incoming call is completed.
Default Access Codes can be changed in System Programming during installation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The Night Call Pickup Access Code is valid when any tenant is in Night Mode and the Night Chime
Feature is Programmed.
When several incoming calls are ringing in at the same time, the lowest numbered line is answered
first.
Restrictions:
H
H
Tie/DID incoming calls cannot be answered using Night Call Pickup unless Tie/DID Delay Ringing
is assigned in System Programming and Delay Ringing has started.
DIT/ANA calls cannot be answered using Night Call Pickup.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
N-4
Night Chime
N-5
Night Transfer
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BN
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
2-08
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
058
___________________________________________________________________________________
N - 14
Night Call Pickup
Night Chime
N-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Night Chime provides a common audible tone with one relay contact for control when incoming CO/PBX
calls are received in Night Mode. The relay contact closures may also be used for external bells or
chimes. The Night Chime feature is used after working hours to alert night personnel for incoming
outside calls.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU for common audible tone and control relay
External common audible tone equipment
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
An ECR-U( ) ETU is required for common audible tone and control relays. Ten relays are provided
with this ETU. One relay is provided for Night Chime control.
H
The Night Chime control relay is activated based on Night Mode of each Tenant group.
H
Ringing interval for Night Chime is fixed (1 sec. ON/1 sec. OFF).
H
The ECR-U( ) ETU provides a common audible tone for Night Chime ringing and External Tone
ringing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The Night Chime equipment must be provided locally.
H
From a station in the same Tenant group, the Call Pickup Tenant Access Code can be used.
H
When a trunk is not assigned to a Tenant group, the Night Chime feature does not work.
Restrictions:
H
Tie/DID lines, DIT/ANA calls, and Automated Attendant do not activate the Night Chime relay.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
N-3
Night Call Pickup
N-5
Night Transfer
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BP
External Ring Relay Cycle Selection
1-7-07
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
2-08
+BN
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
N - 16
Night Chime
N-5
Night Transfer
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Positions (with or without Attendant Add-On Consoles) can place the system in or out of Night
Mode. This changes the ring assignment of CO/PBX lines, activates Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
Assignments, Night Call Pickup, Night Chime, Code Restriction Class Assignments, and Automated
Attendant messages. This feature can operate system-wide or per tenant.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Attendant Positions assigned this ability
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Night Transfer system-wide:
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
.
.
HK
.
- OR -
Press the Night Transfer key on the Attendant Add-On Console during Day Mode.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Night Transfer system-wide:
A
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Press
A
.
HK
1.
.
.
- OR -
Press the Night Transfer (NT) key on the Attendant Add-On Console during Night Mode.
To set per tenant:
A
HEKK DG
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the Tenant number (
4.
Press
A
.
.
.
~
).
To cancel per tenant:
A
.
HEKK DG
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the tenant number (
4.
Press
A
.
.
~
).
To set weekend per tenant:
A
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the Tenant number (
4.
Press
A
.
HKKK DG
1.
.
.
~
).
___________________________________________________________________________________
N - 18
Night Transfer
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel weekend per tenant:
A
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
3.
Dial the tenant number (
4.
Press
A
.
HKKK DG
1.
.
.
~
).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The following features are affected when switching to the Night Mode:
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
Flexible Ringing Assignment
ANA Assignment
Code Restriction Class Assignment
Automated Attendant
Night Chime
Night Call Pickup
Feature Access keys or One-Touch keys can be assigned to set/cancel Night Transfer
(system-wide or per tenant).
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-19
Feature Name
Class of Service
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
N - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-07
+AC
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-08
+BM
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time
Slot
1-1-27
+BM
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week
Selection
1-1-32
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1, 1-2,
___________________________________________________________________________________
N - 20
Night Transfer
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Off-Hook Ringing alerts a Multiline Terminal user that an incoming outside call is ringing to that station
during another call. Off-Hook Ringing is provided through the built-in speaker of the Multiline Terminal
at a lower volume than On-Hook Ringing.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set off-hook ringing volume:
1.
Go off-hook with the handset.
2.
Dial the Access Code (default:
3.
Dial
4.
Press press
volume.
5.
Go on-hook.
A UV
from the dial pad.
FK
).
( = decrease) or ( = increase) to decrease/increase off-hook ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
O-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Off-Hook Ringing applies only to lines assigned to ring.
H
At system default, Off-Hook Ringing tone volume is approximately 10 dB lower than On-Hook
Ringing tone volume.
H
The Off-Hook Ringing feature is effective when a headset is used.
H
Off-Hook Ringing follows the Distinctive Ringing Pattern selection but not Synchronous Ringing.
H
Off-Hook Ringing is provided for calls to a Secondary Incoming Extension when the station user is
busy on an internal or outside call.
Restrictions:
H
Off-Hook Ringing is not provided when the Multiline Terminal speaker is activated or when the
terminal is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-15
Feature Name
Do Not Disturb (DND)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BA
+BTS
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
4-51
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
049
___________________________________________________________________________________
O-2
Off-Hook Ringing
Off-Premise Extension
O-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Off-Premise Extension allows a Single Line Telephone, located remotely from the main installation site,
to access the system features with the same abilities as an on-premise Single Line Telephone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Single Line Telephones
Required components:
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU to support this feature
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal call handling procedures apply.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
Each OPX(2)-U( ) ETU provides two circuits.
The maximum loop resistance between an OPX(2)-U( ) ETU and an Off-Premise Extension Single
Line Telephone is 1600 ohms (including Single Line Telephone set resistance).
The OPX(2)-U( ) ETU has a built-in ringer (RSG). This ETU supports Synchronous Ringing and
detects Dial Pulse/DTMF tones.
Restrictions:
H
The OPX(2)-U( ) ETU does not support an interface to a Voice Mail unit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
O-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
O-4
Off-Premise Extension
One-Touch Feature Access
O-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
One-Touch Feature Access is provided with Multiline Terminals to allow a Multiline Terminal user to
press a single, flexible Feature Access key or One-Touch key to access many system features or
System/Station Speed Dial without going off-hook first.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to Related Features for the Operating Procedures.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
You can press a single key to call a station, access a Speed Dial buffer, or activate a feature.
When the MIC key is programmed on a One-Touch Feature Access Key, set/cancel is operated by
toggle.
Trunk access can be programmed on a Feature Access or One-Touch key.
When programming Feature Access or One-Touch keys, the Conference (CNF) key can be used
to backspace and erase an entry.
H
Each One-Touch key can store up to 16 digits.
H
Nesting Dial is allowed under One-Touch keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
O-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When programming Feature Access or One-Touch keys, press the Answer key, then press: Recall,
Feature, Conf, Redial, Speaker, Answer, Transfer, or Hold to enter and store the applicable feature
keys.
Restrictions:
H
Feature Access keys and One-Touch keys are similar in purpose and ability. Up to 16 feature
access keys are available depending on system programming and available Line keys. One-Touch
key availability is controlled by the type of Multiline Terminal.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
N-2
Nesting Dial
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
___________________________________________________________________________________
O-6
One-Touch Feature Access
PC Programming
P-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The MIFM-U( ) ETU and System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allow the system to be
programmed from a personal computer (PC). System Data is transferred to/from a diskette for backup of
system data. SAT PC programming software also allows the user to print station designation strips to
shorten installation time. End users can use end-user SAT PC programming software to program
several features for their Multiline Terminals such as: Line Key Assignment, Telephone Names, Zone
Paging Groups, or various programmed times.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 2000:
With R2000 or higher, System Administration Terminal (SAT) software allows user programmable
settings (e.g., DND, Call Forward) to be assigned and saved as part of the site database.
The following can be assigned and saved:
Call Forward/DND(Station)
H
DND Set
H
Call Forward – All Call Set
H
Call Forward – No Answer Set
H
Call Forward – Busy Set
H
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Set
H
Call Forward – No Answer Split Set
H
Call Forward – Busy Split Set
H
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split Set
H
Call Forward – All Split Set
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Miscellaneous (System Wide)
H
Day/Night Mode (System and Tenant)
Miscellaneous (Station Base)
H
Station Lockout Password
H
Save Dial
H
Station Lockout
H
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
H
Answer Preset
H
Background Music
H
MIC Settings
H
Callback Messages (Read Only)
H
Timed Alarm SLT
H
Customized Message Display
Miscellaneous (Trunk Base)
H
Automated Attendant/DISA Mode
H
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode
H
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Outgoing Trunk
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, PC Programming (SAT) can be used with the New MIFM-U20 ETU and the
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU. When using a remote connection through the modem, the MOD-U10 Unit must be
installed on the MIFM-U20. When programming using Ethernet, the ETH-U10 Unit and the POW-U10
Unit must be installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU. Modem and Ethernet ports are included with the
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
___________________________________________________________________________________
P-2
PC Programming
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Required Components:
Pentium PC with Windows 95 or higher to run SAT PC programming
MIFM-U10 ETU with KMM( )U PAL chip installed and Modem Kit Unit
- OR MIFM-U20 ETU with MOD-U10 Unit, ETH-U10 Unit, and POW-U10 Unit installed
- OR SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
A comparison between the MIFM-U10 ETU, the MIFM-U20 ETU and the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is provided
by the following table.
Feature
Hardware Components
MIFM-U10 ETU
MIFM-U10 ETU
KMM( )U PAL chip
Modem Kit Unit
SAT Serial Programming
MIFM-U20 with KMM-U20
upgrade chip and the MODU10, POW-U10, and ETHU10 Units.
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU with Soft
Modem Activation Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Optional)
Yes (Optional)
Yes (Standard)
38.4K
38.4K
38.4K
Yes (Optional) with Elite
LAN PC Programming
Device)
Yes (Optional) for MIFMU20 using ETH-U10 and
POW-U10 Units)
Yes
SAT Modem Programming
Maximum Modem Speed
SAT Ethernet (Intra/
Internet) Programming
MIFM-U20 ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual and the Electra Elite IPK and Electra Elite System
Administration Terminals Technician’s Guide for programming instructions.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The MIFM-U( ) ETU provides the RS-232C connector for connection of a PC or a modem.
H
PC Requirements:
J
J
J
Pentium Processor
Microsoft Windows 95, 98, ME, XP, 2000 or NT 4.0 (or higher) operating system
At least 15 MB of free hard disk space
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
J
J
H
Unused PC serial communication port (COM Port)
MNP Class 5 compatible modem when remote programming is required
Network Interface Card (NIC) when programming via LAN/WAN is required
When the Elite LAN PC programming device is used, the system can be programmed via the LAN
or WAN. Version V4.00 LCR PC software is required.
H
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is programmed as an MIFM-U( ) ETU.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
R-4
Feature Name
Remote Programming
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK and Electra Elite System Administration Terminals (SAT) Technician’s
Guide for more details.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
7-3-02
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
+CSS
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment
1-8-36
+CSS
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
+CSS
Modem Port for Remote Programming
Assignment
1-8-38
+CSN
Site Name Assignment
1-8-18
+CSP
PC Programming Password Assignment
1-8-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
P-4
PC Programming
Pooled Line (Outgoing)
P-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Pooled Line (Outgoing) allows Multiline Terminal users to seize an outside line on one Pooled line key.
One Pooled line key can accommodate a Trunk group or Route Advance Block.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate an outside call:
1.
Press the Pooled line key, and wait for outside line dial tone.
2.
Dial the desired telephone number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
A maximum of 48 pooled groups are allowed per system. Each pooled group corresponds to a
Trunk Group number (1~32) or a Route Advance Block number (1~32).
Pooled Line LED indicates the status of the pooled group as follows:
On:
All trunks in the pooled group are in use.
Off:
Some or all trunks in the pooled group are idle.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When an idle Pooled line key is pressed, an idle trunk belonging to that pooled group is
automatically selected. When the Electra Elite IPK is designated as KF registration, this feature is
not available.
H
A user on a Pooled Line can access Call Park - System, Call Transfer, and Conference.
H
Trunk Queuing can be set when the Pooled line key is busy (red LED).
H
When a trunk is selected from Pooled line key, it appears on a CO line key or on a Call Appearance
(CAP) key on the Multiline Terminal.
Restrictions:
H
A Pooled Line (Outgoing) cannot receive incoming calls.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
P-6
Pooled Line (Outgoing)
Power Failure Transfer
P-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Power Failure Transfer ensures that a customer has access to the Central Office network during a power
outage. The CO/PBX tip and ring are automatically transferred to the tip and ring of a preselected Single
Line Telephone. The Single Line Telephone can function in the system during normal operation or be
used during a power failure. Each B64-U( ) KSU provides three circuits for this feature. When power
returns, any ongoing conversation is disconnected.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Single Line Telephones
Required Components:
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
A CO/PBX line is automatically switched to a locally provided Single Line Telephone when total system
power is lost, and system battery backup expires.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The Single Line Telephones that are installed must provide dialing signals accepted by the outside
exchange (Dial Pulse or Dual-Tone Multifrequency).
H
Only Single Line Telephones crossconnected at the MDF can be used for this feature.
H
Single Line Telephones and outside lines connected during power failure are fixed one-to-one.
H
Single Line Telephones must be equipped with a ground button for use with Ground-Start Trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
System features cannot be activated from Single Line Telephones when Power Failure Transfer is
in operation.
H
When power is restored to the system, Power Failure Transfer is canceled. Calls in progress on
Power Failure Transfer lines are disconnected.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
P-8
Power Failure Transfer
P-4
Preset Dialing
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Preset Dialing enables a Multiline Terminal user to originate an outgoing call by predialing digits on the
keypad. After dialing the number, the user can go off-hook, press the Speaker key, or press a line key to
make the call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal:
W
1.
Dial the telephone number using the keypad.
2.
Go off-hook, or press
E
, or press a CO
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Confirmation tone is not heard while dialing.
H
When a digit is not dialed within 10 seconds, this feature is automatically canceled.
H
Pauses cannot be entered while dialing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
A maximum of 24 digits can be displayed.
H
A call originating using this feature is canceled when the Redial key, Hold key, Transfer key, or
Recall key is pressed.
H
The LCR feature is in effect when using Preset Dialing unless directly accessing a CO line.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
,
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+AI
,
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
5-5
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 10
Preset Dialing
Prime Line Assignment
P-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature DESCRIPTION
Prime Line Assignment allows a station user to go off-hook and originate an outside call from the trunk
assigned as the Prime Line without pressing the line key. This feature allows assignment of a trunk,
Trunk group, or Route Advance Block.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate a call:
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the call.
E
. Prime Line (outside line) is seized.
To access an internal dial tone for Feature Access or an internal call at a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press
3.
Dial Access Code
A
.
E
FJ
. Prime Line (outside line) is seized.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Dial the desired Feature Access Code or station number.
- OR -
Press
A
and
E
.
To access internal dial tone for Feature Access or an internal dial tone at a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Press the hookswitch.
3.
Dial the desired Feature Access Code or station number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Ringing Line Preference takes priority over Prime Line when both features are assigned.
H
Internal Dial Tone Access Codes can be stored on a Feature Access or One-Touch key.
H
An internal line can be seized by pressing the ICM key (when assigned) before going off-hook.
H
Prime Line can be assigned to a Single Line Telephone.
H
H
When a Single Line Telephone user provides a hookflash, the outside line is put on hold and
internal dial tone is heard. To return to the outside line, provide another hookflash.
The Service Conditions for Multiline Terminals when the Feature key and Access Code 6 are
used to access intercom dial tone include:
J
J
J
H
The seized outside line is disconnected and internal dial tone is provided.
During an internal call or when receiving call waiting tone, busy tone, or reorder tone, press
the Feature key and dial 6 again to provide new internal dial tone.
When an incoming internal or ring transfer call is being received while off-hook, and an
outside dial tone is received, press the Feature key and dial 6 to answer the call.
Prime Line is assigned per station.
Restrictions:
H
When Prime Line is busy or on Hold, a busy tone is received when user goes off-hook. Another
line must be seized manually.
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 12
Prime Line Assignment
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
4-23
+BA
+BTT
,
,
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
101~132,
176~199,
201~232,
401~416
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 14
Prime Line Assignment
Privacy on All Calls
P-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The system provides complete Privacy on All Calls. A station user cannot enter another conversation
unless allowed using Barge-In, Add-On Conference, or Privacy Release.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Only the person talking may allow a third or fourth party to enter the conversation using Add-On
Conference or Privacy Release, unless the Barge-In feature is allowed at designated stations.
All stations have privacy at default.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-3
Add-On Conference
B-3
Barge-In
C-19
Class of Service
P-7
Privacy Release
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTS
System Data Name
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Memory
Block
1-8-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-4, 1-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 16
Privacy on All Calls
Privacy Release
P-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Privacy Release allows the multiline terminal user to release the privacy on an outside line by pressing a
privacy release key programmed on the station. Another user can then press the same CO/PBX or CAP
key to join the conversation in progress.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program a Feature Access Key for Privacy Release from a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access Key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial
6.
Press
.
B
AK
A
.
.
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a One-Touch Key for Privacy Release from a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
3.
Press the One-Touch Key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial
6.
Press
.
B
AK
A
.
.
.
To activate Privacy Release from a Multiline Terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
Press the Privacy Release key.
To enter a Conversation using the Privacy Release from a Multiline Terminal:
E
.
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Press the CO/PBX Line key or CAP key that released privacy.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
Privacy Release can be activated or deactivated while a CO/PBX call is in progress.
The red Conf LED flashes during Privacy Release. After Privacy Release is canceled or all
allowed parties have joined, the LED is off.
The Conf key LED indication for Privacy Release is the same as the indication for a conference
call.
When Privacy Release is activated, the Conf key LED winks on all Multiline Terminals assigned to
the same Tenant as the CO line with Privacy Release, even when the CO line is assigned to
multiple Tenants.
D
When
is pressed from the same station that activated Privacy Release, the Privacy
Release feature is canceled.
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 18
Privacy Release
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
Holding an internal call has priority over Privacy Release.
When a CO assigned as a private line is Privacy Released, the Conf key at the shared private line
flashes.
Restrictions:
H
H
Privacy Release is only available on an Outside line.
Only two stations can be added per CO/PBX call after Privacy Release. After two parties have
joined the conversation, the Conf key LED at all stations that did not enter is turned off. A third
station that tries to enter receives a busy signal.
H
When the originating caller abandons the call, the user cannot enter the call again.
H
Privacy Release cannot be activated again until both added stations release the CO/PBX line.
H
A maximum of 16 Privacy Release calls are available.
H
Voice Over is prohibited to a station that has activated Privacy Release.
H
When a station is receiving Voice Over, activating Privacy Release is ignored and Voice Over
continues.
H
Privacy Release and Live Record are not allowed at the same time.
H
Privacy Release cannot be used on Single Line Telephones.
H
Specified CO/PBX seizure cannot be used to activate Privacy Release.
H
Privacy Release is not allowed when a conference is in progress.
H
To join a CO/PBX call using Privacy Release the originating CO/PBX key or CAP key must be
assigned to that station.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-3
Add-On Conference
B-3
Barge-In
C-19
Class of Service
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BN
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
2-01
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
One-Touch and Feature Access keys are programmable through SAT but not using system programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 20
Privacy Release
Private Lines
P-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Two outside lines can be programmed as private lines. Only a Multiline Terminal that is programmed for
the Private Lines feature can access these private lines. The Private Line LED status is not displayed on
any other Multiline Terminal.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The following combinations are possible:
J
J
J
H
H
Two stations with individual Private Lines
Two stations sharing one Private Line
One station with two Private Lines
Barge-In on a Private Line is possible only when the same Private Line is shared by two terminals.
Private Lines cannot be included in a conference and/or transferred except when two stations
share a Private Line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Private Lines cannot be accessed by a Trunk Access Code.
H
Tie lines can be assigned as Private Lines.
H
Private Lines cannot follow Call Forward assignments unless the destination telephones use the
same Private Lines.
H
Use Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] or 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit)
Assignment] Function Number 050 or 051 to assign access code for CO/PBX/Centrex Line
Seizure. Private Lines can be assigned to Single Line Telephones, and the user can access the
line by dialing the specified access code.
Restrictions:
H
Last Number Redial does not access a Private Line.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-3
Add-On Conference
B-3
Barge-In
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BA
+BCS
,
,
Memory
Block
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Private Line Assignment
1-1-29
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
050,051
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 22
Private Lines
Programming from Multiline Terminal
P-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
System Programming can be performed from designated Display Multiline Terminals in the first two
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU ports. Some programming changes become effective immediately. Other programming
changes become effective after applicable busy telephones and circuits become idle.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Display Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
ESI(8)-U( ), ESIB(8)-U( ), and ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for additional information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The first two Multiline Terminal ports are programming positions (default: Stations 100 and 101).
H
Both stations can go off-line at the same time to program the system.
Restrictions:
H
PC Programming and programming from a Multiline Terminal cannot be performed at the same
time.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 24
Programming from Multiline Terminal
Pushbutton Dial – DTMF or DP
P-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Pushbutton Dial – DTMF or DP is provided on all Single Line Telephones and outside lines. Tie Lines
are assigned per trunk to generate either Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) or Dial Pulse (DP) dialing
signals.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with a push button dial pad
Required Components:
TLI(2)-U( ) or DTI-U( ) ETU assigned as Tie Lines
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
P - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General
H
DTMF or DP programming is per Tie line trunk.
H
Single Line Telephones that are installed can be Push Button DTMF or DP (rotary dial).
H
Default assigns DTMF signaling to all trunks and Single Line Telephone ports.
H
DTMF tone can be sent from Multiline Terminals to Dial Pulse trunks.
H
Loop Start/Ground Start trunks are DTMF only.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
P - 26
Pushbutton Dial – DTMF or DP
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Q-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A station user transferring a call can transfer the call to the called party voice mail box after the
transferred call recalls, after an internal station number is dialed while performing a screened transfer, or
during intercom calls.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals allow either operation.
Single line telephones may perform the Quick Transfer only during screened transfer operations. They
may not perform Quick Transfer after recall.
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To Quick Transfer a call while talking with an outside or internal party:
G
1.
Press
2.
Enter a station number, and wait for a ring back tone.
3.
Dial the Quick Transfer Access Code (default:
user Voice Mail box.
4.
Hang up.
5.
The Voice Mail answers.
, and wait for an internal dial tone.
G
). The outside party is transferred to the station
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
Q-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To Quick Transfer a call during a recall:
HF
1.
Press the recalling line key.
2.
Press
3.
Hang up.
4.
Voice Mail answers.
A
and dial
.
To leave a message using Quick Transfer to voice mail during an intercom call:
1.
Make the intercom call.
2.
Dial the Quick Transfer Access Code (default:
3.
Leave a voice mail message.
4.
Hang up.
G
).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The Quick Transfer to Voice Mail feature is allowed when:
J
J
J
J
Listening to the ring back tone (RBT)
Listening to the call waiting tone (CWT)
In Handsfree Answerback Mode
In Voice Over Mode
H
This feature is allowed from a Single Line Telephone until the PBR times out (default: 10 sec).
H
When Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is accessed, the Voice Over feature is canceled.
H
While on an intercom (ICM) call, dial the Quick Transfer Access Code (default: 7) to automatically
transfer to that station Voice Mail box.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Q-2
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
The Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is not allowed when caller is:
J
J
J
J
J
H
Listening to the busy tone (BT)
Talking on an internal line
Talking on an outside line
Making a conference call
Setting Automatic Callback
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
H
When a call is transferred to a station that is call forwarded to Voice Mail, or the Quick transfer to
Voice Mail feature is used, the call must be released (blind transferred) before Voice Mail answers
the call. During the transfer, the transferring party hears ring back tone, and the external party
hears Music on Hold (MOH) or ringback tone until the transfer is completed. MOH or ring back
tone is determined by Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection). This condition
applies to the following software versions:
R1700
R2000
R2500
R3000
3500
R1.71
R2.01
R2.50
R3.00
R3.50
R2.02
R2.51
R3.01
R3.51
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
+BA
+AV
,
,
Memory
Block
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-24
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt
Number
1-8-26
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
007
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
Q-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Q-4
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Recall Key
R-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Recall Key either generates a hookflash to access features provided by the outside exchange or
abandons a call while retaining the CO/PBX line for another call. Each Multiline Terminal has a Recall
key. The function of this key is programmed.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature with an outside CO call in progress:
C
1.
Press
2.
Receive new CO dial tone; line is not released.
.
To use this feature with a PBX/Centrex call in progress:
C
1.
Press
.
2.
Receive PBX/Centrex second dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
The Recall key functions only on Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks.
A Drop key can be programmed on a Flexible Line key or One-Touch key to be used to abandon a
call and retain the same PBX/Centrex line.
While receiving busy, error tone, or an internal call, press the Recall key to provide a new internal
dial tone.
When you press the Recall key at an LCR station during a conversation with an outside party, and
a CO Trunk is assigned using Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection), the following occur:
J
J
J
J
H
A new Least Cost Routing dial tone is heard.
Station Message Detail Recording starts again.
Code Restriction starts again.
When you press the Recall key during a conversation with an outside party, a PBX Trunk is
assigned using Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection), and Least Cost Routing Recall is
assigned as Allow (LED On) using Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2] Page 4 LK1, the following occur:
J
J
J
J
H
The current call is dropped.
The current call is held by a PBX trunk.
A new PBX dial tone is heard.
Station Message Detail Recording starts again.
Code Restriction starts again.
When you press the Recall key during a conversation with an outside party, a PBX Trunk is
assigned using Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection), and Least Cost Routing Recall is
assigned as Deny (LED Off) using Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2] Page 4 LK1, the following occur:
J
J
J
J
The current call is dropped.
A new CO dial tone is heard.
Station Message Detail Recording starts again.
Code Restriction starts again.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R-2
Recall Key
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When you press the Recall key during a conversation with an outside party, a Centrex Trunk
Assume-9 is assigned using Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection), and Least Cost Routing
Recall is assigned as Allow (LED On) using Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station)
Feature Selection 2] Page 4 LK1, the following occur:
J
J
J
J
H
A new Centrex dial tone is heard.
Station Message Detail Recording starts again.
Code Restriction starts again.
When you press the Recall key during a conversation with an outside party, a Centrex Trunk
Assume-9 is assigned using Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection), and Least Cost Routing
Recall is assigned as Deny (LED Off) using Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station)
Feature Selection 2] Page 4 LK1, the following occur:
J
J
J
J
H
The current call is held by a Centrex trunk.
The current call is dropped.
A new CO dial tone is heard.
Station Message Detail Recording starts again.
Code Restriction starts again.
A hookflash can be programmed as any digit in a Speed Dial buffer.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-19
Class of Service
D-19
Drop Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BCM
,
Hookflash Time Selection
1-1-02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
1-3-02
Access Code (1, 2-, 3--Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BM
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTI
+BA
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
029
4-1
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R-4
Recall Key
Recall With Station Identification
R-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A transferred, held, or camped-on call that is not answered in a specified time, recalls. During the recall,
the Multiline Terminal display shows the station number that is recalling and the station that did not
answer.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any Multiline Terminal with LCD
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal with LCD:
1.
The Multiline Terminal user answers a CO/PBX incoming call.
2.
Press
3.
Go on-hook.
4.
After the timeout, when the call has not been answered, the recall tone is received and the
CO/PBX line key LED intermittently winks. The station number where the call was transferred is
indicated in the LCD.
5.
Press the intermittently winking line key, and go off-hook to answer the recall.
G
, and dial the desired station number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
I-Hold and Call Park indicates the station number that set these features.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-14
I-1
Feature Name
Call Park – System
I-Hold Indication
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non Exclusive
Hold)
1-1-03
+BM
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection
1-1-12
+BM
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
1-2-23
+BM
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-1-63
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
+BTM
Hold/Transfer Recall Display Selection
4-30
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
R-6
Recall With Station Identification
Redial Key
R-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Users can press the Redial key and dial the Speed Dial buffer number to access System and Station
Speed Dial. Users can also press the Redial key and to redial the last outside number dialed.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal:
Last Number Redial
Key Function:
1.
Press an idle CO/PBX/Tie line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial
B
J
B
J
.
.
Multifunction (Dial Access:)
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Speed Dial:
Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press an idle CO/PBX/Tie line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial Speed Dial buffer number (
B
.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
.
KK II
KK II
1.
Press
2.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
~
).
~
).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The last outside line number (24 digits maximum) that is dialed is automatically redialed.
The Redial key feature can be assigned to a Feature Access or One-Touch key.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
L-2
Last Number Redial
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-13
Speed Dial – System
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BTS
+BCM
,
System Data Name
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Hookflash Time Selection
Memory
Block
1-8-08
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-1
1-1-02
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R-8
Redial Key
Remote Programming
R-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Remote Programming is used to modify and save all system parameters from a remote location using a
modem. This is a variation of System Administration Terminal (SAT) PC Programming, and additional
software other than PC Programming is not required.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not Applicable
Required Components:
PC with SAT PC Programming and modem installed at the remote location.
MIFM-U10/20 or SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
Modem Kit Unit mounted on the MIFM-U10 ETU or an external modem connected to the MIFM-U10 ETU
through COM1. The MIFM-U20 requires installing an optional MOD-U10 Unit. The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
requires a modem to be installed.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to PC Programming Section of the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The MIFM-U10/20 and the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU can be installed in the AP slot or slot S1 or S2 of the
base B64-U( ) KSU.
Restrictions:
H
The MIFM-U10 ETU must be installed in slot S1 or S2 of the base B64-U( ) KSU when the
MIF-Modem Unit is installed.
H
The MIFM-U20 ETU must be installed in slot S1 or S2 of the base B64-U( ) KSU when the
MOD-U10 Unit is installed.
H
The SPEU(M)-U( ) ETU must be installed in slot S1 or S2 of the base B64-U( ) KSU when the
Modem is installed.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
P-1
Feature Name
PC Programming
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
Modem Number for Remote Programming
Assignment
1-8-38
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
+BS
+CSS
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 10
Remote Programming
Resident System Program
R-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
When power is supplied to the system, the hardware configuration is scanned and Resident System
Program default values are assigned. This enables immediate operation, even before the system is
programmed to accommodate the individual site requirements.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Default assignments for Multiline Terminals are as follows:
LK 01~ LK 08 corresponds to CO 01~ CO 08.
H
Default assignments for Attendant Add-On Consoles are as follows:
J
J
J
J
DSS1
Port 1
DSS 2 Port 2
DSS 3 Port 1
DSS 4 Port 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Default Attendant Add-On Console key assignments are:
DSS Keys
H
Assignment
01~48
Stations 100~147 (if installed)
49
Night Mode Change
50
Internal Paging Zone A
51
Internal Paging Zone B
52
Internal Paging Zone C
53
All Internal Zone Paging
54
Vacant
55
Message
56
External Speaker A
57
External Speaker B
58
External Speaker C
59
External Speaker All
60
Transfer
First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default. Disconnect the battery
on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU, turn off system power and wait for 30 seconds, then turn the system
power back on again to provide First Initialization.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 12
Resident System Program
Restriction (Outgoing)
R-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Restriction (Outgoing) prohibits station users from originating outside calls per station/per trunk. At
stations where Outgoing Restriction is assigned, a user can answer an incoming call, place and receive
an internal call, or pick up a held line on a specified trunk. The number of digits dialed on outgoing calls
may also be restricted per station.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Operating procedures depend on System Programming.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
The default program assigns no restrictions to any station.
When you press the Recall key or any key on the dial pad (while receiving dial tone), the CO/PBX
line is dropped and reorder tone is sent to the station user.
Restricted outside lines cannot be seized by using a Trunk Access Code.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-21
Feature Name
Code Restriction
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTT
,
System Data Name
,
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-19
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 14
Restriction (Outgoing)
Ring Tone Variation
R-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Ring Tone Variation provides three different tones that can be assigned per telephone or per CO/PBX.
With this feature, the user can verify priority CO/PBX calls or identify particular ringing stations in an
area.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This feature works closely with the Distinctive Ringing feature and pattern selections.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-14
Feature Name
Distinctive Ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO
Selection
1-1-28
+BCT
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
3-07
+BTM
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection
4-91
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 16
Ring Tone Variation
Ringing Line Preference
R-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Ringing Line Preference allows a station user to answer any outside ringing line by going off-hook
without having to press the Answer key or the Flexible Line key associated with the ringing line.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a station where Ringing Line Preference is assigned:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Talk with the calling party.
To set/cancel using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Press
2.
Press
A
F F
.
(
LED lights red).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Ringing Line Preference picks up lines that are programmed to ring at that station only.
H
For multiple calls in one of the following priority levels, the Multiline Terminal answers the line that
was ringing first:
1.
Voice Announcement or internal ringing call.
2.
Ring transfer calls to a station.
3.
Ringing call on an outside line key.
H
When the user sets Ringing Line Preference, the red Answer key LED is on at that station.
H
Ringing Line Preference has priority over Prime Line and Hot Line Assignment.
H
The CO line that begins ringing first is answered first.
H
All stations are assigned this feature at default.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
System Data Name
+BTM
Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-11
+BTM
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-41
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-2
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 18
Ringing Line Preference
Route Advance Block
R-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Route Advance Block assigns up to 32 tables. Each table can contain four Trunk group priority
levels from lowest cost to most expensive. Station users may have a Route Advance key programmed
or may access this feature using a Trunk Access Code. When placing an outside call, the system follows
the Route Advance table assigned for the station, ensuring that the lowest cost available Trunk group is
used. Any Trunk group can be assigned to multiple route advance priority tables.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Press a line key assigned for a Route Advance Block.
2.
Dial the desired number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Using any station:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial a Route Advance Block Access Code.
3.
Dial the desired number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Outgoing Restriction and Code Restriction rules apply to stations dialing out using Route Advance
Blocks.
The line key assigned for a Route Advance Block is On when all trunks and Trunk groups assigned
to the Route Advance Block are busy.
H
Stations are allowed to set Trunk Queuing to a Route Advance Block.
H
Up to four Trunk groups can be programmed in one Route Advance Block priority table.
H
Trunk groups can be repeated in multiple priority tables.
Restrictions:
H
The system must be assigned as MF registration.
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 20
Route Advance Block
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-30
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
+ALN
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection
5-06
+BCT
+BCS
+BA
,
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
201 ~ 232
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
R - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
R - 22
Route Advance Block
S-1
Save and Repeat
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Save and Repeat allows a Multiline Terminal user to save the last outside number dialed in system
memory for later use.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature with an outgoing CO/PBX call in progress:
A
I
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
The last number that was dialed is saved in memory.
4.
Restore the handset or press
.
.
E
.
To repeat saved number:
B
L
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To repeat saved number (R4000 or higher):
B
LL
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Only one number (24 digits maximum) can be saved in the memory of each Multiline Terminal.
H
The saved number is retained by the memory backup battery.
H
A new number can be saved over the last Save and Repeat Number.
H
The Save and Repeat and the Store and Repeat features cannot be used simultaneously from a
Multiline Terminal. The same memory area is shared by both features.
H
The user can program a Feature Access key or a One-Touch key as a Save key. A second
Feature Access key or a One-Touch key can be assigned as a Repeat key. The LED does not
light when a number is saved.
H
R4000 or higher requires # # to be used to repeat the saved number.
Restrictions:
H
Save and Repeat is valid on outside line calls only.
Related Features List
Feature
Number
S-23
Feature Name
Store and Repeat
___________________________________________________________________________________
S-2
Save and Repeat
Scrolling Directories
S-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Scrolling Directories functions like a telephone directory, and provides an Electra Elite IPK Display
Multiline Terminal user a list of system and/or station speed dial numbers. Using Softkeys, the user can
select a speed dial number and press the Speaker key or lift the handset to dial the number.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Display Multiline Terminals with Softkeys
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature:
1.
Press the
2.
Press the
- OR -
V
V
(SYS or STA) Softkey to designate system or station speed dialing.
(UP or DOWN) Softkey to view the names/numbers listed in the directory.
J
Press a dial pad key (to select the first letter of the name or number of the desired speed dial
buffer) and dial
.
3.
To dial the number press
E
or lift the handset.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S-3
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To use this feature with Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified:
1.
Press the
2.
Press the
- OR -
V
V
(SYS. or STA. Softkey) to designate system or station speed dialing.
(UP or DOWN Softkey) to view the names/numbers listed in the directory.
J
Press a dial pad key (to select the first letter of the name or number of the desired speed dial
buffer) and dial
.
3.
To dial the number press
4.
Enter the Account Code.
E
or lift the handset.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified is compatible.
H
Names/numbers can be found in the directory in two ways:
J
J
H
H
H
H
Scroll the list using the
V
(UP or DOWN) Softkey.
Search by entering a letter or digit using the dial pad keys.
Both the name and number can be stored in the directory. When both are stored, only the name is
shown in the LCD.
The third line of the LCD displays the Softkey designations:
J
J
J
J
SYS
System Speed Dial Numbers.
STA
Station Speed Dial Numbers.
UP
Moves up to display additional System or Station Speed Dial numbers.
DOWN
Moves down to display additional System or Station Speed Dial numbers.
When the Feature key or digit key is not pressed within 10 seconds, scrolling is canceled.
When scrolling, the system uses the following criteria to display the information in the order listed
below:
J
J
J
J
Spaces (between alphabetical characters)
Alphabetical Characters
Digits
Special Characters
___________________________________________________________________________________
S-4
Scrolling Directories
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
When more than one entry has the same name, the Speed Dial buffer with the lowest number is
displayed first (i.e., buffer 04 is displayed before buffer 08).
Users can scroll Speed Dial buffers that are included in their Tenant Group only.
The spaces programmed in the beginning of a name are ignored during scrolling for sorting (i.e.,
^^^Jean is regarded as Jean with ^ being equal to a space).
The speed dial buffers can be manually searched by scrolling through the Speed Dial Directory or
the search can be narrowed down to the first letter of the name or first digit of the phone number.
For the first letter of the name, the user can use the dial pad key with that letter on it. For example
to search for NEC, the user dials 66
(i.e., 6 has three letters, M, N and O).Dial 66 to reach
names starting with alphabet N and press to be used as an Enter key.
The LCD displays the name(s) starting with N. The user can then scroll down to the applicable
name and make a selection.
H
Dial Pad 0~9 is valid for searching. The following shows the relation between Dial Pad and
Alphabet/Digit:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
H
Dial Pad 0
0
Dial Pad 1
1
Dial Pad 2
ABC2
Dial Pad 3
DEF3
Dial Pad 4
GHI4
Dial Pad 5
JKL5
Dial Pad 6
MNO6
Dial Pad 7
PQRS7
Dial Pad 8
TUV8
Dial Pad 9
WXYZ9
When the system is programmed as Key Function, select a number in the display, and press an
idle trunk line key to dial it.
When the user is viewing the directory to select the number to be dialed, an incoming call to that
station is treated in the same way as a call to a User Programming Mode station.
Scrolling mode is canceled when one of the following keys is pressed: Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Redial, One-Touch, or Feature Access.
Key operation is ignored when Conf or Recall is pressed during scrolling.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S-5
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
A maximum 12 characters are displayed in the Multiline Terminal LCD when the system is
programmed for 1000 System Speed Dial numbers.
H
A maximum 13 characters are displayed in the Multiline Terminal LCD for Station Speed Dial or
when programmed for 100 System Speed Dial numbers.
H
When the stored name/number exceeds 12 or 13 characters, only the first 12 or 13 characters are
displayed in the Multiline Terminal LCD.
Restrictions:
H
Scrolling Directories can be used only while the station is idle.
H
When the System Speed Dial Display Assignment is used to restrict Tenants from viewing the
numbers stored in System Speed Dial buffers, the scrolling follows these conditions:
J
J
H
When both Name and Number are stored, the user can scroll System Speed Dial buffers.
When only the Number is stored, the user cannot scroll System Speed Dial buffers.
When System or Station Speed Dial data is stored or changed by PC Programming, the changes
are not displayed by the scrolling feature until the PC Programming connection is released.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BE
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-33
+BE
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-1-35
+BN
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
2-07
+AC
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-18
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
S-6
Scrolling Directories
Secondary Incoming Extension
S-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) can be assigned on a Flexible Line key. The status is indicated
by the LED of the assigned SIE. An incoming internal, ringing Tie/DID, DIT/ANA, CO Transfer Ring, or
call forwarded call can be picked up from an SIE.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To answer a secondary incoming extension call:
1.
Receive an incoming ringing call on a Secondary Incoming Extension key.
2.
Press the Secondary Incoming Extension key or go off-hook when Ringing Line Preference is
assigned, and receive the call.
3.
Talk with party. (Normal call handling procedures apply.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S-7
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Calls that recall to a station are not indicated by the LED and do not ring on a Secondary Incoming
Extension.
Tone Override and Camp-On calls to a station are indicated by the LED and ring on a Secondary
Incoming Extension.
H
Calls cannot be originated from a Secondary Incoming Extension.
H
Off-Hook Ringing is provided with calls ringing into Secondary Incoming Extensions.
H
Secondary Incoming Extensions cannot be set for Call Forward.
H
H
H
Internal and outside line calls answered from a Secondary Incoming Extension become the
answering station user call.
Off-Hook indication busy lamp field (BLF) is not provided on the Secondary Incoming Extension.
When a Secondary Incoming Extension call is received and answered while the user is on an
internal or outside line call, the first call is automatically put on hold.
Restrictions:
H
H
A station number cannot be programmed as a Secondary Incoming Extension on multiple Flexible
Line keys on a Multiline Terminal.
Intercom voice signaling to another station cannot be picked up at the Secondary Incoming
Extension. The LED on the Secondary Incoming Extension indicates Idle.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S-8
Secondary Incoming Extension
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTM
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
Mode)
4-37
+BTM
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
Mode)
4-38
+BTM
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-41
+BN
Line Key Selection
2-05
+BN
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-06
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S-9
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 10
Secondary Incoming Extension
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display
S-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display shows the programmed telephone name or number of each trunk
in the system. The name or number is displayed on the Multiline Terminal LCD when a trunk is seized.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
For an outside call in progress (after Elapsed Call Time starts):
A
C
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
The trunk number and assigned name or number are briefly displayed.
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 11
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
For outgoing calls, the Name/Number assigned is displayed when an outside line is seized until a
digit is dialed or the line is dropped.
H
For an incoming or transferred call, or a call removed from hold, the Name/Number is displayed
briefly (five seconds) after the line is accessed. The Elapsed Call Time begins immediately after
the trunk Name/Number is displayed.
Restrictions:
H
During a conference call, the seized trunk Name/Number is not displayed.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BCT
,
System Data Name
,
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-00
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 12
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display
Simplified Call Distribution
S-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Simplified Call Distribution distributes calls evenly to all members of a hunt group. It is very similar to
UCD but does not require members to control call processing status by logging off. Hunting is instituted
when a DIT, DID, TIE or VRS(4)-U( ) ETU call is terminated at an SCD group pilot number. Up to 32
SCD members can be divided among four SCD groups or assigned in one SCD group.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The SCD hunt is circular, and the starting point is the station that received the last SCD call.
H
SCD calls follow Station Call Forward – All Call settings.
H
When an SCD call is unanswered, the Electra Elite IPK system uses the Call Forward – No Answer
time to send the call to the next available SCD station. This forward is a single event and does not
repeat itself for the duration of that SCD call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 13
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
SCD is not available for Voice Mail, Automated Attendant transferred calls, or station transferred
calls.
H
SCD is not available for intercom calls.
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+AA
,
+AA
,
Memory
Block
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number
Assignment
1-8-29
SCD Group Agent Assignment
1-8-30
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 14
Simplified Call Distribution
S-6
Single Point of Entry (SPE)
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature provides a single access point (remote or direct) to configure the system and/or individual
ETUs. The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU provides the same function as the MIFM-U10 ETU with the KMM( )-U PAL
chip installed or the MIFM-U20 ETU with the KMM-U20 upgrade chip installed, and comes with a
standard built-in modem An Ethernet port is provided to allow programming over a network using
TCP/IP.
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU has six physical COM ports. Two ports go through the backplane to COM1 for PC
Programming and COM2 for SMDR on the side of the KSU just like an MIFM-U( ) ETU. The other four
COM ports (COM-A, COM-B, COM-C, COM-D) are accessible along the front of the ETU. These four
ports are used to interface other programmable ETUs such as VMS.
A comparison between the MIFM-U10 ETU, the MIFM-U20 ETU and the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is provided
by the following table.
Feature
Hardware Components
MIFM-U10 ETU
MIFM-U10 ETU
KMM( )U PAL chip
Modem Kit Unit
SAT Serial Programming
MIFM-U20 ETU
MIFM-U20 with KMM-U20
upgrade chip and the MODU10, POW-U10, and ETHU10 Units.
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU with Soft
Modem Activation Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Optional)
Yes (Optional)
Yes (Standard)
38.4K
38.4K
38.4K
Yes (Optional) with Elite
LAN PC Programming
Device)
Yes (Optional) for MIFMU20 using ETH-U10 and
POW-U10 Units)
Yes
LCR Serial Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCR Modem Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCR Ethernet Programming
No
Yes
Yes
Serial SMDR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ethernet SMDR
No
Yes
(simultaneous on serial also)
Yes
(simultaneous on serial also)
SAT Modem Programming
Maximum Modem Speed
SAT Ethernet (Intra/
Internet) Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 15
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
MIFM-U10 ETU
MIFM-U20 ETU
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
Approximately 100 call
records
Maximum of 200 records in
non-volatile Memory
Maximum of 200 records in
non-volatile Memory
50 per Station
50 per Station in
non-volatile Memory
50 per Station in
non-volatile Memory
VM CoSession using KSU
serial port (no open box)
No
No
Yes
VM CoSession using
modem not on VM ETU
No
No
Yes
VM CoSession using
Ethernet
No
No
Yes
BRT/PRT/CCH Remote
Debugging
No
No
Yes
SMDR Record Storage
when Printer is not
connected
Caller ID Storage
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Required Software:
H
No special KSU software
H
SAT PC Programming Software R1.70 or higher
H
LCR PC Programming Software Version 4.03 or higher
H
CoSession Update
Required Components:
H
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU provides the following communication methods to the key telephone system
and individual installed ETUs:
J
J
J
Serial using COM1 on the KTS chassis
Modem
Ethernet
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 16
Single Point of Entry (SPE)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
H
H
Connectors on front of the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU are 10-pin RJ45 jacks, and a special SPE serial cable
must be used with the SPE COM ports. COM-A and COM-B are fixed DTE interfaces. COM-C and
COM -D each have a DIP switch that allows these ports to be set as either DTE or DCE interfaces.
Factory defaults include DTE interface for COM-A and COM-B ports and DCE interface for COM-C
and COM-D ports.
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU has a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port with an auto-crossover and autonegotiating link that allows connectivity through a customer firewall to the remote office.
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is a hot-swap interface ETU that includes a Web-based interface for easy
configuration of the SPE.
When the printer or I/O device is not ready (e.g., out of paper or the cable is disconnected)
approximately 200 call records are saved in the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU buffer. When the buffer is full,
the newest record replaces the oldest record.
A brief delay may be encountered when trying to go off hook on Dterm terminals immediately
following boot up and/or hardware or software resets.
Restrictions:
H
H
The SPE(M)-U( ) ETU can be installed only in the AP, S1, or S2 slot of the first KSU. When the
Modem is required, the ETU must be installed in slot S1 or S2.
An SPE(M)-U( ) ETU software application must be installed for the following connections:
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
Electra Elite LCR (Version 4.00 and lower)
Wireless Service Console (WSC)
CoSession Client (Voicemail Programming
BRT/PRT/CNF/CCH (Remote debugging)
PC Programming applications that can communicate to the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU without using the
SPE PC application include:
J
J
H
Electra Elite IPK SAT (R1000 and lower)
Electra Elite IPK SAT (R1700 and higher)
Electra Elite LCR (Version 4.03 and higher)
COM54 is used by SAT and LCR PC-based applications and COM4 is used by the WSC PC-based
applications, but only one of these applications can be used at a time.
SPE Serial Port D (COM53) must be used to connect to the Voicemail CMS/FMS/VMS/CTI/VP
ETU.
Voicemail BRU and BRFT software utilities are not supported by the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 17
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
For Serial data communication to the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU from a PC, the physical COM1 port
normally used for Serial communication is superimposed on the Transport medium physical COM
port by a series of Virtual COM ports (COM4 and COM50~54). the Virtual COM ports are mapped
to physical COM ports on the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU as follows:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
COM4 → CoSession (COM53)
COM4 → WCS (COM54)
COM50 SPE Serial Port A
COM51 SPE Serial Port B
COM52 SPE Serial Port C
COM53 SPE Serial Port D
COM54 → SAT/LCR
When using modem or serial connections and simultaneous connections are made using virtual COM ports
to other ETUs (e.g., CCH or PRI), and SAT download is required, the respective virtual COM ports must be
temporarily disabled by unchecking the COM port in the Configuration Screen and clicking on the update
key. After the SAT download is complete, the virtual COM ports can be enabled and an update can be
performed to set the COM ports back in service.
Multiple connections from a single PC are allowed as shown in the table below.
SAT
SAT
LCR
WSC
CoSession
BRT
PRT
CCH
–
–
X
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LCR
–
WSC
–
–
CoSession
X
X
–
BRT
X
X
X
X
PRT
X
X
X
X
X
CCH
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X Compatible
– Not compatible
H
Only one PC can connect to the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU at a time.
H
Remote upgrades are not supported.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 18
Single Point of Entry (SPE)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
The COM port varies between ETUs. The ETU connector and interface are shown in the table
below.
ETU Connector
ETU Interface
CMS/FMS/VMS/CTI/VP
Male
DTE
BRT
Male
DCE
PRT
Male
DCE
CNF
Male
DCE
CCH
Male
DCE
The IP address to connect to the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU can be configured but is static only (not DHCP).
SMDR Call Records and Caller ID Storage updates in flash memory every 15 minutes. When the
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is removed or reset, the most recent SMDR Call Records and Caller IDs may
be lost.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
L-3
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
P-1
PC Programming
R-4
Remote Programming
S-17
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 19
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-1
+BS
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-4
+CSS
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
+CSS
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment
1-8-36
+CSS
Modem Number for Remote Programming
Assignment
1-8-38
+CSN
Site Name Assignment
1-8-18
+CSP
PC Programming Password Assignment
1-8-17
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 20
Single Point of Entry (SPE)
Single Line Telephone Access
S-7
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Expanded Port Package allows connection of 112 Electra Elite IPK system Single Line Telephones
(SLTs). The Basic Port Package allows the connection of 24 Single Line Telephones. Single Line
Telephone users can make CO/PBX calls, internal calls, and paging calls.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 2000:
With R2000 or higher, a Single Line Telephone (SLT) can perform a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and a
1-terminal to 2-outside parties conference call.
Release 3000:
With R3000 or higher, Caller ID to Single Line Telephones is supported only for the incoming outside
trunk calls (Loop Start, T1, ANI, ISDN, BRI, or PRI). A Send Caller ID Information to Single Line
Telephones Class of Service is added.
Version 1.54 is required for SLIB(4)/SLIE(4)-U10 ETU to support Caller ID to Single Line Telephones.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Single Line Telephones
Required Components:
SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU, OPX(2)-U( ) ETU, or SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
AP(R)-R or AP(A)-R Unit connected to an Electra Elite IPK or Dterm Series i Digital Multiline Terminal
(DTH/DTR)
APR-U or APA-U Unit connected to an Electra Elite Digital Multiline Terminal (DTU/DTP)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 21
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate internal calls:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the applicable station number.
3.
Talk when called party answers.
To originate outside calls:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial Trunk Access Code (default:I).
3.
Dial the number of outside party.
4.
Talk when the called party answers.
To answer outside or internal calls:
Lift the handset, and communicate.
To transfer an outside call or internal call with a call in progress:
1.
Press the hookswitch momentarily, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number where call is to be transferred.
3.
Hang up.
To perform a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer with an outside call in progress (R2000 or higher):
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is placed on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code for applicable trunk.
3.
Dial the applicable number.
4.
Hang up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 22
Single Line Telephone Access
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To initiate a 2 outside party Add-On conference using a Single Line Telephone with an outside call in
progress (R2000 or higher):
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is placed on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code for applicable trunk.
3.
Dial the applicable number, and wait for the party to answer.
4.
Provide hookflash again, and talk with both parties.
To access feature:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Feature Access Code.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When using the DID Conversion Table, the Date and Time are provided by the IPK.
H
When using Analog lines, the Date and Time are provided by the CO provider.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Single Line Telephones provide a distinctive ringing pattern between CO/PBX incoming calls and
internal calls.
Both DTMF type 2500 and Rotary type 500 Single Line Telephones can be used with the system.
Message Wait LEDs light when a message is sent to a Single Line Telephone with Message Wait
LED [SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU only].
A Single Line Telephone can be used to voice announce to a Multiline Terminal.
The system must be installed as Multifunction registration for Single Line Telephones to have dial
access to outside lines.
Default Access Code 6# can be used to send a hookflash from a Single Line Telephone to an
outside line.
After the PBR is released, DTMF tones from a Single Line Telephone are not detected by the
system but are sent directly to the CO/PBX line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 23
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
When Data Line Security is assigned for a Single Line Telephone, override tones are denied to this
station.
When a Single Line Telephone is called, PBR is not connected to that Single Line Telephone.
Therefore, no features can be set.
Restrictions:
H
Internal Calls, Transferred calls, and K-CCIS calls do not support Caller ID on Single Line
Telephones.
H
The SLT(1)-U( ) ADP or OPX(2)-U( ) ETU does not support Message Waiting.
H
The AP(A)-R Unit or APA-U Unit does not support ringing.
H
H
H
H
H
When a rotary type 500 Single Line Telephone is used, Access Codes using # and
changed to numerical digits because this telephone does not support these digits.
must be
Most Feature Access Codes can be used from a Single Line Telephone when allowed by Station
Class of Service and applicable assignments.
An SLT cannot perform a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer or support a 1 terminal - 2 outside parties
conference call (R1700 or lower only).
An SLT connected to the AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit or the APA-U/APR-U Unit cannot perform a
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer or support a 1 terminal - 2 outside parties conference call.
Caller ID Name to Single Line Telephone is NOT supported for ISDN (BRT/PRT) Trunks.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
C-19
Class of Service
C-26
Cordless Telephone Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 24
Single Line Telephone Access
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BS
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BTI
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
4-35
+BTI
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
4-95
+BTI
SLT Hookflash Assignment
4-24
+BTI
Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection
1-3-04
+BTI
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
1-3-02
+BTI
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to PBR
Selection
1-8-01
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTI
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
1-3-03
+BTI
Hookflash Start Time Selection
1-3-05
+BTI
Hookflash End Time Selection
1-3-06
+BTI
Bounce Protect Time Selection
1-3-01
+BTT
Station Name Assignment
4-18
+BTT
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-09
+BTT
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-90
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
+BTS
,
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4,
5-7, 6-5,
7-1
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 25
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 26
Single Line Telephone Access
SLT Adapter
S-8
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Adapter allows a port of an ESIB(8)-U( ) or ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU to
support a Single Line Telephone. A Single Line Telephone can be connected to the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
using the SLT Adapter and 2-wire cable. Eight SLT(1)-U( ) ADP Single Line Telephone Adapters can be
installed in the Electra Elite IPK system.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 2000:
With R2000 or higher, an SLT connected to an SLT Adapter [SLT(1)-U( )] can perform a Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer and a 1-terminal to 2-outside parties conference call.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Single Line Telephones
Required Components:
SLT(1)-U( ) ADP
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate internal calls:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the applicable internal number.
3.
Talk when called party answers.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 27
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To originate outside calls:
I
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for dial tone.
2.
Dial Trunk Access Code (default:
3.
Dial the number of outside party.
4.
Talk when the called party answers.
).
To answer outside or internal calls:
Lift the handset, and talk.
To transfer an outside call or internal call with a call in progress:
1.
Press the hookswitch momentarily, and wait for second dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number where call is to be transferred.
3.
Hang up.
To perform a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer with an outside call in progress (R2000 or higher):
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is placed on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code for the applicable trunk.
3.
Dial the applicable number.
4.
Hang up.
To initiate a 2-outside party Add-On conference using an SLT with an outside call in progress (R2000 or
higher):
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is placed on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code for the applicable trunk.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 28
SLT Adapter
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Dial the applicable number, and wait for the party to answer.
4.
Provide hookflash again, and speak with both parties.
To access the feature:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the applicable Feature Access Code.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
A maximum of eight SLT(1)-U( ) ADPs can be used in the Electra Elite IPK system.
H
Dial Pulse and Dual-Tone Multifrequency Single Line Telephones are supported.
Restrictions:
H
The SLT(1)-U( ) ADP does not support voice mail.
H
Message Waiting LED is not supported.
H
An SLT connected to an SLT Adapter [SLT(1)-U( ) ADP] cannot perform a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
or support a 1-terminal to 2-outside party conference call (R1700 or lower).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 29
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
C-26
Cordless Telephone Connection
S-7
Single Line Telephone Access
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BS
+BS
,
System Data Name
,
Memory
Block
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
Station Number Assignment
4-10
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 30
SLT Adapter
SLT Timed Alarm
S-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A Timed Alarm (reminder) may be set at any Single Line Telephone. At a programmed time, the system
automatically calls the Single Line Telephone station user to indicate a scheduled action.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Single Line Telephones connected to an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU.
Required Components:
Any Single Line Telephone port
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set Timed Alarm using a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Timed Alarm set/cancel Access Code X (not assigned at default).
3.
Enter time for the alarm (24-hour format in 5-minute increments).
4.
Restore the handset.
To cancel Timed Alarm using a Single Line Telephone:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial Timed Alarm set/cancel Access Code X (not assigned at default).
3.
Restore the handset.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 31
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel Timed Alarm using Attendant position:
A
EH
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Press
.
.
.
To set Timed Alarm for a Single Line Telephone using a Multiline Terminal (Attendant Position only):
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Timed Alarm set/cancel to Single Line Telephone Access Code X (not assigned at
default).
3.
Dial the Single Line Telephone station number.
4.
Enter time to set the alarm (24-hour format in 5-minute increments).
5.
Restore the handset.
, and wait for internal dial tone.
To cancel Timed Alarm for a Single Line Telephone using a Multiline Terminal (Attendant Position only):
E
, and wait for internal dial tone.
1.
Lift the handset or press
2.
Dial the Timed Alarm set/cancel to Single Line Telephone Access Code X (not assigned at
default).
3.
Dial the Single Line Telephone station number.
4.
Dial time as
5.
Restore the handset.
II II
:
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 32
SLT Timed Alarm
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Timed Alarm must be set in five-minute increments for SLTs using a 24-hour format. For example:
12:10, 12:15,...23:55.
H
A Timed Alarm rings for four minutes when not answered.
H
When Timed Alarm is answered, the user hears Music On Hold.
H
SLT Timed Alarm must be set daily.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
PageLine Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
2-1
1-6
044~046,
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 33
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 34
SLT Timed Alarm
Softkeys
S-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK system provides softkeys on all display Electra Elite IPK (DTH), Dterm Series i
(DTR), Electra Elite (DTU), or Dterm Series E (DTP) Multiline Terminals. Currently Speed Dial Scrolling
Directories, and EliteMail Digital Voice Mail systems make extensive use of these keys to guide a station
user effortlessly through difficult-to-use feature operations.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or higher is required to support Interactive Softkeys.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTU/DTP or DTH/DTR Multiline Terminal with LCD
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 35
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
INTERACTIVE SOFTKEYS (R4000 OR HIGHER)
Interactive Softkeys change state based on the following conditions of the Display Terminal.
H
On-Hook – Idle
H
Call Origination
H
Conversation Mode
H
Incoming Call State
On-Hook – Idle
Status
Idle
Page 1 Softkeys
MIC
SYS.
STA
Page 2 Softkeys
MORE
DND
CFA
CFB/NA
MORE
Call Origination
Status
Page 1 Softkeys
ICM Calling
RING
VOICE
ICM Calling – Call
Waiting Tone
CBR
ACB
T.O.
ICM Calling – Busy*
MORE
V.O.
MORE
CBR
STEP
MORE
STEP
MORE
RECALL
ICM Calling – Voice Call
On Hold
RING
VOICE
QVM
ICM Calling – CWT
Call On Hold
QVM
T.O.
V.O.
ICM Calling – Busy Call
On Hold*
RECALL
CO Calling – Normal
AUTORD
CO Calling – All Trunks
Busy
Page 2 Softkeys
ACB
T.Q.
* Call Control does not allow any options in this state
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 36
Softkeys
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Conversation Mode
Status
Talking (ICM) Speaker
Page 1 Softkeys
Page 2 Softkeys
MIC
PARK
MUTE
PARK
Talking (CO)
Speaker - Outgoing
MIC
PARK
DND
Talking (CO)
Handset/Headset Outgoing
MUTE
PARK
DND
Talking (CO)
Speaker - Incoming
MIC
PARK
I.D.
DND
Talking (CO)
Handset/Headset Incoming
MUTE
PARK
I.D.
DND
Talking (ICM)
Handset/Headset
DND
DND
Incoming Call State
Status
Incoming (ICM) Voice
Call
MIC
Ringing (ICM)
MIC
Incoming (CO)
Day/Night Mode
MIC
Incoming (CO)
DIT/ANA/DID/TIE
MIC
Page 1 Softkeys
Page 2 Softkeys
Page 1 Softkeys
Page 2 Softkeys
System or Station Speed Dial
Status
System Speed dial
check
UP
DOWN
Station Speed dial
check
UP
DOWN
SYS or STA pressed in idle
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 37
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Definition for Each Interactive Softkey
Softkey
Definition
ACB
Automatic Callback
Auto-RD
Automatic Redial Set
CBR
Callback Request
CFA
Call Forward – All Set/Cancel
CFB/NA
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Set/Cancel
DND
Do Not Disturb Set/Cancel
DOWN
Speed Dial Access (The order of rain)
I.D.
Caller I.D. Recall
MIC
Microphone Control
MORE
Next or Previous Page
MUTE
Mute Handset
PARK
Call Park – System
QVM
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
RECALL
Recall Key
RING
Switch from Voice Announce to Ring
STA.
Station Speed Dial Access
STEP
Step Call
SYS.
System Speed Dial Access
T.O.
Tone Override
T.Q.
Trunk Queuing Set
UP
Speed Dial Access (The order of a rise)
V.O.
Voice Over Originate
VOICE
Switch from Ring to Voice Announce
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 38
Softkeys
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Scrolling Directories, Elite ACD Plus, and Voice Mail applications supported by the CTI/VP, FMS,
or VMS ETU currently use softkeys.
For more detailed operation for each Interactive Softkey, refer to Features and Specifications
Manual for the related feature.
Restrictions:
H
H
R4000 or higher is required to support the Interactive Softkeys.
Interactive Softkeys are not available when an ACD Plus or Q-Master Agent or Supervisor is
logged on.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-19
Automatic Callback
A-24
Automatic Redial
C-4
Callback Request
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
C-7
Call Forward – All Call
C-8
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
C-13
Call Monitoring
C-14
Call Park – System
C-19
Class of Service
D-15
Do Not Disturb (DND)
H-1
Handset Mute
I-5
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
M-3
Microphone Control
Q-1
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
R-1
Recall Key
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-13
Speed Dial – System
S-22
Step Call
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 39
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Number
Feature Name
T-5
Tone Override
T-6
Trunk Queuing
V-4
Voice Over Split
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BTS
,
System Data Name
,
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-3, 4-4,
5-7, 6-5,
7-1,7-5
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 40
Softkeys
Speed Dial – Station
S-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
When 100-memory allocation is specified, each station in the system can be assigned 20 Station Speed
Dial buffers. Each Station Speed Dial buffer may contain 24 digits or four other buffer numbers (Nesting
Dial) and the called party name. The DTP/DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL, DTU-32D-2 TEL, and DTU/DTP-32-1
TEL have 16 One-Touch keys that can also be used for Speed Dial. The One-Touch key buffer may
contain a maximum of 16 digits with no characters for names.
Using System Software these keys can be used for station speed dialing in addition to the 20 station
speed dial buffers. System Software permits input stored characters to be entered on the dial pad, but
no longer allows the Character Code Table to be used.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or Higher
When the system speed dial buffers are set to 1000, each station gets 10 speed dial buffers (#00~#09)
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program a Station Speed Dial buffer using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Press
2.
Press
A
B
.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 41
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
HK II
Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (
LKK LKI
~
).
When the system is assigned for 1000 system speed dial buffers, each station has 10 speed dial buffers
(
~
) (R4000 or higher).
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Dial the desired telephone number.
6.
Press
H
, and enter name using the Character Code Table.
- OR -
7.
Use the dial pad to enter the name.
8.
Refer to next feature, S-12 Speed Dial Stored Characters on page S-47.
Press
A
.
To program a Feature Access key for Station Speed Dial using a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
6.
Dial the desired telephone number.
7.
Press
K
.
.
.
A
.
To program a One-Touch key for Station Speed Dial using a Multiline Terminal:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the One-Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
6.
Dial the desired telephone number.
7.
Press
K
.
.
.
A
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 42
Speed Dial – Station
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a Station Speed Dial buffer using a Single Line Telephone:
GI
HK II
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Station Speed Dial Program Access Code (default:
3.
Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (
JKK JKI
).
~
).
When the system is assigned for 1000 system speed dial buffers, each station has 10 speed dial buffers
~
) (R4000 or higher).
(
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Dial the telephone number to be stored.
6.
Restore the handset.
To use a Station Speed Dial buffer using a Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number (
Q.
JKK JKI
HK II
~
).
When the system is assigned for 1000 system speed dial buffers, each station has 10 speed dial buffers
(
~
) (R4000 or higher).
Multifunction (Dial Access):
Q.
HK II
1.
Press
2.
Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number (
JKK JKI
~
).
When the system is assigned for 1000 system speed dial buffers, each station has 10 speed dial buffers
(
~
) (R4000 or higher).
To use a Feature Access or One-Touch key programmed for Station Speed Dial using a Multiline
Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 43
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Multifunction (Dial Access):
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key.
To use a Station Speed Dial Buffer using a Single Line Telephone:
Multifunction (Dial Access) only:
GG
HK II
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Station Speed Dial Access Code (default:
3.
Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number (
4.
JKK JKI
).
~
).
When the system is assigned for 1000 system speed dial buffers, each station has 10 speed dial buffers
~
) (R4000 or higher).
(
Talk with the called party.
To program the Station Speed Dial with 1000 System Speed Dials using a Multiline Terminal (R4000 or
higher):
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (use
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Dial the desired telephone number.
.
.
L KK LKI
~
.
To Confirm Speed Dial using a Multiline Terminal:
D
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be confirmed (
B
.
.
JKK JKI
HK II
~
).
When the system is assigned for 1000 system speed dial buffers, each station has 10 speed dial buffers
(
~
) (R4000 or higher).
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 44
Speed Dial – Station
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A maximum of 24 digits can be programmed for a Speed Dial buffer.
A maximum of 16 Feature Access keys per station can be programmed on unused line keys. A
maximum of 16 digits can be programmed in each Feature Access key.
A pause, , and # may be programmed in a Multiline Terminal Station Speed Dial buffer. Each item
is counted as a digit; however, the Trunk and Trunk Group Access Code do not count as digits.
A pause and hookflash can be programmed in a Single Line Telephone Station Speed Dial buffer,
but only when using the Electra Elite System Program Technician Software.
Pauses stored in systems with the Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature may cause the MIFM-U( )
ETU with KMM(1.0)U to seize a Least Cost Route because the pauses may be considered digits
dialed. In systems using LCR, pauses should be programmed as part of extra codes in the Extra
Code Add Table.
The built-in battery backup on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU for Electra Elite IPK retains Station Speed Dial
memories when power fails.
To verify Station Speed Dial buffer contents on a Multiline Terminal with an LCD display, press the
Conference key, then the Redial key, and dial the Station Speed Dial buffer (80~99).
H
H
With R4000 or Higher and the system set to 1000 speed dial buffers, dial #00~#09 for station buffers.
To verify Station Speed Dial buffer contents programmed on a Feature Access or One-Touch key
on a Multiline Terminal with an LCD display, press the Feature key and then press the Feature
Access or One-Touch key.
Multiline Terminal users may access two or more Station Speed Dial buffers using Consecutive
Speed Dial.
Restrictions:
H
One-Touch keys programmed as Station Speed Dial cannot have a name stored with the number
to dial.
H
A maximum of 13 characters can be entered for the name.
H
A maximum of 16 digits can be programmed for a One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 45
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-25
Feature Name
Consecutive Speed Dial
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
N-2
Nesting Dial
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters
S-13
Speed Dial – System
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BE
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-1-35
+BE
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-33
+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
090, 095
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 46
Speed Dial – Station
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Speed Dial buffers may contain 24 digits. When 100-memories (80 System Speed Dial buffers and 20
Station Speed dial buffers) are allocated, a maximum of 13 characters can be entered for the name.
When 1000-memories are allocated, a maximum of 12 characters can be entered for the name.
System Software permits input stored characters to be entered on the dial pad, but no longer allows use
of the Character Code Table.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program a Station Speed Dial buffer with stored characters:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Dial the desired telephone number.
.
.
HK II
~
).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 47
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
H
Press
, and enter name using the Character Code Table.
- OR -
Use the dial pad to enter the name.
7.
Refer to Character Code Table to follow.
A
Press
.
To program a System Speed Dial buffer with stored characters (Attendant Position only at default):
A
B
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the System Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (
~
).
KKK III
.
KK GI
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Dial the desired telephone number.
6.
Press
H
~
or
, and enter name using the Character Code Table.
- OR -
Use the dial pad to enter the name.
7.
Refer to Character Code Table to follow.
A
Press
.
Using a Speed Dial buffer with stored characters:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
B
.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
.
KK II KKK III
KK II KKK II
1.
Press
2.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
~
or
~
~
or
~
).
I
).
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 48
Speed Dial Stored Characters
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Feature Access key for Station Speed Dial with stored characters:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press the desired Feature Access key.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
Press the desired Feature Access key.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
When programming Feature Access or One-Touch keys, the Conference key can be used to
backspace and erase an entry.
Stored characters can only be entered for outside line numbers.
Restrictions:
H
One-Touch keys, programmed as Station Speed Dial, cannot have a name stored with the number
to dial.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
N-2
Nesting Dial
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-13
Speed Dial – System
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 49
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
Memory
Block
System Data Name
¦
¦
¦
+BE
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-33
+BE
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-1-35
+BN
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
2-07
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
CHARACTER CODE TABLE
System Data Input
Press
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Redial
1st
1
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
0
*
2nd
@
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
!
+
3rd
[
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
“
,
a
d
g
j
m
S
t
Z
#
-
4th
5th
]
b
e
h
k
n
p
u
w
$
.
6th
^
c
f
i
l
o
q
v
x
%
/
2
3
4
5
6
r
8
y
&
:
To A
To D
To G
To J
To M
s
To T
z
b
;
7th
8th
/
9th
{
7
9
(
<
10th
|
To P
To W
)
=
11th
}
To 0
>
12th
?
13th
To *
14th
R
#
Hold
To 1
Clears one character to the left.
Used to move cursor to right.
Space (MB3-00)
Data Clear (except MB3-00)
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 50
Speed Dial Stored Characters
S-13
Speed Dial – System
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Positions can be used to program either 80 or 1000 System Speed Dial memories that provide
shared access by all stations. Selection may be set per Class to override System Speed Dial.
When 80 system speed dial buffers are allowed, each station user also has 20 station speed dial buffers.
System Software permits input stored characters to be entered on the dial pad, but no longer allows the
Character Code Table to be used.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or higher is required to support an additional 10 Station Speed Dials when the system is
assigned for 1000 System Speed Dials.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program the System Speed Dial buffer using the Attendant Position:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (use
~
).
.
KKK III
.
KK GI
~
or
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 51
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Dial the desired telephone number.
6.
Press
Table.
H
- OR -
7.
A
Press
, and use the dial pad to enter the name (when desired) using the Character Code
.
To use System Speed Dial using a Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (use
B
.
KK GI KKK III
~
~
or
).
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial the System Speed Dial buffer number (use
~
).
KKK III
KK GI
~
or
To use a Feature Access or One-Touch key programmed for System Speed Dial using a Multiline
Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 52
Speed Dial – System
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To use a System Speed Dial buffer using a Single Line Telephone:
Multifunction (Dial Access) only:
GFKK GI
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Speed Dial Access Code (default:
3.
Dial the System Speed Dial buffer number (use
KKK III
~
4.
.
).
~
or
Talk with called party.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When using 1000 System Speed Dial mode, buffers 900~999 cannot be restricted from any tenant.
H
System Speed Dial blocks can be shared by one or more tenants.
H
A maximum of 24 digits can be programmed in a System Speed Dial buffer.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A name can be entered with the number to be dialed when programming a System Speed Dial
buffer. The name is displayed when the Speed Dial buffer is used.
A maximum of 13 characters using 80 System Speed Dial mode or 12 characters using 1000
System Speed Dial mode can be entered for the name.
A pause, hookflash, ,, and # may be programmed in a System Speed Dial buffer. Each item is
counted as a digit, except the Trunk and Trunk Group Access Code.
The built-in battery backup on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU retains System Speed Dial memories when
power fails.
To verify System Speed Dial buffer contents on a Multiline Terminal with an LCD display, press the
Conference key, then the Redial key, and dial the System Speed Dial buffer (use 00~79 or
000~999) (R3500 or lower).
Multiline Terminal users may access two or more System Speed Dial buffers by using Consecutive
Speed Dial.
A pause is automatically inserted when a PBX Access Code with a pause specified by Memory
Block 1-1-24 (PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I) is entered in a System Speed Dial buffer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 53
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
H
H
Pauses should not be stored in Speed Dial in systems with the Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature.
These pauses may cause the MIFM-U( ) ETU with KMM(1.0)U to seize a Least Cost Route
because the pauses may be considered digits dialed. In systems using the LCR feature, pauses
should be programmed as part of extra codes in the Extra Code Add Table.
With R4000 or higher, when 1000 System Speed Dial buffers (000~999) are available, 10
additional Station Speed Dial buffers are available (#00~#09).
Memory Block 8-3 (Station Speed Dial Memory Clear) can be used to clear all Station Speed Dials.
Restrictions:
H
When 1000 System Speed Dial buffers (000~999) are available, Station Speed Dial buffers cannot
be assigned (R3500 or lower).
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-25
Feature Name
Consecutive Speed Dial
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
N-2
Nesting Dial
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 54
Speed Dial – System
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BE
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-1-35
+BE
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-33
+AC
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-18
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection
1
1-8-07
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+AC
System Speed Dial Override by Class
Selection
1-1-62
+BN
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
2-07
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BA
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-3
090, 095
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 55
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 56
Speed Dial – System
Station Add-On Console
S-14
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Station Add-On Console functions with a Multiline Terminal to provide an additional 16 DSS/BLF
keys. The Busy Lamp Field status is shown by icons for each station or feature. This console also has
an additional 100 programmable speed dials that are separate from the System or Station Speed dials.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTR/H-8-2( )
DTR/H-8D-2( )
DTH-16-2( )
DTR/H-16D-2( )
DTR/H-16(BL)-2( )
DTR/H-16LD-2( )
Required Components:
D16(LD)-U( ) ADM
Required Software:
R4000 or higher is required for the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program a Feature Access Key with name for DSS/BLF:
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
A
B
.
.
Wassigned as Feature Access key.
G
when existing data is present.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 57
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
A
A
.
5.
Dial
6.
Dial station number
7.
Dial
(option, refer to note).
H
G
To switch the call from Voice to Tone or Tone to Voice.
8.
Press
9.
Press
10.
Enter name using the dial pad.
11.
Press
A
.
when existing data is present.
.
To program a Feature Access Key with Name for Station Speed Dial:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Dial
6.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (4-digit maximum).
7.
Dial Telephone number to be dialed.
8.
Press
9.
Press
10.
Enter name using the dial pad.
11.
Press
.
.
Wassigned as Feature Access key.
G
K
when existing data is present.
.
H
G
A
.
when existing data is present.
.
To program a Feature Access Key with Name for dial code feature:
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Dial
A
B
.
.
Wassigned as Feature Access key.
G
A
when existing data is present.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 58
Station Add-On Console
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
Dial the feature code.
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Enter name using the dial pad.
10.
Press
H
G
A
.
when existing data is present.
.
To program a Feature Access Key with Name for a Feature key + code feature:
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Dial
A
B
.
.
Wassigned as Feature Access key.
G
L
L
when existing data is present.
.
indicates a feature for the IPK system.
6.
Dial Feature Access Code.
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Enter name using the dial pad.
10.
Press
H
G
A
.
when existing data is present.
.
To program a Feature Access Key with Name for Digital Voice Mail function:
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Dial
A
B
.
.
Wassigned as Feature Access key.
G
B
when existing data is present.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 59
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
Dial Digital Voice Mail feature code.
KK
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KG
Feature codes are:
H
G
Record
Pause
Rerecord
Erase
End
Urgent Page
Address
Live Monitor
.
7.
Press
8.
Press
9.
Enter name using the dial pad.
10.
Press
A
when existing data is present.
.
To program or use the Directory Feature:
Refer to the manual provided with each unit
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When a user programs or modifies a Name for a Feature Access/One Touch key, changes are
displayed in Memory Block 4-70 [LCD Line Key – Name Assignment (Station Add On Console)].
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
The Add on Module (ADM) Directory (PC application) must be used to edit the directory database.
Refer to the documentation provided with the D16(LD)-R( ) ADM unit.
The dialed # feature of the D16(LD)-R( ) ADM stores the last 15 calls made for the unit.
Memory Block 4-50 (Multiline Terminal Type Selection) must be set for the 16-key station when the
D16(LD)-R( ) ADM is attached.
A maximum of 100 Directories can be stored in the D16(LD)-R( ) ADM.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 60
Station Add-On Console
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
A maximum of 24 digits can be stored for each Directory not including the Trunk Access Code.
H
A maximum of four digits can be stored for the Trunk Access Code.
H
A maximum of eight characters can be stored for each Directory.
H
Trunks cannot be programmed on the D16(LD)-R( ) ADM.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-25
Feature Name
Consecutive Speed Dial
F-2
Feature Access – User Programmable
N-2
Nesting Dial
S-11
Speed Dial – Station
S-12
Speed Dial Stored Characters
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BE
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-1-35
+BE
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-33
+AC
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-18
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection
1
1-8-07
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
4-17
+BTM
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
4-50
LCD Line Key – Name Assignment (Station
Add-On Console)
4-70
System Speed Dial Override by Class
Selection
1-1-62
+BTS
+AC
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 61
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
+BN
+BA
System Data Name
Memory
Block
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
2-07
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
090, 095
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 62
Station Add-On Console
Station Camp-On
S-15
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Camp-On allows a call to be transferred to a busy station. When the station receiving the
Camp-On tone becomes idle, the call rings and can be answered. After a programmed time,
unanswered Camp-On calls recall to the station that initiated the Camp-On.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate Station Camp-On from a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress:
G
1.
Press
2.
Dial the station number or press the designated DSS key programmed on a Flexible Line key or
One-Touch key on the terminal. Receive call waiting tone.
3.
Go on-hook.
4.
After timeout, when the Camp-On remains unanswered, the line recalls, and the LED on the
assigned CO/PBX line key returns to flashing green.
5.
Press the CO/PBX line key with green LED, and go off-hook to return to the call.
. The call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 63
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To answer a Camp-On while engaged in a call:
1.
Receive a camp-on tone. The CO/PBX line key LED flashes green.
2.
Press the flashing
camp-on is answered.
3.
Go on-hook. The transferred call rings.
4.
Go off-hook or press
F
. The existing CO/PBX line call is automatically placed on hold, and the
F
, and talk with the incoming caller.
To originate a Station Camp-On using a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress:
1.
Press the hookswitch momentarily, and wait for second dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number to where call is to be transferred.
3.
Hang up.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When the Camp-On is placed after Tone Override, camp-on tone is provided.
H
Station and Attendant Camp-On Recall times can be assigned separately.
H
Camp-On Tone receive is assigned in Station Class of Service assignment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 64
Station Camp-On
Station Hunt
S-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Hunt distributes internal and outside calls to multiple stations in a Station Hunt group. When a
dialed station number programmed as an Intercom Master Hunt Number is busy, the call is forwarded to
another station in that hunt group.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To call a Station Hunt group from an internal station:
1.
Lift the handset, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number of the desired hunt group.
3.
Talk with the called party when answered.
To use this feature for an incoming internal, DIT/ANA, or Tie/DID call:
An incoming call to a station number programmed as an Intercom Master Hunt Number is sent to the first
available station in the hunt group.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 65
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
A maximum of 120 stations in the expanded Electra Elite IPK, or 32 stations in the basic Electra
Elite IPK can be assigned to a hunt group.
The Intercom Master Hunt Number is an actual station. When it is busy, the call is forwarded to the
next programmed answering station.
H
Linear hunt (consecutively search from the lead station) is provided.
H
DIT/ANA calls to an Intercom Master Hunt Number follow the station hunt group assignment.
H
H
H
H
When a station number other than the Intercom Master Hunt Number in the hunt group is dialed
directly, the hunt is not provided.
When an Intercom Master Hunt Number is set for Call Forward – All Call/Busy, incoming calls
follow the Call Forward setting. When the Forward to Station is busy, the incoming calls follow the
station hunt assignment.
An Intercom Master Hunt Number can be included in another station hunt group to chain together
two Station Hunt groups.
These conditions cause a station in the hunt group to be skipped:
J
J
J
J
H
H
The station is busy.
Call Forward – All Call is set for that station.
The station is in DND Mode.
The station is off-line.
CO Ring transfers, DIT/ANA, Tie/DID, and internal calls to an Intercom Master Hunt Number do not
hunt past an unanswered member of the hunt group.
When all hunt group stations are busy, the transferring caller hears call waiting tone. The call is
camped on the Intercom Master Hunt Number and does not forward to other stations that become
idle.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 66
Station Hunt
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
S-5
Feature Name
Simplified Call Distribution
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
+BTT
,
+BTT
,
Memory
Block
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment
4-15
+AA
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number
Assignment
1-8-29
+AA
SCD Group Agent Assignment
1-8-30
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 67
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 68
Station Hunt
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
S-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
An optional MIFM-U( ) ETU provides detailed outside call records of system telephone usage to support
cost control by identifying telephone users, trunk usage, and digits dialed. SMDR enables connection of
call accounting equipment to audit local and long distance telephone bills.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals:
H
Incoming CO/PBX Call
H
Outgoing CO/PBX Call
H
Conference CO/PBX Call
H
Transferred CO/PBX Call
Required Components:
RS-232C compatible printer and serial data straight connection cable and/or a call accounting unit must
be locally provided.
MIFM-U( ) ETU
- OR SPE(M)-U10 ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 69
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
When the printer or other I/O device fails to operate, approximately 100 call records are saved in
the MIFM-U( ) ETU buffer. When the buffer is full, the first call record is lost and the last call record
is stored.
Call record data provides the Start Time, Trunk Number, Trunk Group, Type of Call, Station
Number, Duration, Number Dialed, LCR, Calling Station Number, and Transferred Station Number.
The maximum digits allowed for output of a telephone number is 24.
When Printer is assigned, and a printer is not connected to the system, a PRINTER TROUBLE
LCD indication and an audible alert tone are provided at the first two Multiline Terminals connected
to the system (Stations 100 and 101). When an MIFM-U( ) ETU is not installed or disabled, no
alarm indication is given.
When Caller ID is installed, SMDR prints the incoming caller telephone number when received
from the Central Office.
H
Call records are not provided for internal calls.
H
Caller ID name is not printed on SMDR.
H
When the system automatically switches the clock for daylight saving time and a station is on a
call, the duration of that call is invalid.
Restrictions:
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension number
are printed by SMDR.
SMDR Print Formats:
H
H
H
Outgoing Call
07/03/98
A
00:15:32
G
Outgoing Call
07/03/98
A
00:15:32
G
09:00
08-05-12
B
C
101028809727519000
H
OG 123
D
E
09:00
08-05-12
B
C
101028809727519000
H
OG 123
D
E
Outgoing Call (LCR)
07/03/98
09:00
A
B
08-05-12
C
OG 123
D
E
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 70
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
00:15:32
G
101028809727517000
H
LCR
K
H
H
H
Incoming Call
07/03/98
A
00:15:32
G
09:00
B
9727517000
H
05-12
C
IC
D
123
E
DISA (Both incoming and outgoing are printed. Format shown is printed when incoming caller
hangs up first. Format is reversed when called party hangs up first.
07/03/98
A
00:15:32
G
07/03/98
A
00:15:32
G
1234567890
I
09:00
B
05-12
C
D100
J
09:00
08- 05-12
B
C
101028809787577000
H
D100
J
IC
D
999
E
234
F
OG 999
D
E
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 71
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SMDR Format Explanation:
A~K are printout items.
H A Start Date
07 = month
03 = day
98 = year
H
B
Start Time
09 = hour
00 = minute
H
C
Trunk Information
08 = Route Advance Block
05 = Trunk Group
12 = Trunk Number
H
D
Call Type
IC
OG
ICC
OGC
IT
OT
ITC
OTC
H
E
Station Number
1
2-digit Station Number in System Programming
2
3-digit Station Number in System Programming
3
4-digit Station Number in System Programming
H
F
Transferred Station Number
2
2-digit Station Number in System Programming
3
3-digit Station Number in System Programming
4
4-digit Station Number in System Programming
H
G
Call Duration
00 = hour
15 = minutes
32 = seconds
H
H
Number Dialed
Maximum of 24 Characters
Incoming Caller ID Number = 9727517622I
Account Code Entry:1234567890
Maximum of 16 Characters
Forced Account Code: A1234567890
Maximum of 13 Characters
When both are entered, SMDR prints the Account Code entry followed by the Forced
Account Code.
Incoming Call
Outgoing Call
Conference on Incoming Call
Conference on Outgoing Call
Transferred Incoming Call
Transferred Outgoing Call
Conference on Transferred Incoming Call
Conference on Transferred Outgoing Call
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 72
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
J
Station Number of DISA Caller
Maximum of 4 Characters
H
K
Least Cost Routing
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-1
Account Code Entry
A-2
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING OVER ETHERNET(SMDROE)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
An optional SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or MIFM-U20 ETU provides detailed outside call records of system
telephone usage to support cost control by identifying telephone users, trunk usage, and digits dialed.
SMDRoE enables connection of call accounting equipment such as Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise through
TCP/IP to audit local and long distance telephone bills. Configuration of the SMDRoE application is
made through the web interface. Users can access the web screen using any commercially available
web browser such as Internet Explorer (IE). A web screen on the SPE allows the user to perform the
following:
H
Enable/Disable sending SMDR over Ethernet.
H
Enter the IP address of the PC running Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise.
H
Enter the TCP Port number (server listening port 50563).
ENHANCEMENT(S)
R4000 or higher is required to support SMDR over Ethernet.
System Availability
H
Incoming CO/PBX Call
H
Outgoing CO/PBX Call
H
Conference CO/PBX Call
H
Transferred CO/PBX Call
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 73
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Required Components
TCP/IP connection from server side [(SPE(M)-U( ) or MIFM-U20 ETU)] to client side (PC).
MIFM-U20
- OR SPE(M)-U( ) ETU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
When SMDR is enabled and neither the printer nor SMDRoE client is connected, the SMDR call
records are archived to Flash. The archive stores 200 SMDR records. When the buffer is full, the
first call record is lost, and the last call record is stored.
After a valid connection is reestablished, the buffered SMDR records are transmitted out the newly
connected device. After the records are transmitted, they are not transmitted again when a
connection is made through a secondary mechanism.
Buffered call records are saved to Flash every 15 minutes. A save also automatically occurs
during firmware updates and software resets (unless a hard reset is performed).
Call record data provides Start Time, Trunk Number, Trunk Group, Type of Call, Station Number,
Duration, Number Dialed, LCR, Calling Station Number, and Transferred Station Number.
A maximum of 24 digits are allowed for output of a telephone number.
When Printer is assigned, but a printer is not connected to the system, a PRINTER TROUBLE LCD
indication and an audible alert tone are provided at the Multiline Terminal connected to system
Station 100 and the Multiline Terminal connected to system Station 101. When an MIFM-U20 or
SPE(M)-U( ) ETU is not installed or disabled, no alarm indication is provided.
When a valid SMDRoE connection is made, the PRINTER TROUBLE LCD indication is cleared.
When the SMDRoE connection is made and the printer is still offline, the PRINTER TROUBLE
LCD indication returns.
When Caller ID is installed, SMDRoE prints the incoming caller telephone number when received
from the Central Office.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 74
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Call records are not provided for internal calls.
H
Caller ID name is not printed on SMDRoE.
H
H
H
When the system automatically switches the clock for Daylight Savings Time while a station is on a
call, the duration of that call is invalid.
The IP Address configuration determines whether the server allows a connection from any client
(0.0.0.0.) or when configured with an IP address from only a specific client (e.g., Elite CallAnalyst
Enterprise).
SMDRoE print formats are the same as MIFM-U10 ETU Station Message Detail Recording print
formats.
Restrictions:
H
H
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, only the last four digits of the extension number
are printed by SMDR.
Currently, Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise is the only recipient of the SMDR over Ethernet output.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
E-9
Feature Name
Elite CallAnalyst Enterprise Server
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
+BS
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
7-3-02
+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-13
+AS
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-14
+AS
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-5-26
+AS
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 75
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
+AS
SMDR Print Format
1-5-02
+CSS
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 76
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Name Assignment – User
Programmable
S-18
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature allows a user to program the Station Name for telephone extensions and allows the
Attendant Station to program any extension in the system. The name is displayed on the Multiline
Terminal LCD when an intercom or K-CCIS call is placed.
ENHANCEMENT(S)
Release 4000:
R4000 or higher is required to support 16 characters for the Station Name.
Release 3500:
R3500 or lower allows only six characters for the Station Name.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIB/ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
SLI(8)/(4)-U( ) ETU
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
VMP(2)/(4)/(8)/(16)-U( ) ETU
CTP( ) ETU
CTI( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 77
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Station Name Assignment (Station Programming): (R4000 or higher)
A
Press
2.
Enter Station Name using the Dial Pad.
+
BE
1.
LD
.
Use the following:
to move the cursor right
3.
to move the cursor left and clear last entry
Refer to the Character Code Chart.
Press
A
.
Station Name Assignment (Attendant Programming): (R4000 or higher)
A
BE
1.
Press
2.
Enter Station Number using the Dial Pad.
3.
Enter Station Name using the Dial Pad.
+
LD
.
Use the following:
to move the cursor right
4.
to move the cursor left and clear last entry
Refer to the Character Code Chart.
Press
A
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
The ability for an individual station to assign Station Name is allowed in Station Class of Service.
The ability for an Attendant Position to assign Station Name for other extensions is allowed in
Attendant Class of Service.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 78
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
H
H
H
H
When PC Programming a terminal in off-line mode, the Attendant or station cannot assign Station
Names.
For Hold Recall or Transfer Recall, the station recalling displays only the first six characters of the
Programmed Station Name.
When an Attendant or station user changes or assigns a Station Name, Memory Block 4-18
(Station Name Assignment) reflects the change.
Only the first 13 characters of a 16-character name are displayed when using the Caller I.D.
Display feature in voice mail on a Station-to-Station Call.
With 4000 or higher, the Station Name is displayed on the second row of a Multiline Terminal LCD
regardless of the length of the Station Name assigned.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-5
Alphanumeric Display
C-19
Class of Service
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 79
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
CHARACTER CODE TABLE
Press
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Redial
1st
1
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
0
,
nd
@
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
!
+
[
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
“
,
a
d
g
j
m
S
t
Z
#
-
2
3rd
th
4
5th
]
b
e
h
k
n
p
u
w
$
.
th
^
c
f
i
l
o
q
v
x
%
/
2
3
4
5
6
r
8
y
&
:
To A
To D
To G
To J
To M
s
To T
z
b
;
6
7th
8th
/
9th
{
7
9
(
<
10th
|
To P
To W
)
=
11th
}
To 0
>
12th
?
13th
To
14th
To 1
D
Clears one character to the left.
#
,
Used to move cursor to the right.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 80
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
,
+BTS
,
+BTT
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1
1-8-07
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection
2
1-8-08
Station Name Assignment
4-18
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-3
7-3
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 81
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 82
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable
S-19
Station Outgoing Lockout
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Outgoing Lockout allows a station user to restrict outgoing calls by assigning a personal
password.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set:
1.
Go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial Password set Access Code. (default: not assigned).
3.
4.
KKKKKKKKKK
Dial the Password Code:
(default).
Receive confirmation tone, and hang up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 83
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To cancel:
1.
Go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial Password cancel Access Code (default: not assigned).
3.
4.
KKKKKKKKKK
Dial the Password code:
(default).
Receive confirmation tone, and hang up.
To cancel Telephone Password and Default Password using the Attendant Position:
1.
Go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial Password cancel Access Code from another station (default: not assigned).
3.
Dial the station number.
4.
Wait for confirmation tone, and hang up.
To change the Password:
1.
Go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial Password change Access Code (default: not assigned).
3.
Dial current Password.
4.
Enter new Password.
5.
Hang up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 84
Station Outgoing Lockout
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Internal calls, Paging, and Feature Access are provided when a telephone is locked out.
H
The password can have 10 digits.
H
Reset password from Attendant and Password Change does not have a default Access Code.
H
Service tone is not provided when setting a new password that is less than 10 digits.
H
A terminal indication is not provided when Station Outgoing Lockout is set.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
C-21
Feature Name
Code Restriction
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/
47/48
Code Restriction Class Assignment when
Lockout is Set
1-1-70
+BA
+AC
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
2-4
2-3
035 ~ 038
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 85
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 86
Station Outgoing Lockout
Station Relocation
S-20
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Relocation enables a station to be moved from one location to another without programming the
station data again. The station features and extension number are the same after it is moved to the new
location.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set and cancel the Terminal Exchange Mode (Attendant):
A
1.
Press
2.
Dial Access Code
.
HD
.
To exchange two terminals:
E
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial the Station Relocation Access Code (default: not assigned).
3.
Dial the extension number of the distant Multiline Terminal (i.e., the new Multiline Terminal).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 87
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Enter the telephone password of the distant Multiline Terminal (same password set for Station
Lockout).
5.
Press
E
. The Multiline Terminal is relocated.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This feature can be used to relocate terminals among the following combinations:
Multiline
Multiline
Dterm Cordless
Dterm Cordless
Multiline
Dterm Cordless
Single Line Telephone
Single Line Telephone (SLT)
SLT Adapter
SLT Adapter
H
The station password must be set from an individual station.
H
The station password is the same as the password set for Station Lockout.
H
H
H
H
When Feature + 84 is programmed on a One-Touch key or Feature Access key, the LED lights
when this feature is turned ON and remains on until the feature is turned OFF. Feature + 84 is
used to toggle this feature ON and OFF.
When this feature is set/reset using Feature + 84, the setting is retained even when a second
power on is performed. The BLF indication on the One-Touch or Feature Access keys returns
when the system becomes operable.
When multiple Attendants have Feature + 84 stored on a One-Touch or Feature Access key, they
have the same BLF indications on the key where Feature + 84 is stored.
When this feature is set/reset using Feature + 84, RELO MODE ON or RELO MODE OFF is
displayed for five seconds.
Restrictions:
H
This feature cannot be used with the following combinations:
Multiline
Single Line Telephone
Multiline
Single Line Telephone Adapter
Single Line Telephone
Single Line Telephone Adapter
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 88
Station Relocation
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
An error tone is received and ERROR is displayed in the LCD under the following conditions:
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
A station number that causes a prohibited combination is entered.
A station number that does not exist is entered.
The station number of the terminal being used to perform Station Relocation is entered.
A Pilot Number or CAR number is entered.
The wrong password is entered.
A station number of the terminal to be exchanged is entered and that station is not idle.
Station Relocation Mode is not set.
This feature cannot be used to relocate DSS Consoles because consoles are not assigned station
numbers. When Station Relocation is performed for a station that has an associated DSS
Console, the station is relocated but not the DSS Console.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
+BTS
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-07
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-17
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
48
+BA
,
System Data Name
Memory
Block
,
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
3-1
5-3
148
When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 89
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 90
Station Relocation
Station Transfer
S-21
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Transfer allows any station user in the system to transfer any call to any other station. Outside
calls can be transferred to Multiline Terminals without the direct line appearance. To initiate Call
Transfer, press the Transfer key on a Multiline Terminal or use the hookswitch on a Single Line
Telephone. The transfer is completed by going on-hook on a Multiline Terminal or Single Line
Telephone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress:
G
1.
Press
2.
Dial the station number where the call is to be transferred.
3.
Hang up.
. Receive internal dial tone. The call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold.
Using a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress:
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is put on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number of the station where call is to be transferred.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 91
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Hang up.
- OR -
When the party answers, announce the transfer.
4.
Restore the handset (transfer is completed).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
After transferring an answered call, the Multiline Terminal user can press the Conference key on
the Multiline Terminal even after the Transfer key is pressed to enter a conference.
After transferring an answered call, the Single Line Telephone user can enter a conference by
providing a second hookflash.
Use Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection) to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for
the outside party when a trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Dterm, or hook flash
from a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold keys at a PSII station.
Restrictions
H
A Trunk-to-Trunk transfer can be established by the following operation:
1.
While talking to an outside party, press the Hold Key.
2.
Access a second outside line, and dial the desired number.
3.
Press Transfer Key to complete the Trunk-to-Trunk transfer.
When the second call is to be transferred to another station (Not Trunk-to-Trunk), the user
should press the Hold Key at step 3, then dial the desired station, and press the Transfer Key to
complete the transfer.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
Feature Name
A-15
Attendant Transfer
D-13
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
M-7
Music on Hold
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 92
Station Transfer
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BTS
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-11
+BM
System Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection
1-1-12
+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-13
+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
1-1-14
+BM
Attendant Add-on Console Transfer/Camp-on
Recall Time Selection
1-1-64
+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
+AC
Station to Timer Class of Service
4-71
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
4-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 93
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 94
Station Transfer
Step Call
S-22
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A caller that receives a call waiting tone during an internal call can dial 2 (default) to access the next
higher station number in the same 10s group (e.g., 10~19, 20~29, or 110~119).
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
After calling a station and receiving a call waiting tone:
B
1.
Dial
2.
The next higher available station number is called.
(set at default).
After attempting to System Call Park call in a busy location and receiving busy tone (e.g., System Call
Park locations 0 and 1 are busy, and an attempt is made to park in location 0):
1.
Dial
2.
Dial
A
B
, and receive busy.
; call is parked in park location 2.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 95
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
Step Call operation can be performed only while a call waiting tone is heard.
When a call is stepped to the next higher station number, the next available station number is
accessed.
H
H
H
H
It may not be the next consecutively numbered station.
Step Call is provided in a 10s group (e.g., 100~109) of stations. When the highest station number
in a 10s group is reached and is busy, the search continues with the lowest number in the group.
This feature is unaffected by tenant assignment.
When Station 109 is call forwarded to Station 121, Station 121 is busy, and a call is made to
Station 109 which forwards to Station 121, a call waiting tone is received. When Step Call is used,
the call skips to Station 122, when available.
When using the Step Call feature, the system skips stations that are busy.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BA
System Data Name
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
Memory
Block
1-2-24
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
002
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 96
Step Call
S-23
Store and Repeat
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Store and Repeat allows a Multiline Terminal user talking on a CO/PBX line to store any telephone
number in memory for later use.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use this feature with a CO/PBX Call in progress at a Multiline Terminal):
A
G
1.
Press
2.
Dial
3.
Dial the desired number to be stored in memory.
4.
Press
5.
Restore the handset or press
.
.
A
.
E
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 97
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To repeat a stored number:
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
L
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
Key Function:
1.
Go off-hook on a CO/PBX line; receive outside dial tone.
2.
Press
3.
Dial
B
L
.
.
To repeat a stored number (R4000 or higher):
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
LL
1.
Press
2.
Dial
.
.
Key Function:
1.
Go off-hook on a CO/PBX line; receive outside dial tone.
2.
Press
3.
Dial
B
LL
.
.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Store and Repeat and Save and Repeat cannot be used simultaneously from a Multiline Terminal.
The same memory area is shared by both features.
H
The stored number is retained by the memory backup battery.
H
A new number can be saved over the last Store and Repeat number.
H
When entering a Store and Repeat number, the Conference key can be used to backspace and
erase digits entered.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 98
Store and Repeat
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Press the Redial key to store pauses with a Store and Repeat number.
H
A hookflash cannot be saved in a Store and Repeat number.
H
A hookflash is sent to the CO/PBX line when you press the Recall key during Store and Repeat.
H
R4000 or higher requires that # # be used to repeat the stored number.
Restrictions:
H
Store and Repeat is valid only on outside line calls.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Number
S-1
Feature Name
Save and Repeat
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 99
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 100
Store and Repeat
Stored Hookflash
S-24
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Stored Hookflash allows any Multiline Terminal user to store a hookflash in a Speed Dial buffer to allow
one-step access to certain Centrex or PBX features.
System Software permits input stored characters to be entered on the dial pad, but no longer allows the
Character Code Table to be used.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To program a Hookflash in Feature Access key programmed for Speed Dial:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the Feature Access key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
6.
Press
7.
Dial the desired telephone number.
8.
Press
K
.
.
.
C
A
to enter a hookflash.
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 101
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
To program a Hookflash on a One-Touch key programmed for Speed Dial:
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Press the One-Touch key.
4.
Dial
5.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
6.
Press
7.
Dial the desired telephone number.
8.
Press
K
.
.
.
C
A
to enter a hookflash.
.
To program a Hookflash in the System Speed Dial buffer (Attendant Position only):
A
B
1.
Press
2.
Press
3.
Dial the System Speed Dial buffer number (
4.
Dial the Trunk or Trunk Group Access Code (maximum four digits).
5.
Press
6.
Dial the desired telephone number.
7.
Press
C
H
.
.
KK GI KKK III
~
or
~
).
to enter a hookflash.
, and enter name using the Character Code Table.
- OR -
Use the dial pad to enter the name.
8.
Refer to S-12 Speed Dial Stored Characters on page S-47.
Press
A
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 102
Stored Hookflash
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
To use the Speed Dial buffer with Stored Hookflash using a Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press
3.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
B
.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
B
.
KK GI KKK III
KK GI KKK III
1.
Press
2.
Dial the Speed Dial buffer number (
~
or
~
).
~
or
~
).
To use Feature Access or a One-Touch key programmed for Station Speed Dial with Stored Hookflash
at a Multiline Terminal:
Key Function:
1.
Press the desired CO/PBX line key.
2.
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key.
Multifunction (Dial Access):
Press the desired Feature Access or One-Touch key.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
H
H
H
H
This feature is available on all Multiline Terminals.
Stored Hookflash is effective on Loop Start and Ground Start trunks when the system is installed
behind a PBX or Centrex system.
A hookflash can be stored in System and Station Speed Dial buffers.
The LCD display for a Stored Hookflash shows / during programming and use of the Speed Dial
buffer.
A Stored Hookflash can be used with a stored number.
For example: A Station Speed Dial Key is stored as hookflash + 110. Press this particular key
during an outside line conversation to automatically trigger a Centrex transfer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 103
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
¦
System Data Name
Memory
Block
+BCM
Hookflash Time Selection
1-1-02
+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 104
Stored Hookflash
Synchronous Ringing
S-25
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Synchronous Ringing synchronizes CO/PBX incoming ringing with the incoming ringing pattern from a
Central Office.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations except Single Line Telephones connected to AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Restrictions:
H
Synchronous Ringing is not supported for Tie/DID incoming calls, Off-Hook Ringing, or CO/PBX
Ring Transfers.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Number
D-14
Feature Name
Distinctive Ringing
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 105
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BCS
System Data Name
Synchronous Ringing Selection
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
1-1-59
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 106
Synchronous Ringing
System Data Up/Down Load
S-26
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
System Data Up/Down Load, included with NEC Electra Elite IPK System Administration Terminal (SAT)
Software, transfers Station Speed Dial data, System Speed Dial data, and all System Data from/to an
NEC PowerMate or Pentium1-compatible PC. System Data Up/Down Load can be performed locally or
from a remote location.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
Local Access:
H
External Modem
MIFM-U10 ETU
3.5"/5.25” floppy disk with SAT PC programming software
Straight DB-9 cable
Null modem adaptor cable (required for a direct connection between MIFM-U( ) ETU and a modem)
H
Internal Modem
MIFM-U10 ETU with Modem Kit Unit (to install on the MIFM-U10 ETU)
- OR MIFM-U20 ETU with MOD-U10 Unit (to install on the MIFM-U20 ETU)
- OR SPE(M)-U( ) with Modem to install on the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
1.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 107
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Remote Access:
An MIF-Modem Unit local with an MNP Class 5 modem at the remote site
MNP1 Class 5 compatible modem at both sites
Pentium PC running Windows 95/98
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To up/down load system data:
1.
Access the MIFM-U( ) ETU via a direct connection from a compatible PC, or use an MPN Class 5
compatible modem from a remote location through an outside line.
2.
Select menu for Up/Down Load (communication menu).
3.
Select the item (e.g., Speed Dial) to be transferred.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This feature allows System Data to be programmed from a PC connected to the system.
H
Data that can be transferred includes:
J
J
J
1.
Complete System Data
Partial System Data
N
N
N
N
N
All System Data Blocks
Tenant Blocks (All/Tenant/Individual Tenant)
Trunk Blocks (All Trunk/Individual Trunk)
Terminal Blocks (All Terminal/Individual Terminal)
Trunk Route Blocks
System Speed Dial
MNP is a registered trademark of Microcom, Inc.
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 108
System Data Up/Down Load
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
H
Station Speed Dial
N
N
N
N
All Station Speed Dial
Block Station Speed Dial
Individual Station Speed Dial
One-Touch DSS Speed Dial
Loading Time (all data)
Operation
H
On-Site
(9600 bps)
Remote Site
(2400 bps)
UP LOAD
3~5 minute
5~10 minute
DOWN LOAD
3~5 minute
5~10 minute
The user should verify the system hardware configuration between the System Program
Technician Software and the system or download the complete assignment mode before up/down
loading System Data.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Order
and
Shortcut
¦
+BS
System Data Name
Card interface Slot Assignment
Memory
Block
Function
1-8-07
Attendant
Page-Line
Key
1-8-08
Station
PageLine Key
7-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
S - 109
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
S - 110
System Data Up/Down Load
T1 Connection
T-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
T1 Connection allows the system to be connected directly to FT1 carrier links using a public or private
network. The Digital Trunk Interface, DTI-U( ) ETU, provides different types of trunk signaling with FT1
carrier links using System Programming. The DTI-U( ) ETU supports Loop Start/Ground Start and Tie
line/DID trunks.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Stations
Required Components:
DTI-U( ) ETU
Phase Lock Oscillator, CLKG-U( ) Unit: Piggybacked on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU for the Electra Elite IPK for
network synchronization
Locally provided Channel Service Unit (CSU) installed
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal call handling procedures apply.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
T-1
Document Revision 4
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
DTI-U( ) ETUs can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any Cabinet (1~3) without requiring
adjacent slots to be vacant.
H
Both the analog COI and digital DTI can exist in the same Trunk group.
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU supports Dial Pulse and DTMF signaling.
H
Groups of four Loop Start/Ground Start, Tie Line, or DID channels are assigned.
Restrictions:
H
DTI-U( ) ETUs can be assigned in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) with the
following configurations:
J
J
J
J
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
DTI4 (4 ports)
DTI8 (8 ports)
DT